I n t e r n a t i o n a l
Te l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n
Manual
for use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services Provisions of the Telecommunication Services applicable or useful to stations in the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services
Volume 2
U n i o n
THE RADIOCOMMUNICATION SECTOR OF ITU The role of the Radiocommunication Sector is to ensure the rational, equitable, efficient and economical use of the radio-frequency spectrum by all radiocommunication services, including satellite services, and carry out studies without limit of frequency range on the basis of which Recommendations are adopted. The regulatory and policy functions of the Radiocommunication Sector are performed by World and Regional Radiocommunication Conferences and Radiocommunication Assemblies supported by Study Groups. Inquiries about radiocommunication matters Please contact: ITU Radiocommunication Bureau Place des Nations CH -1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland Telephone: Fax: E-mail: Web:
+41 22 730 5800 +41 22 730 5785
[email protected] www.itu.int/itu-r
Placing orders for ITU publications Please note that orders cannot be taken over the telephone. They should be sent by fax or e-mail. ITU Sales and Marketing Division Place des Nations CH -1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland Fax: E-mail:
+41 22 730 5194
[email protected]
The Electronic Bookshop of ITU: www.itu.int/publications
ITU 2011 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means whatsoever, without the prior written permission of ITU.
Table of Contents
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS Manual for use by the maritime mobile and maritime mobile-satellite services Page FOREWORD
............................................................................................
1
PART A Extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the International Telecommunication Union
Constitution (CS) of the International Telecommunication Union CHAPTER VI – General Provisions Relating to Telecommunications ARTICLE 33 The Right of the Public to Use the International Telecommunication Service .................................................
5
ARTICLE 34 Stoppage of Telecommunications ........................................
5
ARTICLE 35 Suspension of Services .........................................................
6
ARTICLE 36 Responsibility .......................................................................
6
ARTICLE 37 Secrecy of Telecommunications ..........................................
6
ARTICLE 39 Notification of Infringements ...............................................
7
ARTICLE 40 Priority of Telecommunications Concerning Safety of Life .......................................................................................
7
ARTICLE 41 Priority of Government Telecommunications ...................... ARTICLE 42 Special Arrangements ..........................................................
7 8
CHAPTER VII – Special Provisions for Radio ARTICLE 45 Harmful Interference ............................................................
8
ARTICLE 46 Distress Calls and Messages ................................................
9
ARTICLE 47 False or Deceptive Distress, Urgency, Safety or Identification Signals............................................................
9
ANNEX
Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Constitution, the Convention and the Administrative Regulations of the International Telecommunication Union .....................................
10
iv
Maritime Manual
Page
Convention (CV) of the International Telecommunication Union CHAPTER V – Various Provisions Related to the Operation of Telecommunication Services ARTICLE 36 Charges and Free Services ...................................................
12
ARTICLE 38 Monetary Unit ...................................................................... ARTICLE 39 Intercommunication .............................................................
12 13
ARTICLE 40 Secret Language ................................................................... ANNEX Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Convention and the Administrative Regulations of the International Telecommunication Union ...........................................................
13
14
PART B Extracts from the Radio Regulations (RR) (Edition of 2008)
SECTION I – Articles (Extracts) ARTICLE 1
Terms and definitions ...........................................................
23
ARTICLE 2
Nomenclature .......................................................................
44
ARTICLE 3
Technical characteristics of stations .....................................
46
ARTICLE 4
Assignment and use of frequencies ......................................
48
ARTICLE 5
Frequency allocations ...........................................................
51
ARTICLE 15 Interferences .........................................................................
55
ARTICLE 17 Secrecy ................................................................................
61
ARTICLE 18 Licences................................................................................
62
ARTICLE 19 Identification of stations .......................................................
64
ARTICLE 20 Service publications and online information systems ..........
77
ARTICLE 28 Radiodetermination services ................................................
79
ARTICLE 30 General provisions................................................................
82
ARTICLE 31 Frequencies for the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) .................................................................
85
Table of Contents
v Page
ARTICLE 32 Operational procedures for distress communications in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) ...
87
ARTICLE 33 Operational procedures for urgency and safety communications in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) .......................................................
101
ARTICLE 34 Alerting signals in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) .................................................................
111
ARTICLE 46 Authority of the master ........................................................
112
ARTICLE 47 Operator’s certificates ..........................................................
113
ARTICLE 48 Personnel ..............................................................................
118
ARTICLE 49 Inspection of stations............................................................
120
ARTICLE 50 Working hours of stations ....................................................
121
ARTICLE 51 Conditions to be observed in the maritime services .............
122
ARTICLE 52 Special rules relating to the use of frequencies ....................
128
ARTICLE 53 Order of priority of communications....................................
149
ARTICLE 54 Selective calling ...................................................................
149
ARTICLE 56 Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy...............................
150
ARTICLE 57 Radiotelephony ....................................................................
151
ARTICLE 58 Charging and accounting for maritime radiocommunications ...................................................................
152
SECTION II – Appendices (Extracts) APPENDIX 1
(Rev.WRC-07) Classification of emissions and necessary bandwidths ...........................................................
155
APPENDIX 2
(Rev.WRC-03) Table of transmitter frequency tolerances
160
APPENDIX 3
(Rev.WRC-03) Tables of maximum permitted power levels for spurious or spurious domain emissions ................
167
Report of an irregularity or infringement .............................
179
APPENDIX 10 (Rev.WRC-07) Report of harmful interference .................
182
APPENDIX 12 Special rules applicable to radiobeacons ..............................
184
APPENDIX 14 (Rev.WRC-07) Phonetic alphabet and figure code ............
186
APPENDIX 15 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies for distress and safety communications for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) .....................................................
188
APPENDIX 9
vi
Maritime Manual
Page APPENDIX 16 (Rev.WRC-07) Documents with which stations on board ships and aircraft shall be provided ............................
193
APPENDIX 17 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies and channelling arrangements in the high-frequency bands for the maritime mobile service .......................................................
195
APPENDIX 18 (Rev.WRC-07) Table of transmitting frequencies in the VHF maritime mobile band ............................................
231
SECTION III – Resolutions (Extracts) RESOLUTION 18
RESOLUTION 205
RESOLUTION 207
RESOLUTION 331 RESOLUTION 339 RESOLUTION 342
RESOLUTION 343
RESOLUTION 344
(Rev.WRC-07) Relating to the procedure for identifying and announcing the position of ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict ....................................................................
237
(Rev.Mob-87) Protection of the band 406406.1 MHz allocated to the mobile-satellite service .....................................................................
239
(Rev.WRC-03) Measures to address unauthorized use of and interference to frequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service and to the aeronautical mobile (R) service ..................................................
241
(Rev.WRC-07) Transition to the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) ...
245
(Rev.WRC-07) Coordination of NAVTEX services ...................................................................
249
(Rev.WRC-2000) New technologies to provide improved efficiency in the use of the band 156174 MHz by stations in the maritime mobile service .....................................................................
250
(WRC-97) Maritime certification for personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which a radio installation is not compulsory .....................
253
(Rev.WRC-03) Management of the maritime mobile service identity numbering resource ...........
256
Table of Contents
vii Page
RESOLUTION 345
RESOLUTION 349
RESOLUTION 352
RESOLUTION 354
(WRC-97) Operation of Global Maritime Distress and Safety System equipment on and assignment of maritime mobile service identities to non-compulsory fitted vessels ............................
259
(WRC-97) Operational procedures for cancelling false distress alerts in the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System .....................
261
(WRC-03) Use of the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz for safety-related calling to and from rescue coordination centres .....
264
(WRC-07) Distress and safety radiotelephony procedures for 2 182 kHz .......................................
266
SECTION IV –
ITU-R Recommendations incorporated by reference (Extracts)
Rec. ITU-R M.489-2
Technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephone equipment operating in the maritime mobile service in channels spaced by 25 kHz ....................
275
Operational procedures for the use of directprinting telegraph equipment in the maritime mobile service .........................................................
278
Operational procedures for the use of digital selective-calling equipment in the maritime mobile service .........................................................
289
Radiotelephony procedures in the maritime mobile service .........................................................
333
Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
Rec. ITU-R M.1171 Rec. ITU-R M.1173
Rec. ITU-R M.1174-2
Technical characteristics of single-sideband transmitters used in the maritime mobile service for radiotelephony in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz Region 2) and 4 000 kHz and between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz.............................................................. Technical characteristics of equipment used for on-board vessel communications in the bands between 450 and 470 MHz .....................................
345
347
viii
Maritime Manual
Page
PART C Extracts from other ITU-R Recommendations (M and SM Series) Rec. ITU-R M.493-13 Rec. ITU-R M.585-5 Rec. ITU-R M.628-4 Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2
Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1
Digital selective-calling system for use in the maritime mobile service ......................................... Assignment and use of maritime mobile service identities.................................................................. Technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transponders...................................................
353 399 407
International maritime VHF radiotelephone system with automatic facilities based on DSC signalling format .....................................................
421
Determination of necessary bandwidths including examples for their calculation and associated examples for the designation of emissions ................................................................
434
Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEX ranges and protection of the A2 global maritime distress and safety system distress watch channel ...............
444
Characteristics of VHF radio systems and equipment for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service RR Appendix 18 channels ......................................
462
Table of Contents
ix Page
PART D Extracts from the International Telecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988) ARTICLE 1 ARTICLE 2
Purpose and Scope of the Regulations ................................. Definitions ............................................................................
475 476
ARTICLE 3 ARTICLE 4
International Network .......................................................... International Telecommunication Services ..........................
476 477
ARTICLE 5 ARTICLE 6
Safety of Life and Priority of Telecommunications ............. Charging and Accounting.....................................................
478 478
ARTICLE 7 ARTICLE 9
Suspension of Services ......................................................... Special Arrangements ..........................................................
479 479
ARTICLE 10 APPENDIX 1
Final Provisions .................................................................... General Provisions Concerning Accounting ........................
480 481
APPENDIX 2
Additional Provisions Relating to Maritime Telecommunications ...............................................................................
485
PART E Extracts from ITU-T Recommendations ITU-T Rec. D.90 ITU-T Rec. F.60 ITU-T Rec. F.110 ITU-T Rec. F.120
Charging, billing, international accounting and settlement in the maritime mobile service ..............
491
Operational provisions for the international telex service .....................................................................
509
Operational provision for the maritime mobile service .....................................................................
516
Ship station identification for VHF/UHF and maritime mobile-satellite services ..........................
538
______________
Foreword
1
Foreword 1 The 2011 edition of the Volume 2 of the Manual for use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services is published in accordance with Article 20 (No. 20.14) of the Radio Regulations, and results from the revision of texts contained in Parts A, B, C, E and F of this Volume of the Manual extracted from other ITU publications. The contents of each Part are listed below and supplementary information is given to help and inform its users. 2 This Volume, which contains provisions designed to be of use to operators in the maritime mobile and maritime mobile-satellite services, is divided into the following six main Parts: Part A, contains extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the International Telecommunication Union. Part B, contains extracts from the Radio Regulations (RR) (Edition of 2008). This Part is divided into four Sections: Section I – Articles (Extracts). Section II – Appendices (Extracts). Section III – Resolutions (Extracts). Section IV – ITU-R Recommendations incorporated by reference (Extracts). Part C, contains extracts from other ITU-R Recommendations (M and SM Series): – Recommendation ITU-R M.493-13: Digital selective-calling system for use in the maritime mobile service. – Recommendation ITU-R M.585-5: Assignment and use of maritime mobile service identities. – Recommendation ITU-R M.628-4: Technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transponders. – Recommendation ITU-R M.689-2: International maritime VHF radiotelephone system with automatic facilities based on DSC signalling format. – Recommendation ITU-R SM.1138-2: Determination of necessary bandwidths including examples for their calculation and associated examples for the designation of emissions. – Recommendation ITU-R M.1467-1: Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEX ranges and protection of the A2 global maritime distress and safety system distress watch channel. – Recommendation ITU-R M.1842-1: Characteristics of VHF radio system and equipment for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service RR Appendix 18 channels. Part D, contains extracts from the International Telecommunications Regulations (Melbourne, 1988).
2
Maritime Manual
Part E, contains extracts from ITU-T Recommendations: –
ITU-T Recommendation D.90: Charging, billing, international accounting and settlement in the maritime mobile service.
–
ITU-T Recommendation F.60: Operational provisions for the international telex service.
–
ITU-T Recommendation F.110: Operational provisions for the maritime mobile service.
–
ITU-T Recommendation F.120: Ship station identification for VHF/UHF and maritime mobile-satellite services
_______________
PART A Extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the International Telecommunication Union
This Part A contains extracts from the Constitution and Convention of the International Telecommunication Union adopted by the Additional Plenipotentiary Conference (Geneva, 1992) as amended by the Plenipotentiary Conferences (Kyoto, 1994, Minneapolis, 1998, Marrakesh, 2002 and Antalya, 2006), also including amendments, adopted by the Plenipotentiary Conference (Guadalajara, 2010) which will enter into force on 1 January 2012.
Part A – CS
5
CONSTITUTION (CS) OF THE INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION
CHAPTER VI General Provisions Relating to Telecommunications
ARTICLE 33 (CS) The Right of the Public to Use the International Telecommunication Service 179 PP-98
Member States recognize the right of the public to correspond by means of the international service of public correspondence. The services, the charges and the safeguards shall be the same for all users in each category of correspondence without any priority or preference.
ARTICLE 34 (CS) Stoppage of Telecommunications 180 PP-98
181 PP-98
1 Member States reserve the right to stop, in accordance with their national law, the transmission of any private telegram which may appear dangerous to the security of the State or contrary to its laws, to public order or to decency, provided that they immediately notify the office of origin of the stoppage of any such telegram or any part thereof, except when such notification may appear dangerous to the security of the State. 2 Member States also reserve the right to cut off, in accordance with their national law, any other private telecommunications which may appear dangerous to the security of the State or contrary to its laws, to public order or to decency.
6
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 35 (CS) Suspension of Services 182 PP-98
Each Member State reserves the right to suspend the international telecommunication service, either generally or only for certain relations and/or for certain kinds of correspondence, outgoing, incoming or in transit, provided that it immediately notifies such action to each of the other Member States through the Secretary-General.
ARTICLE 36 (CS) Responsibility 183 PP-98
Member States accept no responsibility towards users of the international telecommunication services, particularly as regards claims for damages.
ARTICLE 37 (CS) Secrecy of Telecommunications 184 PP-98
185
1 Member States agree to take all possible measures, compatible with the system of telecommunication used, with a view to ensuring the secrecy of international correspondence. 2 Nevertheless, they reserve the right to communicate such correspondence to the competent authorities in order to ensure the application of their national laws or the execution of international conventions to which they are parties.
Part A – CS
7
ARTICLE 39 (CS) Notification of Infringements
190 PP-98
In order to facilitate the application of the provisions of Article 6 of this Constitution, Member States undertake to inform and, as appropriate, assist one another with regard to infringements of the provisions of this Constitution, of the Convention and of the Administrative Regulations.
ARTICLE 40 (CS) Priority of Telecommunications Concerning Safety of Life
191
International telecommunication services must give absolute priority to all telecommunications concerning safety of life at sea, on land, in the air or in outer space, as well as to epidemiological telecommunications of exceptional urgency of the World Health Organization.
ARTICLE 41 (CS) Priority of Government Telecommunications
192
Subject to the provisions of Articles 40 and 46 of this Constitution, government telecommunications (see Annex to this Constitution, No. 1014) shall enjoy priority over other telecommunications to the extent practicable upon specific request by the originator.
8
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 42 (CS) Special Arrangements 193 PP-98
Member States reserve for themselves, for the operating agencies recognized by them and for other agencies duly authorized to do so, the right to make special arrangements on telecommunication matters which do not concern Member States in general. Such arrangements, however, shall not be in conflict with the terms of this Constitution, of the Convention or of the Administrative Regulations, so far as concerns the harmful interference which their operation might cause to the radio services of other Member States, and in general so far as concerns the technical harm which their operation might cause to the operation of other telecommunication services of other Member States.
CHAPTER VII Special Provisions for Radio
ARTICLE 45 (CS) Harmful Interference 197 PP-98
198 PP-98
1 All stations, whatever their purpose, must be established and operated in such a manner as not to cause harmful interference to the radio services or communications of other Member States or of recognized operating agencies, or of other duly authorized operating agencies which carry on a radio service, and which operate in accordance with the provisions of the Radio Regulations. 2 Each Member State undertakes to require the operating agencies which it recognizes and the other operating agencies duly authorized for this purpose to observe the provisions of No. 197 above.
Part A – CS
199 PP-98
9
3 Further, the Member States recognize the necessity of taking all practicable steps to prevent the operation of electrical apparatus and installations of all kinds from causing harmful interference to the radio services or communications mentioned in No. 197 above.
ARTICLE 46 (CS) Distress Calls and Messages 200
Radio stations shall be obliged to accept, with absolute priority, distress calls and messages regardless of their origin, to reply in the same manner to such messages, and immediately to take such action in regard thereto as may be required.
ARTICLE 47 (CS) False or Deceptive Distress, Urgency, Safety or Identification Signals 201 PP-98
Member States agree to take the steps required to prevent the transmission or circulation of false or deceptive distress, urgency, safety or identification signals, and to collaborate in locating and identifying stations under their jurisdiction transmitting such signals.
10
Maritime Manual
ANNEX Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Constitution, the Convention and the Administrative Regulations of the International Telecommunication Union 1001
For the purpose of the above instruments of the Union, the following terms shall have the meanings defined below:
1001A
Member State: A State which is considered to be a Member of the International Telecommunication Union in application of Article 2 of this Constitution.
PP-98
1001B PP-98
Sector Member: An entity or organization authorized in accordance with Article 19 of the Convention to participate in the activities of a Sector.
1003
Harmful Interference: Interference which endangers the functioning of a radionavigation service or of other safety services or seriously degrades, obstructs or repeatedly interrupts a radiocommunication service operating in accordance with the Radio Regulations.
1007
Operating Agency: Any individual, company, corporation or governmental agency which operates a telecommunication installation intended for an international telecommunication service or capable of causing harmful interference with such a service.
1008
Recognized Operating Agency: Any operating agency, as defined above, which operates a public correspondence or broadcasting service and upon which the obligations provided for in Article 6 of this Constitution are imposed by the Member State in whose territory the head office of the agency is situated, or by the Member State which has authorized this operating agency to establish and operate a telecommunication service on its territory.
PP-98
1011
International Telecommunication Service: The offering of a telecommunication capability between telecommunication offices or stations of any nature that are in or belong to different countries.
Part A – CS
1014
11
Government Telecommunications: Telecommunications originating with any: –
Head of State;
–
Head of government or members of a government;
–
Commanders-in-Chief of military forces, land, sea or air;
–
diplomatic or consular agents;
–
the Secretary-General of the United Nations; Heads of the principal organs of the United Nations;
–
the International Court of Justice, or replies to government telecommunications mentioned above.
1015
Private Telegrams: Telegrams other than government or service telegrams.
12
Maritime Manual
CONVENTION (CV) OF THE INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION UNION
CHAPTER V Various Provisions Related to the Operation of Telecommunication Services
ARTICLE 36 (CV) Charges and Free Services 496
The provisions regarding charges for telecommunications and the various cases in which free services are accorded are set forth in the Administrative Regulations.
ARTICLE 38 (CV) Monetary Unit 500 PP-98
In the absence of special arrangements concluded between Member States, the monetary unit to be used in the composition of accounting rates for international telecommunication services and in the establishment of international accounts shall be: –
either the monetary unit of the International Monetary Fund
–
or the gold franc,
both as defined in the Administrative Regulations. The provisions for application are contained in Appendix 1 to the International Telecommunication Regulations.
Part A – CV
13
ARTICLE 39 (CV) Intercommunication 501
1 Stations performing radiocommunication in the mobile service shall be bound, within the limits of their normal employment, to exchange radiocommunications reciprocally without distinction as to the radio system adopted by them.
502
2 Nevertheless, in order not to impede scientific progress, the provisions of No. 501 above shall not prevent the use of a radio system incapable of communicating with other systems, provided that such incapacity is due to the specific nature of such system and is not the result of devices adopted solely with the object of preventing intercommunication.
503
3 Notwithstanding the provisions of No. 501 above, a station may be assigned to a restricted international service of telecommunication, determined by the purpose of such service, or by other circumstances independent of the system used.
ARTICLE 40 (CV) Secret Language 505 PP-98
506 PP-98
2 Private telegrams in secret language may be admitted between all Member States with the exception of those which have previously notified, through the Secretary-General, that they do not admit this language for that category of correspondence. 3 Member States which do not admit private telegrams in secret language originating in or destined for their own territory must let them pass in transit, except in the case of suspension of service provided for in Article 35 of the Constitution.
14
Maritime Manual
ANNEX Definition of Certain Terms Used in this Convention and the Administrative Regulations of the International Telecommunication Union For the purpose of the above instruments of the Union, the following terms shall have the meanings defined below: 1006
Service Telecommunication: A telecommunication that relates to public international telecommunications and that is exchanged among the following: –
administrations,
–
recognized operating agencies, and
–
the Chairman of the Council, the Secretary-General, the Deputy Secretary-General, the Directors of the Bureaux, the members of the Radio Regulations Board, and other representatives or authorized officials of the Union, including those working on official matters outside the seat of the Union.
_______________
PART B Extracts from the Radio Regulations (RR) (Edition of 2008)
SECTION I
– ARTICLES (Volume 1 of the RR)
SECTION II
– APPENDICES (Volume 2 of the RR)
SECTION III – RESOLUTIONS (Volume 3 of the RR) SECTION IV – ITU-R RECOMMENDATIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE (Volume 4 of the RR)
Part B
17
Note by the Secretariat
This revision of the Radio Regulations, complementing the Constitution and the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union, incorporates the decisions of the World Radiocommunication Conferences of 1995 (WRC-95), 1997 (WRC-97), 2000 (WRC-2000), 2003 (WRC-03) and 2007 (WRC-07). The majority of the provisions of these Regulations entered into force as from 1 January 2009; the remaining provisions shall apply as from the special dates of application indicated in Article 59 of the revised Radio Regulations. In preparing the Radio Regulations, Edition of 2008, the Secretariat corrected the typographical errors that were drawn to the attention of WRC-07 and which were approved by WRC-07. This edition uses the same numbering scheme as the 2001 edition of the Radio Regulations, notably: With respect to Article numbers, this edition follows the standard sequential numbering. The Article numbers are not followed by any abbreviation (such as “(WRC-97)”, “(WRC-2000)”, “(WRC-03)” or “(WRC-07)”). Consequently, any reference to an Article, in any of the provisions of these Radio Regulations (e.g. in No. 13.1 of Article 13), in the texts of the Appendices as contained in Volume 2 of this edition (e.g. in § 1 of Appendix 2), in the texts of the Resolutions included in Volume 3 of this edition (e.g. in Resolution 1 (Rev.WRC-97)), and in the texts of the Recommendations included in Volume 3 of this edition (e.g. in Recommendation 8), is considered as a reference to the text of the concerned Article which appears in this edition, unless otherwise specified. With respect to provision numbers in Articles, this edition continues to use composite numbers indicating the number of the Article and the provision number within that Article (e.g. No. 9.2B means provision No. 2B of Article 9). The abbreviation “(WRC-07)”, “(WRC-03)”, “(WRC-2000)” or “(WRC-97)” at the end of such a provision means that the relevant provision was modified or added by WRC-07, by WRC-03, by WRC-2000 or by WRC-97, as applicable. The absence of an abbreviation at the end of the provision means that the provision is identical with the provision of the simplified Radio Regulations as approved by WRC-95, and whose complete text was contained in Document 2 of WRC-97.
18
Maritime Manual
With respect to Appendix numbers, this edition follows the standard sequential numbering, with the addition of the appropriate abbreviation after the Appendix number (such as “(WRC-97)”, “(WRC-2000)”, “(WRC-03)” or “(WRC-07)”), where applicable. As a rule, any reference to an Appendix, in any of the provisions of these Radio Regulations, in the texts of the Appendices as contained in Volume 2 of this edition, in the texts of the Resolutions and of the Recommendations included in Volume 3 of this edition, is presented in the standard manner (e.g. “Appendix 30 (Rev.WRC-07)”) if not explicitly described in the text (e.g. Appendix 4 as modified by WRC-07). In the texts of Appendices that were partially modified by WRC-07, the provisions that were modified by WRC-07 are indicated with the abbreviation “(WRC-07)” at the end of the concerned text. If an Appendix is referenced without any abbreviation after the Appendix number, in the texts of this edition (e.g., in No. 13.1), or without other description, such reference is considered as a reference to the text of the concerned Appendix which appears in this edition. Abbreviations have generally been used for the names of world administrative radio conferences and world radiocommunication conferences. These abbreviations are shown below.
Part B
Abbreviation
19
Conference
WARC Mar
World Administrative Radio Conference to Deal with Matters Relating to the Maritime Mobile Service (Geneva, 1967)
WARC-71
World Administrative Radio Conference for Space Telecommunications (Geneva, 1971)
WMARC-74
World Maritime Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva, 1974)
WARC SAT-77
World Broadcasting-Satellite (Geneva, 1977)
WARC-Aer2
World Administrative Radio Conference on the Aeronautical Mobile (R) Service (Geneva, 1978)
WARC-79
World Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva, 1979)
WARC Mob-83
World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services (Geneva, 1983)
WARC HFBC-84
World Administrative Radio Conference for the Planning of the HF Bands Allocated to the Broadcasting Service (Geneva, 1984)
WARC Orb-85
World Administrative Radio Conference on the Use of the Geostationary-Satellite Orbit and the Planning of Space Services Utilising It (First Session – Geneva, 1985)
WARC HFBC-87
World Administrative Radio Conference for the Planning of the HF Bands Allocated to the Broadcasting Service (Geneva, 1987)
WARC Mob-87
World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services (Geneva, 1987)
WARC Orb-88
World Administrative Radio Conference on the Use of the Geostationary-Satellite Orbit and the Planning of Space Services Utilising It (Second Session – Geneva, 1988)
WARC-92
World Administrative Radio Conference for Dealing with Frequency Allocations in Certain Parts of the Spectrum (Malaga-Torremolinos, 1992)
WRC-95
World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1995)
WRC-97
World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1997)
WRC-2000
World Radiocommunication Conference (Istanbul, 2000)
WRC-03
World Radiocommunication Conference, (Geneva, 2003)
WRC-07
World Radiocommunication Conference, (Geneva, 2007)
WRC-12
World Radiocommunication Conference, 2012
WRC-15
World Radiocommunication Conference, 20151
_______________ 1
The date of this conference has not been finalized.
Administrative
Radio
Conference
SECTION I Articles (Extracts)
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
23
ARTICLE 1 Terms and definitions
Introduction 1.1 For the purposes of these Regulations, the following terms shall have the meanings defined below. These terms and definitions do not, however, necessarily apply for other purposes. Definitions identical to those contained in the Annex to the Constitution or the Annex to the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union (Geneva, 1992) are marked “(CS)” or “(CV)” respectively. NOTE – If, in the text of a definition below, a term is printed in italics, this means that the term itself is defined in this Article.
Section I – General terms 1.2 administration: Any governmental department or service responsible for discharging the obligations undertaken in the Constitution of the International Telecommunication Union, in the Convention of the International Telecommunication Union and in the Administrative Regulations (CS 1002). 1.3 telecommunication: Any transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals, writings, images and sounds or intelligence of any nature by wire, radio, optical or other electromagnetic systems (CS). 1.4
radio: A general term applied to the use of radio waves.
1.5 radio waves or hertzian waves: Electromagnetic waves of frequencies arbitrarily lower than 3 000 GHz, propagated in space without artificial guide. 1.6 (CV).
radiocommunication: Telecommunication by means of radio waves (CS)
1.7 terrestrial radiocommunication: Any radiocommunication other than space radiocommunication or radio astronomy. 1.8 space radiocommunication: Any radiocommunication involving the use of one or more space stations or the use of one or more reflecting satellites or other objects in space.
24
Maritime Manual
1.9 radiodetermination: The determination of the position, velocity and/or other characteristics of an object, or the obtaining of information relating to these parameters, by means of the propagation properties of radio waves. 1.10 radionavigation: Radiodetermination used for the purposes of navigation, including obstruction warning. 1.11 radiolocation: Radiodetermination used for purposes other than those of radionavigation. 1.12 radio direction-finding: Radiodetermination using the reception of radio waves for the purpose of determining the direction of a station or object. 1.13 radio astronomy: Astronomy based on the reception of radio waves of cosmic origin. 1.14 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): Time scale, based on the second (SI), as defined in Recommendation ITU-R TF.460-6. (WRC-03) For most practical purposes associated with the Radio Regulations, UTC is equivalent to mean solar time at the prime meridian (0° longitude), formerly expressed in GMT. 1.15 industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) applications (of radio frequency energy): Operation of equipment or appliances designed to generate and use locally radio frequency energy for industrial, scientific, medical, domestic or similar purposes, excluding applications in the field of telecommunications.
Section II – Specific terms related to frequency management 1.16 allocation (of a frequency band): Entry in the Table of Frequency Allocations of a given frequency band for the purpose of its use by one or more terrestrial or space radiocommunication services or the radio astronomy service under specified conditions. This term shall also be applied to the frequency band concerned. 1.17 allotment (of a radio frequency or radio frequency channel): Entry of a designated frequency channel in an agreed plan, adopted by a competent conference, for use by one or more administrations for a terrestrial or space radiocommunication service in one or more identified countries or geographical areas and under specified conditions.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
25
1.18 assignment (of a radio frequency or radio frequency channel): Authorization given by an administration for a radio station to use a radio frequency or radio frequency channel under specified conditions.
Section III – Radio services 1.19 radiocommunication service: A service as defined in this Section involving the transmission, emission and/or reception of radio waves for specific telecommunication purposes. In these Regulations, unless otherwise stated, any radiocommunication service relates to terrestrial radiocommunication. 1.20 points.
fixed service: A radiocommunication service between specified fixed
1.21 fixed-satellite service: A radiocommunication service between earth stations at given positions, when one or more satellites are used; the given position may be a specified fixed point or any fixed point within specified areas; in some cases this service includes satellite-to-satellite links, which may also be operated in the intersatellite service; the fixed-satellite service may also include feeder links for other space radiocommunication services. 1.22 inter-satellite service: A radiocommunication service providing links between artificial satellites. 1.23 space operation service: A radiocommunication service concerned exclusively with the operation of spacecraft, in particular space tracking, space telemetry and space telecommand. These functions will normally be provided within the service in which the space station is operating. 1.24 mobile service: A radiocommunication service between mobile and land stations, or between mobile stations (CV). 1.25
mobile-satellite service: A radiocommunication service: – between mobile earth stations and one or more space stations, or between space stations used by this service; or –
between mobile earth stations by means of one or more space stations. This service may also include feeder links necessary for its operation.
1.26 land mobile service: A mobile service between base stations and land mobile stations, or between land mobile stations.
26
Maritime Manual
1.27 land mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in which mobile earth stations are located on land. 1.28 maritime mobile service: A mobile service between coast stations and ship stations, or between ship stations, or between associated on-board communication stations; survival craft stations and emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service. 1.29 maritime mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in which mobile earth stations are located on board ships; survival craft stations and emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service. 1.30 port operations service: A maritime mobile service in or near a port, between coast stations and ship stations, or between ship stations, in which messages are restricted to those relating to the operational handling, the movement and the safety of ships and, in emergency, to the safety of persons. Messages which are of a public correspondence nature shall be excluded from this service. 1.31 ship movement service: A safety service in the maritime mobile service other than a port operations service, between coast stations and ship stations, or between ship stations, in which messages are restricted to those relating to the movement of ships. Messages which are of a public correspondence nature shall be excluded from this service. 1.32 aeronautical mobile service: A mobile service between aeronautical stations and aircraft stations, or between aircraft stations, in which survival craft stations may participate; emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service on designated distress and emergency frequencies. 1.33 aeronautical mobile (R)* service: An aeronautical mobile service reserved for communications relating to safety and regularity of flight, primarily along national or international civil air routes. 1.34 aeronautical mobile (OR)** service: An aeronautical mobile service intended for communications, including those relating to flight coordination, primarily outside national or international civil air routes. _______________ *
(R): route.
**
(OR): off-route.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
27
1.35 aeronautical mobile-satellite service: A mobile-satellite service in which mobile earth stations are located on board aircraft; survival craft stations and emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations may also participate in this service. 1.36 aeronautical mobile-satellite (R)* service: An aeronautical mobilesatellite service reserved for communications relating to safety and regularity of flights, primarily along national or international civil air routes. 1.37 aeronautical mobile-satellite (OR)** service: An aeronautical mobilesatellite service intended for communications, including those relating to flight coordination, primarily outside national and international civil air routes. 1.38 broadcasting service: A radiocommunication service in which the transmissions are intended for direct reception by the general public. This service may include sound transmissions, television transmissions or other types of transmission (CS). 1.39 broadcasting-satellite service: A radiocommunication service in which signals transmitted or retransmitted by space stations are intended for direct reception by the general public. In the broadcasting-satellite service, the term “direct reception” shall encompass both individual reception and community reception. 1.40 radiodetermination service: A radiocommunication service for the purpose of radiodetermination. 1.41 radiodetermination-satellite service: A radiocommunication service for the purpose of radiodetermination involving the use of one or more space stations. This service may also include feeder links necessary for its own operation. 1.42 radionavigation service: A radiodetermination service for the purpose of radionavigation. 1.43 radionavigation-satellite service: A radiodetermination-satellite service used for the purpose of radionavigation. This service may also include feeder links necessary for its operation. 1.44 maritime radionavigation service: A radionavigation service intended for the benefit and for the safe operation of ships. 1.45 maritime radionavigation-satellite service: A radionavigation-satellite service in which earth stations are located on board ships.
28
Maritime Manual
1.46 aeronautical radionavigation service: A radionavigation intended for the benefit and for the safe operation of aircraft. 1.47 aeronautical radionavigation-satellite service: A satellite service in which earth stations are located on board aircraft.
service
radionavigation-
1.48 radiolocation service: A radiodetermination service for the purpose of radiolocation. 1.49 radiolocation-satellite service: A radiodetermination-satellite service used for the purpose of radiolocation. This service may also include the feeder links necessary for its operation. 1.50 meteorological aids service: A radiocommunication service used for meteorological, including hydrological, observations and exploration. 1.51 Earth exploration-satellite service: A radiocommunication service between earth stations and one or more space stations, which may include links between space stations, in which: – information relating to the characteristics of the Earth and its natural phenomena, including data relating to the state of the environment, is obtained from active sensors or passive sensors on Earth satellites; –
similar information is collected from airborne or Earth-based platforms;
– such information may be distributed to earth stations within the system concerned; –
platform interrogation may be included. This service may also include feeder links necessary for its operation.
1.52 meteorological-satellite service: An earth exploration-satellite service for meteorological purposes. 1.53 standard frequency and time signal service: A radiocommunication service for scientific, technical and other purposes, providing the transmission of specified frequencies, time signals, or both, of stated high precision, intended for general reception. 1.54 standard frequency and time signal-satellite service: A radiocommunication service using space stations on earth satellites for the same purposes as those of the standard frequency and time signal service. This service may also include feeder links necessary for its operation.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
29
1.55 space research service: A radiocommunication service in which spacecraft or other objects in space are used for scientific or technological research purposes. 1.56 amateur service: A radiocommunication service for the purpose of selftraining, intercommunication and technical investigations carried out by amateurs, that is, by duly authorized persons interested in radio technique solely with a personal aim and without pecuniary interest. 1.57 amateur-satellite service: A radiocommunication service using space stations on earth satellites for the same purposes as those of the amateur service. 1.58
radio astronomy service: A service involving the use of radio astronomy.
1.59 safety service: Any radiocommunication service used permanently or temporarily for the safeguarding of human life and property. 1.60 special service: A radiocommunication service, not otherwise defined in this Section, carried on exclusively for specific needs of general utility, and not open to public correspondence.
Section IV – Radio stations and systems 1.61 station: One or more transmitters or receivers or a combination of transmitters and receivers, including the accessory equipment, necessary at one location for carrying on a radiocommunication service, or the radio astronomy service. Each station shall be classified by the service in which it operates permanently or temporarily. 1.62
terrestrial station: A station effecting terrestrial radiocommunication. In these Regulations, unless otherwise stated, any station is a terrestrial
station. 1.63 earth station: A station located either on the Earth's surface or within the major portion of the Earth's atmosphere and intended for communication: –
with one or more space stations; or
– with one or more stations of the same kind by means of one or more reflecting satellites or other objects in space. 1.64 space station: A station located on an object which is beyond, is intended to go beyond, or has been beyond, the major portion of the Earth's atmosphere.
30
Maritime Manual
1.65 survival craft station: A mobile station in the maritime mobile service or the aeronautical mobile service intended solely for survival purposes and located on any lifeboat, life-raft or other survival equipment. 1.66
fixed station: A station in the fixed service.
1.66A high altitude platform station: A station located on an object at an altitude of 20 to 50 km and at a specified, nominal, fixed point relative to the Earth. 1.67 mobile station: A station in the mobile service intended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points. 1.68 mobile earth station: An earth station in the mobile-satellite service intended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points. 1.69 in motion.
land station: A station in the mobile service not intended to be used while
1.70 land earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, in some cases, in the mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point or within a specified area on land to provide a feeder link for the mobile-satellite service. 1.71
base station: A land station in the land mobile service.
1.72 base earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, in some cases, in the land mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point or within a specified area on land to provide a feeder link for the land mobile-satellite service. 1.73 land mobile station: A mobile station in the land mobile service capable of surface movement within the geographical limits of a country or continent. 1.74 land mobile earth station: A mobile earth station in the land mobile-satellite service capable of surface movement within the geographical limits of a country or continent. 1.75
coast station: A land station in the maritime mobile service.
1.76 coast earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service or, in some cases, in the maritime mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point on land to provide a feeder link for the maritime mobile-satellite service. 1.77 ship station: A mobile station in the maritime mobile service located on board a vessel which is not permanently moored, other than a survival craft station.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
31
1.78 ship earth station: A mobile earth station in the maritime mobile-satellite service located on board ship. 1.79 on-board communication station: A low-powered mobile station in the maritime mobile service intended for use for internal communications on board a ship, or between a ship and its lifeboats and life-rafts during lifeboat drills or operations, or for communication within a group of vessels being towed or pushed, as well as for line handling and mooring instructions. 1.80
port station: A coast station in the port operations service.
1.81
aeronautical station: A land station in the aeronautical mobile service.
In certain instances, an aeronautical station may be located, for example, on board ship or on a platform at sea. 1.82 aeronautical earth station: An earth station in the fixed-satellite service, or, in some cases, in the aeronautical mobile-satellite service, located at a specified fixed point on land to provide a feeder link for the aeronautical mobile-satellite service. 1.83 aircraft station: A mobile station in the aeronautical mobile service, other than a survival craft station, located on board an aircraft. 1.84 aircraft earth station: A mobile earth station in the aeronautical mobilesatellite service located on board an aircraft. 1.85
broadcasting station: A station in the broadcasting service.
1.86
radiodetermination Station: A station in the radiodetermination service.
1.87 radionavigation mobile station: A station in the radionavigation service intended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points. 1.88 radionavigation land station: A station in the radionavigation service not intended to be used while in motion. 1.89 radiolocation mobile station: A station in the radiolocation service intended to be used while in motion or during halts at unspecified points. 1.90 radiolocation land station: A station in the radiolocation service not intended to be used while in motion. 1.91 radio direction-finding station: A radiodetermination station using radio direction-finding. 1.92 radiobeacon station: A station in the radionavigation service the emissions of which are intended to enable a mobile station to determine its bearing or direction in relation to the radiobeacon station.
32
Maritime Manual
1.93 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon station: A station in the mobile service the emissions of which are intended to facilitate search and rescue operations. 1.94 satellite emergency position-indicating radiobeacon: An earth station in the mobile-satellite service the emissions of which are intended to facilitate search and rescue operations. 1.95 standard frequency and time signal station: A station in the standard frequency and time signal service. 1.96
amateur station: A station in the amateur service.
1.97
radio astronomy station: A station in the radio astronomy service.
1.98 experimental station: A station utilizing radio waves in experiments with a view to the development of science or technique. This definition does not include amateur stations. 1.99 ship's emergency transmitter: A ship's transmitter to be used exclusively on a distress frequency for distress, urgency or safety purposes. 1.100 radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparison of reference signals with radio signals reflected, or retransmitted, from the position to be determined. 1.101 primary radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparison of reference signals with radio signals reflected from the position to be determined. 1.102 secondary radar: A radiodetermination system based on the comparison of reference signals with radio signals retransmitted from the position to be determined. 1.103 radar beacon (racon): A transmitter-receiver associated with a fixed navigational mark which, when triggered by a radar, automatically returns a distinctive signal which can appear on the display of the triggering radar, providing range, bearing and identification information. 1.104 instrument landing system (ILS): A radionavigation system which provides aircraft with horizontal and vertical guidance just before and during landing and, at certain fixed points, indicates the distance to the reference point of landing. 1.105 instrument landing system localizer: A system of horizontal guidance embodied in the instrument landing system which indicates the horizontal deviation of the aircraft from its optimum path of descent along the axis of the runway.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
33
1.106 instrument landing system glide path: A system of vertical guidance embodied in the instrument landing system which indicates the vertical deviation of the aircraft from its optimum path of descent. 1.107 marker beacon: A transmitter in the aeronautical radionavigation service which radiates vertically a distinctive pattern for providing position information to aircraft. 1.108 radio altimeter: Radionavigation equipment, on board an aircraft or spacecraft, used to determine the height of the aircraft or the spacecraft above the Earth's surface or another surface. 1.109 radiosonde: An automatic radio transmitter in the meteorological aids service usually carried on an aircraft, free balloon, kite or parachute, and which transmits meteorological data. 1.109A adaptive system: A radiocommunication system which varies its radio characteristics according to channel quality. 1.110 space system: Any group of cooperating earth stations and/or space stations employing space radiocommunication for specific purposes. 1.111 satellites.
satellite system: A space system using one or more artificial earth
1.112 satellite network: A satellite system or a part of a satellite system, consisting of only one satellite and the cooperating earth stations. 1.113 satellite link: A radio link between a transmitting earth station and a receiving earth station through one satellite. A satellite link comprises one up-link and one down-link. 1.114 multi-satellite link: A radio link between a transmitting earth station and a receiving earth station through two or more satellites, without any intermediate earth station. A multi-satellite link comprises one up-link, one or more satellite-tosatellite links and one down-link. 1.115 feeder link: A radio link from an earth station at a given location to a space station, or vice versa, conveying information for a space radiocommunication service other than for the fixed-satellite service. The given location may be at a specified fixed point, or at any fixed point within specified areas.
34
Maritime Manual
Section V – Operational terms 1.116 public correspondence: Any telecommunication which the offices and stations must, by reason of their being at the disposal of the public, accept for transmission (CS). 1.117 telegraphy1: A form of telecommunication in which the transmitted information is intended to be recorded on arrival as a graphic document; the transmitted information may sometimes be presented in an alternative form or may be stored for subsequent use (CS 1016). 1.118 telegram: Written matter intended to be transmitted by telegraphy for delivery to the addressee. This term also includes radiotelegrams unless otherwise specified (CS). In this definition the term telegraphy has the same general meaning as defined in the Convention. 1.119 radiotelegram: A telegram, originating in or intended for a mobile station or a mobile earth station transmitted on all or part of its route over the radiocommunication channels of the mobile service or of the mobile-satellite service. 1.120 radiotelex call: A telex call, originating in or intended for a mobile station or a mobile earth station, transmitted on all or part of its route over the radiocommunication channels of the mobile service or the mobile-satellite service. 1.121 frequency-shift telegraphy: Telegraphy by frequency modulation in which the telegraph signal shifts the frequency of the carrier between predetermined values. 1.122 facsimile: A form of telegraphy for the transmission of fixed images, with or without half-tones, with a view to their reproduction in a permanent form. 1.123 telephony: A form of telecommunication primarily intended for the exchange of information in the form of speech (CS 1017). _______________ 1
1.117.1 A graphic document records information in a permanent form and is capable of being filed and consulted; it may take the form of written or printed matter or of a fixed image.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
35
1.124 radiotelephone call: A telephone call, originating in or intended for a mobile station or a mobile earth station, transmitted on all or part of its route over the radiocommunication channels of the mobile service or of the mobile-satellite service. 1.125 simplex operation: Operating method in which transmission is made possible alternately in each direction of a telecommunication channel, for example, by means of manual control2. 1.126 duplex operation: Operating method in which transmission is possible simultaneously in both directions of a telecommunication channel2. 1.127 semi-duplex operation: A method which is simplex operation at one end of the circuit and duplex operation at the other.2 1.128 television: A form of telecommunication for the transmission of transient images of fixed or moving objects. 1.129 individual reception (in the broadcasting-satellite service): The reception of emissions from a space station in the broadcasting-satellite service by simple domestic installations and in particular those possessing small antennas. 1.130 community reception (in the broadcasting-satellite service): The reception of emissions from a space station in the broadcasting-satellite service by receiving equipment, which in some cases may be complex and have antennas larger than those used for individual reception, and intended for use: –
by a group of the general public at one location; or
–
through a distribution system covering a limited area.
1.131 telemetry: The use of telecommunication for automatically indicating or recording measurements at a distance from the measuring instrument. 1.132
radiotelemetry: Telemetry by means of radio waves.
1.133 space telemetry: The use of telemetry for the transmission from a space station of results of measurements made in a spacecraft, including those relating to the functioning of the spacecraft. 1.134 telecommand: The use of telecommunication for the transmission of signals to initiate, modify or terminate functions of equipment at a distance. _______________ 2
1.125.1, 1.126.1 and 1.127.1 In general, duplex operation and semi-duplex operation require two frequencies in radiocommunication; simplex operation may use either one or two.
36
Maritime Manual
1.135 space telecommand: The use of radiocommunication for the transmission of signals to a space station to initiate, modify or terminate functions of equipment on an associated space object, including the space station. 1.136 space tracking: Determination of the orbit, velocity or instantaneous position of an object in space by means of radiodetermination, excluding primary radar, for the purpose of following the movement of the object.
Section VI – Characteristics of emissions and radio equipment 1.137 radiation: The outward flow of energy from any source in the form of radio waves. 1.138 emission: Radiation produced, or the production of radiation, by a radio transmitting station. For example, the energy radiated by the local oscillator of a radio receiver would not be an emission but a radiation. 1.139 class of emission: The set of characteristics of an emission, designated by standard symbols, e.g. type of modulation of the main carrier, modulating signal, type of information to be transmitted, and also, if appropriate, any additional signal characteristics. 1.140 single-sideband emission: An amplitude modulated emission with one sideband only. 1.141 full carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emission without reduction of the carrier. 1.142 reduced carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emission in which the degree of carrier suppression enables the carrier to be reconstituted and to be used for demodulation. 1.143 suppressed carrier single-sideband emission: A single-sideband emission in which the carrier is virtually suppressed and not intended to be used for demodulation.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
37
1.144 out-of-band emission*: Emission on a frequency or frequencies immediately outside the necessary bandwidth which results from the modulation process, but excluding spurious emissions. 1.145 spurious emission*: Emission on a frequency or frequencies which are outside the necessary bandwidth and the level of which may be reduced without affecting the corresponding transmission of information. Spurious emissions include harmonic emissions, parasitic emissions, intermodulation products and frequency conversion products, but exclude out-of-band emissions. 1.146 emissions.
unwanted emissions*: Consist of spurious emissions and out-of-band
1.146A out-of-band domain (of an emission): The frequency range, immediately outside the necessary bandwidth but excluding the spurious domain, in which out-ofband emissions generally predominate. Out-of-band emissions, defined based on their source, occur in the out-of-band domain and, to a lesser extent, in the spurious domain. Spurious emissions likewise may occur in the out-of-band domain as well as in the spurious domain. (WRC-03) 1.146B spurious domain (of an emission): The frequency range beyond the outof-band domain in which spurious emissions generally predominate. (WRC-03) 1.147 assigned frequency band: The frequency band within which the emission of a station is authorized; the width of the band equals the necessary bandwidth plus twice the absolute value of the frequency tolerance. Where space stations are concerned, the assigned frequency band includes twice the maximum Doppler shift that may occur in relation to any point of the Earth’s surface.
_______________ *
The terms associated with the definitions given by Nos. 1.144, 1.145 and 1.146 shall be expressed in the working languages as follows: Numbers
In French
In English
In Spanish
1.144
Emission hors bande
Out-of-band emission
Emisión fuera de banda
1.145
Rayonnement non essentiel
Spurious emission
Emisión no esencial
1.146
Rayonnements non désirés
Unwanted emissions
Emisiones no deseadas
38
1.148 station.
Maritime Manual
assigned frequency: The centre of the frequency band assigned to a
1.149 characteristic frequency: A frequency which can be easily identified and measured in a given emission. A carrier frequency may, for example, be designated as the characteristic frequency. 1.150 reference frequency: A frequency having a fixed and specified position with respect to the assigned frequency. The displacement of this frequency with respect to the assigned frequency has the same absolute value and sign that the displacement of the characteristic frequency has with respect to the centre of the frequency band occupied by the emission. 1.151 frequency tolerance: The maximum permissible departure by the centre frequency of the frequency band occupied by an emission from the assigned frequency or, by the characteristic frequency of an emission from the reference frequency. The frequency tolerance is expressed in parts in 106 or in hertz. 1.152 necessary bandwidth: For a given class of emission, the width of the frequency band which is just sufficient to ensure the transmission of information at the rate and with the quality required under specified conditions. 1.153 occupied bandwidth: The width of a frequency band such that, below the lower and above the upper frequency limits, the mean powers emitted are each equal to a specified percentage /2 of the total mean power of a given emission. Unless otherwise specified in an ITU-R Recommendation for the appropriate class of emission, the value of /2 should be taken as 0.5%. 1.154 right-hand (clockwise) polarized wave: An elliptically- or circularlypolarized wave, in which the electric field vector, observed in any fixed plane, normal to the direction of propagation, whilst looking in the direction of propagation, rotates with time in a right-hand or clockwise direction. 1.155 left-hand (anticlockwise) polarized wave: An elliptically- or circularlypolarized wave, in which the electric field vector, observed in any fixed plane, normal to the direction of propagation, whilst looking in the direction of propagation, rotates with time in a left-hand or anticlockwise direction.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
39
1.156 power: Whenever the power of a radio transmitter, etc. is referred to it shall be expressed in one of the following forms, according to the class of emission, using the arbitrary symbols indicated: –
peak envelope power (PX or pX);
–
mean power (PY or pY);
–
carrier power (PZ or pZ).
For different classes of emission, the relationships between peak envelope power, mean power and carrier power, under the conditions of normal operation and of no modulation, are contained in ITU-R Recommendations which may be used as a guide. For use in formulae, the symbol p denotes power expressed in watts and the symbol P denotes power expressed in decibels relative to a reference level. 1.157 peak envelope power (of a radio transmitter): The average power supplied to the antenna transmission line by a transmitter during one radio frequency cycle at the crest of the modulation envelope taken under normal operating conditions. 1.158 mean power (of a radio transmitter): The average power supplied to the antenna transmission line by a transmitter during an interval of time sufficiently long compared with the lowest frequency encountered in the modulation taken under normal operating conditions. 1.159 carrier power (of a radio transmitter): The average power supplied to the antenna transmission line by a transmitter during one radio frequency cycle taken under the condition of no modulation. 1.160 gain of an antenna: The ratio, usually expressed in decibels, of the power required at the input of a loss-free reference antenna to the power supplied to the input of the given antenna to produce, in a given direction, the same field strength or the same power flux-density at the same distance. When not specified otherwise, the gain refers to the direction of maximum radiation. The gain may be considered for a specified polarization. Depending on the choice of the reference antenna a distinction is made between: a) absolute or isotropic gain (Gi), when the reference antenna is an isotropic antenna isolated in space; b) gain relative to a half-wave dipole (Gd), when the reference antenna is a half-wave dipole isolated in space whose equatorial plane contains the given direction;
40
Maritime Manual
c) gain relative to a short vertical antenna (Gv), when the reference antenna is a linear conductor, much shorter than one quarter of the wavelength, normal to the surface of a perfectly conducting plane which contains the given direction. 1.161 equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.): The product of the power supplied to the antenna and the antenna gain in a given direction relative to an isotropic antenna (absolute or isotropic gain). 1.162 effective radiated power (e.r.p.) (in a given direction): The product of the power supplied to the antenna and its gain relative to a half-wave dipole in a given direction. 1.163 effective monopole radiated power (e.m.r.p.) (in a given direction): The product of the power supplied to the antenna and its gain relative to a short vertical antenna in a given direction. 1.164 tropospheric scatter: The propagation of radio waves by scattering as a result of irregularities or discontinuities in the physical properties of the troposphere. 1.165 ionospheric scatter: The propagation of radio waves by scattering as a result of irregularities or discontinuities in the ionization of the ionosphere.
Section VII – Frequency sharing 1.166 interference: The effect of unwanted energy due to one or a combination of emissions, radiations, or inductions upon reception in a radiocommunication system, manifested by any performance degradation, misinterpretation, or loss of information which could be extracted in the absence of such unwanted energy. 1.167 permissible interference3: Observed or predicted interference which complies with quantitative interference and sharing criteria contained in these Regulations or in ITU-R Recommendations or in special agreements as provided for in these Regulations. 1.168 accepted interference3: Interference at a higher level than that defined as permissible interference and which has been agreed upon between two or more administrations without prejudice to other administrations. _______________ 3
1.167.1 and 1.168.1 The terms “permissible interference” and “accepted interference” are used in the coordination of frequency assignments between administrations.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
41
1.169 harmful interference: Interference which endangers the functioning of a radionavigation service or of other safety services or seriously degrades, obstructs, or repeatedly interrupts a radiocommunication service operating in accordance with Radio Regulations (CS). 1.170 protection ratio (R.F.): The minimum value of the wanted-to-unwanted signal ratio, usually expressed in decibels, at the receiver input, determined under specified conditions such that a specified reception quality of the wanted signal is achieved at the receiver output. 1.171 coordination area: When determining the need for coordination, the area surrounding an earth station sharing the same frequency band with terrestrial stations, or surrounding a transmitting earth station sharing the same bidirectionally allocated frequency band with receiving earth stations, beyond which the level of permissible interference will not be exceeded and coordination is therefore not required. (WRC-2000) 1.172
coordination contour: The line enclosing the coordination area.
1.173 coordination distance: When determining the need for coordination, the distance on a given azimuth from an earth station sharing the same frequency band with terrestrial stations, or from a transmitting earth station sharing the same bidirectionally allocated frequency band with receiving earth stations, beyond which the level of permissible interference will not be exceeded and coordination is therefore not required. (WRC-2000) 1.174 equivalent satellite link noise temperature: The noise temperature referred to the output of the receiving antenna of the earth station corresponding to the radio frequency noise power which produces the total observed noise at the output of the satellite link excluding noise due to interference coming from satellite links using other satellites and from terrestrial systems. 1.175 effective boresight area (of a steerable satellite beam): An area on the surface of the Earth within which the boresight of a steerable satellite beam is intended to be pointed. There may be more than one unconnected effective boresight area to which a single steerable satellite beam is intended to be pointed. 1.176 effective antenna gain contour (of a steerable satellite beam): An envelope of antenna gain contours resulting from moving the boresight of a steerable satellite beam along the limits of the effective boresight area.
42
Maritime Manual
Section VIII – Technical terms relating to space 1.177 deep space: Space at distances from the Earth equal to, or greater than, 2 × 106 km. 1.178 spacecraft: A man-made vehicle which is intended to go beyond the major portion of the Earth's atmosphere. 1.179 satellite: A body which revolves around another body of preponderant mass and which has a motion primarily and permanently determined by the force of attraction of that other body. 1.180 active satellite: A satellite carrying a station intended to transmit or retransmit radiocommunication signals. 1.181 signals.
reflecting satellite: A satellite intended to reflect radiocommunication
1.182 active sensor: A measuring instrument in the earth exploration-satellite service or in the space research service by means of which information is obtained by transmission and reception of radio waves. 1.183 passive sensor: A measuring instrument in the earth exploration-satellite service or in the space research service by means of which information is obtained by reception of radio waves of natural origin. 1.184 orbit: The path, relative to a specified frame of reference, described by the centre of mass of a satellite or other object in space subjected primarily to natural forces, mainly the force of gravity. 1.185 inclination of an orbit (of an earth satellite): The angle determined by the plane containing the orbit and the plane of the Earth’s equator measured in degrees between 0º and 180º and in counter-clockwise direction from the Earth’s equatorial plane at the ascending node of the orbit. (WRC-2000) 1.186 period (of a satellite): The time elapsing between two consecutive passages of a satellite through a characteristic point on its orbit. 1.187 altitude of the apogee or of the perigee: The altitude of the apogee or perigee above a specified reference surface serving to represent the surface of the Earth. 1.188 geosynchronous satellite: An earth satellite whose period of revolution is equal to the period of rotation of the Earth about its axis.
Part B – SECTION I – RR1
43
1.189 geostationary satellite: A geosynchronous satellite whose circular and direct orbit lies in the plane of the Earth’s equator and which thus remains fixed relative to the Earth; by extension, a geosynchronous satellite which remains approximately fixed relative to the Earth. (WRC-03) 1.190 geostationary-satellite orbit: The orbit of a geosynchronous satellite whose circular and direct orbit lies in the plane of the Earth's equator. 1.191
steerable satellite beam: A satellite antenna beam that can be re-pointed.
44
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 2 Nomenclature
Section I – Frequency and wavelength bands 2.1 The radio spectrum shall be subdivided into nine frequency bands, which shall be designated by progressive whole numbers in accordance with the following table. As the unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz), frequencies shall be expressed: –
in kilohertz (kHz), up to and including 3 000 kHz;
–
in megahertz (MHz), above 3 MHz, up to and including 3 000 MHz;
–
in gigahertz (GHz), above 3 GHz, up to and including 3 000 GHz.
However, where adherence to these provisions would introduce serious difficulties, for example in connection with the notification and registration of frequencies, the lists of frequencies and related matters, reasonable departures may be made1. (WRC-07)
_______________ 1 2.1.1 In the application of the Radio Regulations, the Radiocommunication Bureau uses the following units:
kHz
for frequencies up to 28 000 kHz inclusive
MHz
for frequencies above 28 000 kHz up to 10 500 MHz inclusive
GHz
for frequencies above 10 500 MHz.
Part B – SECTION I – RR2
Band number
45
Corresponding metric subdivision
Metric abbreviations for the bands
Symbols
Frequency range (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive)
4
VLF
3 to 30 kHz
Myriametric waves
B.Mam
5
LF
30 to 300 kHz
Kilometric waves
B.km
6
MF
300 to 3 000 kHz
Hectometric waves
B.hm
7
HF
3 to 30 MHz
Decametric waves
B.dam
8
VHF
30 to 300 MHz
Metric waves
B.m
9
UHF
300 to 3 000 MHz
Decimetric waves
B.dm
10
SHF
3 to 30 GHz
Centimetric waves
B.cm
11
EHF
30 to 300 GHz
Millimetric waves
B.mm
300 to 3 000 GHz
Decimillimetric waves
12
NOTE 1: “Band N” (N = band number) extends from 0.3 × 10N Hz to 3 × 10N Hz. NOTE 2: Prefix: k = kilo (103), M = mega (106), G = giga (109).
2.2 In communications between administrations and the ITU, no names, symbols or abbreviations should be used for the various frequency bands other than those specified in No. 2.1.
Section II – Dates and times 2.3 Any date used in relation to radiocommunication shall be according to the Gregorian Calendar. 2.4 If in a date the month is not indicated either in full or in an abbreviated form, it shall be expressed in an all-numeric form with the fixed sequence of figures, two of each representing the day, month and year. 2.5 Whenever a date is used in connection with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), this date shall be that of the prime meridian at the appropriate time, the prime meridian corresponding to zero degrees geographical longitude. 2.6 Whenever a specified time is used in international radiocommunication activities, UTC shall be applied, unless otherwise indicated, and it shall be presented as a four-digit group (0000-2359). The abbreviation UTC shall be used in all languages.
Section III – Designation of emissions 2.7 Emissions shall be designated according to their necessary bandwidth and their classification in accordance with the method described in Appendix 1.
46
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 3 Technical characteristics of stations 3.1 The choice and performance of equipment to be used in a station and any emissions therefrom shall satisfy the provisions of these Regulations. 3.2 Also, as far as is compatible with practical considerations, the choice of transmitting, receiving and measuring equipment shall be based on the most recent advances in the technique as indicated, inter alia, in ITU-R Recommendations. 3.3 Transmitting and receiving equipment intended to be used in a given part of the frequency spectrum should be designed to take into account the technical characteristics of transmitting and receiving equipment likely to be employed in neighbouring and other parts of the spectrum, provided that all technically and economically justifiable measures have been taken to reduce the level of unwanted emissions from the latter transmitting equipment and to reduce the susceptibility to interference of the latter receiving equipment. 3.4 To the maximum extent possible, equipment to be used in a station should apply signal processing methods which enable the most efficient use of the frequency spectrum in accordance with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. These methods include, inter alia, certain bandwidth expansion techniques, and in particular, in amplitude-modulation systems, the use of the single-sideband technique. 3.5 Transmitting stations shall conform to the frequency tolerances specified in Appendix 2. 3.6 Transmitting stations shall conform to the maximum permitted power levels for spurious emissions or for unwanted emissions in the spurious domain specified in Appendix 3. (WRC-03) 3.7 Transmitting stations shall conform to the maximum permitted power levels for out-of-band emissions, or unwanted emissions in the out-of-band domain, specified for certain services and classes of emission in the present Regulations. In the absence of such specified maximum permitted power levels transmitting stations should, to the maximum extent possible, satisfy the requirements relating to the limitation of the out-of-band emissions, or unwanted emissions in the out-of-band domain, specified in the most recent ITU-R Recommendations (see Resolution 27 (Rev.WRC-03)*). (WRC-03) _______________ *
Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution was revised by WRC-07.
Part B – SECTION I – RR3
47
3.8 Moreover, every effort should be made to keep frequency tolerances and levels of unwanted emissions at the lowest values which the state of the technique and the nature of the service permit. 3.9 The bandwidths of emissions also shall be such as to ensure the most efficient utilization of the spectrum; in general this requires that bandwidths be kept at the lowest values which the state of the technique and the nature of the service permit. Appendix 1 is provided as a guide for the determination of the necessary bandwidth. 3.10 Where bandwidth-expansion techniques are used, the minimum spectral power density consistent with efficient spectrum utilization shall be employed. 3.11 Wherever necessary for efficient spectrum use, the receivers used by any service should comply as far as possible with the frequency tolerances of the transmitters of that service, due regard being paid to the Doppler effect where appropriate. 3.12 Receiving stations should use equipment with technical characteristics appropriate for the class of emission concerned; in particular, selectivity should be appropriate having regard to No. 3.9 on the bandwidths of emissions. 3.13 The performance characteristics of receivers should be adequate to ensure that they do not suffer from interference due to transmitters situated at a reasonable distance and which operate in accordance with these Regulations. 3.14 To ensure compliance with these Regulations, administrations shall arrange for frequent checks to be made of the emissions of stations under their jurisdiction. For this purpose, they shall use the means indicated in Article 16, if required. The technique of measurements and the intervals of measurements to be employed shall be, as far as is practicable, in accordance with the most recent ITU-R Recommendations. 3.15
The use of damped wave emissions is forbidden in all stations.
48
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 4 Assignment and use of frequencies
Section I – General rules 4.1 Member States shall endeavour to limit the number of frequencies and the spectrum used to the minimum essential to provide in a satisfactory manner the necessary services. To that end they shall endeavour to apply the latest technical advances as soon as possible (CS 195). 4.2 Member States undertake that in assigning frequencies to stations which are capable of causing harmful interference to the services rendered by the stations of another country, such assignments are to be made in accordance with the Table of Frequency Allocations and other provisions of these Regulations. 4.3 Any new assignment or any change of frequency or other basic characteristic of an existing assignment (see Appendix 4) shall be made in such a way as to avoid causing harmful interference to services rendered by stations using frequencies assigned in accordance with the Table of Frequency Allocations in this Chapter and the other provisions of these Regulations, the characteristics of which assignments are recorded in the Master International Frequency Register. 4.4 Administrations of the Member States shall not assign to a station any frequency in derogation of either the Table of Frequency Allocations in this Chapter or the other provisions of these Regulations, except on the express condition that such a station, when using such a frequency assignment, shall not cause harmful interference to, and shall not claim protection from harmful interference caused by, a station operating in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the Convention and these Regulations. 4.5 The frequency assigned to a station of a given service shall be separated from the limits of the band allocated to this service in such a way that, taking account of the frequency band assigned to a station, no harmful interference is caused to services to which frequency bands immediately adjoining are allocated. 4.6 For the purpose of resolving cases of harmful interference, the radio astronomy service shall be treated as a radiocommunication service. However, protection from services in other bands shall be afforded the radio astronomy service only to the extent that such services are afforded protection from each other.
Part B – SECTION I – RR4
49
4.7 For the purpose of resolving cases of harmful interference, the space research (passive) service and the earth exploration-satellite (passive) service shall be afforded protection from different services in other bands only to the extent that these different services are protected from each other. 4.8 Where, in adjacent Regions or sub-Regions, a band of frequencies is allocated to different services of the same category (see Sections I and II of Article 5), the basic principle is the equality of right to operate. Accordingly, the stations of each service in one Region or sub-Region must operate so as not to cause harmful interference to any service of the same or higher category in the other Regions or sub-Regions. (WRC-03) 4.9 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by a station in distress, or by a station providing assistance to it, of any means of radiocommunication at its disposal to attract attention, make known the condition and location of the station in distress, and obtain or provide assistance. 4.10 Member States recognize that the safety aspects of radionavigation and other safety services require special measures to ensure their freedom from harmful interference; it is necessary therefore to take this factor into account in the assignment and use of frequencies. 4.11 Member States recognize that among frequencies which have long-distance propagation characteristics, those in the bands between 5 MHz and 30 MHz are particularly useful for long-distance communications; they agree to make every possible effort to reserve these bands for such communications. Whenever frequencies in these bands are used for short- or medium-distance communications, the minimum power necessary shall be employed. 4.12 To reduce requirements for frequencies in the bands between 5 MHz and 30 MHz and thus to prevent harmful interference to long-distance radiocommunications, administrations are encouraged to use, whenever practicable, any other possible means of communication. 4.13 When special circumstances make it indispensable to do so, an administration may, as an exception to the normal methods of working authorized by these Regulations, have recourse to the special methods of working enumerated below, on the sole condition that the characteristics of the stations still conform to those inserted in the Master International Frequency Register: 4.14
a) a station in the fixed service or an earth station in the fixed-satellite service may, under the conditions defined in Nos. 5.28 to 5.31, transmit to mobile stations on its normal frequencies;
50
4.15
Maritime Manual
b) a land station may communicate, under the conditions defined in Nos. 5.28 to 5.31, with fixed stations in the fixed service or earth stations in the fixed-satellite service or other land stations of the same category.
4.15A Transmissions to or from high altitude platform stations shall be limited to bands specifically identified in Article 5. 4.16 However, in circumstances involving the safety of life, or the safety of a ship or aircraft, a land station may communicate with fixed stations or land stations of another category. 4.17 Any administration may assign a frequency in a band allocated to the fixed service or allocated to the fixed-satellite service to a station authorized to transmit, unilaterally, from one specified fixed point to one or more specified fixed points provided that such transmissions are not intended to be received directly by the general public. 4.18 Any mobile station using an emission which satisfies the frequency tolerance applicable to the coast station with which it is communicating may transmit on the same frequency as the coast station on condition that the latter requests such transmission and that no harmful interference is caused to other stations. 4.19 In certain cases provided for in Articles 31 and 51, aircraft stations are authorized to use frequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service for the purpose of communicating with stations of that service (see No. 51.73). (WRC-07) 4.20 Aircraft earth stations are authorized to use frequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile-satellite service for the purpose of communicating, via the stations of that service, with the public telegraph and telephone networks. 4.21 In exceptional cases, land mobile earth stations in the land mobile-satellite service may communicate with stations in the maritime mobile-satellite and aeronautical mobile-satellite services. Such operations shall comply with the relevant provisions of the Radio Regulations relating to those services and shall be subject to agreement among administrations concerned, taking due account of No. 4.10. 4.22 Any emission capable of causing harmful interference to distress, alarm, urgency or safety communications on the international distress and emergency frequencies established for these purposes by these Regulations is prohibited. Supplementary distress frequencies available on less than a worldwide basis should be afforded adequate protection.
Part B – SECTION I – RR5
51
ARTICLE 5 Frequency allocations
Introduction 5.1 In all documents of the Union where the terms allocation, allotment and assignment are to be used, they shall have the meaning given them in Nos. 1.16 to 1.18, the terms used in the three working languages being as follows:
Frequency distribution to Services Areas or countries Stations
French
English
Spanish
Attribution (attribuer) Allotissement (allotir) Assignation (assigner)
Allocation (to allocate) Allotment (to allot) Assignment (to assign)
Atribución (atribuir) Adjudicación (adjudicar) Asignación (asignar)
52
Maritime Manual
Section I – Regions and areas 5.2 For the allocation of frequencies the world has been divided into three Regions1 as shown on the following map and described in Nos. 5.3 to 5.9:
The shaded part represents the Tropical Zones as defined in Nos. 5.16 to 5.20 and 5.21.
5.3 Region 1: Region 1 includes the area limited on the east by line A (lines A, B and C are defined below) and on the west by line B, excluding any of the territory of the Islamic Republic of Iran which lies between these limits. It also includes the whole of the territory of Armenia, Azerbaijan, the Russian Federation, Georgia, Kazakhstan, Mongolia, Uzbekistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Turkey and Ukraine and the area to the north of Russian Federation which lies between lines A and C. 5.4 Region 2: Region 2 includes the area limited on the east by line B and on the west by line C. 5.5 Region 3: Region 3 includes the area limited on the east by line C and on the west by line A, except any of the territory of Armenia, Azerbaijan, the Russian Federation, Georgia, Kazakhstan, Mongolia, Uzbekistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Turkey and Ukraine and the area to the north of Russian Federation. It _______________ 1
5.2.1 It should be noted that where the words “regions” or “regional” are without a capital “R” in these Regulations, they do not relate to the three Regions here defined for purposes of frequency allocation.
Part B – SECTION I – RR5
53
also includes that part of the territory of the Islamic Republic of Iran lying outside of those limits. 5.6
The lines A, B and C are defined as follows:
5.7 Line A: Line A extends from the North Pole along meridian 40° East of Greenwich to parallel 40° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 60° East and the Tropic of Cancer; thence along the meridian 60° East to the South Pole. 5.8 Line B: Line B extends from the North Pole along meridian 10° West of Greenwich to its intersection with parallel 72° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 50° West and parallel 40° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 20° West and parallel 10° South; thence along meridian 20° West to the South Pole. 5.9 Line C: Line C extends from the North Pole by great circle arc to the intersection of parallel 65° 30 North with the international boundary in Bering Strait; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 165° East of Greenwich and parallel 50° North; thence by great circle arc to the intersection of meridian 170° West and parallel 10° North; thence along parallel 10° North to its intersection with meridian 120° West; thence along meridian 120° West to the South Pole. 5.10 For the purposes of these Regulations, the term “African Broadcasting Area” means: 5.11
a) African countries, parts of countries, territories and groups of territories situated between the parallels 40° South and 30° North;
5.12
b) islands in the Indian Ocean west of meridian 60° East of Greenwich, situated between the parallel 40° South and the great circle arc joining the points 45° East, 11° 30 North and 60° East, 15° North;
5.13
c) islands in the Atlantic Ocean east of line B defined in No. 5.8 of these Regulations, situated between the parallels 40° South and 30° North.
5.14 The “European Broadcasting Area” is bounded on the west by the western boundary of Region 1, on the east by the meridian 40° East of Greenwich and on the south by the parallel 30° North so as to include the northern part of Saudi Arabia and that part of those countries bordering the Mediterranean within these limits. In addition, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Georgia and those parts of the territories of Iraq, Jordan, Syrian Arab Republic, Turkey and Ukraine lying outside the above limits are included in the European Broadcasting Area. (WRC-07)
54
Maritime Manual
5.15 The “European Maritime Area” is bounded to the north by a line extending along parallel 72° North from its intersection with meridian 55° East of Greenwich to its intersection with meridian 5° West, then along meridian 5° West to its intersection with parallel 67° North, thence along parallel 67° North to its intersection with meridian 32° West; to the west by a line extending along meridian 32° West to its intersection with parallel 30° North; to the south by a line extending along parallel 30° North to its intersection with meridian 43° East; to the east by a line extending along meridian 43° East to its intersection with parallel 60° North, thence along parallel 60° North to its intersection with meridian 55° East and thence along meridian 55° East to its intersection with parallel 72° North. 5.16
1) The “Tropical Zone” (see map in No. 5.2) is defined as:
5.17
a) the whole of that area in Region 2 between the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn;
5.18
b) the whole of that area in Regions 1 and 3 contained between the parallels 30° North and 35° South with the addition of:
5.19
i) The area contained between the meridians 40° East and 80° East of Greenwich and the parallels 30° North and 40° North;
5.20
ii) that part of Libyan Arab Jamahiriya north of parallel 30° North.
5.21 2) In Region 2, the Tropical Zone may be extended to parallel 33° North, subject to special agreements between the countries concerned in that Region (see Article 6). 5.22 Region.
A sub-Region is an area consisting of two or more countries in the same
Part B – SECTION I – RR15
55
ARTICLE 15 Interferences
Section I – Interference from Radio Stations 15.1 §1 All stations are forbidden to carry out unnecessary transmissions, or the transmission of superfluous signals, or the transmission of false or misleading signals, or the transmission of signals without identification (except as provided for in Article 19). 15.2 §2 Transmitting stations shall radiate only as much power as is necessary to ensure a satisfactory service. 15.3
§3
In order to avoid interference (see also Article 3 and No. 22.1):
15.4
a) locations of transmitting stations and, where the nature of the service permits, locations of receiving stations shall be selected with particular care;
15.5
b) radiation in and reception from unnecessary directions shall be minimized by taking the maximum practical advantage of the properties of directional antennas whenever the nature of the service permits;
15.6
c) the choice and use of transmitters and receivers shall be in accordance with the provisions of Article 3;
15.7
d)
the conditions specified under No. 22.1 shall be fulfilled.
15.8 §4 Special consideration shall be given to avoiding interference on distress and safety frequencies, those related to distress and safety identified in Article 31 and those related to safety and regularity of flight identified in Appendix 27. (WRC-07) 15.9 §5 The class of emission to be employed by a station should be such as to achieve minimum interference and to assure efficient spectrum utilization. In general this requires that in selecting the class of emission to meet these objectives every effort shall be made to minimize the bandwidth occupied, taking into account the operational and technical considerations of the service to be performed. 15.10 § 6 The out-of-band emissions of transmitting stations should not cause harmful interference to services which operate in adjacent bands in accordance with these Regulations and which use receivers in conformity with Nos. 3.3, 3.11, 3.12, 3.13 and relevant ITU-R Recommendations.
56
Maritime Manual
15.11 § 7 If, while complying with the provisions of Article 3, a station causes harmful interference through its spurious emissions, special measures shall be taken to eliminate such interference.
Section II – Interference from electrical apparatus and installations of any kind except equipment used for industrial, scientific and medical applications 15.12 § 8 Administrations shall take all practicable and necessary steps to ensure that the operation of electrical apparatus or installations of any kind, including power and telecommunication distribution networks, but excluding equipment used for industrial, scientific and medical applications, does not cause harmful interference to a radiocommunication service and, in particular, to a radionavigation or any other safety service operating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations1.
Section III – Interference from equipment used for industrial, scientific and medical applications 15.13 § 9 Administrations shall take all practicable and necessary steps to ensure that radiation from equipment used for industrial, scientific and medical applications is minimal and that, outside the bands designated for use by this equipment, radiation from such equipment is at a level that does not cause harmful interference to a radiocommunication service and, in particular, to a radionavigation or any other safety service operating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations1.
Section IV – Tests 15.14 § 10 1) Before authorizing tests and experiments in any station, each administration, in order to avoid harmful interference, shall prescribe the taking of all possible precautions such as the choice of frequency and of time and the reduction or, in all cases where this is possible, the suppression of radiation. Any harmful interference resulting from tests and experiments shall be eliminated with the least possible delay. 15.15 2) For the identification of transmissions made during tests, adjustments or experiments, see Article 19. _______________ 1
15.12.1 and 15.13.1 In this matter, administrations should be guided by the latest relevant ITU-R Recommendations.
Part B – SECTION I – RR15
57
15.16 3) In the aeronautical radionavigation service, it is undesirable, for safety reasons, to transmit the normal identification during emissions conducted to check or adjust equipment already in service. Unidentified emissions should however be restricted to a minimum. 15.17 4) Signals for testing and adjustment shall be chosen in such a manner that no confusion will arise with a signal, abbreviation, etc., having a special meaning defined by these Regulations or by the International Code of Signals. 15.18
5) For testing stations in the mobile service see No. 57.9.
Section V – Reports of Infringements 15.19 § 11 Infringements of the Constitution, Convention or Radio Regulations shall be reported to their respective administrations by the control organization, stations or inspectors detecting them. For this purpose they shall use forms similar to the specimen given in Appendix 9. 15.20 § 12 Representations relating to any serious infringement committed by a station shall be made to the administration of the country having jurisdiction over the station, by the administrations which detect it. 15.21 § 13 If an administration has information of an infringement of the Convention or Radio Regulations, committed by a station over which it may exercise authority, it shall ascertain the facts, fix the responsibility and take the necessary action.
Section VI – Procedure in a case of harmful interference 15.22 § 14 It is essential that Member States exercise the utmost goodwill and mutual assistance in the application of the provisions of Article 45 of the Constitution and of this Section to the settlement of problems of harmful interference. 15.23 § 15 In the settlement of these problems, due consideration shall be given to all factors involved, including the relevant technical and operating factors, such as: adjustment of frequencies, characteristics of transmitting and receiving antennas, time sharing, change of channels within multichannel transmissions. 15.24 § 16 For the purpose of this Section, the term “administration” may include the centralizing office designated by the administration, in accordance with No. 16.3.
58
Maritime Manual
15.25 § 17 Administrations shall cooperate in the detection and elimination of harmful interference, employing where appropriate the facilities described in Article 16 and the procedures detailed in this Section. 15.26 § 18 Where practicable, and subject to agreement by administrations concerned, the case of harmful interference may be dealt with directly by their specially designated monitoring stations or by direct coordination between their operating organizations. 15.27 § 19 Full particulars relating to harmful interference shall, whenever possible, be given in the form indicated in Appendix 10. 15.28 § 20 Recognizing that transmissions on distress and safety frequencies and frequencies used for the safety and regularity of flight (see Article 31 and Appendix 27) require absolute international protection and that the elimination of harmful interference to such transmissions is imperative, administrations undertake to act immediately when their attention is drawn to any such harmful interference. (WRC-07) 15.29 § 21 In cases of harmful interference where rapid action is required, communications between administrations shall be transmitted by the quickest means available and, subject to prior authorization by the administrations concerned in such cases, information may be exchanged directly between specially designated stations of the international monitoring system. 15.30 § 22 When a case of such harmful interference is reported by a receiving station, it shall give to the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with all possible information which will assist in determining the source and characteristics of the interference. 15.31 § 23 If a case of harmful interference so justifies, the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing the interference shall inform the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with, giving all possible information. 15.32 § 24 If further observations and measurements are necessary to determine the source and characteristics of and to establish the responsibility for the harmful interference, the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with may seek the cooperation of other administrations, particularly of the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing the interference, or of other organizations.
Part B – SECTION I – RR15
59
15.33 § 25 When cases of harmful interference occur as a result of emissions from space stations, the administrations having jurisdiction over these interfering stations shall, upon request from the administration having jurisdiction over the station experiencing the interference, furnish current ephemeral data necessary to allow determination of the positions of the space stations when not otherwise known. 15.34 § 26 Having determined the source and characteristics of the harmful interference, the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with shall inform the administration having jurisdiction over the interfering station, giving all useful information in order that this administration may take such steps as may be necessary to eliminate the interference. 15.35 § 27 On being informed that a station over which it has jurisdiction is believed to have been the cause of harmful interference, an administration shall, as soon as possible, acknowledge receipt of that information by the quickest means available. Such acknowledgement shall not constitute an acceptance of responsibility. (WRC-2000) 15.36 § 28 When a safety service suffers harmful interference the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing the interference may also approach directly the administration having jurisdiction over the interfering station. The same procedure may also be followed in other cases with the prior approval of the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with. 15.37 § 29 An administration receiving a communication to the effect that one of its stations is causing harmful interference to a safety service shall promptly investigate the matter and take any necessary remedial action and respond in a timely manner. (WRC-2000) 15.38 § 30 When the service rendered by an earth station suffers harmful interference, the administration having jurisdiction over the receiving station experiencing such interference may also approach directly the administration having jurisdiction over the interfering station. 15.39 § 31 If the harmful interference persists in spite of the action taken in accordance with the procedures outlined above, the administration having jurisdiction over the transmitting station whose service is being interfered with may address to the administration having jurisdiction over the interfering station a report of irregularity or infraction in accordance with the provisions of Section V. 15.40 § 32 If there is a specialized international organization for a particular service, reports of irregularities and of infractions relating to harmful interference caused or suffered by stations in this service may be addressed to such organization at the same time as to the administration concerned.
60
Maritime Manual
15.41 § 33 1) If it is considered necessary, and particularly if the steps taken in accordance with the procedures described above have not produced satisfactory results, the administration concerned shall forward details of the case to the Bureau for its information. 15.42 2) In such a case, the administration concerned may also request the Bureau to act in accordance with the provisions of Section I of Article 13; but it shall then supply the Bureau with the full facts of the case, including all the technical and operational details and copies of the correspondence. 15.43 § 34 1) In the case where an administration has difficulty in identifying a source of harmful interference in the HF bands and urgently wishes to seek the assistance of the Bureau, it shall promptly inform the Bureau. 15.44 2) On receipt of this information, the Bureau shall immediately request the cooperation of appropriate administrations or specially designated stations of the international monitoring system that may be able to help in identifying the source of harmful interference. 15.45 3) The Bureau shall consolidate all reports received in response to requests under No. 15.44 and, using such other information as it has available, shall promptly attempt to identify the source of harmful interference. 15.46 4) The Bureau shall thereafter forward its conclusions and recommendations to the administration reporting the case of harmful interference. These shall also be forwarded to the administration believed to be responsible for the source of harmful interference, together with a request for prompt action.
Part B – SECTION I – RR17
61
ARTICLE 17 Secrecy 17.1 In the application of the appropriate provisions of the Constitution and the Convention, administrations bind themselves to take the necessary measures to prohibit and prevent: 17.2
a) the unauthorized interception of radiocommunications not intended for the general use of the public;
17.3
b) the divulgence of the contents, simple disclosure of the existence, publication or any use whatever, without authorization of information of any nature whatever obtained by the interception of the radiocommunications mentioned in No. 17.2.
62
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 18 Licences 18.1 §1 1) No transmitting station may be established or operated by a private person or by any enterprise without a licence issued in an appropriate form and in conformity with the provisions of these Regulations by or on behalf of the government of the country to which the station in question is subject (however, see Nos. 18.2, 18.8 and 18.11). 18.2 2) However, the government of a country may conclude with the government of one or more neighbouring countries a special agreement concerning one or several stations of its broadcasting service or of its land mobile services, operating on frequencies above 41 MHz, situated in the territory of a neighbouring country and intended to improve national coverage. This agreement, which shall be compatible with the provisions of the present Regulations as well as of those regional agreements to which the countries concerned are signatories, may allow exceptions to the provisions of No. 18.1 and shall be communicated to the Secretary-General in order that it may be brought to the notice of administrations for their information. 18.3 3) Mobile stations which are registered in a territory or group of territories which does not have full responsibility for its international relations may be considered, in so far as the issue of licences is concerned, as subject to the authority of that territory or group of territories. 18.4 §2 The holder of a licence is required to preserve the secrecy of telecommunications, as provided in the relevant provisions of the Constitution and the Convention. Moreover, the licence shall mention, specifically or by reference, that if the station includes a receiver, the interception of radiocommunication correspondence, other than that which the station is authorized to receive, is forbidden, and that in cases where such correspondence is involuntarily received, it shall not be reproduced, nor communicated to third parties, nor used for any purpose, and even its existence shall not be disclosed. 18.5 §3 To facilitate the verification of licences issued to mobile stations and mobile earth stations, a translation of the text in one of the working languages of the Union shall be added, when necessary, to the text written in the national language. 18.6 §4 1) The government which issues a licence to a mobile station or a mobile earth station shall indicate therein in clear form the particulars of the station, including its name, call sign and, where appropriate, the public correspondence category, as well as the general characteristics of the installation.
Part B – SECTION I – RR18
63
18.7 2) For land mobile stations, including stations consisting only of one or more receivers, a clause shall be included in the licence, specifically or by reference, under which the operation of these stations shall be forbidden in countries other than the country in which the licence is issued, except as may be provided by special agreement between the governments of the countries concerned. 18.8 §5 1) In the case of a new registration of a ship or aircraft in circumstances where delay is likely to occur in the issue of a licence by the country in which it is to be registered, the administration of the country from which the mobile station or mobile earth station wishes to make its voyage or flight may, at the request of the operating company, issue a certificate to the effect that the station complies with these Regulations. This certificate, drawn up in a form determined by the issuing administration, shall give the particulars mentioned in No. 18.6 and shall be valid only for the duration of the voyage or flight to the country in which the registration of the ship or aircraft will be effected, or for a period of three months, whichever is less. 18.9 2) The administration issuing the certificate shall inform the administration responsible for issuing the licence of the action taken. 18.10 3) The holder of the certificate shall comply with the provisions of these Regulations applicable to licence holders. 18.11 § 6 In the case of hire, lease or interchange of aircraft, the administration having authority over the aircraft operator receiving an aircraft under such an arrangement may, by agreement with the administration of the country in which the aircraft is registered, issue a licence in conformity with that specified in No. 18.6 as a temporary substitute for the original licence.
64
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 19 Identification of stations
Section I – General provisions 19.1 §1 All transmissions shall be capable of being identified either by identification signals or by other means1. 19.2 §2 prohibited.
1) All transmissions with false or misleading identification are
19.3 2) Where practicable and in appropriate services, identification signals should be automatically transmitted in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations. 19.4 3) All transmissions in the following services should, except as provided in Nos. 19.13 to 19.15, carry identification signals: 19.5
a)
amateur service;
19.6
b)
broadcasting service;
19.7
c)
fixed service in the bands below 28 000 kHz;
19.8
d)
mobile service;
19.9
e)
standard frequency and time signal service.
19.10 4) All operational transmissions by radiobeacons shall carry identification signals. However, it is recognized that, for radiobeacons and for certain other radionavigation services that normally carry identification signals, during periods of malfunction or other non-operational service the deliberate removal of identification signals is an agreed means of warning users that the transmissions cannot safely be used for navigational purposes. _______________ 1
19.1.1 In the present state of the technique, it is recognized nevertheless that the transmission of identifying signals for certain radio systems (e.g. radiodetermination, radio relay systems and space systems) is not always possible.
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
65
19.11 5) All transmissions by satellite emergency position-indicating radiobeacons (EPIRBs) operating in the band 406-406.1 MHz or the band 1 645.51 646.5 MHz, or by EPIRBs using digital selective calling techniques, shall carry identification signals. 19.12 6) When identification signals are transmitted they shall comply with the provisions of this Article. 19.13 7) However, the requirements for certain transmissions to carry identification signals need not apply to: 19.14
a) survival automatically;
craft
stations
when
transmitting
distress
signals
19.15
b) emergency position-indicating radiobeacons (except for those in No. 19.11).
19.16 § 3 In transmissions carrying identification signals a station shall be identified by a call sign, by a maritime mobile service identity or by other recognized means of identification which may be one or more of the following: name of station, location of station, operating agency, official registration mark, flight identification number, selective call number or signal, selective call identification number or signal, characteristic signal, characteristic of emission or other clearly distinguishing features readily recognized internationally. 19.17 § 4 For transmissions carrying identification signals, in order that stations may be readily identified, each station shall transmit its identification as frequently as practicable during the course of transmissions, including those made for tests, adjustments or experiments. During such transmissions, however, identification signals shall be transmitted at least hourly, preferably within the period from five minutes before to five minutes after the hour (UTC) unless to do so would cause unreasonable interruption of traffic, in which case identification shall be given at the beginning and end of transmissions. 19.18 § 5 Identification signals shall wherever practicable be in one of the following forms: 19.19
a)
speech, using simple amplitude or frequency modulation;
19.20
b)
international Morse code transmitted at manual speed;
19.21
c)
a telegraph code compatible with conventional printing equipment;
19.22
d)
any other form recommended by the Radiocommunication Sector.
19.23 § 6 To the extent possible the identification signal should be transmitted in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations.
66
Maritime Manual
19.24 § 7 Administrations should ensure that wherever practicable superimposed identification methods be employed in accordance with ITU-R Recommendations. 19.25 § 8 When a number of stations work simultaneously in a common circuit, either as relay stations, or in parallel on different frequencies, each station shall, as far as practicable, transmit its own identification or those of all the stations concerned. 19.26 § 9 Administrations shall ensure, except in the cases mentioned in Nos. 19.13 to 19.15, that all transmissions not carrying identification signals can be identified by other means when they are capable of causing harmful interference to the services of another administration operating in accordance with these Regulations. 19.27 § 10 Administrations shall, having regard to the provisions of these Regulations relating to the notification of assignments for recording in the Master Register, adopt their own measures to ensure compliance with the provisions of No. 19.26. 19.28 § 11 Each Member State reserves the right to establish its own measures for identifying its stations used for national defence. However, it shall use, as far as possible, call signs recognizable as such, and containing the distinctive characters of its nationality.
Section II – Allocation of international series and assignment of call signs 19.28A § 11A 1) For the purpose of the supply of identification signals, a territory or geographical area shall be understood to mean the territory within the limits of which the station is located. For mobile stations, it shall be understood to mean the territory within the limits of which the responsible administration is located. A territory which does not have full responsibility for its international relations shall also be considered as a geographical area for this purpose. 19.28B 2) In all documents of the Union where the terms allocation of call sign series and assignment of call signs are to be used, they shall be used with the following meaning: Identification means
Terms used in these Regulations
International series of call signs (including maritime identification digits (MIDs) and selective call numbers)
Allocation to the administration of a Member State (see definition in No. 1002 of the Constitution)
Call signs (including maritime identification digits (MIDs) and selective call numbers)
Assignment by any administration to stations operating in a territory or geographical area (see No. 19.28A)
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
67
19.29 § 12 1) All stations open to international public correspondence, all amateur stations, and other stations which are capable of causing harmful interference beyond the boundaries of the territory or geographical area in which they are located, shall have call signs from the international series allocated to its administration as given in the Table of Allocation of International Call Sign Series in Appendix 42. 19.30 2) As the need arises, ship stations and ship earth stations to which the provisions of Chapter IX apply, and coast stations, coast earth stations, or other non-shipborne stations capable of communicating with such ship stations, shall have assigned to them maritime mobile service identities in accordance with Section VI of this Article. (WRC-07) 19.31 3) It is not compulsory to assign call signs from the international series to stations identified by maritime mobile service identities or which are easily identified by other means (see No. 19.16) and whose signals of identification or characteristics of emission are published in international documents. 19.31A 4) Means shall be provided for uniquely identifying mobile stations operating in automated terrestrial or satellite communication systems for the purposes of answering distress calls, for avoiding interference and for billing. Identification of the mobile station by accessing a registration database is satisfactory, provided that the system can associate the mobile station calling number with the particular mobile station user. (WRC-03) 19.32 § 13 Should the available call sign series in Appendix 42 be exhausted, new call sign series may be allocated according to the principles set out in Resolution 13 (Rev.WRC-97) relating to the formation of call signs and the allocation of new international series. 19.33 § 14 Between radiocommunication conferences, the Secretary-General is authorized to deal with questions relating to changes in the allocation of series of call signs, on a provisional basis, and subject to confirmation by the following conference (see also No. 19.32). 19.34 § 15 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for allocating maritime identification digits (MIDs) to administrations and shall regularly publish information regarding allocated MIDs.
68
Maritime Manual
19.35 § 16 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for allocating additional maritime identification digits (MIDs) to administrations within the limits specified, provided that it is ascertained that the possibilities offered by the MIDs allocated to an administration will soon be exhausted despite judicious ship station identity assignment as outlined in Section VI. (WRC-03) 19.36 § 17 Each administration has been allocated one or more maritime identification digit (MID) for its use. A second or subsequent MID should not be requested2 unless the previously allocated MID is more than 80% exhausted in the basic category of three trailing zeros and the rate of assignments is such that 90% exhaustion is foreseen. (WRC-03) 19.37 § 18 The Secretary-General shall be responsible for supplying series of selective call numbers or signals (see Nos. 19.92 to 19.95) at the request of the administrations concerned. 19.38 § 19 1) Each administration shall choose the call signs from the international series allocated or supplied to it; and shall notify this information to the Secretary-General together with the information which is to appear in Lists I, IV and V. These notifications do not include call signs assigned to amateur and experimental stations. (WRC-07) 19.39 2) Each administration shall choose the maritime mobile service identities of its stations from the maritime identification digits allocated to it and notify this information to the Secretary-General for inclusion in the relevant lists, as provided for in Article 20. 19.40 3) The Secretary-General shall ensure that the same call sign, the same maritime mobile service identity, the same selective call number or the same identification number is not assigned more than once and that call signs which might be confused with distress signals, or with other signals of the same nature, are not assigned. _______________ 2
19.36.1 In no circumstances may an administration claim more MIDs than the total number of its ship stations notified to ITU divided by 1 000, plus one. Administrations shall make every attempt to reuse the Maritime Mobile Service Identities (MMSI) assigned from earlier MID resources, which become redundant after ships leave their national ship registry. Such numbers should be considered for reassignment after being absent from at least two successive editions of List V of the ITU service publications. Administrations seeking additional MID resources must meet the criteria of having notified all previous assignments, in accordance with No. 20.16. This criteria applies only to MMSIs in the basic category and to all MIDs assigned to the administration. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
69
19.41 § 20 1) When a fixed station uses more than one frequency in the international service, each frequency may be identified by a separate call sign used solely for this frequency. 19.42 2) When a broadcasting station uses more than one frequency in the international service, each frequency may be identified by a separate call sign used solely for this frequency or by some other appropriate means, such as announcing the name of the place and frequency used. 19.43 3) When a land station uses more than one frequency, each frequency may, if desired, be identified by a separate call sign. 19.44 4) Where practicable, coast stations should use a common call sign for each frequency series3.
Section III – Formation of call signs 19.45 § 21 1) The twenty-six letters of the alphabet, as well as digits in the cases specified below, may be used to form call signs. Accented letters are excluded. 19.46 signs:
2) However, the following combinations shall not be used as call
19.47
a) combinations which might be confused with distress signals or with other signals of a similar nature;
19.48
b) combinations in Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 that are reserved for the abbreviations to be used in the radiocommunication services. (WRC-03)
19.50 § 22 Call signs in the international series are formed as indicated in Nos. 19.51 to 19.71. The first two characters shall be two letters or a letter followed by a digit or a digit followed by a letter. The first two characters or in certain cases the first character of a call sign constitute the nationality identification4. _______________ 3
19.44.1 By “frequency series” is meant a group of frequencies each of which belongs to one of the different bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz that are allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service. 4
19.50.1 For call sign series beginning with B, F, G, I, K, M, N, R, W and 2, only the first character is required for nationality identification. In the cases of half series (i.e. when the first two characters are allocated to more than one Member State), the first three characters are required for nationality identification. (WRC-03)
70
Maritime Manual
19.51 19.52
Land and fixed stations § 23
1)
–
two characters and one letter, or
–
two characters and one letter followed by not more than three digits (other than the digits 0 and 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).
19.53 2) However, it is recommended that, as far as possible, the call signs of fixed stations consist of: – 19.54 19.55
Ship stations § 24 –
two characters and two letters, or
–
two characters, two letters and one digit (other than the digits 0 or 1), or
–
two characters (provided that the second is a letter) followed by four digits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter), or
–
two characters and one letter followed by four digits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter). (WRC-07)
19.57 19.58
Aircraft stations § 25 –
19.59 19.60
two characters and three letters. Ship’s survival craft stations
§ 26 –
19.61 19.62
two characters and one letter followed by two digits (other than the digits 0 and 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).
the call sign of the parent ship followed by two digits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter). Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations
§ 27 –
the Morse letter B and/or the call sign of the parent ship to which the radiobeacon belongs.
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
19.63 19.64
Aircraft survival craft stations § 28 –
19.65 19.66
the complete call sign of the parent aircraft (see No. 19.58), followed by a single digit other than 0 or 1. Land mobile stations
§ 29 –
two characters (provided that the second is a letter) followed by four digits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter), or
–
two characters and one or two letters followed by four digits (other than the digits 0 or 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).
19.67 19.68
71
Amateur and experimental stations § 30
1)
–
one character (provided that it is the letter B, F, G, I, K, M, N, R or W) and a single digit (other than 0 or 1), followed by a group of not more than four characters, the last of which shall be a letter, or
–
two characters and a single digit (other than 0 or 1), followed by a group of not more than four characters, the last of which shall be a letter.5 (WRC-03)
19.68A 1A) On special occasions, for temporary use, administrations may authorize use of call signs with more than the four characters referred to in No. 19.68. (WRC-03) 19.69 2) However, the prohibition of the use of the digits 0 and 1 does not apply to amateur stations. 19.70
Stations in the space service
19.71 § 31 When call signs for stations in the space service are employed, it is recommended that they consist of: –
two characters followed by two or three digits (other than the digits 0 and 1 in cases where they immediately follow a letter).
_______________ 5
19.68.1 In the case of half series (i.e. when the first two characters are allocated to more than one Member State), the first three characters are required for nationality identification. In such cases, the call sign shall consist of three characters followed by a single digit and a group of not more than three characters, the last of which shall be a letter. (WRC-07)
72
Maritime Manual
Section IV – Identification of stations using radiotelephony 19.72 § 32 Stations using radiotelephony shall be identified as indicated in Nos. 19.73 to 19.82A. (WRC-03) 19.73
§ 33
1) Coast stations
–
a call sign (see No. 19.52); or
–
the geographical name of the place as it appears in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations, followed preferably by the word RADIO or by any other appropriate indication. (WRC-07)
19.74
2) Ship stations –
a call sign (see Nos. 19.55 and 19.56); or
–
the official name of the ship preceded, if necessary, by the name of the owner on condition that there is no possible confusion with distress, urgency and safety signals; or
–
its selective call number or signal.
19.75
3) Ship’s survival craft stations –
a call sign (see No. 19.60); or
–
a signal of identification consisting of the name of the parent ship followed by two digits.
19.76
4) Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon stations When speech transmission is used:
19.77
–
the name and/or the call sign of the parent ship to which the radiobeacon belongs. (WRC-07)
§ 34
1) Aeronautical stations
–
the name of the airport or geographical name of the place followed, if necessary, by a suitable word indicating the function of the station.
19.78
2) Aircraft stations –
a call sign (see No. 19.58), which may be preceded by a word designating the owner or the type of aircraft; or
–
a combination of characters corresponding to the official registration mark assigned to the aircraft; or
–
a word designating the airline, followed by the flight identification number.
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
73
19.79 3) In the exclusive aeronautical mobile frequency bands, aircraft stations using radiotelephony may use other methods of identification, after special agreement between governments, and on condition that they are internationally known. 19.80
19.81
4) Aircraft survival craft stations –
a call sign (see No. 19.64).
§ 35
1) Base stations
–
a call sign (see No. 19.52); or
–
the geographical name of the place followed, if necessary, by any other appropriate indication.
19.82
2) Land mobile stations –
a call sign (see No. 19.66); or
–
the identity of the vehicle or any other appropriate indication.
19.82A § 35A –
Amateur stations and experimental stations a call sign (see No. 19.68).
(WRC-03)
Section V – Selective call numbers in the maritime mobile service 19.83 § 36 When stations of the maritime mobile service use selective calling devices in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476-5 and ITU-R M.625-3, their call numbers shall be assigned by the responsible administrations in accordance with the provisions below. (WRC-07) 19.84 Formation of ship station selective call numbers and coast station identification numbers 19.85 § 37 1) The ten digits from 0 to 9 inclusive shall be used to form selective call numbers. 19.86 2) However, combinations of numbers commencing with the digits 00 (zero, zero) shall not be used when forming the identification numbers for coast stations. 19.87 3) Ship station selective call numbers and coast station identification numbers in the series are formed as indicated in Nos. 19.88, 19.89 and 19.90. 19.88
4) Coast station identification numbers –
four digits (see No. 19.86).
74
Maritime Manual
19.89
5) Ship station selective call numbers –
19.90
five digits. 6) Predetermined groups of ship stations
–
five digits consisting of: –
the same digit repeated five times; or
–
two different digits repeated alternately.
19.91 Assignment of ship station selective call numbers and coast station identification numbers 19.92 § 38 1) In cases where selective call numbers for ship stations and identification numbers for coast stations are required for use in the maritime mobile service, the selective call numbers and identification numbers shall be supplied by the Secretary-General on request. Upon notification by an administration of the introduction of selective calling for use in the maritime mobile service: (WRC-07) 19.93
a) selective call numbers for ships will be supplied as required in blocks of 100 (one hundred);
19.94
b) coast station identification numbers will be supplied in blocks of 10 (ten) to meet actual requirements;
19.95
c) selective call numbers for selective calling of predetermined groups of ship stations in accordance with No. 19.90 will be supplied as required as single numbers.
19.96 2) Each administration shall choose the selective call numbers to be assigned to its ship stations from the blocks of the series supplied to it. Administrations shall notify the Bureau immediately in accordance with No. 20.16 when assigning selective call numbers to ship stations. 19.96A 3) Five-digit ship station selective call numbers shall be assigned for narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) equipment (as described in Recommendation ITU-R M.476-5). (WRC-07) 19.97 4) Each administration shall choose the coast station identification numbers to be assigned to its coast stations from the blocks of the series supplied to it.
Part B – SECTION I – RR19
75
Section VI – Maritime mobile service identities 19.98
(WRC-07)
A – General
19.99 § 39 When a station6 operating in the maritime mobile service or the maritime mobile-satellite service is required to use maritime mobile service identities, the responsible administration shall assign the identity to the station in accordance with the provisions described in Annexes 1 to 5 of Recommendation ITU-R M.585-4. In accordance with No. 20.16, administrations shall notify the Radiocommunication Bureau immediately when assigning maritime mobile service identities. (WRC-07) 19.100 § 40 1) Maritime mobile service identities are formed of a series of nine digits which are transmitted over the radio path in order to uniquely identify ship stations, ship earth stations, coast stations, coast earth stations, and other non-shipborne stations operating in the maritime mobile service or the maritime mobile-satellite service, and group calls. (WRC-07)
19.101 2) These identities are formed in such a way that the identity or part thereof can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the public telecommunications network principally to call ships automatically in the shore-to-ship direction. Access to public networks may also be achieved by means of free-form numbering plans, so long as the ship can be uniquely identified using the system’s registration database (see No. 19.31A) to obtain the ship station identity, call sign or ship name and nationality. (WRC-03) 19.102 3) The types of maritime mobile service identities shall be as described in Annexes 1 to 5 of Recommendation ITU-R M.585-4. (WRC-07) 19.108
B – Maritime identification digits (MIDs)
19.108A § 41 The maritime identification digits M1I2D3 are an integral part of the maritime mobile service identity and denote the geographical area of the administration responsible for the station so identified. (WRC-07) 19.110
C – Maritime mobile service identities
(WRC-07)
19.111 § 43 1) Administrations shall follow Annexes 1 to 5 of Recommendation ITU-R M.585-4 concerning the assignment and use of maritime mobile service identities. (WRC-07) _______________ 6
19.99.1 In this Section a reference to a ship station or a coast station may include the respective earth stations.
76
Maritime Manual
19.112
2) Administrations should:
(WRC-07)
19.113 a) make optimum use of the possibilities of forming identities from the single MID allocated to them; (WRC-07) 19.114 b) take particular care in assigning ship station identities with six significant digits (i.e. having three-trailing-zero identities), which should be assigned only to ship stations which can reasonably be expected to require such an identity for automatic access on a worldwide basis to public switched networks, in particular for mobile-satellite systems accepted for use in the GMDSS on or before 1 February 2002, as long as those systems maintain the MMSI as part of their numbering scheme. (WRC-07)
Section VII – Special provisions 19.127 § 47 1) In the aeronautical mobile service, after communication has been established by means of the complete call sign, the aircraft station may use, if confusion is unlikely to arise, an abbreviated call sign or identification consisting of: 19.128 a) in radiotelegraphy, the first character and last two letters of the complete call sign (see No. 19.58); 19.129 b)
in radiotelephony: –
the first character of the complete call sign; or
–
the abbreviation of the name of the owner of the aircraft (company or individual); or
–
the type of aircraft;
followed by the last two letters of the complete call sign (see No. 19.58) or by the last two characters of the registration mark. 19.130 2) The provisions of Nos. 19.127, 19.128 and 19.129 may be amplified or modified by agreement between administrations concerned. 19.131 § 48 The distinguishing signals allotted to ships for visual and aural signalling shall, in general, agree with the call signs of ship stations.
Part B – SECTION I – RR20
77
ARTICLE 20 Service publications and online information systems Section I – Titles and contents of service publications
(WRC-07)
(WRC-07)
20.1 §1 The following publications shall be issued by the Secretary-General. As circumstances warrant and in response to individual requests by administrations, the published information shall also be available in various formats and by appropriate means. (WRC-07) 20.2
§2
20.3
List I – The International Frequency List. This List shall contain:
20.4
a) particulars of frequency assignments recorded in the Master International Frequency Register;
20.5
b) the frequencies prescribed by these Regulations for common use by certain services; (WRC-07)
20.6
c) the allotments in the Allotment Plans included in Appendices 25, 26 and 27.
20.7
§3
List IV – List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations.
(WRC-07)
20.8 §4 Assignments. 20.12
§8
List V – List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service Identity (WRC-07)
List VIII – List of International Monitoring Stations.
20.13 § 9 List VIII A – List of Stations in the Space Radiocommunication Services and in the Radio Astronomy Service. 20.14 § 10 Manual for Use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime MobileSatellite Services.
Section II – Online information systems
(WRC-07)
20.14A § 10A The following online information system(s) are made available by the Radiocommunication Bureau: the ITU Maritime mobile Access and Retrieval System (MARS).
(WRC-07)
78
Maritime Manual
Section III – Preparation and amendment of service publications and online information systems (WRC-07) 20.15 § 11 The form, the content and the periodicity of each publication shall be decided by the Radiocommunication Bureau in consultation with administrations and the international organizations concerned. Similar consultation shall be made with regard to the maritime online information systems. (WRC-07) 20.16 § 12 1) Administrations shall take all appropriate measures to notify the Radiocommunication Bureau immediately of any changes in the operational information contained in Lists IV and V, in view of the importance of this information, particularly with regard to safety. In the case of the data published in List V, which is also made available online through MARS, administrations shall communicate those changes at least once a month. In the case of other publications, administrations shall communicate the changes in the information contained in them as soon as possible. (WRC-07) 20.16A 2) The names of the administrations which have failed to notify the Radiocommunication Bureau of the changes in the operational information contained in Lists IV and V shall be published in these Lists. 20.16B 3) The Radiocommunication Bureau will periodically request administrations to reconfirm the information published in Lists IV and V. If no information has been received by the Radiocommunication Bureau for two consecutive editions of Lists IV and V, unvalidated information shall be deleted. The Radiocommunication Bureau shall however inform the administration concerned before taking such action. (WRC-07) 20.17 § 13 For the purpose of the service publications, a “country” shall be understood to mean the territory within the limits of which the station is located; a territory which does not have full responsibility for its international relations shall also be considered as a country for this purpose. (WRC-03)
Part B – SECTION I – RR28
79
ARTICLE 28 Radiodetermination services
Section I – General provisions
28.1 §1 Administrations which have established a radiodetermination service shall take the necessary steps to ensure the effectiveness and regularity of that service; however they accept no responsibility for the consequences that might arise from the use of inaccurate information furnished, defective working, or failure of their stations. 28.2 §2 In the case of doubtful or unreliable observations, the station taking the bearing or fixing the position shall, whenever possible, notify the station to which this information is given of any such doubt or unreliability. 28.3 §3 Administrations shall notify to the Bureau the characteristics of each radiodetermination station providing an international service of value to the maritime mobile service and, if considered necessary, for each station or group of stations, the sectors in which the information furnished is normally reliable. This information is published in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV), and the Bureau shall be notified of any change of a permanent nature. (WRC-07) 28.4 §4 The method of identification of radiodetermination stations shall be so chosen as to avoid any doubt as to their identity. 28.5 §5 Signals sent by radiodetermination stations shall be such as to permit accurate and precise measurements. 28.6 §6 Any information concerning modification or irregularity of working of a radiodetermination station shall be notified without delay in the following manner: 28.7
a) land stations of countries operating a radiodetermination service shall send out daily, if necessary, notices of modifications or irregularities in working until such time as normal working is restored or, if a permanent alteration has been made, until such time as it can reasonably be taken that all navigators interested have been warned;
28.8
b) permanent alterations or irregularities of long duration shall be published as soon as possible in the relevant notices to navigators.
80
Maritime Manual
Section II – Provisions for the radiodetermination-satellite service
28.9 §7 1) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding No. 28.2, shall be applied to the maritime radionavigation-satellite service. 28.10 2) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding Nos. 28.2 and 28.3, shall be applied to the aeronautical radionavigation-satellite service. 28.11 3) The provisions of Nos. 28.1 to 28.8, excluding Nos. 28.2 and 28.3, shall be applied to the radiodetermination-satellite service.
Section III – Radio direction-finding stations
28.12 § 8 1) In the maritime radionavigation service, the radiotelegraph frequency normally used for radio direction-finding is 410 kHz. All direction-finding stations of the maritime radionavigation service using radiotelegraphy shall be able to use this frequency. They shall, in addition, be able to take bearings on 500 kHz, especially for locating stations sending signals of distress, alarm and urgency. 28.13 2) Where a radio direction-finding service is provided in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz, the radio direction-finding stations should be able to take bearings on the radiotelephone distress and calling frequency 2 182 kHz. (WRC-03) 28.14 3) Where a radio direction-finding station as defined in No. 1.12, operates in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, it should be able to take bearings on the VHF distress and calling frequency 156.8 MHz and on the VHF digital selective calling frequency 156.525 MHz. 28.16 § 9 In the absence of prior arrangements, an aircraft station which calls a radio direction-finding station for a bearing shall use for this purpose a frequency on which the station called normally keeps watch. 28.17 § 10 In the aeronautical radionavigation service, the procedure contemplated for radio direction-finding in this Section is applicable, except where special procedures are in force as a result of arrangements concluded between the administrations concerned.
Part B – SECTION I – RR28
81
Section IV – Radiobeacon stations
28.18 § 11 When an administration thinks it desirable in the interests of navigation to organize a service of radiobeacon stations, it may use for this purpose: 28.19
a) radiobeacons properly so-called, established on land or on ships permanently moored or, exceptionally, on ships navigating in a restricted area, the limits of which are known and published. The emissions of these radiobeacons may have either directional or non-directional patterns;
28.20
b) fixed stations, coast stations or aeronautical stations designated to function as radiobeacons, at the request of mobile stations.
28.21 § 12 1) Radiobeacons properly so-called shall use the frequency bands which are available to them under Chapter II. 28.22 2) Other stations notified as radiobeacons shall use for this purpose their normal working frequency and their normal class of emission. 28.23 3) The power radiated by each radiobeacon properly so-called shall be adjusted to the value necessary to produce the stipulated field strength at the limit of the range required (see Appendix 12). 28.24 § 13 Special rules applicable to aeronautical radio beacons operating in the bands between 160 kHz and 535 kHz and to the maritime radio beacons operating in the bands between 283.5 kHz and 335 kHz are given in Appendix 12.
82
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 30 General provisions
Section I – Introduction
30.1 §1 This Chapter contains the provisions for the operational use of the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS), whose functional requirements, system elements and equipment carriage requirements are set forth in the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended. This Chapter also contains provisions for initiating distress, urgency and safety communications by means of radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16). (WRC-07) 30.2 §2 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by a mobile station or a mobile earth station in distress of any means at its disposal to attract attention, make known its position, and obtain help (see also No. 4.9). 30.3 §3 No provision of these Regulations prevents the use by stations on board aircraft, ships engaged in search and rescue operations, land stations, or coast earth stations, in exceptional circumstances, of any means at their disposal to assist a mobile station or a mobile earth station in distress (see also Nos. 4.9 and 4.16).
Section II – Maritime provisions
30.4 §4 The provisions specified in this Chapter are obligatory in the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service for all stations using the frequencies and techniques prescribed for the functions set out herein (see also No. 30.5). (WRC-07) 30.5 §5 The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974 as amended, prescribes which ships and which of their survival craft shall be provided with radio equipment, and which ships shall carry portable radio equipment for use in survival craft. It also prescribes the requirements which shall be met by such equipment.
Part B – SECTION I – RR30
83
30.6 §6 Ship earth stations located at rescue coordination centres1 may be authorized by an administration to communicate for distress and safety purposes with any other station using bands allocated to the maritime mobile-satellite service, when special circumstances make it essential, notwithstanding the methods of working provided for in these Regulations. 30.7 §7 Mobile stations2 of the maritime mobile service may communicate, for safety purposes, with stations of the aeronautical mobile service. Such communications shall normally be made on the frequencies authorized, and under the conditions specified in Section I of Article 31 (see also No. 4.9).
Section III – Aeronautical provisions 30.8 §8 The procedure specified in this Chapter is obligatory for communications between stations on board aircraft and stations of the maritime mobilesatellite service, wherever this service or stations of this service are specifically mentioned. 30.9 §9 Certain provisions of this Chapter are applicable to the aeronautical mobile service, except in the case of special arrangements between the governments concerned. 30.10 § 10 Mobile stations of the aeronautical mobile service may communicate, for distress and safety purposes, with stations of the maritime mobile service in conformity with the provisions of this Chapter. 30.11 § 11 Any station on board an aircraft required by national or international regulations to communicate for distress, urgency or safety purposes with stations of the maritime mobile service that comply with the provisions of this Chapter, shall be capable of transmitting and receiving class J3E emissions when using the carrier frequency 2182 kHz, or class J3E emissions when using the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz, or class G3E emissions when using the frequency 156.8 MHz and, optionally, the frequency 156.3 MHz. _______________ 1
30.6.1 The term “rescue coordination centre”, as defined in the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) refers to a unit responsible for promoting the efficient organization of search and rescue services and for coordinating the conduct of search and rescue operations within a search and rescue region. 2
30.7.1 Mobile stations communicating with the stations of the aeronautical mobile (R) service in bands allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service shall conform to the provisions of the Regulations which relate to that service and, as appropriate, to any special arrangements between the governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile (R) service is regulated.
84
Maritime Manual
30.11A § 11A Aircraft, when conducting search and rescue operations, are also permitted to operate digital selective calling (DSC) equipment on the VHF DSC frequency 156.525 MHz, and automatic identification system (AIS) equipment on the AIS frequencies 161.975 MHz and 162.025 MHz. (WRC-07)
Section IV – Land mobile provisions 30.12 § 12 Stations of the land mobile service in uninhabited, sparsely populated or remote areas may, for distress and safety purposes, use the frequencies provided for in this Chapter. 30.13 § 13 The procedure specified in this Chapter is obligatory for stations of the land mobile service when using frequencies provided in these Regulations for distress and safety communications.
Part B – SECTION I – RR31
85
ARTICLE 31 Frequencies for the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)
Section I – General 31.1 §1 The frequencies to be used for the transmission of distress and safety information under the GMDSS are contained in Appendix 15. In addition to the frequencies listed in Appendix 15, ship stations and coast stations should use other appropriate frequencies for the transmission of safety messages and general radiocommunications to and from shore-based radio systems or networks. (WRC-07) 31.2 §2 Any emission causing harmful interference to distress and safety communications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in Appendix 15 is prohibited. (WRC-07) 31.3 §3 The number and duration of test transmissions shall be kept to a minimum on the frequencies identified in Appendix 15; they should be coordinated with a competent authority, as necessary, and, wherever practicable, be carried out on artificial antennas or with reduced power. However, testing on the distress and safety calling frequencies should be avoided, but where this is unavoidable, it should be indicated that these are test transmissions. 31.4 §4 Before transmitting for other than distress purposes on any of the frequencies identified in Appendix 15 for distress and safety, a station shall, where practicable, listen on the frequency concerned to make sure that no distress transmission is being sent.
Section II – Survival craft stations 31.6 §5 1) Equipment for radiotelephony use in survival craft stations shall, if capable of operating on any frequency in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, be able to transmit and receive on 156.8 MHz and at least one other frequency in these bands. 31.7 2) Equipment for transmitting locating signals from survival craft stations shall be capable of operating in the 9 200-9 500 MHz band.
86
Maritime Manual
31.8 3) Equipment with digital selective calling facilities for use in survival craft shall, if capable of operating: 31.9
a) in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz, be able to transmit on 2 187.5 kHz; (WRC-03)
31.10
b) in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz, be able to transmit on 8 414.5 kHz;
31.11
c) in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, be able to transmit on 156.525 MHz. Section III – Watchkeeping
31.12
A – Coast stations
31.13 § 6 Those coast stations assuming a watch-keeping responsibility in the GMDSS shall maintain an automatic digital selective calling watch on frequencies and for periods of time as indicated in the information published in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 31.14
B – Coast earth stations
31.15 § 7 Those coast earth stations assuming a watch-keeping responsibility in the GMDSS shall maintain a continuous automatic watch for appropriate distress alerts relayed by space stations. 31.16
C – Ship stations
31.17 § 8 1) Ship stations, where so equipped, shall, while at sea, maintain an automatic digital selective calling watch on the appropriate distress and safety calling frequencies in the frequency bands in which they are operating. Ship stations, where so equipped, shall also maintain watch on the appropriate frequencies for the automatic reception of transmissions of meteorological and navigational warnings and other urgent information to ships. (WRC-07) 31.18 2) Ship stations complying with the provisions of this Chapter should, where practicable, maintain a watch on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16). (WRC-07) 31.19
D – Ship earth stations
31.20 § 9 Ship earth stations complying with the provisions of this Chapter shall, while at sea, maintain watch except when communicating on a working channel.
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
87
ARTICLE 32 Operational procedures for distress communications in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)* (WRC-07)
Section I – General 32.1 §1 Distress communications rely on the use of terrestrial MF, HF and VHF radiocommunications and communications using satellite techniques. Distress communications shall have absolute priority over all other transmissions. The following terms apply: a)
The distress alert is a digital selective call (DSC) using a distress call format, in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication, or a distress message format, in which case it is relayed through space stations.
b)
The distress call is the initial voice or text procedure.
c)
The distress message is the subsequent voice or text procedure.
d)
The distress alert relay is a DSC transmission on behalf of another station.
e)
The distress call relay is the initial voice or text procedure for a station not itself in distress. (WRC-07)
32.2 §2 1) The distress alert shall be sent through a satellite either with absolute priority in general communication channels, on exclusive distress and safety frequencies reserved for satellite EPIRBs in the Earth-to-space direction or on the distress and safety frequencies designated in the MF, HF and VHF bands for digital selective calling (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07) 32.2A 1A) The distress call shall be sent on the distress and safety frequencies designated in the MF, HF and VHF bands for radiotelephony. (WRC-07) 32.3 2) The distress alert or call and subsequent messages shall be sent only on the authority of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehicle carrying the mobile station or the mobile earth station. (WRC-07) 32.4 §3 All stations which receive a distress alert or call transmitted on the distress and safety frequencies in the MF, HF and VHF bands shall immediately cease any transmission capable of interfering with distress traffic and prepare for subsequent distress traffic. (WRC-07) _______________ *
Note by the Secretariat: The title has been aligned in accordance with WRC-07 decisions.
88
Maritime Manual
32.5 §4 Distress alerts or distress alert relays using DSC should use the technical structures and content set forth in the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. (WRC-07) 32.5A § 4A Each administration shall ensure that suitable arrangements are made for assigning and registering identities used by ships participating in the GMDSS, and shall make registration information available to rescue coordination centres on a 24-hour day, 7-day week basis. Where appropriate, administrations shall notify responsible organizations immediately of additions, deletions and other changes in these assignments (see Nos. 19.39, 19.96 and 19.99). Registration information submitted shall be in accordance with Resolution 340 (WRC-97)*. (WRC-07) 32.5B § 4B Any GMDSS shipboard equipment which is capable of transmitting position coordinates as part of a distress alert and which does not have an integral electronic position-fixing system receiver shall be interconnected to a separate navigation receiver, if one is installed, to provide that information automatically. (WRC-07) 32.6 §5 Transmissions by radiotelephony shall be made slowly and distinctly, each word being clearly pronounced to facilitate transcription. 32.7 §6 The phonetic alphabet and figure code in Appendix 14 and the abbreviations and signals in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 should be used where applicable1. (WRC-03)
Section II – Distress alerting and distress calling 32.8
(WRC-07)
A – General
32.9 §7 1) The transmission of a distress alert or a distress call indicates that a mobile unit2 or person3 is threatened by grave and imminent danger and requires immediate assistance. (WRC-07) _______________ *
Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution has been suppressed by WRC-07. The subject matter is now covered by Resolution 355 (WRC-07). 1
32.7.1 The use of the Standard Marine Communication Phrases and, where language difficulties exists, the International Code of Signals, both published by the International Maritime Organization (IMO), is also recommended. 2 3
32.9.1
Mobile unit: a ship, aircraft or other vehicle.
32.9.2 In this Article, where the case is of a person in distress, the application of the procedures may require adaptation to meet the needs of the particular circumstances.
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
89
32.10 2) The distress alert shall provide4 the identification of the station in distress and its position. 32.10A § 7A 1) A distress alert is false if it was transmitted without any indication that a mobile unit or person was in distress and required immediate assistance (see No. 32.9). Administrations receiving a false distress alert shall report this infringement in accordance with Section V of Article 15, if that alert: a)
was transmitted intentionally;
b)
was not cancelled in accordance with No. 32.53A and Resolution 349 (WRC-97);
c)
could not be verified as a result of either the ship’s failure to keep watch on appropriate frequencies in accordance with Nos. 31.16 to 31.20, or its failure to respond to calls from an authorized rescue authority;
d)
was repeated; or
e)
was transmitted using a false identity.
Administrations receiving such a report shall take appropriate steps to ensure that the infringement does not recur. No action should normally be taken against any ship or mariner for reporting and cancelling a false distress alert. (WRC-07) 32.10B 2) Administrations shall take practicable and necessary steps to ensure the avoidance of false distress alerts, including those transmitted inadvertently. (WRC-07) 32.11
B – Transmission of a distress alert or a distress call
(WRC-07)
B1 – Transmission of a distress alert or a distress call by a ship station or a ship earth station (WRC-07) 32.12 § 8 Ship-to-shore distress alerts or calls are used to alert rescue coordination centres via coast stations or coast earth stations that a ship is in distress. These alerts are based on the use of transmissions via satellites (from a ship earth station or a satellite EPIRB) and terrestrial services (from ship stations and EPIRBs). (WRC-07) _______________ 4
32.10.1 The distress alert may also contain information regarding the nature of the distress, the type of assistance required, the course and speed of the mobile unit, the time that this information was recorded and any other information which might facilitate rescue.
90
Maritime Manual
32.13 § 9 1) Ship-to-ship distress alerts are used to alert other ships in the vicinity of the ship in distress and are based on the use of digital selective calling in the VHF and MF bands. Additionally, the HF band may be used. (WRC-07) 32.13A 2) Ship stations equipped for digital selective calling procedures may transmit a distress call and distress message immediately following the distress alert in order to attract attention from as many ship stations as possible. (WRC-07) 32.13B 3) Ship stations not equipped for digital selective calling procedures shall, where practical, initiate the distress communications by transmitting a radio telephony distress call and message on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16). (WRC-07) 32.13BA § 9A The radiotelephone distress signal consists of the word MAYDAY pronounced as the French expression “m'aider”. (WRC-07) 32.13C § 9B 1) The distress call sent on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16) shall be given in the following form: –
the distress signal MAYDAY, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the vessel in distress, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC).
(WRC-07)
32.13D 2) The distress message which follows the distress call should be given in the following form: –
the distress signal MAYDAY;
–
the name of the vessel in distress;
–
the call sign or other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC);
–
the position, given as the latitude and longitude, or if the latitude and longitude are not known or if time is insufficient, in relation to a known geographical location;
–
the nature of the distress;
–
the kind of assistance required;
–
any other useful information.
(WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
91
32.13E § 9C DSC procedures use a combination of automated functions and manual intervention to generate the appropriate distress call format in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.541. A distress alert sent by DSC consists of one or more distress alert attempts in which a message format is transmitted identifying the station in distress, giving its last recorded position and, if entered, the nature of the distress. In MF and HF bands, distress alert attempts may be sent as a single-frequency attempt or a multi-frequency attempt on up to six frequencies within one minute. In VHF bands, only single-frequency call attempts are used. The distress alert will repeat automatically at random intervals, a few minutes apart, until an acknowledgement sent by DSC is received. (WRC-07) B2 – Transmission of a shore-to-ship distress alert relay or a distress call relay (WRC-07) 32.14 § 10 1) A station or a rescue coordination centre which receives a distress alert or call and a distress message shall initiate the transmission of a shore-toship distress alert relay addressed, as appropriate, to all ships, to a selected group of ships, or to a specific ship, by satellite and/or terrestrial means. (WRC-07) 32.15 2) The distress alert relay and the distress call relay shall contain the identification of the mobile unit in distress, its position and all other information which might facilitate rescue. (WRC-07) B3 – Transmission of a distress alert relay or a distress call relay by a station not itself in distress (WRC-07) 32.16 § 11 A station in the mobile or mobile-satellite service which learns that a mobile unit is in distress (for example, by a radio call or by observation) shall initiate and transmit a distress alert relay or a distress call relay on behalf of the mobile unit in distress once it has ascertained that any of the following circumstances apply: (WRC-07) 32.17
a) on receiving a distress alert or call which is not acknowledged by a coast station or another vessel within five minutes (see also Nos. 32.29A and 32.31); (WRC-07)
32.18
b) on learning that the mobile unit in distress is otherwise unable or incapable of participating in distress communications, if the master or other person responsible for the mobile unit not in distress considers that further help is necessary. (WRC-07)
32.19 § 12 1) The distress relay on behalf of a mobile unit in distress shall be sent in a form appropriate to the circumstances (see Nos. 32.19A to 32.19D) using either a distress call relay by radiotelephony (see Nos. 32.19D and 32.19E), an individually addressed distress alert relay by DSC (see No. 32.19B), or a distress priority message through a ship earth station. (WRC-07)
92
Maritime Manual
32.19A 2) A station transmitting a distress alert relay or a distress call relay in accordance with Nos. 32.16 to 32.18 shall indicate that it is not itself in distress. (WRC-07) 32.19B 3) A distress alert relay sent by DSC should use the call format, as found in the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541, and should preferably be addressed to an individual coast station or rescue coordination centre5. (WRC-07) 32.19C 4) However, a ship shall not transmit a distress alert relay to all ships by digital selective calling on the VHF or MF distress frequencies following receipt of a distress alert sent by digital selective calling by the ship in distress. (WRC-07) 32.19D 5) When an aural watch is being maintained on shore and reliable ship-to-shore communications can be established by radiotelephony, a distress call relay is sent by radiotelephony and addressed to the relevant coast station or rescue coordination centre6 on the appropriate frequency. (WRC-07) 32.19E 6) The distress call relay sent by radiotelephony should be given in the following form: –
the distress signal MAYDAY RELAY, spoken three times;
–
ALL STATIONS or coast station name, as appropriate, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the relaying station, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or other identification of the relaying station;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC) of the relaying station (the vessel not in distress). (WRC-07)
32.19F 7) This call shall be followed by a distress message which shall, as far as possible, repeat the information7 contained in the original distress alert or distress message. (WRC-07) _______________ 5
32.19B.1 Vessels making a distress alert relay or a distress call relay should ensure that a suitable coast station or rescue coordination centre is informed of any distress communications previously exchanged. (WRC-07)
6
32.19D.1 Vessels making a distress call relay should ensure that a suitable coast station or rescue coordination centre is informed of any distress communications previously exchanged. (WRC-07) 7
32.19F.1 If the station in distress cannot be identified, then it will be necessary to originate the distress message as well, using, for example, terms such as “Unidentified trawler” refer to the mobile unit in distress. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
93
32.19G 8) When no aural watch is being maintained on shore, or there are other difficulties in establishing reliable ship-to-shore communications by radiotelephony, an appropriate coast station or rescue coordination centre may be contacted by sending an individual distress alert relay by DSC, addressed solely to that station and using the appropriate call formats. (WRC-07) 32.19H 9) In the event of continued failure to contact a coast station or rescue coordination centre directly, it may be appropriate to send a distress call relay by radiotelephony addressed to all ships, or to all ships in a certain geographical area. See also No. 32.19C. (WRC-07) 32.20
C – Receipt and acknowledgement of distress alerts and distress calls (WRC-07) C1 – Procedure for acknowledgement of receipt of distress alerts or a distress call (WRC-07)
32.21 § 13 1) Acknowledgement of receipt of a distress alert, including a distress alert relay, shall be made in the manner appropriate to the method of transmission of the alert and within the time-scale appropriate to the role of the station in receipt of the alert. Acknowledgement by satellite shall be sent immediately. (WRC-07) 32.21A 2) When acknowledging receipt of a distress alert sent by DSC8, the acknowledgement in the terrestrial services shall be made by DSC, radiotelephony or narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy as appropriate to the circumstances, on the associated distress and safety frequency in the same band in which the distress alert was received, taking due account of the directions given in the most recent versions of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. (WRC-07) 32.21B Acknowledgement by DSC of a distress alert sent by DSC addressed to stations in the maritime mobile service shall be addressed to all stations8. (WRC-07) 32.23 § 15 1) When acknowledging by radiotelephony the receipt of a distress alert or a distress call from a ship station or a ship earth station, the acknowledgement should be given in the following form: –
the distress signal MAYDAY;
_______________ 8
32.21A.1 In order to ensure that no unnecessary delay occurs before the shore-based authorities become aware of a distress incident, the acknowledgement by DSC to a distress alert sent by DSC shall normally only be made by a coast station or a rescue coordination centre. An acknowledgement by DSC will cancel any further automated repetition of the distress alert using DSC. (WRC-07)
94
Maritime Manual
–
the name followed by the call sign, or the MMSI or other identification of the station sending the distress message;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name and call sign or other identification of the station acknowledging receipt;
–
the word RECEIVED;
–
the distress signal MAYDAY.
(WRC-07)
32.24 2) When acknowledging by narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy the receipt of a distress alert from a ship station, the acknowledgement should be given in the following form: –
the distress signal MAYDAY;
–
the call sign or other identification of the station sending the distress alert;
–
the word DE;
–
the call sign or other identification of the station acknowledging receipt of the distress alert;
–
the signal RRR;
–
the distress signal MAYDAY.
(WRC-07)
C2 – Receipt and acknowledgement by a coast station, a coast earth station or a rescue coordination centre (WRC-07) 32.26 § 17 Coast stations and the appropriate coast earth stations in receipt of distress alerts or distress calls shall ensure that they are routed as soon as possible to a rescue coordination centre. In addition, receipt of a distress alert or a distress call is to be acknowledged as soon as possible by a coast station, or by a rescue coordination centre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earth station. A shore-to-ship distress alert relay or a distress call relay (see Nos. 32.14 and 32.15) shall also be made when the method of receipt warrants a broadcast alert to shipping or when the circumstances of the distress incident indicate that further help is necessary. (WRC-07) 32.27 § 18 A coast station using DSC to acknowledge a distress alert shall transmit the acknowledgement on the distress calling frequency on which the distress alert was received and should address it to all ships. The acknowledgement shall include the identification of the ship whose distress alert is being acknowledged. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
C3 – Receipt and acknowledgement by a ship station or ship earth station
95
(WRC-07)
32.28 § 19 1) Ship or ship earth stations in receipt of a distress alert or a distress call shall, as soon as possible, inform the master or person responsible for the ship of the contents of the distress alert. (WRC-07) 32.29 2) In areas where reliable communications with one or more coast stations are practicable, ship stations in receipt of a distress alert or a distress call from another vessel should defer acknowledgement for a short interval so that a coast station may acknowledge receipt in the first instance. (WRC-07) 32.29A 3) Ship stations in receipt of a distress call sent by radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16) shall, if the call is not acknowledged by a coast station or another vessel within five minutes, acknowledge receipt to the vessel in distress and use any means available to relay the distress call to an appropriate coast station or coast earth station (see also Nos. 32.16 to 32.19F). (WRC-07) 32.30 § 20 1) Ship stations operating in areas where reliable communications with a coast station are not practicable which receive a distress alert or call from a ship station which is, beyond doubt, in their vicinity, shall, as soon as possible and if appropriately equipped, acknowledge receipt to the vessel in distress and inform a rescue coordination centre through a coast station or coast earth station (see also Nos. 32.16 to 32.19H). (WRC-07) 32.31 2) However in order to avoid making unnecessary or confusing transmissions in response, a ship station, which may be at a considerable distance from the incident, receiving an HF distress alert, shall not acknowledge it but shall observe the provisions of Nos. 32.36 to 32.38, and shall, if the distress alert is not acknowledged by a coast station within five minutes, relay the distress alert, but only to an appropriate coast station or coast earth station (see also Nos. 32.16 to 32.19H). (WRC-07) 32.32 § 21 A ship station acknowledging receipt of a distress alert sent by DSC should, in accordance with No. 32.29 or No. 32.30: (WRC-07) 32.33
a) in the first instance, acknowledge receipt of the distress alert by using radiotelephony on the distress and safety traffic frequency in the band used for the alert, taking into account any instructions which may be issued by a responding coast station; (WRC-07)
32.34
b) if acknowledgement by radiotelephony of the distress alert received on the MF or VHF distress alerting frequency is unsuccessful, acknowledge receipt of the distress alert by responding with a digital selective call on the appropriate frequency.
96
Maritime Manual
32.34A § 21A However, unless instructed to do so by a coast station or a rescue coordination centre, a ship station may only send an acknowledgement by DSC in the event that: a)
no acknowledgement by DSC from a coast station has been observed; and
b)
no other communication by radiotelephony or narrow-band directprinting telegraphy to or from the vessel in distress has been observed; and
c)
at least five minutes have elapsed and the distress alert by DSC has been repeated (see No. 32.21A.1). (WRC-07)
32.35 § 22 A ship station in receipt of a shore-to-ship distress alert relay or distress call relay (see No. 32.14) should establish communication as directed and render such assistance as required and appropriate. (WRC-07) 32.36
D – Preparations for handling of distress traffic
32.37 § 23 On receipt of a distress alert or a distress call, ship stations and coast stations shall set watch on the radiotelephone distress and safety traffic frequency associated with the distress and safety calling frequency on which the distress alert was received. (WRC-07) 32.38 § 24 Coast stations and ship stations with narrow-band direct-printing equipment shall set watch on the narrow-band direct-printing frequency associated with the distress alert if it indicates that narrow-band direct-printing is to be used for subsequent distress communications. If practicable, they should additionally set watch on the radiotelephone frequency associated with the distress alert frequency. (WRC-07)
Section III – Distress traffic 32.39
A – General and search and rescue coordinating communications
32.40 § 25 Distress traffic consists of all messages relating to the immediate assistance required by the ship in distress, including search and rescue communications and on-scene communications. The distress traffic shall as far as possible be on the frequencies contained in Article 31. 32.42 § 26 For distress traffic by radiotelephony, when establishing communications, calls shall be prefixed by the distress signal MAYDAY.
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
97
32.43 § 27 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations shall be used for distress traffic by direct-printing telegraphy. All messages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a letter shift signal and the distress signal MAYDAY. 32.44 2) Distress communications by direct-printing telegraphy should normally be established by the ship in distress and should be in the broadcast (forward error correction) mode. The ARQ mode may subsequently be used when it is advantageous to do so. 32.45 § 28 1) The rescue coordination centre responsible for controlling a search and rescue operation shall also coordinate the distress traffic relating to the incident or may appoint another station to do so. (WRC-07) 32.46 2) The rescue coordination centre coordinating distress traffic, the unit coordinating search and rescue operations9 or the coast station involved may impose silence on stations which interfere with that traffic. This instruction shall be addressed to all stations or to one station only, according to circumstances. In either case, the following shall be used: 32.47
a) in radiotelephony, the signal SEELONCE MAYDAY, pronounced as the French expression “silence, m'aider”;
32.48
b) in narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy normally using forwarderror correcting mode, the signal SILENCE MAYDAY. However, the ARQ mode may be used when it is advantageous to do so.
32.49 § 29 Until they receive the message indicating that normal working may be resumed (see No. 32.51), all stations which are aware of the distress traffic, and which are not taking part in it, and which are not in distress, are forbidden to transmit on the frequencies in which the distress traffic is taking place. 32.50 § 30 A station of the mobile service which, while following distress traffic, is able to continue its normal service, may do so when the distress traffic is well established and on condition that it observes the provisions of No. 32.49 and that it does not interfere with distress traffic. 32.51 § 31 When distress traffic has ceased on frequencies which have been used for distress traffic, the station controlling the search and rescue operation shall initiate a message for transmission on these frequencies indicating that distress traffic has finished. (WRC-07) _______________ 9
32.46.1 In accordance with the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) this is the on-scene commander (OSC) or the coordinator surface search (CSS).
98
Maritime Manual
32.52 § 32 consist of:
1) In radiotelephony, the message referred to in No. 32.51 should
–
the distress signal MAYDAY;
–
the call “ALL STATIONS”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station sending that message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or other identification of the station sending the message;
–
the time of handing in of the message;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC), the name and the call sign of the mobile station which was in distress;
–
the words SEELONCE FEENEE pronounced as the French words “silence fini”. (WRC-07)
32.53 2) In direct-printing telegraphy, the message referred to in No. 32.51 consists of:
32.53A
–
the distress signal MAYDAY;
–
the call CQ;
–
the word DE;
–
the call sign or other identification of the station sending the message;
–
the time of handing in of the message;
–
the name and call sign of the mobile station which was in distress; and
–
the words SILENCE FINI. Cancellation of an inadvertent distress alert
(WRC-07)
32.53B § 32A 1) A station transmitting an inadvertent distress alert or call shall cancel the transmission. (WRC-07) 32.53C 2) An inadvertent DSC alert shall be cancelled by DSC, if the DSC equipment is so capable. The cancellation should be in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.493. In all cases, cancellations shall also be transmitted by radiotelephone in accordance with 32.53E. (WRC-07) 32.53D 3) An inadvertent distress call shall be cancelled by radiotelephone in accordance with the procedure in 32.53E. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR32
99
32.53E 4) Inadvertent distress transmissions shall be cancelled orally on the associated distress and safety frequency in the same band on which the distress transmission was sent, using the following procedure: –
the call “ALL STATIONS”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the vessel, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC);
–
PLEASE CANCEL MY DISTRESS ALERT OF time in UTC.
Monitor the same band on which the inadvertent distress transmission was sent and respond to any communications concerning that distress transmission as appropriate. (WRC-07) 32.54
B – On-scene communications
32.55 § 33 1) On-scene communications are those between the mobile unit in distress and assisting mobile units, and between the mobile units and the unit coordinating search and rescue operations9. 32.56 2) Control of on-scene communications is the responsibility of the unit coordinating search and rescue operations9. Simplex communications shall be used so that all on-scene mobile stations may share relevant information concerning the distress incident. If direct-printing telegraphy is used, it shall be in the forward errorcorrecting mode. 32.57 § 34 1) The preferred frequencies in radiotelephony for on-scene communications are 156.8 MHz and 2 182 kHz. The frequency 2 174.5 kHz may also be used for ship-to-ship on-scene communications using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy in the forward error correcting mode. 32.58 2) In addition to 156.8 MHz and 2 182 kHz, the frequencies 3 023 kHz, 4 125 kHz, 5 680 kHz, 123.1 MHz and 156.3 MHz may be used for ship-toaircraft on-scene communications. 32.59 § 35 The selection or designation of on-scene frequencies is the responsibility of the unit coordinating search and rescue operations9. Normally, once an on-scene frequency is established, a continuous aural or teleprinter watch is maintained by all participating on-scene mobile units on the selected frequency. _______________ 9
32.55.1, 32.56.1 and 32.59.1 In accordance with the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) this is the on-scene commander (OSC) or the coordinator surface search (CSS).
100
Maritime Manual
32.60
C – Locating and homing signals
32.61 § 36 1) Locating signals are radio transmissions intended to facilitate the finding of a mobile unit in distress or the location of survivors. These signals include those transmitted by searching units, and those transmitted by the mobile unit in distress, by survival craft, by float-free EPIRBs, by satellite EPIRBs and by search and rescue radar transponders to assist the searching units. 32.62 2) Homing signals are those locating signals which are transmitted by mobile units in distress, or by survival craft, for the purpose of providing searching units with a signal that can be used to determine the bearing to the transmitting stations. 32.63 bands:
3) Locating signals may be transmitted in the following frequency 117.975-137 MHz; 156-174 MHz; 406-406.1 MHz; and 9 200-9 500 MHz.
(WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR33
101
ARTICLE 33 Operational procedures for urgency and safety communications in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)
Section I – General 33.1
§1
1) Urgency and safety communications include:
33.2
a)
navigational and meteorological warnings and urgent information;
33.3
b)
ship-to-ship safety of navigation communications;
33.4
c)
ship reporting communications;
33.5
d)
support communications for search and rescue operations;
33.6
e)
other urgency and safety messages; and
33.7
f) communications relating to the navigation, movements and needs of ships and weather observation messages destined for an official meteorological service.
(WRC-07)
33.7A 2) Urgency communications shall have priority over all other communications, except distress. (WRC-07) 33.7B 3) Safety communications shall have priority over all other communications, except distress and urgency. (WRC-07)
Section II – Urgency communications 33.7C
§ 1A
The following terms apply:
a) The urgency announcement is a digital selective call using an urgency call format1, in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication, or an urgency message format, in which case it is relayed through space stations. b)
The urgency call is the initial voice or text procedure.
c) The urgency procedure. (WRC-07)
message
is
the
subsequent
voice
or
text
_______________ 1
33.7C.1 The format of urgency calls and urgency messages should be in accordance with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. (WRC-07)
102
Maritime Manual
33.8 §2 1) In a terrestrial system, urgency communications consist of an announcement, transmitted using digital selective calling, followed by the urgency call and message transmitted using radiotelephony, narrow-band direct-printing, or data. The announcement of the urgency message shall be made on one or more of the distress and safety calling frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 using either digital selective calling and the urgency call format, or if not available, radio telephony procedures and the urgency signal. Announcements using digital selective calling should use the technical structure and content set forth in the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. A separate announcement need not be made if the urgency message is to be transmitted through the maritime mobilesatellite service. (WRC-07) 33.8A 2) Ship stations not equipped for digital selective calling procedures may announce an urgency call and message by transmitting the urgency signal by radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (channel 16), while taking into account that other stations outside VHF range may not receive the announcement. (WRC-07) 33.8B 3) In the maritime mobile service, urgency communications may be addressed either to all stations or to a particular station. When using digital selective calling techniques, the urgency announcement shall indicate which frequency is to be used to send the subsequent message and, in the case of a message to all stations, shall use the “All Ships” format setting. (WRC-07) 33.8C 4) Urgency announcements from a coast station may also be directed to a group of vessels or to vessels in a defined geographical area. (WRC-07) 33.9 §3 1) The urgency call and message shall be transmitted on one or more of the distress and safety traffic frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31. (WRC-07) 33.9A 2) However, in the maritime mobile service, the urgency message shall be transmitted on a working frequency: a)
in the case of a long message or a medical call; or
b)
in areas of heavy traffic when the message is being repeated.
An indication to this effect shall be included in the urgency announcement or call. (WRC-07) 33.9B 3) In the maritime mobile-satellite service, a separate urgency announcement or call does not need to be made before sending the urgency message. However, if available, the appropriate network priority access settings should be used for sending the message. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR33
103
33.10 § 4 The urgency signal consists of the words PAN PAN. In radiotelephony each word of the group shall be pronounced as the French word “panne”. 33.11 § 5 1) The urgency call format and the urgency signal indicate that the calling station has a very urgent message to transmit concerning the safety of a mobile unit or a person. (WRC-07) 33.11A 2) Communications concerning medical advice may be preceded by the urgency signal. Mobile stations requiring medical advice may obtain it through any of the land stations shown in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations. (WRC-07) 33.11B 3) Urgency communications to support search and rescue operations need not be preceded by the urgency signal. (WRC-07) 33.12
§6
1) The urgency call should consist of:
–
the urgency signal PAN PAN, spoken three times;
–
the name of the called station or “all stations”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station transmitting the urgency message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or any other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC),
followed by the urgency message or followed by the details of the channel to be used for the message in the case where a working channel is to be used. In radiotelephony, on the selected working frequency, the urgency call and message consists of: –
the urgency signal PAN PAN, spoken three times;
–
the name of the called station or “all stations”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station transmitting the urgency message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or any other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC);
–
the text of the urgency message.
(WRC-07)
104
Maritime Manual
33.13 2) In narrow-band direct-printing, the urgency message shall be preceded by the urgency signal (see No. 33.10) and the identification of the transmitting station. 33.14 § 7 1) The urgency call format or urgency signal shall be sent only on the authority of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehicle carrying the mobile station or mobile earth station. (WRC-07) 33.15 2) The urgency call format or the urgency signal may be transmitted by a land station or a coast earth station with the approval of the responsible authority. 33.15A § 7A 1) Ship stations in receipt of an urgency announcement or call addressed to all stations shall not acknowledge. (WRC-07) 33.15B 2) Ship stations in receipt of an urgency announcement or call of an urgency message shall monitor the frequency or channel indicated for the message for at least five minutes. If, at the end of the five-minute monitoring period, no urgency message has been received, a coast station should, if possible, be notified of the missing message. Thereafter, normal working may be resumed. (WRC-07) 33.15C 3) Coast and ship stations which are in communication on frequencies other than those used for the transmission of the urgency signal or the subsequent message may continue their normal work without interruption, provided that the urgency message is not addressed to them nor broadcast to all stations. (WRC-07) 33.16 § 8 When an urgency announcement or call and message was transmitted to more than one station and action is no longer required, an urgency cancellation should be sent by the station responsible for its transmission. The urgency cancellation should consist of: –
the urgency signal PAN PAN, spoken three times;
–
“all stations”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station transmitting the urgency message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or any other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC);
–
PLEASE CANCEL URGENCY MESSAGE OF time in UTC. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR33
105
33.17 § 9 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations shall be used for urgency messages by direct-printing telegraphy. All messages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a letter shift signal and the urgency signal PAN PAN. 33.18 2) Urgency communications by direct-printing telegraphy should normally be established in the broadcast (forward error correction) mode. The ARQ mode may subsequently be used when it is advantageous to do so.
Section III – Medical transports 33.19 § 10 The term “medical transports”, as defined in the 1949 Geneva Conventions and Additional Protocols, refers to any means of transportation by land, water or air, whether military or civilian, permanent or temporary, assigned exclusively to medical transportation and under the control of a competent authority of a party to a conflict or of neutral States and of other States not parties to an armed conflict, when these ships, craft and aircraft assist the wounded, the sick and the shipwrecked. 33.20 § 11 1) For the purpose of announcing and identifying medical transports which are protected under the above-mentioned Conventions, the procedure of Section II of this Article is used. The urgency call shall be followed by the addition of the single word MEDICAL in narrow-band direct-printing and by the addition of the single word MAY-DEE-CAL pronounced as in French “médical”, in radiotelephony. (WRC-07) 33.20A 2) When using digital selective calling techniques, the urgency announcement on the appropriate Digital Selective Calling distress and safety frequencies shall always be addressed to all stations on VHF and to a specified geographical area on MF and HF and shall indicate “Medical transport” in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. (WRC-07) 33.20B 3) Medical transports may use one or more of the distress and safety traffic frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 for the purpose of selfidentification and to establish communications. As soon as practicable, communications shall be transferred to an appropriate working frequency. (WRC-07) 33.21 § 12 The use of the signals described in Nos. 33.20 and 33.20A indicates that the message which follows concerns a protected medical transport. The message shall convey the following data: (WRC-07) 33.22
a) call sign or other recognized means of identification of the medical transport;
33.23
b)
position of the medical transport;
106
Maritime Manual
33.24
c)
number and type of vehicles in the medical transport;
33.25
d)
intended route;
33.26
e)
estimated time en route and of departure and arrival, as appropriate;
33.27
f) any other information, such as flight altitude, radio frequencies guarded, languages used and secondary surveillance radar modes and codes.
33.30 § 14 The use of radiocommunications for announcing and identifying medical transports is optional; however, if they are used, the provisions of these Regulations and particularly of this Section and of Articles 30 and 31 shall apply.
Section IV – Safety communications
33.30A § 14A
The following terms apply:
a) the safety announcement is a digital selective call using a safety call format in the bands used for terrestrial radiocommunication or a safety message format, in which case it is relayed through space stations; b)
the safety call is the initial voice or text procedure;
c) the procedure.
safety
message
is
the
subsequent
voice
or
text
(WRC-07)
33.31 § 15 1) In a terrestrial system, safety communications consist of a safety announcement, transmitted using digital selective calling, followed by the safety call and message transmitted using radiotelephony, narrow-band direct-printing or data. The announcement of the safety message shall be made on one or more of the distress and safety calling frequencies specified in Section I of Article 31 using either digital selective calling techniques and the safety call format, or radiotelephony procedures and the safety signal. (WRC-07) 33.31A 2) However, in order to avoid unnecessary loading of the distress and safety calling frequencies specified for use with digital selective calling techniques: a) safety messages transmitted by coast stations in accordance with a predefined timetable should not be announced by digital selective calling techniques; b) safety messages which only concern vessels sailing in the vicinity should be announced using radiotelephony procedures. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR33
107
33.31B 3) In addition, ship stations not equipped for digital selective calling procedures may announce a safety message by transmitting the safety call by radiotelephony. In such cases the announcement shall be made using the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16), while taking into account that other stations outside VHF range may not receive the announcement. (WRC-07) 33.31C 4) In the maritime mobile service, safety messages shall generally be addressed to all stations. In some cases, however, they may be addressed to a particular station. When using digital selective calling techniques, the safety announcement shall indicate which frequency is to be used to send the subsequent message and, in the case of a message to all stations, shall use the “All Ships” format setting. (WRC-07) 33.32 § 16 1) In the maritime mobile service, the safety message shall, where practicable, be transmitted on a working frequency in the same band(s) as those used for the safety announcement or call. A suitable indication to this effect shall be made at the end of the safety call. In the case that no other option is practicable, the safety message may be sent by radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz (VHF channel 16). (WRC-07) 33.32A 2) In the maritime mobile-satellite service, a separate safety announcement or call does not need to be made before sending the safety message. However, if available, the appropriate network priority access settings should be used for sending the message. (WRC-07) 33.33 § 17 The safety signal consists of the word SECURITE. In radiotelephony, it shall be pronounced as in French. 33.34 § 18 1) The safety call format or the safety signal indicates that the calling station has an important navigational or meteorological warning to transmit. (WRC-07) 33.34A 2) Messages from ship stations containing information concerning the presence of cyclones shall be transmitted, with the least possible delay, to other mobile stations in the vicinity and to the appropriate authorities through a coast station, or through a rescue coordination centre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earth station. These transmissions shall be preceded by the safety announcement or call. (WRC-07) 33.34B 3) Messages from ship stations, containing information on the presence of dangerous ice, dangerous wrecks, or any other imminent danger to marine navigation, shall be transmitted as soon as possible to other ships in the vicinity, and to the appropriate authorities through a coast station, or through a rescue coordination centre via a coast station or an appropriate coast earth station. These transmissions shall be preceded by the safety announcement or call. (WRC-07)
108
33.35
Maritime Manual
§ 19
1) The complete safety call should consist of:
–
the safety signal SECURITE, spoken three times;
–
the name of the called station or “all stations”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station transmitting the safety message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or any other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial announcement has been sent by DSC),
followed by the safety message or followed by the details of the channel to be used for the message in the case where a working channel is to be used. In radiotelephony, on the selected working frequency, the safety call and message should consist of: –
the safety signal SECURITE, spoken three times;
–
the name of the called station or “all stations”, spoken three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the station transmitting the safety message, spoken three times;
–
the call sign or any other identification;
–
the MMSI (if the initial alert has been sent by DSC);
–
the text of the safety message.
(WRC-07)
33.36 2) In narrow-band direct-printing, the safety message shall be preceded by the safety signal (see No. 33.33), and the identification of the transmitting station. 33.37 § 20 1) Error correction techniques in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations shall be used for safety messages by direct-printing telegraphy. All messages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, a line feed signal, a letter shift signal and the safety signal SECURITE. 33.38 2) Safety communications by direct-printing telegraphy should normally be established in the broadcast (forward error correction) mode. The ARQ mode may subsequently be used when it is advantageous to do so. 33.38A § 20A 1) Ship stations in receipt of a safety announcement using digital selective calling techniques and the “All Ships” format setting, or otherwise addressed to all stations, shall not acknowledge. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR33
109
33.38B 2) Ship stations in receipt of a safety announcement or safety call and message shall monitor the frequency or channel indicated for the message and shall listen until they are satisfied that the message is of no concern to them. They shall not make any transmission likely to interfere with the message. (WRC-07)
Section V – Transmission of maritime safety information2 33.39
A – General
33.41 § 22 The mode and format of the transmissions mentioned in Nos. 33.43, 33.45, 33.46 and 33.48 shall be in accordance with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. 33.42
B – International NAVTEX system
33.43 § 23 Maritime safety information shall be transmitted by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forward error correction using the frequency 518 kHz in accordance with the international NAVTEX system (see Appendix 15). 33.44
C – 490 kHz and 4 209.5 kHz
33.45 § 24 1) The frequency 490 kHz may be used for the transmission of maritime safety information by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forward error correction (see Appendix 15). (WRC-03) 33.46 2) The frequency 4 209.5 kHz is used exclusively for NAVTEXtype transmission by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forward error correction. 33.47
D – High seas maritime safety information
33.48 § 25 Maritime safety information is transmitted by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy with forward error correction using the frequencies 4 210 kHz, 6 314 kHz, 8 416.5 kHz, 12 579 kHz, 16 806.5 kHz, 19 680.5 kHz, 22 376 kHz and 26 100.5 kHz. _______________ 2
33.V.1 Maritime safety information includes navigation and meteorological warnings, meteorological forecasts and other urgent messages pertaining to safety transmitted from coast stations or coast earth stations. (WRC-07)
110
33.49
Maritime Manual
E – Maritime safety information via satellite
33.50 § 26 Maritime safety information may be transmitted via satellite in the maritime mobile-satellite service using the band 1530-1 545 MHz (see Appendix 15).
Section VI – Intership navigation safety communications 33.51 § 27 1) Intership navigation safety communications are those VHF radiotelephone communications conducted between ships for the purpose of contributing to the safe movement of ships. 33.52 2) The frequency 156.650 MHz is used for intership navigation safety communications (see also Appendix 15 and note k) in Appendix 18).
Section VII – Use of other frequencies for safety
(WRC-07)
33.53 § 28 Radiocommunications for safety purposes concerning ship reporting communications, communications relating to the navigation, movements and needs of ships and weather observation messages may be conducted on any appropriate communications frequency, including those used for public correspondence. In terrestrial systems, the bands 415-535 kHz (see Article 52), 1 606.5-4 000 kHz (see Article 52), 4 000-27 500 kHz (see Appendix 17), and 156-174 MHz (see Appendix 18) are used for this function. In the maritime mobile-satellite service, frequencies in the bands 1530-1 544 MHz and 1 626.5-1 645.5 MHz are used for this function as well as for distress alerting purposes (see No. 32.2). (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR34
111
ARTICLE 34 Alerting signals in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS)
Section I – Emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) and satellite EPIRB signals 34.1 §1 The emergency position-indicating radiobeacon signal in the band 406-406.1 MHz shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.633-3. (WRC-07)
Section II – Digital selective calling 34.2 §2 The characteristics of the “distress call” (see No. 32.9) in the digital selective calling system shall be in accordance with relevant ITU-R Recommendations (see Resolution 27 (Rev.WRC-03)*).
_______________ *
Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution was revised by WRC-07.
112
Maritime Manual – SECTION I – RR46
ARTICLE 46 Authority of the master 46.1 §1 The service of a ship station is placed under the supreme authority of the master or of the person responsible for the ship or other vessel carrying the station. 46.2 §2 The person holding this authority shall require that each operator comply with these Regulations and that the ship station for which the operator is responsible is used, at all times, in accordance with these Regulations. 46.3 §3 The master or the person responsible, as well as all persons who may have knowledge of the text or even of the existence of a radiotelegram, or of any information whatever obtained by means of the radiocommunication service, are placed under the obligation of observing and ensuring the secrecy of correspondence. 46.4 §4 The provisions of Nos. 46.1, 46.2 and 46.3 shall also apply to personnel of ship earth stations.
Part B – SECTION I – RR47
113
ARTICLE 47 Operator’s certificates
Section I – General provisions 47.2 §1 1) The service of every ship radiotelephone station, ship earth station and ship station using the frequencies and techniques for GMDSS, as prescribed in Chapter VII, shall be controlled by an operator holding a certificate issued or recognized by the government to which the station is subject. Provided the station is so controlled, other persons besides the holder of the certificate may use the equipment. (WRC-07) 47.4 2) Nevertheless, in the service of radiotelephone stations operating solely on frequencies above 30 MHz, each government shall decide for itself whether a certificate is necessary and, if so, shall define the conditions for obtaining it. 47.5 3) The provisions of No. 47.4 shall not, however, apply to any ship station working on frequencies assigned for international use. 47.9 §3 1) Each administration shall take the necessary steps to prevent, to the maximum extent possible, the fraudulent use of certificates. For this purpose, such certificates shall bear the holder’s signature and shall be authenticated by the issuing administration. Administrations may employ, if they wish, other means of identification such as photographs, fingerprints, etc. 47.10 2) In the maritime mobile service the certificates issued after 1 January 1978 shall bear the photograph of the holder and the holder’s date of birth. 47.11 3) To facilitate verification of certificates, these may carry, if necessary, in addition to the text in the national language, a translation of this text in a working language of the Union. 47.12 4) In the maritime mobile service all certificates not in one of the working languages of the Union and issued after 1 January 1978 shall carry at least the following information in one of these working languages: 47.13
a)
the name and date of birth of the holder;
47.14
b)
the title of the certificate and its date of issue;
114
Maritime Manual
47.15
c)
if applicable, the number and period of validity of the certificate;
47.16
d)
the issuing administration.
47.17 § 4 Each administration shall take the necessary steps to place operators under the obligation to preserve the secrecy of correspondence as provided for in No. 18.4. 47.18 § 5 1) Each administration may determine the conditions under which personnel holding certificates specified in Section II may be granted certificates specified in Nos. 47.20 to 47.23B. (WRC-07) 47.18A 2) Each administration may determine the conditions under which personnel holding certificates for equipment that operate with non-GMDSS frequencies and techniques may be granted certificates specified in Nos. 47.26 and 47.27. (WRC-07)
Section II – Categories of operator’s certificates A
GMDSS certificates
(WRC-07)
47.19 § 6 1) There are six categories of certificates, shown in descending order of requirements, for personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations using the frequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII. An operator meeting the requirements of a certificate automatically meets all of the requirements of lower order certificates. (WRC-07) 47.20
a)
First-class radio electronic certificate.
47.21
b)
Second-class radio electronic certificate.
47.22
c)
General operator’s certificate.
47.23
d)
Restricted operator’s certificate.
47.23A e)
Long range certificate (for non-SOLAS vessels).
(WRC-07)
47.23B f)
Short range certificate (for non-SOLAS vessels).
(WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR47
115
47.24 2) The holder of one of the certificates specified in Nos. 47.20 to 47.23 may carry out the service of ship stations or ship earth stations using the frequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII. B
Non-GMDSS certificates
(WRC-07)
47.25 § 7 1) There are six categories of certificates. Existing certificates of the categories listed in No. 47.26 may continue to be used for the purposes they were issued for. (WRC-07) 47.26
§8
The following maritime radio operator’s certificates are still valid:
1
Radiocommunication operator’s general certificate.
2
First-class radio telegraph operator’s certificate.
3
Second-class radio telegraph operator’s certificate.
4
Radiotelegraph operator’s special certificate.
5
Radiotelephone operator’s general certificate.
6
Restricted radiotelephone operator’s certificate.
(WRC-07)
47.27 § 9 The requirements for the certificates of this section, for which candidates must show proof of technical and professional knowledge and qualification, are shown in Table 47-1. (WRC-07)
116
Maritime Manual
TABLE 47-1 Requirements for radio electronic and operator’s certificates The relevant certificate is issued to a candidate who 1st-class 2nd-class General Restricted has given proof of the technical and professional radio radio operator’s operator’s knowledge and qualifications enumerated below, as electronic electronic certificate certificate indicated by an asterisk in the appropriate box certificate certificate Knowledge of the principles of electricity and the theory of radio and of electronics sufficient to meet the requirements specified below:
*
Theoretical knowledge of GMDSS radiocommunication equipment, including narrow-band directprinting telegraph and radiotelephone transmitters and receivers, digital selective calling equipment, ship earth stations, emergency position-indicating radiobeacons, marine antenna systems, radio equipment for survival craft together with all auxiliary items, including power supplies, as well as general knowledge of the principles of other equipment generally used for radionavigation, with particular reference to maintaining equipment in service.
*
General theoretical knowledge of GMDSS radiocommunication equipment, including narrow-band direct-printing telegraph and radiotelephone transmitters and receivers, digital selective calling equipment, ship earth stations, emergency positionindicating radiobeacons, marine antenna systems, radio equipment for survival craft together with all auxiliary items, including power supplies, as well as general knowledge of the principles of other equipment generally used for radionavigation, with particular reference to maintaining equipment in service.
*
Practical knowledge of the operation and knowledge of the preventive maintenance of the equipment indicated above.
*
Practical knowledge necessary for the location and repair (using appropriate testing equipment and tools) of faults in the equipment mentioned above which may occur during a voyage.
*
Practical knowledge necessary for effecting repairs in the case of faults in the equipment indicated above, using the means available on board and, if necessary, replacing modular units.
*
*
*
Part B – SECTION I – RR47
117
TABLE 47-1 (end) The relevant certificate is issued to a candidate who has given proof of the technical and professional knowledge and qualifications enumerated below, as indicated by an asterisk in the appropriate box
1st-class 2nd-class General Restricted radio radio operator’s operator’s electronic electronic certificate certificate certificate certificate
Detailed practical knowledge of the operation of all the GMDSS sub-systems and equipment. Practical knowledge of the operation of all the GMDSS sub-systems and equipment which is required while the ship is within the range of VHF coast stations (see NOTE 1).
*
Ability to send and to receive correctly by radiotelephone and direct-printing telegraphy. Ability to send and to receive correctly by radiotelephone.
*
Detailed knowledge of the regulations applying to radiocommunications, knowledge of the documents relating to charges for radiocommunications and knowledge of those provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended which relate to radio.
*
*
* *
*
* *
*
*
Knowledge of the regulations applying to radiotelephone communications and specifically of that part of those regulations relating to the safety of life. Sufficient knowledge of one of the working languages of the Union. Candidates should be able to express themselves satisfactorily in that language, both orally and in writing.
*
*
*
*
An elementary knowledge of one of the working * languages of the Union. Candidates should be able to express themselves satisfactorily in that language, both orally and in writing. Administrations may waive the above language requirements for holders of a restricted operator’s certificate when the ship station is confined to a limited area specified by the administration concerned. In such cases the certificate shall be suitably endorsed. NOTE 1 – A restricted operator’s certificate covers only the operation of GMDSS equipment required for GMDSS sea areas A1, and does not cover the operation of GMDSS A2/A3/A4 equipment fitted on a ship over and above the basic A1 requirements, even if the ship is in a sea area A1. GMDSS sea areas A1, A2, A3 and A4 are identified in the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, (SOLAS), 1974, as amended. NOTE 2 – The conditions for the issuing of the long-range and short-range Certificates are contained in Resolution 343 (WRC-97). (WRC-07)
118
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 48 Personnel
Section I – Personnel of coast stations and coast earth stations
48.1 §1 Administrations shall ensure that the staff on duty in coast stations and in coast earth stations are adequately qualified to operate the stations efficiently.
Section II – Class and minimum number of personnel for ship stations and ship earth stations
48.2 §2 Administrations shall ensure that the personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations are adequately qualified to enable efficient operation of the station, and shall take steps to ensure the operational availability and maintenance of equipment for distress and safety communications in accordance with the relevant international agreements. 48.3 §3 An adequately qualified person shall be available to act as a dedicated communications operator in cases of distress. 48.4 §4 The personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which a radio installation is compulsory under international agreements and which use the frequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII shall, with respect to the provisions of Article 47, include: 48.5
a) for stations on board ships which sail beyond the range of VHF coast stations, taking into account the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended: a holder of a first- or second-class radio electronic certificate or a general operator’s certificate;
48.6
b) for stations on board ships which sail solely within the range of VHF coast stations, taking into account the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended: a holder of a first- or second-class radio electronic certificate or a general operator’s certificate or a restricted operator’s certificate.
Part B – SECTION I – RR48
119
48.7 §5 The personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which a radio installation is not compulsory either under international agreements or national regulations and which use the frequencies and techniques prescribed in Chapter VII shall be adequately qualified and certificated in accordance with the administration’s requirements. Guidance concerning appropriate qualifications and certification is provided in Resolution 343 (WRC-97). That Resolution describes two appropriate certificates for use by personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which a radio installation is not compulsory.
120
Maritime Manual – SECTION I – RR49
ARTICLE 49 Inspection of stations 49.1 §1 1) The governments or appropriate administrations of countries which a ship station or ship earth station visits may require the production of the licence for examination. The operator of the station, or the person responsible for the station, shall facilitate this examination. The licence shall be kept in such a way that it can be produced upon request. As far as possible, the licence, or a copy certified by the authority which has issued it, should be permanently exhibited in the station. 49.2 2) The inspectors shall have in their possession an identity card or badge, issued by the competent authority, which they shall show on request of the master or person responsible for the ship or other vessel carrying the ship station or the ship earth station. 49.3 3) When the licence cannot be produced or when manifest irregularities are observed, governments or administrations may inspect the radio installations in order to satisfy themselves that these conform to the conditions imposed by these Regulations. 49.4 4) In addition, inspectors have the right to require the production of the operators’ certificates, but proof of professional knowledge may not be demanded. 49.5 §2 1) When a government or an administration has found it necessary to adopt the course indicated in No. 49.3, or when the operators’ certificates cannot be produced, the government or administration to which the ship station or ship earth station is subject shall be so informed without delay. In addition, the procedure specified in Article 15 is followed when necessary. 49.6 2) Before leaving, the inspector shall report the result of his inspection to the master, or the person responsible for the ship or other vessel carrying the ship station or ship earth station. If any breach of the conditions imposed by these Regulations is observed, the inspector shall make this report in writing. 49.7 §3 Member States undertake not to impose upon foreign ship stations or upon foreign ship earth stations, which are temporarily within their territorial waters or which make a temporary stay in their territory, technical and operating conditions more severe than those contemplated in these Regulations. This undertaking in no way affects arrangements which are made under international agreements relating to maritime navigation, and which are therefore not covered by these Regulations. 49.8 §4 The frequencies of emissions of ship stations shall be checked by the inspection service to which these stations are subject.
Part B – SECTION I – RR50
121
ARTICLE 50 Working hours of stations 50.1 §1 In order to permit the application of the following rules on the subject of hours of watch, every station of the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service shall have an accurate clock correctly regulated to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). 50.2 §2 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), reckoned from 0000 to 2359 h beginning at midnight, shall be used for all entries in the radiocommunication service log and in all similar documents of ships compulsorily equipped with radiocommunication apparatus in compliance with an international agreement; this same provision will apply, as far as possible, to other ships. 50.3 §3 1) The services of coast stations and coast earth stations are, as far as possible, continuous (day and night). Certain coast stations, however, may have a service of limited duration. Each administration or recognized private operating agency duly authorized to that effect fixes the hours of service for coast stations under its jurisdiction. 50.4 2) These hours of service shall be notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau, who shall publish them in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 50.5 §4 Coast stations whose service is not continuous shall not close before finishing all operations resulting from a distress call or from an urgency or safety signal. (WRC-07)
122
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 51 Conditions to be observed in the maritime services
Section I – Maritime mobile service
51.1
A – General
51.2 §1 The energy radiated by receiving apparatus shall be reduced to the lowest practical value and shall not cause harmful interference to other stations. 51.3 §2 Administrations shall take all practicable steps necessary to ensure that the operation of any electrical or electronic apparatus installed in ship stations does not cause harmful interference to the essential radio services of stations which are operating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations. 51.4 §3 1) Changes of frequency in the sending and receiving apparatus of any ship station shall be capable of being made as rapidly as possible. 51.5 2) Installations of any ship station shall be capable, once communication is established, of changing from transmission to reception and vice versa in as short a time as possible. 51.5A 3) The operation of a broadcasting service (see No. 1.38) by a ship station at sea is prohibited (see also No. 23.2). 51.6 §4 Ship stations and ship earth stations other than survival craft stations shall be provided with the documents enumerated in the appropriate section of Appendix 16. 51.7 §5 When any ship station transmitter itself cannot be controlled in such a way that its frequency satisfies the tolerance specified in Appendix 2, the ship station shall be provided with a device, having a precision equal to at least one-half of this tolerance, for measuring the frequency of the emission.
Part B – SECTION I – RR51
51.24
123
C – Ship stations using digital selective calling
51.25 § 12 The characteristics of the digital selective calling equipment shall be in accordance with ITU-R Recommendations (see Resolution 27 (Rev.WRC-03)*). 51.26
C1 – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz
51.27 § 13 All ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective calling to work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on at least two digital selective calling channels necessary for their service. 51.28
C2 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
51.29 § 14 All ship stations equipped with digital selective calling apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be able to: (WRC-03) 51.30
a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the frequency 2 187.5 kHz;
51.31
b) in addition, send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on other digital selective calling frequencies in this band necessary to carry out their service.
51.32
C3 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
51.33 § 15 All ship stations equipped with digital selective calling apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be able to: 51.34
a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the frequencies designated for digital selective distress calling in each of the maritime HF bands in which they are operating (see also No. 32.9);
51.35
b) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on an international calling channel (specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9) in each of the HF maritime mobile bands necessary for their service; (WRC-07)
51.36
c) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on other digital selective calling channels in each of the HF maritime mobile bands necessary for their service.
_______________ *
Note by the Secretariat: This Resolution was revised by WRC-07.
124
51.37
Maritime Manual
C4 – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz
51.38 § 16 All ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective calling to work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz shall be able to send and receive class G2B emissions on the frequency 156.525 MHz. 51.39
CA – Ship stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy
51.40 § 17 1) All ship stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy equipment shall be able to send and receive on the frequency designated for distress traffic by narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy in the frequency bands in which they are operating. 51.41 2) The characteristics of the narrow-band direct-printing equipment shall be in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476-5, ITU-R M.625-3 and ITU-R M.627-1. 51.42
CA1 – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz
51.43 § 18 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall be able to: 51.44
a) send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on the working frequencies necessary to carry out their service;
51.45
b) receive class F1B emissions on 518 kHz, if complying with the provisions of Chapter VII.
51.46
CA2 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
51.47 § 19 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on working frequencies necessary to carry out their service. (WRC-03) 51.48
CA3 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
51.49 § 20 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on working frequencies in each of the HF maritime mobile bands necessary to carry out their service.
Part B – SECTION I – RR51
51.50
D – Ship stations using radiotelephony
51.51
D1 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
125
(WRC-03)
51.52 § 21 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall be able to: 51.53
a) send class J3E emissions on a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz and receive class J3E emissions on a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz, except for such apparatus as is referred to in No. 51.56; (WRC-07)
51.54
b)
51.55
c) receive, in addition, J3E emissions on all other frequencies necessary for their service.
send, in addition, J3E emissions on at least two working frequencies1;
51.56 § 22 The provisions of Nos. 51.54 and 51.55 do not apply to apparatus provided solely for distress, urgency and safety purposes. 51.57
D2 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
51.58 § 23 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony to work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz and which do not comply with the provisions of Chapter VII should be able to send and receive on the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz and 6 215 kHz. However, all ship stations which comply with the provisions of Chapter VII shall be able to send and receive on the carrier frequencies designated in Article 31 for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony for the frequency bands in which they are operating. (WRC-07) 51.59
D3 – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz
51.60 § 24 All ship stations equipped with radiotelephony to work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz (see No. 5.226 and Appendix 18) shall be able to send and receive class G3E emissions on: 51.61
a)
the distress, safety and calling frequency 156.8 MHz;
51.62
b)
the primary intership frequency 156.3 MHz;
51.63
c)
the intership navigation safety frequency 156.65 MHz;
51.64
d)
all the frequencies necessary for their service.
_______________ 1
51.54.1 frequency.
In certain areas, administrations may reduce this requirement to one working
126
Maritime Manual
Section II – Maritime mobile-satellite service
51.65 § 25 The energy radiated by receiving apparatus shall be reduced to the lowest practical value and shall not cause harmful interference to other stations. 51.66 § 26 Administrations shall take all practicable steps necessary to ensure that the operation of any electrical or electronic apparatus installed in ship earth stations does not cause harmful interference to the essential radio services of stations which are operating in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations.
Section III – Stations on board aircraft communicating with stations of the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service 51.67
A – General provisions
51.68 § 27 1) Stations on board aircraft may communicate with stations of the maritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services. They shall conform to those provisions of these Regulations which relate to these services. 51.69 2) For this purpose stations on board aircraft should use the frequencies allocated to the maritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services. 51.70 3) Stations on board aircraft, when handling public correspondence with stations of the maritime mobile service or of the maritime mobile-satellite service, shall comply with all the provisions applicable to the handling of public correspondence in the maritime mobile or maritime mobile-satellite services (see particularly Articles 53, 54, 55, 57 and 58). 51.71 § 28 In the case of communication between stations on board aircraft and stations of the maritime mobile service, radiotelephone calling may be renewed as specified in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1171 and radiotelegraph calling may be renewed after an interval of five minutes, notwithstanding the procedure contained in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1170. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION I – RR51
51.72
127
B – Provisions relating to the use of frequencies between 156 MHz and 174 MHz
51.73 § 29 1) Having regard to interference which may be caused by aircraft stations at high altitudes, frequencies in the maritime mobile bands above 30 MHz shall not be used by aircraft stations, with the exception of those frequencies between 156 MHz and 174 MHz specified in Appendix 18 which may be used provided that the following conditions are observed: 51.74
a) the altitude of aircraft stations shall not exceed 300 m (1 000 feet), except for reconnaissance aircraft participating in ice-breaking operations, where an altitude of 450 m (1 500 feet) is allowed;
51.75
b) the mean power of aircraft station transmitters shall not exceed 5 W; however, a power of 1 W or less shall be used to the maximum extent possible;
51.76
c) aircraft stations shall use the channels designated for this purpose in Appendix 18;
51.77
d) except as provided in No. 51.75, aircraft station transmitters shall comply with the technical characteristics given in Recommendation ITU-R M.489-2;
51.78
e) the communications of an aircraft station shall be brief and limited to operations in which stations of the maritime mobile service are primarily involved and where direct communication between the aircraft and the ship or coast station is required.
51.79 2) The frequency 156.3 MHz may be used by stations on board aircraft for safety purposes. It may also be used for communication between ship stations and stations on board aircraft engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07) 51.80 3) The frequency 156.8 MHz may be used by stations on board aircraft for safety purposes only (see Appendix 15). (WRC-07)
128
Maritime Manual
ARTICLE 52 Special rules relating to the use of frequencies
Section I – General provisions 52.1
A – Single-sideband radiotelegraph transmissions
52.2 §1 1) Where these provisions specify A1A emission, class A1B or J2A emissions shall be considered equivalent. 52.3 2) Where these provisions specify class F1B emission, class J2B and J2D emissions shall be considered equivalent. However, class J2D emission shall not be used with the HF distress and safety frequencies listed in Appendix 15. 52.4
B – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz
52.5 §2 Ship stations authorized to work in the bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall transmit on the frequencies indicated in this Article (see No. 52.39). 52.6 §3 1) In the maritime mobile service, no assignments shall be made on the frequency 518 kHz other than for transmission by coast stations of meteorological and navigational warnings and urgent information to ships by means of automatic narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy (International NAVTEX System). 52.7 2) In the maritime mobile service, the frequency 490 kHz is used exclusively for the transmission by coast stations of meteorological and navigational warnings and urgent information to ships by means of narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy. (WRC-03) 52.8
C – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
52.9 §4 1) In Region 1, frequencies assigned to stations operating in the bands between 1 850 kHz and 3 800 kHz (see Article 5) should, whenever possible, be in accordance with the following subdivision: –
1 850-1 950 kHz:
Coast stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
1 950-2045 kHz:
Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
2 194-2262.5 kHz:
Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
129
–
2 262.5-2 498 kHz:
Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
2 502-2578 kHz:
Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.
–
2 578-2850 kHz:
Coast stations, narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy and single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
3 155-3200 kHz:
Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy.
–
3 200-3340 kHz:
Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
3 340-3 400 kHz:
Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
3 500-3 600 kHz:
Intership, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
3 600-3 800 kHz:
Coast stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
52.10 2) In Region 1, frequencies assigned to stations operating in the bands listed below shall be in accordance with the following subdivision: –
1 606.5-1 625 kHz:
Coast stations, narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy, digital selective calling.
–
1 635-1 800 kHz:
Coast stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
2 045-2141.5 kHz:
Ship stations, single-sideband radiotelephony.
–
2 141.5-2 160 kHz:
Ship stations, narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy, digital selective calling.
52.11 § 5 In Regions 2 and 3, the carrier frequencies 2 635 kHz (assigned frequency 2 636.4 kHz) and 2 638 kHz (assigned frequency 2 639.4 kHz) are used as single-sideband intership radiotelephony working frequencies in addition to the frequencies prescribed for common use in certain services. The carrier frequencies 2 635 kHz and 2 638 kHz should be used with class J3E emissions only. In Region 3 these frequencies are protected by a guardband between 2 634 kHz and 2 642 kHz. 52.12
D – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
52.13 § 6 Bands exclusively allocated to the maritime mobile service between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz (see Article 5) are subdivided into categories and sub-bands as indicated in Appendix 17. 52.14
E – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz
52.15 § 7 The ship movement service should be operated only on frequencies allocated to the maritime mobile service in the band 156-174 MHz.
130
Maritime Manual
Section III – Use of frequencies for narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy
52.94
A – General
52.95 § 44 Frequencies assigned to coast stations for narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). This List shall also indicate any other useful information concerning the service performed by each coast station. (WRC-07)
52.96
B – Bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz
52.97 § 45 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 535 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B emissions as specified in No. 51.44. Additionally, ship stations complying with the provisions of Chapter VII shall be able to receive class F1B emissions on 518 kHz (see No. 51.45).
52.99
C – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
52.100 § 46 1) All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraph apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B or J2B emissions on at least two working frequencies. (WRC-03) 52.101 2) Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy is forbidden in the band 2 170-2 194 kHz, except as provided for in Appendix 15 and Resolution 354 (WRC-07). (WRC-07)
52.102
D – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
52.103 § 47 All ship stations equipped with narrow-band direct-printing telegraph apparatus to work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be able to send and receive class F1B emissions as specified in No. 51.49. The assignable frequencies are indicated in Appendix 17.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
131
52.104 § 48 Coast stations employing class F1B emissions and operating in the bands exclusively allocated to the maritime mobile service between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall at no time use mean powers in excess of the following: Band 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26
Maximum mean power
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
5 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW
52.105 1) In all bands, the working frequencies for ship stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK, including those paired with the working frequencies assignable to coast stations (see Appendix 17), are spaced 0.5 kHz apart. The frequencies assignable to ship stations which are paired with those used by coast stations are shown in Appendix 17. The frequencies assignable to ship stations which are not paired with those used by coast stations are shown in Appendix 17. 52.107 2) Each administration shall, if necessary, assign to each ship station under its jurisdiction and employing non-paired narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy one or more frequencies reserved for this purpose and shown in Appendix 17. 52.108
E – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz
52.109 § 49 All ship stations equipped with direct-printing telegraph apparatus may work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz and shall conform to the provisions of Appendix 18.
Section IV – Use of frequencies for digital selective-calling 52.110
A – General
52.111 § 50 The provisions described in this Section are applicable to calling and acknowledgement, when digital selective-calling techniques are used, except in cases of distress, urgency and safety, to which the provisions of Chapter VII apply.
132
Maritime Manual
52.112 § 51 The characteristics of the digital selective-calling equipment shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and should be in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.493. (WRC-07) 52.113 § 52 The frequencies on which coast stations provide services using digital selective-calling techniques shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV), which shall also supply any other useful information concerning such services. (WRC-07) 52.114
B – Bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz B1 – Mode of operation
52.115 § 53 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling and acknowledgement in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz shall be F1B. 52.116 2) When transmitting digital selective calls and acknowledgements in the bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz, coast stations should use the minimum power necessary to cover their service area. 52.117 § 54 Transmissions of digital selective calls and acknowledgements by ship stations shall be limited to a mean power of 400 W. B2 – Call and acknowledgement 52.118 § 55 For call and acknowledgement by digital selective-calling techniques, an appropriate channel shall be used. 52.119 § 56 The international digital selective-calling frequency 455.5 kHz may be assigned to any coast station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, it may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or in cases where it is not known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands the ship station is maintaining watch. 52.120 § 57 The international digital selective-calling frequency 458.5 kHz may be used by any ship station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, it shall only be used when calling cannot be made on national frequencies assigned to the coast station. 52.121 § 58 The frequency to be used for transmission of an acknowledgement shall normally be the frequency paired with the calling frequency used.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
133
B3 – Watch 52.122 § 59 1) A coast station providing international public correspondence service using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selectivecalling watch on appropriate national or international calling frequencies. The hours and frequencies shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.123 2) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-calling to work in the authorized bands between 415 kHz and 526.5 kHz should, when within the coverage area of coast stations providing services using digital selective-calling techniques in these bands, maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watch on one or more appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands, taking into account the digital selective-calling frequencies operated by the coast stations. 52.124
C – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
C1 – Mode of operation 52.125 § 60 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling and acknowledgement in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be F1B. (WRC-03) 52.126 2) Coast stations should, when transmitting digital selective calls and acknowledgements in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz, use the minimum power necessary to cover their service area. (WRC-03) 52.127 3) In Region 1, transmissions of digital selective calls and acknowledgements by ship stations shall be limited to a mean power of 400 W. C2 – Call and acknowledgement 52.128 § 61 1) When calling a coast station by digital selective-calling techniques, ship stations should use for the call, in order of preference: 52.129 a) a national digital selective-calling channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch; 52.130 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.131, the international digital selective-calling frequency 2 189.5 kHz. 52.131 2) The international digital selective-calling frequency 2 189.5 kHz may be assigned to any ship station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, it may be used as a general rule by ship stations to call coast stations of another nationality.
134
Maritime Manual
52.132 3) A ship station calling another ship station by digital selectivecalling techniques should use the frequency 2 177 kHz for the call. Acknowledgements of such calls should also be made on this frequency. 52.133 § 62 1) When calling ship stations by digital selective-calling techniques, coast stations should use for the call, in the order of preference: 52.134 a) a national digital selective-calling channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch; 52.135 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.136, the international digital selective-calling frequency 2 177 kHz. 52.136 2) The international digital selective-calling frequency 2 177 kHz may be assigned to any coast station. In order to reduce interference on this frequency, it may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or in cases where it is not known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz the ship station is maintaining watch. (WRC-03) 52.137 § 63 The frequency to be used for transmission of an acknowledgement shall normally be the frequency paired with the frequency used for the call received, as indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) (see also No. 52.113). (WRC-07) C3 – Watch 52.138 § 64 1) The provisions detailed in this Sub-section are applicable to watch-keeping by digital selective-calling, except for distress, urgency and safety purposes, to which the provisions of Section III of Article 31 apply. 52.139 2) A coast station providing international public correspondence service using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4000 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selectivecalling watch on appropriate national or international calling frequencies. The hours and frequencies shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.140 3) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-calling to work in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz should, when within the coverage area of coast stations providing services using digital selectivecalling techniques in these bands, maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watch on one or more appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands, taking into account the digital selective-calling frequencies operated by the coast stations. (WRC-03)
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
52.141
135
D – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz D1 – Mode of operation
52.142 § 65 1) The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling and acknowledgement in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be F1B. 52.143 2) When transmitting digital selective calls and acknowledgements in the bands between 4000 kHz and 27 500 kHz, coast stations shall at no time use a mean power in excess of the following values: Band 4 6 8 12 16 18/19 22 25/26
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
Maximum mean power 5 kW 5 kW 10 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW 15 kW
52.144 3) Transmissions of digital selective calls and acknowledgements by ship stations in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall be limited to a mean power of 1.5 kW. D2 – Call and acknowledgement 52.145 § 66 A station calling another station by digital selective-calling techniques within the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz should choose an appropriate digital selective-calling frequency, taking into account propagation characteristics. 52.146 § 67 1) When calling a coast station by digital selective-calling techniques on frequencies within the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz, ship stations should use for the call, in order of preference: 52.147 a) a national digital selective-calling channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch;
136
Maritime Manual
52.148 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.149, one of the international digital selective-calling frequencies. (WRC-07) 52.149 2) The international digital selective-calling frequencies shall be as indicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and may be used by any ship station. In order to reduce interference on these frequencies, they shall only be used when calling cannot be made on nationally assigned frequencies. (WRC-07) 52.150 § 68 1) When calling ship stations by digital selective-calling techniques on frequencies within the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz coast stations should use for the call, in order of preference: 52.151 a) a national digital selective-calling channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch; 52.152 b) subject to the provisions of No. 52.153, one of the international digital selective-calling frequencies. (WRC-07) 52.153 2) The international digital selective-calling frequencies shall be as indicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9 and may be assigned to any coast station. In order to reduce interference on these frequencies, they may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or in cases where it is not known on which digital selective-calling frequencies within the bands concerned the ship station is maintaining watch. (WRC-07) D3 – Watch 52.154 § 69 1) The provisions detailed in this Sub-section are applicable to watch-keeping by digital selective-calling, except for distress, urgency and safety purposes, to which the provisions of Section III of Article 31 apply. 52.155 2) A coast station providing international public correspondence service using digital selective-calling techniques within the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27500 kHz should, during its hours of service, maintain automatic digital selectivecalling watch on the appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies as indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.156 3) Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-calling to work in the authorized bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz should maintain automatic digital selective-calling watch on appropriate digital selective-calling frequencies within these bands, taking into account propagation characteristics and the calling frequencies for coast stations providing service using digital selective-calling techniques.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
52.157
137
E – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz E1 – Mode of operation
52.158 § 70 The class of emission to be used for digital selective-calling and acknowledgement in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz shall be G2B. E2 – Call and acknowledgement 52.159 § 71 1) The frequency 156.525 MHz is an international frequency in the maritime mobile service used for distress, urgency, safety and calling by digital selective-calling techniques (see Nos. 33.8 and 33.31 and Appendix 15). (WRC-07) 52.160 2) Calling by digital selective-calling techniques within the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, from ship to coast station, from coast station to ship and from ship to ship should, as a general rule, be made on the digital selective-calling frequency 156.525 MHz. E3 – Watch 52.161 § 72 Information concerning watch-keeping by automatic digital selectivecalling on the frequency 156.525 MHz by coast stations shall be given in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) (see also No. 31.13). (WRC-07) 52.162 § 73 Ship stations equipped with apparatus for digital selective-calling to work in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz should, while at sea, maintain an automatic digital selective-calling watch on the frequency 156.525 MHz (see also No. 31.17).
Section V – Use of frequencies for wide-band telegraphy, facsimile, special transmission systems and oceanographic data transmissions
52.163 A – Wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems 52.164
A1 – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
52.165 § 74 In Region 2, the frequencies in the band 2 068.5-2 078.5 kHz are assigned to ship stations using wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems. The provisions of No. 52.171 apply.
138
52.166
Maritime Manual
A2 – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
52.167 § 75 In all bands, the working frequencies for ship stations equipped to use wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems are spaced 4 kHz apart. The assignable frequencies are shown in Appendix 17. 52.168 § 76 1) Each administration shall assign to each ship station under its jurisdiction and employing wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems one or more series of the working frequencies reserved for this purpose shown in Appendix 17. The total number of series assigned to each ship station shall be determined by traffic requirements. 52.169 2) When ship stations employing wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems are assigned less than the total number of working frequencies in a band, the administration concerned shall assign working frequencies to such ships in accordance with an orderly system of rotation that will ensure approximately the same number of assignments on any one working frequency. 52.170 3) However, within the limits of the bands given in Appendix 17, administrations may, to meet the needs of specific systems, assign frequencies in a different manner from that shown in Appendix 17. Nevertheless administrations shall take into account, as far as possible, the provisions of Appendix 17, concerning channelling and the 4 kHz spacing. 52.171 § 77 Ship stations equipped for wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems may, in the frequency bands reserved for such use, employ any class of emission provided that such emissions can be contained within the wideband channels indicated in Appendix 17. However, the use of A1A Morse telegraphy and telephony is excluded except for circuit alignment purposes. 52.172 § 78 Coast radiotelegraph stations employing multichannel telegraph emissions and operating in the bands allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall at no time use a mean power in excess of 2.5 kW per 500 Hz bandwidth. 52.173
B – Oceanographic data transmission systems
52.174 § 79 In all bands, the assignable frequencies for oceanographic data transmissions are spaced 0.3 kHz apart. The assignable frequencies are shown in Appendix 17. 52.175 § 80 The frequency bands for oceanographic data transmission systems (see Appendix 17) may also be used by buoy stations for oceanographic data transmission and by stations interrogating these buoys.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
139
Section VI – Use of frequencies for radiotelephony 52.176
A – General
52.177 § 81 Except with regard to the provisions of Article 11 concerning notification and recording of frequencies, when designating frequencies for singlesideband radiotelephony the carrier frequency is always to be designated. The assigned frequency shall be 1 400 Hz higher than the carrier frequency. 52.178 § 82 Coast stations shall not occupy idle radiotelephone channels by emitting identification signals, such as those generated by call slips or tapes. Exceptionally, a coast station, when requested by a ship station for the purpose of establishing a radiotelephone call, may emit a receiver tuning signal of not more than 10 s duration. 52.179 § 83 However, coast stations in automatic service in the UHF band may emit marking signals. The emission power of the signals shall however be limited to the minimum value necessary for effective operation of the signalling. Such emissions shall not cause harmful interference to the maritime mobile service in other countries. 52.180 § 84 The frequencies of transmission (and reception when these frequencies are in pairs as in the case of duplex radiotelephony) assigned to each coast station shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). This List shall also indicate any other useful information concerning the service performed by each coast station. (WRC-07) 52.181 § 85 Single-sideband apparatus in radiotelephone stations of the maritime mobile service operating in the bands allocated to this service between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz and in the bands allocated exclusively to this service between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall satisfy the technical and operational conditions specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173. (WRC-03) 52.182
B – Bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz
(WRC-03)
B1 – Mode of operation of stations 52.183 § 86 1) Unless otherwise specified in the Radio Regulations (see Nos. 51.53, 52.188, 52.189 and 52.199), the class of emission to be used in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall be J3E. (WRC-07) 52.184 2) The peak envelope power of coast radiotelephone stations operating in the authorized bands allocated between 1 606.5 kHz and 4 000 kHz shall not exceed: (WRC-03) 52.185 –
5 kW for coast stations located north of latitude 32° N;
140
52.186 –
Maritime Manual
10 kW for coast stations located south of latitude 32° N.
52.187 3) The normal mode of operation for each coast station shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.188 4) Transmissions in the bands 2 170-2 173.5 kHz and 2 190.52 194 kHz with the carrier frequency 2 170.5 kHz and the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz, respectively, are limited to class J3E emissions and are limited to a peak envelope power of 400 W. (WRC-07) B2 – Call and reply 52.189 § 87 1) The frequency 2 182 kHz1 is an international distress frequency for radiotelephony (see Appendix 15 and Resolution 354 (WRC-07)). (WRC-07) 52.190
2) The frequency 2 182 kHz may also be used:
52.191 a)
for call and reply in accordance with the provisions of Article 57;
52.192 b) by coast stations to announce the transmission, on another frequency, of traffic lists as specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1171. (WRC-03) 52.193 3) In addition, an administration may assign to its stations other frequencies for call and reply. 52.194 § 88 To facilitate use of the frequency 2 182 kHz for distress purposes, all transmissions on 2 182 kHz shall be kept to a minimum. 52.195 § 89 1) Before transmitting on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, a station shall, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on this frequency for a reasonable period to make sure that no distress traffic is being sent. (WRC-03) 52.196
2) The provisions of No. 52.195 do not apply to stations in distress. B3 – Traffic
52.197 § 90 1) Coast stations which use 2 182 kHz for calling shall be able to use at least one other frequency in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz. (WRC-03) _______________ 1
52.189.1 Where administrations provide at their coast stations a watch on 2 182 kHz for receiving class J3E emissions as well as class A3E and H3E emissions, ship stations may call those coast stations for safety purposes using class H3E or J3E emissions.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
141
52.198 2) Coast stations authorized to use radiotelephony on one or more frequencies other than 2 182 kHz in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall use class J3E emissions on those frequencies (see also No. 52.188). (WRC-03) 52.199 3) Coast stations open to the public correspondence service on one or more frequencies between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall also be capable of transmitting class H3E and J3E emissions with a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz, and of receiving class A3E, H3E and J3E emissions with a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz. (WRC-03) 52.200 4) One of the frequencies which coast stations are required to be able to use (see No. 52.197) is printed in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) to indicate that it is the normal working frequency of the stations. Supplementary frequencies, if assigned, are shown in ordinary type. (WRC-07) 52.201 5) Working frequencies of coast stations shall be chosen in such a manner as to avoid interference with other stations. B4 – Additional provisions applying to Region 1 52.202 § 91 The peak envelope power of ship radiotelephone stations operating in the authorized bands between 1 606.5 kHz and 2 850 kHz shall not exceed 400 W. (WRC-03) 52.203 § 92 to use:
1) All stations on ships making international voyages should be able
52.204 a) the following ship-to-shore working frequency, if required by their service: 52.205
–
52.206 b)
the following intership frequency, if required by their service:
52.207
–
52.208
carrier frequency 2 045 kHz (assigned frequency 2 046.4 kHz) for class J3E emissions;
carrier frequency 2 048 kHz (assigned frequency 2 049.4 kHz) for class J3E emissions;
This frequency may be used as an additional ship-to-shore frequency.
52.210 § 93 1) Ships frequently exchanging correspondence with a coast station of a nationality other than their own may use the same frequencies as ships of the nationality of the coast station: 52.211 –
where mutually agreed by the administrations concerned; or
142
Maritime Manual
52.212 –
where the facility is open to ships of all nationalities by virtue of a note against each of the frequencies concerned in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)
52.213 2) In exceptional circumstances, if frequency usage according to Nos. 52.203 to 52.208 or No. 52.210 is not possible, a ship station may use one of its own assigned national ship-to-shore frequencies for communication with a coast station of another nationality, under the express condition that the coast station as well as the ship station shall take precautions, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, to ensure that the use of such a frequency will not cause harmful interference to the service for which the frequency in question is authorized. (WRC-03) 52.214 § 94
The following ship-to-shore frequencies:
–
carrier frequency 2 051 kHz (assigned frequency 2 052.4 kHz),
–
carrier frequency 2 054 kHz (assigned frequency 2 055.4 kHz), and
–
carrier frequency 2 057 kHz (assigned frequency 2 058.4 kHz),
may be assigned to coast stations as receiving frequencies. B5 – Additional provisions applying to Regions 2 and 3 52.215 § 95 All stations on ships making international voyages should, if required by their service, be able to use the intership carrier frequencies: 2 635 kHz (assigned frequency 2 636.4 kHz) 2 638 kHz (assigned frequency 2 639.4 kHz). The conditions of use of these frequencies are specified in No. 52.11. 52.216
C – Bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz C1 – Mode of operation of stations
52.217 § 96 1) The class of emission to be used for analogue radiotelephony in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 26 175 kHz shall be J3E; for digital telecommunications in those bands, the class of emission shall be J2D. (WRC-03) 52.218 2) The normal mode of operation of each coast station is indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.219 3) Coast stations employing class J3E or J2D emissions in accordance with No. 52.217 in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall use the minimum power necessary to cover their service area and shall at no time use a peak envelope power in excess of 10 kW per channel.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
143
52.220 4) Ship stations employing class J3E or J2D emissions in accordance with No. 52.217 in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall at no time use a peak envelope power in excess of 1.5 kW per channel. C2 – Call and reply 52.220A 5) Administrations should encourage the coast stations and ship stations under their jurisdiction to use digital selective calling techniques for call and reply. (WRC-2000) 52.220B § 96 A When calling by radiotelephony is necessary, it should be done (in order of preference): (WRC-2000) 52.220C or (WRC-2000)
1) on the working frequencies assigned to the coast stations;
52.220D 2) when this is not possible, on the calling frequencies listed under No. 52.221 or 52.221A below. (WRC-2000) 52.221 § 97 1) Ship stations may use the following carrier frequencies for calling in radiotelephony: 4 125 6 215 8 255 12 290 16 420 18 795 22 060 25 097
kHz2, 3, 4 kHz3, 4 kHz kHz4 (see also No. 52.221A) kHz4 (see also No. 52.221A) kHz kHz kHz
(WRC-2000)
_______________ 2
52.221.1 In the United States, the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz is also authorized for common use by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis, provided the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW (see also No. 52.222.2).
3
52.221.2 The carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz and 6 215 kHz are also authorized for common use by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis for call and reply purposes, provided that the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW. The use of these frequencies for working purposes is not permitted (see also No. 52.221.1). (WRC-07)
4
52.221.3 The carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz, 8 291 kHz, 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz are also authorized for common use by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis for distress and safety traffic.
144
Maritime Manual
52.221A 2) Calling on the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz shall be permitted only to and from rescue coordination centres (see No. 30.6.1), subject to the safeguards of Resolution 352 (WRC-03). The alternative carrier frequencies 12 359 kHz and 16 537 kHz may be used by ship stations and coast stations for calling on a simplex basis, provided that the peak envelope power does not exceed 1 kW. (WRC-03) 52.222 3) Coast stations may use the following carrier frequencies for calling in radiotelephony: 4 417 kHz5 6 516 kHz5 8 779 kHz 13 137 kHz (see No. 52.222A) 17 302 kHz (see No. 52.222A) 19 770 kHz 22 756 kHz 26 172 kHz
(WRC-2000)
52.222A 4) The carrier frequencies 13 137 kHz and 17 302 kHz shall not be used as calling frequencies after 31 December 2003. The alternative carrier frequencies 12 359 kHz and 16 537 kHz may be used by ship stations and coast stations for calling on a simplex basis, provided that the peak envelope power does not exceed 1 kW. (WRC-2000) 52.223 § 98 The hours of service of coast stations open to public correspondence and the frequency or frequencies on which watch is maintained shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.224 § 99 1) Before transmitting on the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz, 8 291 kHz, 12 290 kHz or 16 420 kHz a station shall, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on the frequency for a reasonable period to make sure that no distress traffic is being sent (see No. 52.221A). (WRC-03) 52.225
2) The provisions of No. 52.224 do not apply to stations in distress.
_______________ 5
52.222.2 The carrier frequencies 4 417 kHz and 6 516 kHz are also authorized for common use by coast and ship stations for single-sideband radiotelephony on a simplex basis, provided that the peak envelope power of such stations does not exceed 1 kW. The use of 6 516 kHz for this purpose should be limited to daytime operation (see also No. 52.221.1).
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
145
C3 – Traffic 52.226 § 100 1) For the conduct of duplex telephony, the transmitting frequencies of the coast stations and of the corresponding ship stations shall be associated in pairs, as indicated in Appendix 17, except temporarily in cases where working conditions prohibit the use of paired frequencies in order to meet operational needs. 52.227 2) The frequencies to be used for the conduct of simplex radiotelephony are shown in Appendix 17, Section B. In these cases, the peak envelope power of the coast station transmitter shall not exceed 1 kW. 52.228 3) The frequencies indicated in Appendix 17 for ship station transmissions may be used by ships of any category according to traffic requirements. 52.229 4) Transmitters used for radiotelephony in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz shall comply with technical characteristics specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173. (WRC-03) 52.230
D – Bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz D1 – Call and reply
52.231 § 101 1) The frequency 156.8 MHz is the international frequency for distress traffic and for calling by radiotelephony when using frequencies in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz. The class of emission to be used for radiotelephony on the frequency 156.8 MHz shall be G3E (as specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.489-2). (WRC-07) 52.232
2) The frequency 156.8 MHz may also be used:
52.233 a) by coast and ship stations for call and reply in accordance with the provisions of Articles 54 and 57; 52.234 b) by coast stations to announce the transmission on another frequency of traffic lists, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, and important maritime information. (WRC-03) 52.236 3) Any one of the channels designated in Appendix 18 for public correspondence may be used as a calling channel if an administration so desires. Such use shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07)
146
Maritime Manual
52.237 5) Ship and coast stations in the public correspondence service may use a working frequency, for calling purposes, as provided in Articles 54 and 57. 52.238 6) All emissions in the band 156.7625-156.8375 MHz capable of causing harmful interference to the authorized transmissions of stations of the maritime mobile service on 156.8 MHz are forbidden. 52.239 7) To facilitate the reception of distress calls and distress traffic, all transmissions on 156.8 MHz shall be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed one minute. 52.240 8) Before transmitting on the frequency 156.8 MHz, a station shall, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171, listen on this frequency for a reasonable period to make sure that no distress traffic is being sent. (WRC-03) 52.241
9) The provisions of No. 52.240 do not apply to stations in distress.
52.241A 10) The frequency 156.525 MHz is the international distress, safety and calling frequency for the maritime mobile VHF radiotelephone service using digital selective calling (DSC) when using frequencies in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz. (WRC-07) 52.241B 11) All emissions in the band 156.4875-156.5625 MHz capable of causing harmful interference to the authorized transmissions of stations of the maritime mobile service on 156.525 MHz are forbidden. (WRC-07) 52.241C 12) To facilitate the reception of distress calls and distress traffic, all transmissions on 156.525 MHz shall be kept to a minimum. (WRC-07) D2 – Watch 52.242 § 102 1) A coast station open to the international public correspondence service should, during its hours of service, maintain watch on its receiving frequency or frequencies indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations. (WRC-07) 52.243 2) The method of watch on a working frequency shall be no less efficient than watch by an operator. 52.244 3) Ship stations should, where practicable, maintain watch on 156.8 MHz when within the service area of a coast station providing international maritime mobile radiotelephone service in the band 156-174 MHz. Ship stations fitted only with VHF radiotelephone equipment operating in the authorized bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz should maintain watch on 156.8 MHz when at sea.
Part B – SECTION I – RR52
147
52.245 4) Ship stations, when in communication with a port station, may, on an exceptional basis and subject to the agreement of the administration concerned, continue to maintain watch on the appropriate port operations frequency only, provided that watch on 156.8 MHz is being maintained by the port station. 52.246 5) Ship stations, when in communication with a coast station in the ship movement service and subject to the agreement of the administration concerned, may continue to maintain watch on the appropriate ship movement service frequency only, provided that watch on 156.8 MHz is being maintained by that coast station. 52.247 § 103 A coast station in the port operations service in an area where 156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency or safety shall, during its working hours, keep an additional watch on 156.6 MHz or another port operations frequency indicated in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) 52.248 § 104 A coast station in the ship movement service in an area where 156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency and safety shall, during its working hours, keep an additional watch on the ship movement frequencies indicated in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV). (WRC-07) D3 – Traffic 52.249 § 105 1) Where practicable, coast stations open to the international public correspondence service shall be capable of working with ship stations equipped for duplex or semi-duplex operation. 52.250 2) The method of working (single-frequency or two-frequency) specified in Appendix 18 for each channel should be used in the international services. 52.251 § 106 Communications in the port operations service shall be restricted to those relating to operational handling, the movement and the safety of ships and, in emergency, to the safety of persons. Messages of a public correspondence nature shall be excluded from this service. 52.252 § 107 Communications in the ship movement service shall be restricted to those relating to the movement of ships. Messages of a public correspondence nature shall be excluded from this service. 52.253 § 108 1) Coast stations which use 156.8 MHz for calling shall be able to use at least one other authorized channel in the international maritime mobile radiotelephone service in the band 156-174 MHz.
148
Maritime Manual
52.254 2) In the band 156-174 MHz administrations shall, where practicable, assign frequencies to coast and ship stations in accordance with the Table of transmitting frequencies given in Appendix 18 for such international services as administrations consider necessary. 52.256 3) In assigning frequencies to their coast stations, administrations should collaborate in cases where harmful interference might occur. 52.257 4) Channels are designated by numbers in the Table of transmitting frequencies given in Appendix 18. 52.258 § 109 1) In assigning frequencies to stations of authorized services, other than maritime mobile, administrations shall avoid the possibility of interference to international maritime services in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz. 52.259 2) The use of channels for maritime mobile purposes other than those indicated in the Table of transmitting frequencies given in Appendix 18 shall not cause harmful interference to services which operate in accordance with that table and shall not prejudice the future development of such services. 52.260 § 110
The carrier power of ship station transmitters shall not exceed 25 W.
Part B – SECTION I – RR53, RR54
149
ARTICLE 53 Order of priority of communications 53.1 §1 All stations in the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobilesatellite service shall be capable of offering four levels of priority in the following order: 1) Distress calls, distress messages, and distress traffic. 2) Urgency communications. 3) Safety communications. 4) Other communications. 53.2 §2 In a fully automated system, where it is impracticable to offer all four levels of priority, category 1 shall receive priority until such time as intergovernmental agreements1 remove exemptions granted for such systems from offering the complete order of priority.
ARTICLE 54 Selective calling 54.1 §1 1) Selective calling is designed for automatic station calling and distress alerting or the transmission of information for the organization of traffic. 54.2 2) Selective calling is carried out using a digital selective calling system which shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.541-9, and may be in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.493. (WRC-07)
_______________ 1
53.2.1 Requirements and performance standards for radio systems and equipment for maritime distress and safety radiocommunications are developed and adopted by the International Maritime Organization (IMO).
150
Maritime Manual – SECTION I – RR56
ARTICLE 56 Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy 56.1 §1 Stations using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy shall comply with the provisions of Articles 51 and 52. 56.2 §2 The procedures specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.492-6 shall be employed except in cases of distress, urgency, or safety, in which case alternate or non-standard procedures may be used. (WRC-07) 56.3 §3 Before transmitting, a station shall take precautions to ensure that its emissions will not interfere with transmissions already in progress; if such interference is likely, the station shall await an appropriate break in the communications in progress. This obligation does not apply to stations where unattended operation is possible through automatic means (see No. 47.3). 56.4 §4 1) For communication between two stations the ARQ mode should be used when available. 56.5 2) For transmissions from one coast or ship station to two or more other stations the forward-error-correcting mode should be used when available. 56.6 §5 The services provided by each station open to public correspondence shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) and in the List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service Identity Assignments (List V), together with information on charging. (WRC-07) 56.7 §6 Where transmission over the telecommunication channels open to public correspondence (excluding the telecommunication channels of the mobile service and of the mobile-satellite service and its feeder links) is involved, the provisions of the International Telecommunication Regulations and the relevant ITU-T Recommendations should be taken into account.
Part B – SECTION I – RR57
151
ARTICLE 57 Radiotelephony 57.1 §1 The procedure detailed in Recommendation ITU-R M.1171 shall be applicable to radiotelephone stations, except in cases of distress, urgency or safety. (WRC-07) 57.2 §2 The radiotelephone public correspondence service provided on ships should, if possible, be operated on a duplex basis. 57.3 §3 1) Devices providing for the emission of a signal to indicate that a call is in progress on a channel may be used in this service on a non-interference basis to the service provided by coast stations. 57.4 2) The use of devices for continuous or repetitive calling or identification in a manually operated radiotelephony service is not permitted. 57.5 3) A station may not transmit identical information simultaneously on two or more frequencies when communicating with only one other station. 57.6 4) A station shall not emit any carrier wave between calls. However, stations in an automatically operated radiotelephone system may emit marking signals under the conditions provided for in No. 52.179. 57.7 5) When it is necessary to spell out certain expressions, difficult words, service abbreviations, figures, etc., the phonetic spelling tables in Appendix 14 shall be used. 57.8 §4 Calling, and signals preparatory to traffic, shall not exceed one minute when made on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz or on 156.8 MHz, except in cases of distress, urgency or safety. (WRC-07) 57.9 §5 When it is necessary for a ship station to send signals for testing or adjustments which are liable to interfere with the working of neighbouring coast stations, the consent of these stations shall be obtained before such signals are sent. 57.10 § 6 When it is necessary for a station to make test signals, either for the adjustment of a transmitter before making a call or for the adjustment of a receiver, such signals shall be kept to a minimum but in any event, shall not exceed ten seconds, and shall include the call sign or other identification of the station emitting the test signals. This call sign or other identification shall be spoken slowly and distinctly.
152
Maritime Manual – SECTION I – RR58
ARTICLE 58 Charging and accounting for maritime radiocommunications 58.1 The provisions of the International Telecommunications Regulations, taking into account ITU-T Recommendations, shall apply.
_______________
SECTION II Appendices (Extracts)
Part B – SECTION II – AP1
155
APPENDIX 1 (Rev.WRC-07) Classification of emissions and necessary bandwidths (See Article 2) §1 1) Emissions shall be designated according to their necessary bandwidth and their classification as explained in this Appendix. 2) Formulae and examples of emissions designated in accordance with this Appendix are given in Recommendation ITU-R SM.1138-1. Further examples may be provided in other ITU-R Recommendations. These examples may also be published in the Preface to the International Frequency List. (WRC-07)
Section I – Necessary bandwidth §2 1) The necessary bandwidth, as defined in No. 1.152 and determined in accordance with the formulae and examples, shall be expressed by three numerals and one letter. The letter occupies the position of the decimal point and represents the unit of bandwidth. The first character shall be neither zero nor K, M or G. 2) Necessary bandwidths1: between 0.001 and 999 Hz shall be expressed in Hz (letter H); between 1.00 and 999 kHz shall be expressed in kHz (letter K); between 1.00 and 999 MHz shall be expressed in MHz (letter M); between 1.00 and 999 GHz shall be expressed in GHz (letter G). _______________ 1 Examples:
0.002 0.1 25.3 400 2.4
Hz = Hz = Hz = Hz = kHz =
H002 H100 25H3 400H 2K40
6 12.5 180.4 180.5 180.7
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
= = = = =
6K00 12K5 180K 181K 181K
1.25 2 10 202 5.65
MHz MHz MHz MHz GHz
= = = = =
1M25 2M00 10M0 202M 5G65
156
Maritime Manual
3) For the full designation of an emission, the necessary bandwidth, indicated in four characters, shall be added just before the classification symbols. When used, the necessary bandwidth shall be determined by one of the following methods: 3.1)
use of the formulae and examples of necessary bandwidths and designation of corresponding emissions given in Recommendation ITU-R SM.1138-1; (WRC-07)
3.2)
computation, in accordance with other ITU-R Recommendations;
3.3)
measurement, in cases not covered by § 3.1) or 3.2) above.
Section II – Classification §3
The class of emission is a set of characteristics conforming to § 4 below.
§4 Emissions shall be classified and symbolized according to their basic characteristics as given in Sub-Section IIA and any optional additional characteristics as provided for in Sub-Section IIB. §5
The basic characteristics (see Sub-Section IIA) are:
1)
first symbol type of modulation of the main carrier;
2)
second symbol nature of signal(s) modulating the main carrier;
3)
third symbol
type of information to be transmitted.
Modulation used only for short periods and for incidental purposes (such as, in many cases, for identification or calling) may be ignored provided that the necessary bandwidth as indicated is not thereby increased.
Sub-Section IIA – Basic characteristics §6
1) First symbol
Type of modulation of the main carrier
1.1)
Emission of an unmodulated carrier
1.2)
Emission in which the main carrier is amplitude-modulated (including cases where sub-carriers are angle-modulated)
N
1.2.1)
Double-sideband
A
1.2.2)
Single-sideband, full carrier
H
1.2.3)
Single-sideband, reduced or variable level carrier
R
1.2.4)
Single-sideband, suppressed carrier
J
Part B – SECTION II – AP1
1.3)
1.4) 1.5)
1.2.5)
Independent sidebands
B
1.2.6)
Vestigial sideband
C
Emission in which the main carrier is angle-modulated 1.3.1)
Frequency modulation
F
1.3.2)
Phase modulation
G
Emission in which the main carrier is amplitude- and angle-modulated either simultaneously or in a pre-established sequence Emission of
1.7)
D
pulses2
1.5.1)
Sequence of unmodulated pulses
1.5.2)
A sequence of pulses
P
1.5.2.1)
modulated in amplitude
K
1.5.2.2)
modulated in width/duration
L
1.5.2.3)
modulated in position/phase
M
1.5.2.4)
in which the carrier is angle-modulated during the angle-period of the pulse
Q
which is a combination of the foregoing or is produced by other means
V
Cases not covered above, in which an emission consists of the main carrier modulated, either simultaneously or in a pre-established sequence, in a combination of two or more of the following modes: amplitude, angle, pulse
W
1.5.2.5) 1.6)
157
Cases not otherwise covered 2) Second symbol Nature of signal(s) modulating the main carrier
2.1)
No modulating signal
0
2.2)
A single channel containing quantized or digital information without the use of a modulating sub-carrier3
1
A single channel containing quantized or digital information with the use of a modulating sub-carrier3
2
A single channel containing analogue information
3
2.3) 2.4)
_______________ 2
Emissions where the main carrier is directly modulated by a signal which has been coded into quantized form (e.g. pulse code modulation) should be designated under § 1.2) or 1.3). 3 This excludes time-division multiplex.
158
Maritime Manual
2.5)
Two or more channels containing quantized or digital information
7
2.6)
Two or more channels containing analogue information
8
2.7)
Composite system with one or more channels containing quantized or digital information, together with one or more channels containing analogue information
9
Cases not otherwise covered
X
2.8)
3) Third symbol
Type of information to be transmitted4
3.1)
No information transmitted
N
3.2)
Telegraphy for aural reception
A
3.3)
Telegraphy for automatic reception
B
3.4)
Facsimile
C
3.5)
Data transmission, telemetry, telecommand
D
3.6)
Telephony (including sound broadcasting)
E
3.7)
Television (video)
F
3.8)
Combination of the above
W
3.9)
Cases not otherwise covered
X
Sub-Section IIB – Optional characteristics for the classification of emissions §7 Two optional characteristics should be added for a more complete description of an emission. These are: Fourth symbol Fifth symbol
Details of signal(s) Nature of multiplexing
Where the fourth or fifth symbol is used it shall be as indicated below. Where the fourth or the fifth symbol is not used this should be indicated by a dash where each symbol would otherwise appear. 1) Fourth symbol Details of signal(s) 1.1)
Two-condition code with elements of differing numbers and/or durations
A
_______________ 4
In this context the word information does not include information of a constant, unvarying nature such as is provided by standard frequency emissions, continuous wave and pulse radars, etc.
Part B – SECTION II – AP1
1.2)
159
Two-condition code with elements of the same number and duration without error-correction
B
Two-condition code with elements of the same number and duration with error-correction
C
Four-condition code in which each condition represents a signal element (or one or more bits)
D
Multi-condition code in which each condition represents a signal element (of one or more bits)
E
Multi-condition code in which each condition or combination of conditions represents a character
F
1.7)
Sound of broadcasting quality (monophonic)
G
1.8)
Sound of broadcasting quality (stereophonic or quadraphonic)
H
1.9)
Sound of commercial quality (excluding categories given in § 1.10) and 1.11))
J
1.10) Sound of commercial quality with the use of frequency inversion or band-splitting
K
1.11) Sound of commercial quality with separate frequency-modulated signals to control the level of demodulated signal
L
1.12) Monochrome
M
1.13) Colour
N
1.14) Combination of the above
W
1.15) Cases not otherwise covered
X
1.3) 1.4) 1.5) 1.6)
2) Fifth symbol Nature of multiplexing 2.1)
None
N
2.2)
Code-division multiplex5
C
2.3)
Frequency-division multiplex
F
2.4)
Time-division multiplex
T
2.5)
Combination of frequency-division multiplex and time-division multiplex
W
Other types of multiplexing
X
2.6)
_______________ 5 This includes bandwidth expansion techniques.
160
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 2 (Rev.WRC-03) Table of transmitter frequency tolerances (See Article 3) 1 Frequency tolerance is defined in Article 1 and is expressed in parts in 106, unless otherwise indicated. 2 The power shown for the various categories of stations is the peak envelope power for single-sideband transmitters and the mean power for all other transmitters, unless otherwise indicated. The term power of a radio transmitter is defined in Article 1. 3 For technical and operational reasons, certain categories of stations may need more stringent tolerances than those shown in the table.
Frequency bands (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive) and categories of stations Band: 9 kHz to 535 kHz 1 Fixed stations: 9 kHz to 50 kHz 50 kHz to 535 kHz 2 Land stations: a) Coast stations b) Aeronautical stations 3 Mobile stations: a) Ship stations b) Ship s emergency transmitters c) Survival craft stations d) Aircraft stations 4 Radiodetermination stations 5 Broadcasting stations
Tolerances applicable to transmitters
100 50 100 100
1, 2
200 500 500 100 100
3, 4 5
10 Hz
Band: 535 kHz to 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz in Region 2) Broadcasting stations
10 Hz
(WRC-03)
Part B – SECTION II – AP2
Frequency bands (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive) and categories of stations
161
Tolerances applicable to transmitters
Band: 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz in Region 2) to 4 000 kHz 1 Fixed stations: power 200 W or less power above 200 W
100 50
7, 8 7, 8
2 Land stations: power 200 W or less power above 200 W
100 50
1, 2, 7, 9, 10 1, 2, 7, 9, 10
3 Mobile stations: a) Ship stations b) Survival craft stations c) Emergency position-indicating radiobeacons d) Aircraft stations e) Land mobile stations
40 Hz 100 100 100 10 50 13
4 Radiodetermination stations: power 200 W or less power above 200 W
20 10
5 Broadcasting stations
10 Hz
Band: 4 MHz to 29.7 MHz 1 Fixed stations: a) Single-sideband and independent-sideband emissions: power 500 W or less power above 500 W b) Class F1B emissions c) Other classes of emission: power 500 W or less power above 500 W
50 Hz 20 Hz
2 Land stations: a) Coast stations b) Aeronautical stations: power 500 W or less power above 500 W c) Base stations 3 Mobile stations: a) Ship stations: 1) Class A1A emissions 2) Emissions other than Class A1A b) Survival craft stations c) Aircraft stations d) Land mobile stations
3, 4, 12
14 14 15
10 Hz 20 10 20 Hz 100 50 20
10 10 7
10 50 Hz 50 100 40
1, 2, 16
3, 4, 19
10 20
4 Broadcasting stations
10 Hz
5 Space stations
20
6 Earth stations
20
15, 21
162
Maritime Manual
Frequency bands (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive) and categories of stations
Tolerances applicable to transmitters
Band: 29.7 MHz to 100 MHz 1 Fixed stations: power 50 W or less power above 50 W
30 20
2 Land stations
20
3 Mobile stations
20
4 Radiodetermination stations
50
5 Broadcasting stations (other than television) 6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision)
2 000 Hz 500 Hz
7 Space stations
20
8 Earth stations
20
Band: 100 MHz to 470 MHz 1 Fixed stations: power 50 W or less power above 50 W 2 Land stations:
20 10
a) Coast stations b) Aeronautical stations c) Base stations: in the band 100-235 MHz in the band 235-401 MHz in the band 401-470 MHz 3 Mobile stations: a) Ship stations and survival craft stations: in the band 156-174 MHz outside the band 156-174 MHz b) Aircraft stations c) Land mobile stations: in the band 100-235 MHz in the band 235-401 MHz in the band 401-470 MHz 4 Radiodetermination stations 5 Broadcasting stations (other than television) 6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision)
22
10 20
23 24, 25
26
28
15 7 5
29 29 29
10 50
31
30
28
15 7 5
29 29, 32 29, 32
50
33
2 000 Hz 500 Hz
7 Space stations
20
8 Earth stations
20
23 24, 25
Part B – SECTION II – AP2
Frequency bands (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive) and categories of stations
163
Tolerances applicable to transmitters
Band: 470 MHz to 2 450 MHz 1 Fixed stations: power 100 W or less power above 100 W
100 50
2 Land stations
20
36
3 Mobile stations
20
36
4 Radiodetermination stations
500
33
5 Broadcasting stations (other than television)
100
6 Broadcasting stations (television sound and vision) in the band 470 MHz to 960 MHz
500 Hz
7 Space stations
20
8 Earth stations
20
Band: 2 450 MHz to 10 500 MHz 1 Fixed stations: power 100 W or less power above 100 W 2 Land stations 3 Mobile stations 4 Radiodetermination stations 5 Space stations 6 Earth stations
200 50 100 100 1 250 50 50
33
Band: 10.5 GHz to 40 GHz 1 2 3 4
Fixed station Radiodetermination stations Broadcasting stations Space stations
5 Earth stations
300 5 000 100 100 100
33
24, 25
164
Maritime Manual
Notes in the table of transmitter frequency tolerances 1
For coast station transmitters used for direct-printing telegraphy or for data transmission, the tolerance is: 5 Hz for narrow-band phase-shift keying; 15 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters in use or installed before 2 January 1992; 10 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters installed after 1 January 1992.
2
For coast station transmitters used for digital selective calling, the tolerance is 10 Hz. (WRC-03)
3
For ship station transmitters used for direct-printing telegraphy or for data transmission, the tolerance is: 5 Hz for narrow-band phase-shift keying; 40 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters in use or installed before 2 January 1992; 10 Hz for frequency-shift keying for transmitters installed after 1 January 1992.
4
For ship station transmitters used for digital selective calling, the tolerance is 10 Hz. (WRC-03)
5
If the emergency transmitter is used as the reserve transmitter for the main transmitter, the tolerance for ship station transmitters applies.
7
For single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters except at coast stations, the tolerance is: 50 Hz in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz, for peak envelope powers of 200 W or less and 500 W or less, respectively; 20 Hz in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz, for peak envelope powers above 200 W and 500 W, respectively.
8
For radiotelegraphy transmitters with frequency-shift keying the tolerance is 10 Hz.
9
For coast station single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters the tolerance is 20 Hz.
10
For single-sideband transmitters operating in the frequency bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)4 000 kHz and 4-29.7 MHz which are allocated exclusively to the aeronautical mobile (R) service, the tolerance on the carrier (reference) frequency is: a) for all aeronautical stations, 10 Hz; b) for all aircraft stations operating on international services, 20 Hz; c) for aircraft stations operating exclusively on national services, 50 Hz*.
12
For A1A emissions the tolerance is 50 × 10 6.
13
For transmitters used for single-sideband radiotelephony or for frequency-shift keying radiotelegraphy the tolerance is 40 Hz.
14
For radiobeacon transmitters in the band 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-1 800 kHz the tolerance is 50 × 10 6.
_______________ *
NOTE In order to achieve maximum intelligibility, it is suggested that administrations encourage the reduction of this tolerance to 20 Hz.
Part B – SECTION II – AP2
165
15
For A3E emissions with carrier power of 10 kW or less the tolerance is 20 × 10 6, 15 × 10 6 and 10 × 10 6 in the bands 1 606.5 (1 605 Region 2)-4 000 kHz, 4-5.95 MHz and 5.9529.7 MHz respectively.
16
For A1A emissions the tolerance is 10 × 10 6.
19
For ship station transmitters in the band 26 175-27 500 kHz, on board small craft, with a carrier power not exceeding 5 W in or near coastal waters and utilizing F3E and G3E emissions, the frequency tolerance is 40 × 10 6. (WRC-03)
20
The tolerance is 50 Hz for single-sideband radiotelephone transmitters, except for those transmitters operating in the band 26 175-27 500 kHz, and not exceeding a peak envelope power of 15 W, for which the basic tolerance of 40 × 10 6 applies.
21
It is suggested that administrations avoid carrier frequency differences of a few hertz, which cause degradations similar to periodic fading. This could be avoided if the frequency tolerance were 0.1 Hz, a tolerance which would be suitable for single-sideband emissions*.
22
For non-vehicular mounted portable equipment with a transmitter mean power not exceeding 5 W, the tolerance is 40 × 10 6.
23
For transmitters of a mean power of 50 W or less operating at frequencies below 108 MHz a tolerance of 3 000 Hz applies.
24
In the case of television stations of: 50 W (vision peak envelope power) or less in the band 29.7-100 MHz; 100 W (vision peak envelope power) or less in the band 100-960 MHz; and which receive their input from other television stations or which serve small isolated communities, it may not, for operational reasons, be possible to maintain this tolerance. For such stations, the tolerance is 2 000 Hz. For stations of 1 W (vision peak envelope power) or less, this tolerance may be relaxed further to: 5 kHz in the band 100-470 MHz; 10 kHz in the band 470-960 MHz.
25
For transmitters for system M (NTSC) the tolerance is 1 000 Hz. However, for low power transmitters using this system Note 24 applies.
26
For multi-hop radio-relay systems employing direct frequency conversion the tolerance is 30 × 10 6.
28
For a channel spacing of 50 kHz the tolerance is 50 × 10 6.
29
These tolerances apply to channel spacings equal to or greater than 20 kHz.
_______________ *
NOTE The single-sideband system adopted for the bands exclusively allocated to HF broadcasting does not require a frequency tolerance less than 10 Hz. The above-mentioned degradation occurs when the ratio of wanted-to-interfering signal is well below the required protection ratio. This remark is equally valid for both double- and single-sideband emissions.
166
Maritime Manual
31
For transmitters used by on-board communication stations a tolerance of 5 × 10 6 shall apply.
32
For non-vehicular mounted portable equipment with a transmitter mean power not exceeding 5 W the tolerance is 15 × 10 6.
33
Where specific frequencies are not assigned to radar stations, the bandwidth occupied by the emissions of such stations shall be maintained wholly within the band allocated to the service and the indicated tolerance does not apply.
36
In applying this tolerance administrations should be guided by the latest relevant ITU-R Recommendations.
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
167
APPENDIX 3 (Rev.WRC-03) Tables of maximum permitted power levels for spurious or spurious domain emissions1 (See Article 3) 1 The following sections indicate the maximum permitted levels of certain unwanted emissions, in terms of power as indicated in the tables, of components supplied by a transmitter to the antenna transmission line. Section I, which provides spurious emission limits, is applicable until 1 January 2012 to transmitters installed on or before 1 January 2003; Section II, which limits emissions in the spurious domain, is applicable to transmitters installed after 1 January 2003 and to all transmitters after 1 January 2012. The provisions of No. 4.5 apply to unwanted emissions not covered in Sections I and II. 2 Spurious and spurious domain emissions (covered by Sections I and II) from any part of the installation, other than the antenna and its transmission line, shall not have an effect greater than would occur if this antenna system were supplied with the maximum permitted power at the frequency of that emission. 3 These levels shall not, however, apply to emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) stations, emergency locator transmitters, ships emergency transmitters, lifeboat transmitters, survival craft stations or maritime transmitters when used in emergency situations. 4 For technical or operational reasons, more stringent levels than those specified may be applied to protect specific services in certain frequency bands. The levels applied to protect these services, such as safety and passive services, shall be those agreed upon by the appropriate world radiocommunication conference. More stringent levels may also be fixed by specific agreement between the administrations concerned. Additionally, special consideration of transmitter spurious or spurious domain emissions may be required for the protection of safety services, radio astronomy and space services using passive sensors. Information on the levels of interference detrimental to radio astronomy, Earth exploration satellites and meteorological passive sensing is given in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.329. 5 Spurious and spurious domain emission limits (covered by Sections I and II) for combined radiocommunication and information technology equipment are those for the radiocommunication transmitters. (WRC-03) _______________ 1
Spurious domain emissions are unwanted emissions at frequencies within the spurious domain.
168
Maritime Manual
Section I – Spurious emission limits for transmitters installed on or before 1 January 2003 (valid until 1 January 2012) 6 Radar systems are exempt from spurious emission limits under this Section. The lowest practicable power of spurious emission should be achieved. (WRC-2000) TABLE I Attenuation values and absolute mean power levels used to calculate maximum permitted spurious emission power levels for use with radio equipment Frequency band containing the assignment (lower limit exclusive, upper limit inclusive)
For any spurious component, the attenuation (mean power within the necessary bandwidth relative to the mean power of the spurious component concerned) shall be at least that specified below and the absolute mean power levels given shall not be exceeded 1
9 kHz to 30 MHz
40 dB 50 mW
2, 3, 4
30 MHz to 235 MHz mean power above 25 W mean power 25 W or less
60 dB 1 mW 5 40 dB 25 W
235 MHz to 960 MHz mean power above 25 W mean power 25 W or less
60 dB 20 mW 6, 7 40 dB 25 W 6, 7
960 MHz to 17.7 GHz mean power above 10 W mean power 10 W or less Above 17.7 GHz 1
50 dB 100 mW 6, 7, 8, 9 100 W 6, 7, 8, 9 The lowest possible values achievable shall be employed (see Recommendation 66 (Rev.WRC-2000)*).
When checking compliance with the provisions of the Table, it shall be verified that the bandwidth of the measuring equipment is sufficiently wide to accept all significant components of the spurious emission concerned.
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
169
TABLE I (end) 2
For mobile transmitters which operate below 30 MHz, any spurious component shall have an attenuation of at least 40 dB without exceeding the value of 200 mW, but every effort should be made to comply with the level of 50 mW wherever practicable.
3
For transmitters of a mean power exceeding 50 kW which can operate on two or more frequencies covering a frequency range approaching an octave or more, while a reduction below 50 mW is not mandatory, a minimum attenuation of 60 dB shall be provided.
4
For hand-portable equipment of mean power less than 5 W, the attenuation shall be 30 dB, but every practicable effort should be made to attain 40 dB attenuation.
5
Administrations may adopt a level of 10 mW provided that harmful interference is not caused.
6
Where several transmitters feed a common antenna or closely spaced antennas on neighbouring frequencies, every practicable effort should be made to comply with the levels specified.
7
Since these levels may not provide adequate protection for receiving stations in the radio astronomy and space services, more stringent levels might be considered in each individual case in the light of the geographical position of the stations concerned.
8
These levels are not applicable to systems using digital modulation techniques, but may be used as a guide. Values for these systems may be provided by the relevant ITU-R Recommendations, when available (see Recommendation 66 (Rev.WRC-2000)*).
9
These levels are not applicable to stations in the space services, but the levels of their spurious emissions should be reduced to the lowest possible values compatible with the technical and economic constraints to which the equipment is subject. Values for these systems may be provided by the relevant ITU-R Recommendations, when available (see Recommendation 66 Rev.WRC-2000)*).
* Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-03.
Section II – Spurious domain emission limits for transmitters installed after 1 January 2003 and for all transmitters after 1 January 2012 (WRC-03) Application of these limits 7 The frequency range of the measurement of spurious domain emissions is from 9 kHz to 110 GHz or the second harmonic if higher. (WRC-03) 8 Except as provided in § 9 and 10 of this Appendix, the spurious domain emission levels are specified in the following reference bandwidths: 1 kHz between 9 kHz and 150 kHz 10 kHz between 150 kHz and 30 MHz
170
Maritime Manual
100 kHz between 30 MHz and 1 GHz 1 MHz above 1 GHz.
(WRC-03)
9 The reference bandwidth of all space service spurious domain emissions should be 4 kHz. (WRC-03) 10 For radar systems, the reference bandwidths for specifying spurious domain emission levels should be calculated for each particular system. Thus, for the four general types of radar pulse modulation utilized for radionavigation, radiolocation, acquisition, tracking and other radiodetermination functions, the reference bandwidth values are determined using the following: for a fixed-frequency, non-pulse-coded radar, the reciprocal of the radar pulse length, in seconds (e.g. if the radar pulse length is 1 s, then the reference bandwidth is 1/(1 s) 1 MHz); for a fixed-frequency, phase-coded pulsed radar, the reciprocal of the phase chip length, in seconds (e.g. if the phase-coded chip is 2 s long, then the reference bandwidth is 1/(2 s) 500 kHz); for a frequency modulated (FM) or chirped radar, the square root of the quantity obtained by dividing the chirp bandwidth in MHz by the pulse length, in s (e.g. if the FM is from 1 250 MHz to 1 280 MHz, i.e. 30 MHz, during the pulse length of 10 s, then the reference bandwidth is (30 MHz/10 s)1/2 1.73 MHz); for radars operating with multiple waveforms, the reference bandwidth for specifying spurious domain emission levels is determined empirically from observations of the radar emission and is obtained following the guidance given in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1177. In the case of radars, for which the bandwidth, as determined using the method above, is greater than 1 MHz, a reference bandwidth of 1 MHz should be used. (WRC-03) 10bis Guidance regarding the methods of measuring spurious domain emissions is given in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.329. The e.i.r.p. method specified in this Recommendation should be used when it is not possible to accurately measure the power supplied to the antenna transmission line, or for specific applications where the antenna is designed to provide significant attenuation in the spurious domain. Additionally, the e.i.r.p. method may need some modification for special cases. Specific guidance regarding the methods of measuring spurious domain emissions from radar systems is given in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1177.
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
171
To improve measurement accuracy, sensitivity and efficiency, the resolution bandwidth in which spurious domain emissions are measured can be different from the reference bandwidth used for specifying spurious domain emission levels. (WRC-03) 11 The emission limits of this Section apply to all emissions, including harmonic emissions, intermodulation products, frequency conversion products and parasitic emissions, at frequencies in the spurious domain (see Fig. 1). The upper and lower parts of the spurious domain extend outward from a boundary determined using Annex 1. (WRC-03)
FIGURE 1
(WRC-03)
Out-of-band and spurious domains Unwanted emissions
Spurious domain
Unwanted emissions
Out-of-band domain
Necessary bandwidth
Out-of-band domain
Spurious domain
Frequency of the emission Limits of the necessary bandwidth Boundary of the spurious domain
AP3-01
11ter For the case of a single satellite operating with more than one transponder in the same service area, and when considering the limits for spurious domain emissions as indicated in § 11 of this Appendix, spurious domain emissions from one transponder may fall on a frequency at which a second, companion transponder is transmitting. In these situations, the level of spurious domain emissions from the first transponder is well exceeded by the fundamental or out-of-band domain emissions of the second transponder. Therefore, the limits of this Appendix should not apply to those emissions of a satellite that fall within either the necessary bandwidth or the out-of-band domain of another transponder on the same satellite, in the same service area (see Fig. 2). (WRC-03)
172
Maritime Manual FIGURE 2 Example of the applicability of spurious domain emission limits to a satellite transponder
Transponder A
Out-ofband
Transponder B
Transponder C
Transponder D
Out-ofband
AP3-02
Transponders A, B, C and D are operating on the same satellite in the same service area. Transponder A is not required to meet spurious domain emission limits in frequency ranges and , but is required to meet them in frequency ranges and . (WRC-03)
12
Examples of applying 43 requirements
10 log (P) to calculate attenuation
Where specified in relation to mean power, spurious domain emissions are to be at least x dB below the total mean power P, i.e. x dBc. The power P (W) is to be measured in a bandwidth wide enough to include the total mean power. The spurious domain emissions are to be measured in the reference bandwidths given in the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. The measurement of the spurious domain emission power is independent of the value of necessary bandwidth. Because the absolute emission power limit, derived from 43 10 log (P), can become too stringent for high-power transmitters, alternative relative powers are also provided in Table II. Example 1 A land mobile transmitter, with any value of necessary bandwidth, must meet a spurious domain emission attenuation of 43 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is less stringent. The reference bandwidths used for specifying spurious domain emission levels are provided in § 8 to 10 of this Appendix. Applying this in the frequency range between 30 MHz and 1 GHz gives a reference bandwidth of 100 kHz.
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
173
With a measured total mean power of 10 W: Attenuation relative to total mean power 43
10 log (10)
53 dBc.
The 53 dBc value is less stringent than the 70 dBc, so the 53 dBc value is used. Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 53 dBc in a 100 kHz bandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed 10 dBW 53 dBc 43 dBW in a 100 kHz reference bandwidth. With a measured total mean power of 1 000 W: Attenuation relative to total mean power 43
10 log (1 000)
73 dBc.
The 73 dBc value is more stringent than the 70 dBc limit, so the 70 dBc value is used. Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 70 dBc in a 100 kHz bandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed 30 dBW 70 dBc _ 40 dBW in a 100 kHz reference bandwidth. (WRC-03) Example 2 A space service transmitter with any value of necessary bandwidth must meet a spurious domain emission attenuation of 43 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is less stringent. To measure spurious domain emissions at any frequency, Note 10 to Table II indicates using a reference bandwidth of 4 kHz. With a measured total mean power of 20 W: Attenuation relative to total mean power 43
10 log (20)
56 dBc.
The 56 dBc value is less stringent than the 60 dBc limit, so the 56 dBc value is used. Therefore: Spurious domain emissions must not exceed 56 dBc in a 4 kHz reference bandwidth, or converting to an absolute level, they must not exceed 13 dBW 56 dBc _ 43 dBW in a 4 kHz reference bandwidth. (WRC-03)
174
Maritime Manual
TABLE II
(WRC-03)
Attenuation values used to calculate maximum permitted spurious domain emission power levels for use with radio equipment Service category in accordance with Article 1, or equipment type15
Attenuation (dB) below the power supplied to the antenna transmission line
All services except those services quoted below:
43 + 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is less stringent
Space services (earth stations)10, 16
43 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is less stringent
Space services (space stations)10, 17
43 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is less stringent
Radiodetermination14
43 + 10 log (PEP), or 60 dB, whichever is less stringent
Broadcast television11
46 + 10 log (P), or 60 dBc, whichever is less stringent, without exceeding the absolute mean power level of 1 mW for VHF stations or 12 mW for UHF stations. However, greater attenuation may be necessary on a case by case basis
Broadcast FM
46 + 10 log (P), or 70 dBc, whichever is less stringent; the absolute mean power level of 1 mW should not be exceeded
Broadcasting at MF/HF
50 dBc; the absolute mean power level of 50 mW should not be exceeded
SSB from mobile stations12
43 dB below PEP
Amateur services operating below 30 MHz (including those using SSB)16
43 + 10 log (PEP), or 50 dB, whichever is less stringent
Services operating below 30 MHz, except space, radiodetermination, broadcast, those using SSB from mobile stations, and amateur12
43 + 10 log (X), or 60 dBc, whichever is less stringent, where X = PEP for SSB modulation, and X = P for other modulation
Low-power device radio equipment13
56 + 10 log (P), or 40 dBc, whichever is less stringent
Emergency transmitters18
No limit
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
175
TABLE II (end) P:
(WRC-03)
mean power in watts supplied to the antenna transmission line, in accordance with No. 1.158. When burst transmission is used, the mean power P and the mean power of any spurious domain emissions are measured using power averaging over the burst duration.
PEP: peak envelope power in watts supplied to the antenna transmission line, in accordance with No. 1.157. dBc: decibels relative to the unmodulated carrier power of the emission. In the cases which do not have a carrier, for example in some digital modulation schemes where the carrier is not accessible for measurement, the reference level equivalent to dBc is decibels relative to the mean power P. 10
Spurious domain emission limits for all space services are stated in a 4 kHz reference bandwidth.
11
For analogue television transmissions, the mean power level is defined with a specified video signal modulation. This video signal has to be chosen in such a way that the maximum mean power level (e.g. at the video signal blanking level for negatively modulated television systems) is supplied to the antenna transmission line.
12
All classes of emission using SSB are included in the category SSB .
13
Low-power radio devices having a maximum output power of less than 100 mW and intended for short-range communication or control purposes; such equipment is in general exempt from individual licensing.
14
For radiodetermination systems (radar as defined by No. 1.100), spurious domain emission attenuation (dB) shall be determined for radiated emission levels, and not at the antenna transmission line. The measurement methods for determining the radiated spurious domain emission levels from radar systems should be guided by the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1177. (WRC-03)
15
In some cases of digital modulation (including digital broadcasting), broadband systems, pulsed modulation and narrow-band high-power transmitters for all categories of services, there may be difficulties in meeting limits close to 250% of the necessary bandwidth.
16
Earth stations in the amateur-satellite service operating below 30 MHz are in the service category Amateur services operating below 30 MHz (including those using SSB) . (WRC-2000)
17
Space stations in the space research service intended for operation in deep space as defined by No. 1.177 are exempt from spurious domain emission limits. (WRC-03)
18
Emergency position-indicating radio beacon, emergency locator transmitters, personal location beacons, search and rescue transponders, ship emergency, lifeboat and survival craft transmitters and emergency land, aeronautical or maritime transmitters. (WRC-2000)
176
Maritime Manual
ANNEX 1
(WRC-03)
Determination of the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains 1 Except as provided below, the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains occurs at frequencies that are separated from the centre frequency of the emission by the values shown in Table 1. In general, the boundary, on either side of the centre frequency, occurs at a separation of 250% of the necessary bandwidth, or at 2.5 BN, as shown in Table 1. For most systems, the centre frequency of the emission is the centre of the necessary bandwidth. For multichannel or multicarrier transmitters/transponders, where several carriers may be transmitted simultaneously from a final output amplifier or an active antenna, the centre frequency of the emission is taken to be the centre of the 3 dB bandwidth of the transmitter or transponder, and the transmitter or transponder bandwidth is used in place of the necessary bandwidth for determining the boundary. For multicarrier satellite systems, guidance on the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains is provided in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.1541. Some systems specify unwanted emissions relative to channel bandwidth, or channel spacing. These may be used as a substitute for the necessary bandwidth in Table 1, provided they are found in ITU-R Recommendations. TABLE 1 Values for frequency separation between the centre frequency and the boundary of the spurious domain Frequency range 9 kHz < fc
150 kHz
Narrow-band case for BN <
Normal separation Separation
Wideband case for BN >
Separation
250 Hz
625 Hz
2.5 BN
10 kHz
1.5 BN + 10 kHz
150 kHz < fc
30 MHz
4 kHz
10 kHz
2.5 BN
100 kHz
1.5 BN + 100 kHz
30 MHz < fc
1 GHz
25 kHz
62.5 kHz
2.5 BN
10 MHz
1.5 BN + 10 MHz 1.5 BN + 50 MHz
1 GHz < fc
3 GHz
100 kHz
250 kHz
2.5 BN
50 MHz
3 GHz < fc
10 GHz
100 kHz
250 kHz
2.5 BN
100 MHz 1.5 BN + 100 MHz
10 GHz < fc
15 GHz
300 kHz
750 kHz
2.5 BN
250 MHz 1.5 BN + 250 MHz
15 GHz < fc
26 GHz
500 kHz
1.25 MHz
2.5 BN
500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz
1 MHz
2.5 MHz
2.5 BN
500 MHz 1.5 BN + 500 MHz
fc > 26 GHz
NOTE In Table 1, fc is the centre frequency of the emission and BN is the necessary bandwidth. If the assigned frequency band of the emissions extends across two frequency ranges, then the values corresponding to the higher frequency range shall be used for determining the boundary.
Part B – SECTION II – AP3
177
Example 1: The necessary bandwidth of an emission at 26 MHz is 1.8 kHz. Since BN is less than 4 kHz, the minimum separation of 10 kHz applies. The spurious domain begins 10 kHz each side of the centre of the necessary bandwidth. Example 2: The necessary bandwidth of an emission at 8 GHz is 200 MHz. Since the wideband case applies for BN > 100 MHz at that frequency, the spurious domain begins 1.5 200 MHz + 100 MHz = 400 MHz each side of the centre of the necessary bandwidth. Using the general separation formula, the out-of-band domain would have extended to 2.5 200 MHz = 500 MHz either side of the centre frequency. 2 Tables 2 and 3 show exceptions to Table 1 for narrow-band and wideband cases, respectively, applicable to particular systems or services and frequency bands.
TABLE 2 Narrow-band variations for particular systems or services and frequency bands Narrow-band case System or service
Fixed service
Frequency range
for BN < (kHz)
Separation (kHz)
14 kHz-1.5 MHz
20
50(1)
50 W
30
75(2)
PT > 50 W
80
200(2)
1.5-30 MHz
PT
(1)
The separation value is based on an assumption that the maximum value of the necessary bandwidth is about 3 kHz for the frequency range 14 kHz-1.5 MHz. The separation value of 50 kHz is extremely large as compared with the necessary bandwidth. This is because unwanted emissions of high power transmitters under modulated conditions have to be below the spurious limit (70 dBc) at the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains.
(2)
PT is the transmitter power. The separation values are based on an assumption that the maximum value of the necessary bandwidth is about 12 kHz for the frequency range 1.530 MHz. The separation value of 200 kHz for PT > 50 W is extremely large as compared with the necessary bandwidth. This is because unwanted emissions of high power transmitters under modulated conditions have to be below the spurious limit, 70 dBc, at the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains. Also, if future systems in the fixed service operating in this frequency range require a necessary bandwidth larger than 12 kHz, it may become necessary to review the 200 kHz separation.
178
Maritime Manual
TABLE 3 Wideband variations for particular systems or services and frequency bands Wideband case System or service
Frequency range For BN >
Separation
Fixed service
14-150 kHz
20 kHz
1.5 BN + 20 kHz
Fixed-satellite service (FSS)
3.4-4.2 GHz
250 MHz
1.5 BN + 250 MHz
FSS
5.725-6.725 GHz
500 MHz
1.5 BN + 500 MHz
FSS
7.25-7.75 GHz and 7.9-8.4 GHz
250 MHz
1.5 BN + 250 MHz
FSS
10.7-12.75 GHz
500 MHz
1.5 BN + 500 MHz
Broadcastingsatellite service
11.7-12.75 GHz
500 MHz
1.5 BN + 500 MHz
FSS
12.75-13.25 GHz
500 MHz
1.5 BN + 500 MHz
FSS
13.75-14.8 GHz
500 MHz
1.5 BN + 500 MHz
3 For primary radar, the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains is the frequency at which the out-of-band domain limits specified in the applicable ITU-R Recommendations are equal to the spurious domain limit defined in Table II of this Appendix. Further guidance on the boundary between the out-of-band and spurious domains for primary radar is provided in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R SM.1541.
Part B – SECTION II – AP9
179
APPENDIX 9 Report of an irregularity or infringement (See Article 15, Section V)
Particulars concerning the station infringing the Radio Regulations: 1
Name1 if known (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
2
Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
3
Nationality, if known
..........................................
4
Frequency used (kHz, MHz, GHz or THz)
..........................................
5
Class of emission2
..........................................
6
Class of station and nature of service, if known
..........................................
7
Location3, 4, 5
Particulars concerning the station, the centralizing office or inspection service reporting the irregularity or infringement: 8
Name (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
9
Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
10
Nationality
..........................................
11
Location3, 4
..........................................
Particulars of the irregularity or infringement: 12
Name6 of the station (in BLOCK letters) in communication with the station committing the irregularity or infringement ..........................................
13
Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters) of the station in communication with the station committing the irregularity or infringement ..........................................
180
Maritime Manual
14
Date and time7
..........................................
15
Nature of the irregularity or infringement8
..........................................
16
Extracts from ship log or other information supporting the report
..........................................
Particulars concerning the transmitting station interfered with9: 17
Name of the station (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
18
Call sign or other identification (in BLOCK letters)
..........................................
19
Frequency assigned (kHz, MHz, GHz or THz)
..........................................
20
Frequency measured at the time of the interference
..........................................
21
Class of emission2 and bandwidth (indicate whether measured or estimated, or indicate the necessary bandwidth notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau) ..........................................
22
Receiving location3, 4 (in BLOCK letters) where the interference was experienced ..........................................
23
Certificate: I certify that the foregoing report represents, to the best of my knowledge, a complete and accurate account of what took place. .......................................... Signatures10 .............................................
Date: ..........................................
.............................................
..........................................
Part B – SECTION II – AP9
181
Instructions for filling in this form 1
Each report shall refer to only one station (see Note 6). If it is forwarded as a letter, it shall be in duplicate, and whenever practicable should be typewritten. It may also be forwarded as a telegram. 2
The class of emission shall contain the basic characteristics listed in Appendix 1. If any characteristic cannot be determined, indicate the unknown symbol with a dash. However, if a station is not able to identify unambiguously whether the modulation is frequency or phase modulation, indicate frequency modulation (F). 3 In the case of land, fixed, or earth stations, the position shall be expressed in latitude and longitude (Greenwich). If the position cannot be furnished, the area of operation should be indicated. 4
In the case of ship or aircraft stations, the position shall be expressed either in latitude and longitude (Greenwich) or by a true bearing in degrees and distance in nautical miles, or in kilometres, from some well known place. If the position cannot be furnished, the area of operation should be indicated. 5
Where space stations are concerned, information shall be furnished on the orbit.
6
If both communicating stations infringe the Regulations, a separate report shall be made for each of these stations. 7
The time must be expressed as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) by a group of four figures (0000 to 2359). If the infringement is prolonged or repeated, the dates and times shall be shown. 8 A separate report is required for each irregularity or infringement, unless they are repeated within a short time. 9
This information is to be given only in case of a complaint about interference.
10
This report shall be signed by the operator who has reported the infringement and countersigned by the Master of the ship or person responsible for the aircraft, or the officer in charge of the station in the case of an infringement reported by a station of the mobile service. When the report originates from a centralizing office or from an inspection service, it shall be signed by the head of that office or service and countersigned by an official of the administration sending it.
For the use of the administration only 1
Company controlling the installation of the station against which complaint is made .........................................................................................
2
Name of the operator of the station held responsible for the irregularity or infringement of the Regulations .......................................................
3
Action taken
........................................................................................................
182
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 10 (Rev.WRC-07) Report of harmful interference (See Article 15, Section VI) Particulars concerning the station causing the interference: a
Name, call sign or other means of identification
..........................................
b
Frequency measured
..........................................
Date:
..........................................
Time (UTC):
..........................................
c
Class of emission 1
..........................................
d
Bandwidth (indicate whether measured or estimated) ..........................................
e
Measured field strength or power flux-density2
..........................................
Date:
..........................................
Time (UTC):
..........................................
f
Observed polarization
..........................................
g
Class of station and nature of service
..........................................
h
Location/position/area/bearing (QTE3)
i
Location of the facility which made the above measurements ..........................................
(WRC-07)
..........................................
Particulars concerning the transmitting station interfered with: j
Name, call sign or other means of identification
..........................................
k
Frequency assigned
..........................................
_______________ 1
The class of emission shall contain the basic characteristics listed in Appendix 1. If any characteristic cannot be determined, indicate the unknown symbol with a dash. However, if a station is not able to identify unambiguously whether the modulation is frequency or phase modulation, indicate frequency modulation (F). 2
When measurements are not available, signal strengths according to the QSA scale should be provided. 3 See the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1172.
(WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION II – AP10
l
183
Frequency measured
..........................................
Date:
..........................................
Time (UTC):
..........................................
m
Class of emission4
..........................................
n
Bandwidth (indicate whether measured or estimated, or indicate the necessary bandwidth notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau) ..........................................
o
Location/position/area
p
Location of the facility which made the above measurements ..........................................
..........................................
Particulars furnished by the receiving station experiencing the interference: q
Name of station
..........................................
r
Location/position/area
..........................................
s
Dates and times (UTC) of occurrence of harmful interference ..........................................
t
Bearings (QTE5) or other particulars
u
Nature of interference
v
Field strength or power flux-density of the wanted emission at the receiving station experiencing the interference6 ..........................................
(WRC-07)
.......................................... ..........................................
Date:
..........................................
Time (UTC):
..........................................
w
Polarization of the receiving antenna or observed polarization ..........................................
x
Action requested
..........................................
NOTE For convenience and brevity, telegraphic reports shall be in the format above, using the letters in the order listed in lieu of the explanatory titles, but only those letters for which information is provided should be used. However, sufficient information shall be provided to the administration receiving the report, so that an appropriate investigation can be conducted.
_______________ 4 See footnote 1. 5 See footnote 3. 6 See footnote 2.
184
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 12 Special rules applicable to radiobeacons (See Article 28)
Section II – Maritime Radiobeacons 1) The protection ratio required for assignment of frequencies to maritime radiobeacons operating in the bands between 283.5 kHz and 335 kHz shall be based on the effective radiated power being kept to the minimum value necessary to give the desired field strength at the service range and the need to provide adequate geographical separation between radiobeacons operating on the same frequency and at the same time, to avoid harmful interference. 2) The daylight service range of the radiobeacons referred to in § 1) above shall be based on the following field strengths: 3) Region 1 50 V/m for radiobeacons north of 43° N; 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 43° N and 30° N; 100 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° N and 30° S; 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° S and 43° S; 50 V/m for radiobeacons south of 43° S. 4) Region 2 50 V/m for radiobeacons north of 40° N; 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 40° N and 31° N; 100 V/m for radiobeacons between 31° N and 30° S; 75 V/m for radiobeacons between 30° S and 43° S; 50 V/m for radiobeacons south of 43° S.
Part B – SECTION II – AP12
185
5) Region 3 75 V/m for radiobeacons north of 40° N; 100 V/m for radiobeacons between 40° N and 50° S; 75 V/m for radiobeacons south of 50° S. 6) The carrier frequencies of maritime radiobeacons and the separation between channels shall be based on the use of integer multiples of 100 Hz. The separation between adjacent carrier frequencies should be based on relevant ITU-R Recommendations.
186
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 14 (Rev.WRC-07) Phonetic alphabet and figure code (See Articles 32 and 57)
(WRC-07)
1 When it is necessary to spell out call signs, service abbreviations and words, the following letter spelling table shall be used: Letter to be transmitted
Code word to be used
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
Alfa Bravo Charlie Delta Echo Foxtrot Golf Hotel India Juliett Kilo Lima Mike November Oscar Papa Quebec Romeo Sierra Tango Uniform
V W X Y Z
Victor Whiskey X-ray Yankee Zulu
_______________ 1 The syllables to be emphasized are underlined.
Spoken as1 AL FAH BRAH VOH CHAR LEE or SHAR LEE DELL TAH ECK OH FOKS TROT GOLF HOH TELL IN DEE AH JEW LEE ETT KEY LOH LEE MAH MIKE NO VEM BER OSS CAH PAH PAH KEH BECK ROW ME OH SEE AIR RAH TANG GO YOU NEE FORM or OO NEE FORM VIK TAH WISS KEY ECKS RAY YANG KEY ZOO LOO
Part B – SECTION II – AP14
2 used:
187
When it is necessary to spell out figures or marks, the following table shall be
Figure or mark to be transmitted
Code word to be used
Spoken as2
0
Nadazero
NAH-DAH-ZAY-ROH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Decimal point Full stop
Unaone Bissotwo Terrathree Kartefour Pantafive Soxisix Setteseven Oktoeight Novenine Decimal Stop
OO-NAH-WUN BEES-SOH-TOO TAY-RAH-TREE KAR-TAY-FOWER PAN-TAH-FIVE SOK-SEE-SIX SAY-TAY-SEVEN OK-TOH-AIT NO-VAY-NINER DAY-SEE-MAL STOP
3 However, stations of the same country, when communicating between themselves, may use any other table recognized by their administration.
_______________ 2 Each syllable should be equally emphasized.
188
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 15 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies for distress and safety communications for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) (See Article 31)
The frequencies for distress and safety communications for the GMDSS are given in Tables 15-1 and 15-2 for frequencies below and above 30 MHz, respectively. TABLE 15-1
(WRC-07)
Frequencies below 30 MHz Frequency (kHz)
Description of usage
Notes
490
MSI
The frequency 490 kHz is used exclusively for maritime safety information (MSI). (WRC-03)
518
MSI
The frequency 518 kHz is used exclusively by the international NAVTEX system.
*2 174.5
NBDP-COM
*2 182
RTP-COM
*2 187.5
DSC
3 023
AERO-SAR
*4 125
RTP-COM
*4 177.5
NBDP-COM
*4 207.5
DSC
4 209.5
MSI
The frequency 2 182 kHz uses class of emission J3E. See also No. 52.190.
The aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies 3 023 kHz and 5 680 kHz may be used for intercommunication between mobile stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations, and for communication between these stations and participating land stations, in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 27 (see Nos. 5.111 and 5.115). See also No. 52.221. The carrier frequency 4 125 kHz may be used by aircraft stations to communicate with stations of the maritime mobile service for distress and safety purposes, including search and rescue (see No. 30.11).
The frequency 4 209.5 kHz is exclusively used for NAVTEXtype transmissions (see Resolution 339 (Rev.WRC-07)).
Part B – SECTION II – AP15
189
TABLE 15-1 (end ) Frequency (kHz)
Description of usage
4 210
MSI-HF
5 680
AERO-SAR
*6 215
RTP-COM
*6 268
NBDP-COM
*6 312
DSC
6 314
MSI-HF
*8 291
RTP-COM
*8 376.5
NBDP-COM
*8 414.5
DSC
8 416.5
MSI-HF
*12 290
RTP-COM
*12 520
NBDP-COM
*12 577
DSC
12 579
MSI-HF
*16 420
RTP-COM
*16 695
NBDP-COM
*16 804.5
DSC
16 806.5
MSI-HF
19 680.5
MSI-HF
22 376
MSI-HF
26 100.5
MSI-HF
(WRC-07)
Notes
See note under 3 023 kHz above. See also No. 52.221.
Legend: AERO-SAR These aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies may be used for distress and safety purposes by mobile stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations. DSC These frequencies are used exclusively for distress and safety calls using digital selective calling in accordance with No. 32.5 (see Nos. 33.8 and 33.32). (WRC-07) MSI In the maritime mobile service, these frequencies are used exclusively for the transmission of maritime safety information (MSI) (including meteorological and navigational
190
Maritime Manual
warnings and urgent information) by coast stations to ships, by means of narrow-band directprinting telegraphy. MSI-HF In the maritime mobile service, these frequencies are used exclusively for the transmission of high seas MSI by coast stations to ships, by means of narrow-band directprinting telegraphy. NBDP-COM These frequencies are used exclusively for distress and safety communications (traffic) using narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy. RTP-COM These carrier frequencies are used for distress and safety communications (traffic) by radiotelephony. * Except as provided in these Regulations, any emission capable of causing harmful interference to distress, alarm, urgency or safety communications on the frequencies denoted by an asterisk (*) is prohibited. Any emission causing harmful interference to distress and safety communications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in this Appendix is prohibited. (WRC-07)
TABLE 15-2
(WRC-07)
Frequencies above 30 MHz (VHF/UHF) Frequency (MHz)
Description of usage
*121.5
AERO-SAR
Notes The aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz is used for the purposes of distress and urgency for radiotelephony by stations of the aeronautical mobile service using frequencies in the band between 117.975 MHz and 137 MHz. This frequency may also be used for these purposes by survival craft stations. Emergency position-indicating radio beacons use the frequency 121.5 MHz as indicated in Recommendation ITU-R M.690-1. Mobile stations of the maritime mobile service may communicate with stations of the aeronautical mobile service on the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz for the purposes of distress and urgency only, and on the aeronautical auxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz for coordinated search and rescue operations, using class A3E emissions for both frequencies (see also Nos. 5.111 and 5.200). They shall then comply with any special arrangement between governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile service is regulated.
Part B – SECTION II – AP15
191
TABLE 15-2 (continued )
(WRC-07)
Frequency (MHz)
Description of usage
123.1
AERO-SAR
The aeronautical auxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz, which is auxiliary to the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz, is for use by stations of the aeronautical mobile service and by other mobile and land stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations (see also No. 5.200). Mobile stations of the maritime mobile service may communicate with stations of the aeronautical mobile service on the aeronautical emergency frequency 121.5 MHz for the purposes of distress and urgency only, and on the aeronautical auxiliary frequency 123.1 MHz for coordinated search and rescue operations, using class A3E emissions for both frequencies (see also Nos. 5.111 and 5.200). They shall then comply with any special arrangement between governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile service is regulated.
156.3
VHF-CH06
The frequency 156.3 MHz may be used for communication between ship stations and aircraft stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations. It may also be used by aircraft stations to communicate with ship stations for other safety purposes (see also Note f ) in Appendix 18).
*156.525
VHF-CH70
The frequency 156.525 MHz is used in the maritime mobile service for distress and safety calls using digital selective calling (see also Nos. 4.9, 5.227, 30.2 and 30.3).
156.650
VHF-CH13
The frequency 156.650 MHz is used for ship-to-ship communications relating to the safety of navigation in accordance with Note k) in Appendix 18.
*156.8
VHF-CH16
The frequency 156.8 MHz is used for distress and safety communications by radiotelephony. Additionally, the frequency 156.8 MHz may be used by aircraft stations for safety purposes only.
*161.975
AIS-SART VHF CH AIS 1
AIS 1 is used for AIS search and rescue transmitters (AISSART) for use in search and rescue operations.
*162.025
AIS-SART VHF CH AIS 2
AIS 2 is used for AIS search and rescue transmitters (AISSART) for use in search and rescue operations.
*406-406.1
406-EPIRB
This frequency band is used exclusively by satellite emergency position-indicating radio beacons in the Earth-to-space direction (see No. 5.266).
1 530-1 544
SAT-COM
In addition to its availability for routine non-safety purposes, the band 1 530-1 544 MHz is used for distress and safety purposes in the space-to-Earth direction in the maritime mobile-satellite service. GMDSS distress, urgency and safety communications have priority in this band (see No. 5.353A).
Notes
192
Maritime Manual
TABLE 15-2 (end )
(WRC-07)
Frequency (MHz)
Description of usage
*1 544-1 545
D&S-OPS
Use of the band 1 544-1 545 MHz (space-to-Earth) is limited to distress and safety operations (see No. 5.356), including feeder links of satellites needed to relay the emissions of satellite emergency position-indicating radio beacons to earth stations and narrow-band (space-to-Earth) links from space stations to mobile stations.
1 626.5-1 645.5
SAT-COM
In addition to its availability for routine non-safety purposes, the band 1 626.5-1 645.5 MHz is used for distress and safety purposes in the Earth-to-space direction in the maritime mobilesatellite service. GMDSS distress, urgency and safety communications have priority in this band (see No. 5.353A).
*1 645.5-1 646.5
D&S-OPS
Use of the band 1 645.5-1 646.5 MHz (Earth-to-space) is limited to distress and safety operations (see No. 5.375).
9 200-9 500
SARTS
This frequency band is used by radar transponders to facilitate search and rescue.
Notes
Legend: AERO-SAR These aeronautical carrier (reference) frequencies may be used for distress and safety purposes by mobile stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue operations. D&S-OPS The use of these bands is limited to distress and safety operations of satellite emergency position-indicating radio beacons (EPIRBs). SAT-COM These frequency bands are available for distress and safety purposes in the maritime mobile-satellite service (see Notes). VHF-CH# These VHF frequencies are used for distress and safety purposes. The channel number (CH#) refers to the VHF channel as listed in Appendix 18, which should also be consulted. AIS These frequencies are used by automatic identification systems (AIS), which should operate in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1371. (WRC-07) * Except as provided in these Regulations, any emission capable of causing harmful interference to distress, alarm, urgency or safety communications on the frequencies denoted by an asterisk (*) is prohibited. Any emission causing harmful interference to distress and safety communications on any of the discrete frequencies identified in this Appendix is prohibited. (WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION II – AP16
193
APPENDIX 16 (Rev.WRC-07) Documents with which stations on board ships and aircraft shall be provided (See Articles 42 and 51) Section I – Ship stations for which a Global Maritime Distress and Safety System installation is required by international agreement These stations shall be provided with: 1
the licence prescribed by Article 18;
2
certificates of the operator or operators;
3 a log in which the following are recorded as they occur, together with the time of the occurrence, unless administrations have adopted other arrangements for recording all information which the log should contain: a)
a summary of communications relating to distress, urgency and safety traffic;
b)
a reference to important service incidents;
4 the List of Ship Stations and Maritime Mobile Service Identity Assignments (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format; 5 the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format; 6 the Manual for Use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime MobileSatellite Services (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format. NOTE An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned in items 5 and 6 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalent information for the ship s specified trading area).
Section II – Other ship stations for which a radio installation is required by regional or international agreement These stations shall be provided with: 1
the licence prescribed by Article 18;
2
certificates of the operator or operators;
194
Maritime Manual
3 a log or other arrangements which the administration may have adopted for that purpose, in which a summary of communications related to distress, urgency and safety traffic shall be recorded together with the time of their occurrence; 4 the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (see Article 20) in either printed or electronic format; 5 the relevant rules and procedures of radiocommunications, e.g. Manual for Use by the Maritime Mobile and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Services (paper or electronic format) (see Article 20). NOTE An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned in items 4 and 5 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalent information for the ship s specified trading area).
Section III – Other ship stations These stations shall be provided with: 1
the documents mentioned in items 1 and 2 of Section II;
2 the documents mentioned in items 4 and 5 of Section II, in accordance with the requirements of the administrations concerned. NOTE An administration may exempt a ship from the carriage of the documents mentioned in item 2 above under various circumstances (for example, when that ship carries equivalent information for the ship s specified trading area). Administrations may also, by mutual agreement, exempt ships travelling only between their national jurisdictions from the licensing prescribed by Article 18 and the carriage of the documents mentioned in item 1 above, provided those vessels are otherwise licensed or authorized by regulation.
Section IV – Stations on board aircraft These stations shall be provided with: 1
the documents mentioned in items 1 and 2 of Section I;
2 a log, unless administrations have adopted other arrangements for recording all information which the log should contain; 3 those published documents, in either printed or electronic formats, containing official information relating to stations which the aircraft station may use for the execution of its service.
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
195
APPENDIX 17 (Rev.WRC-07) Frequencies and channelling arrangements in the high-frequency bands for the maritime mobile service (See Article 52) PART A – Table of subdivided bands
(WRC-07)
In the Table, where appropriate1, the assignable frequencies in a given band for each usage are: indicated by the lowest and highest frequency, in heavy type, assigned in that band; regularly spaced, the number of assignable frequencies ( f.) and the spacing in kHz being indicated in italics. Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service Band (MHz) Limits (kHz) Frequencies assignable to ship stations for oceanographic data transmission c)
4
6
8
12
16
18/19
22
25/26
4 063
6 200
8 195
12 230
16 360
18 780
22 000
25 070
4 065
6 200
8 195
12 230
16 360
18 780
22 000
25 070
4 066.4 to 4 144.4
6 201.4 to 6 222.4
8 196.4 to 8 292.4
12 231.4 to 12 351.4
16 361.4 to 16 526.4
18 781.4 to 18 823.4
22 001.4 to 22 157.4
25 071.4 to 25 098.4
27 f. 3 kHz
8 f. 3 kHz
33 f. 3 kHz
41 f. 3 kHz
56 f. 3 kHz
15 f. 3 kHz
53 f. 3 kHz
10 f. 3 kHz
4 146
6 224
8 294
12 353
16 528
18 825
22 159
25 100
4 147.4 to 4 150.4
6 225.4 to 6 231.4
8 295.4 to 8 298.4
12 354.4 to 12 366.4
16 529.4 to 16 547.4
18 826.4 to 18 844.4
22 160.4 to 22 178.4
25 101.4 to 25 119.4
2 f. 3 kHz
3 f. 3 kHz
2 f. 3 kHz
5 f. 3 kHz
7 f. 3 kHz
7 f. 3 kHz
7 f. 3 kHz
7 f. 3 kHz
4 152
6 233
8 300
12 368
16 549
18 846
22 180
25 121
4 063.3 to 4 064.8 6 f. 0.3 kHz
Limits (kHz) Frequencies assignable to ship stations for telephony, duplex operation a) i)
Limits (kHz) Frequencies assignable to ship stations and coast stations for telephony, simplex operation a) Limits (kHz)
_______________ 1 Within the non-shaded boxes.
196
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (continued ) Band (MHz)
4
6
8
12
16
18/19
22
25/26
Limits (kHz)
4 152
6 233
8 300
12 368
16 549
18 846
22 180
25 121
Frequencies assignable to ship stations for wide-band telegraphy, facsimile and special transmission systems
4 154 to 4 170
6 235 to 6 259
8 302 to 8 338
12 370 to 12 418
16 551 to 16 615
18 848 to 18 868
22 182 to 22 238
25 123 to 25 159
5 f. 4 kHz
7 f. 4 kHz
10 f. 4 kHz
13 f. 4 kHz
17 f. 4 kHz
6 f. 4 kHz
15 f. 4 kHz
10 f. 4 kHz
4 172
6 261
8 340
12 420
16 617
18 870
22 240
25 161.25
6 261.3 to 6 262.5
8 340.3 to 8 341.5
12 420.3 to 12 421.5
16 617.3 to 16 618.5
22 240.3 to 22 241.5
5 f. 0.3 kHz
5 f. 0.3 kHz
5 f. 0.3 kHz
5 f. 0.3 kHz
5 f. 0.3 kHz
Limits (kHz) Frequencies assignable to ship stations for oceanographic data transmission c)
Limits (kHz)
4 172
6 262.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75
18 870
22 241.75 25 161.25
Frequencies (paired) assignable to ship stations for narrowband direct-printing (NBDP) telegraphy and data transmission systems at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK d) j) m) p)
4 172.5 to 4 181.5
6 263 to 6 275.5
18 f. 0.5 kHz
25 f. 0.5 kHz
Limits (kHz)
4 181.75 6 275.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75
18 870
22 241.75 25 161.25
4 186.75 6 280.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75
18 870
22 241.75 25 161.25
18 870
22 241.75 25 161.25
Calling frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy g) p) Limits (kHz) Frequencies (paired) assignable to ship stations for NBDP telegraphy and data transmission systems at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK d) m) p) Limits (kHz)
6 281 to 6 284.5 8 f. 0.5 kHz
4 186.75 6 284.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
197
Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (continued ) Band (MHz) Limits (kHz) Working frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy e) f) p) Limits (kHz)
4
6
8
12
16
4 186.75 6 284.75 8 341.75 12 421.75 16 618.75
18/19 18 870
22
25/26
22 241.75 25 161.25
4 187 to 4 202
6 285 to 6 300
8 342 to 8 365.5
12 422 to 12 476.5
16 619 to 16 683
22 242 to 22 279
25 161.5 to 25 171
31 f. 0.5 kHz
31 f. 0.5 kHz
48 f. 0.5 kHz
110 f. 0.5 kHz
129 f. 0.5 kHz
75 f. 0.5 kHz
20 f. 0.5 kHz
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 365.75 12 476.75 16 683.25
18 870
22 279.25 25 171.25
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 370.75 12 476.75 16 683.25
18 870
22 284.25 25 172.75
18 870
22 284.25 25 172.75
Calling frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy g) p) Limits (kHz) Working frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy e) f) p) Limits (kHz) Frequencies (paired) assignable to ship stations for NBDP telegraphy and data transmission systems at speeds not exceeding 100 bauds for FSK and 200 bauds for PSK d) j) m) p) Limits (kHz)
8 371 to 8 376 11 f. 0.5 kHz 4 202.25 6 300.25 8 376.25 12 476.75 16 683.25 8 376.5 to 8 396
12 477 to 12 549.5
16 683.5 to 16 733.5
18 870.5 to 18 892.5
22 284.5 to 22 351.5
25 173 to 25 192.5
40 f. 0.5 kHz
146 f. 0.5 kHz
101 f. 0.5 kHz
45 f. 0.5 kHz
135 f. 0.5 kHz
40 f. 0.5 kHz
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 549.75 16 733.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75
Calling frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy g) p) Limits (kHz)
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 554.75 16 738.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75
(WRC-07)
198
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (continued ) Band (MHz) Limits (kHz)
4
6
8
12
16
18/19
22
25/26
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 554.75 16 738.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75
Frequencies (paired) assignable to ship stations for NBDP telegraphy and data transmission systems at speeds not exceeding 100 bauds for FSK and 200 bauds for PSK d) m) p)
12 555 to 12 559.5
16 739 to 16 784.5
10 f. 0.5 kHz
92 f. 0.5 kHz
Limits (kHz)
4 202.25 6 300.25 8 396.25 12 559.75 16 784.75 18 892.75 22 351.75 25 192.75
Frequencies (non paired) assignable to ship stations for NBDP telegraphy and data transmission systems at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK and for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working) b) p)
4 202.5 to 4 207
6 300.5 to 6 311.5
8 396.5 to 8 414
12 560 to 12 576.5
16 785 to 16 804
18 893 to 18 898
22 352 to 22 374
25 193 to 25 208
10 f. 0.5 kHz
23 f. 0.5 kHz
36 f. 0.5 kHz
34 f. 0.5 kHz
39 f. 0.5 kHz
11 f. 0.5 kHz
45 f. 0.5 kHz
31 f. 0.5 kHz
Limits (kHz)
4 207.25 6 311.75 8 414.25 12 576.75 16 804.25 18 898.25 22 374.25 25 208.25
Frequencies assignable to ship stations for digital selective calling k) l)
4 207.5 to 4 209
6 312 to 6 313.5
8 414.5 to 8 416
12 577 to 12 578.5
16 804.5 to 16 806
18 898.5 to 18 899.5
22 374.5 to 22 375.5
25 208.5 to 25 209.5
4 f. 0.5 kHz
4 f. 0.5 kHz
4 f. 0.5 kHz
4 f. 0.5 kHz
4 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
Limits (kHz)
4 209.25 6 313.75 8 416.25 12 578.75 16 806.25 18 899.75 22 375.75
Limits (kHz)
4 209.25 6 313.75 8 416.25 12 578.75 16 806.25 19 680.25 22 375.75 26 100.25
Frequencies (paired) assignable to coast stations for NBDP and data transmission systems, at speeds not exceeding 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK d) n) o) p)
4 209.5 to 4 219
6 314 to 6 330.5
8 416.5 to 8 436
12 579 to 12 656.5
16 806.5 to 16 902.5
19 680.5 to 19 703
22 376 to 22 443.5
26 100.5 to 26 120.5
20 f. 0.5 kHz
34 f. 0.5 kHz
40 f. 0.5 kHz
156 f. 0.5 kHz
193 f. 0.5 kHz
46 f. 0.5 kHz
136 f. 0.5 kHz
41 f. 0.5 kHz
Limits (kHz)
25 210
4 219.25 6 330.75 8 436.25 12 656.75 16 902.75 19 703.25 22 443.75 26 120.75
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
199
Table of frequencies (kHz) to be used in the band between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service (end ) Band (MHz)
4
6
8
12
16
18/19
22
25/26
Limits (kHz)
4 219.25 6 330.75 8 436.25 12 656.75 16 902.75 19 703.25 22 443.75 26 120.75
Frequencies assignable to coast stations for digital selective calling l)
4 219.5 to 4 220.5
6 331 to 6 332
8 436.5 to 8 437.5
12 657 to 12 658
16 903 to 16 904
19 703.5 to 19 704.5
22 444 to 22 445
26 121 to 26 122
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
3 f. 0.5 kHz
4 221
6 332.5
8 438
12 658.5
16 904.5
19 705
22 445.5
26 122.5
4 351
6 501
8 707
13 077
17 242
19 755
22 696
26 145
4 352.4 to 4 436.4
6 502.4 to 6 523.4
29 f. 3 kHz
8 f. 3 kHz
36 f. 3 kHz
41 f. 3 kHz
56 f. 3 kHz
15 f. 3 kHz
53 f. 3 kHz
10 f. 3 kHz
4 438
6 525
8 815
13 200
17 410
19 800
22 855
26 175
Limits (kHz) Frequencies assignable to coast stations for wide-band and A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy, facsimile, special and data transmission systems and directprinting telegraphy systems Limits (kHz)
Frequencies assignable to coast stations for telephony, duplex operation a) Limits (kHz)
8 708.4 13 078.4 17 243.4 19 756.4 22 697.4 26 146.4 to to to to to to 8 813.4 13 198.4 17 408.4 19 798.4 22 853.4 26 173.4
a)
See Part B, Section I.
b)
See Part B, Section III.
c)
The frequency bands may also be used by buoy stations for oceanographic data transmission and by stations interrogating these buoys.
d)
See Part B, Section II.
e)
In the frequency bands to be used by ship stations for A1A Morse telegraphy working at speeds not exceeding 40 Bd, administrations may assign additional frequencies interleaved between the assignable frequencies. Any frequencies so assigned shall be multiples of 100 Hz. Administrations shall ensure a uniform distribution of such assignments within the bands.
f)
See Part B, Section V.
g)
See Part B, Section IV.
200
Maritime Manual
i)
For the use of the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz, 8 291 kHz, 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safety purposes, by single-sideband radiotelephony, see Article 31. (WRC-07)
j)
For the use of the frequencies 4 177.5 kHz, 6 268 kHz, 8 376.5 kHz, 12 520 kHz and 16 695 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safety purposes, by NBDP telegraphy, see Article 31.
k)
For the use of the frequencies 4 207.5 kHz, 6 312 kHz, 8 414.5 kHz, 12 577 kHz and 16 804.5 kHz in these sub-bands by ship and coast stations for distress and safety purposes, by digital selective calling, see Article 31.
l)
The following paired frequencies (for ship/coast stations) 4 208/4 219.5 kHz, 6 312.5/6 331 kHz, 8 415/8 436.5 kHz, 12 577.5/12 657 kHz, 16 805/16 903 kHz, 18 898.5/19 703.5 kHz, 22 374.5/22 444 kHz and 25 208.5/26 121 kHz are the first choice international frequencies for digital selective calling (see Article 54).
m)
Frequencies from these frequency bands may also be used for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working) (see Part B, Section II).
n)
The frequencies 4 210 kHz, 6 314 kHz, 8 416.5 kHz, 12 579 kHz, 16 806.5 kHz, 19 680.5 kHz, 22 376 kHz and 26 100.5 kHz are the exclusive international frequencies for the transmission of maritime safety information (MSI) (see Articles 31 and 33).
o)
The frequency 4 209.5 kHz is an exclusive international frequency for the transmission of NAVTEX type information (see Articles 31 and 33).
p)
These sub-bands, except the frequencies referred to in Notes j), n) and o), may be used for the initial testing and the possible future introduction within the maritime mobile service of new digital technologies. Stations using these sub-bands for this purpose shall not cause harmful interference to, and shall not claim protection from, other stations operating in accordance with Article 5.
PART B – Channelling arrangements
(WRC-07)
Section I – Radiotelephony 1 Radiotelephone channelling arrangements for the frequencies to be used by coast and ship stations in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service are indicated in the following Sub-Sections: Sub-Section A
Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for duplex (two-frequency) operation;
Sub-Section B
Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for simplex (single-frequency) operation and for intership cross-band (two-frequency) operation;
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
201
Sub-Section C-1
Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for ship stations in the band 4 000-4 063 kHz shared with the fixed service;
Sub-Section C-2
Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for ship and coast stations in the band 8 100-8 195 kHz shared with the fixed service.
2 The technical characteristics for single-sideband transmitters are specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173. 3 One or more series of frequencies from Sub-Section A (with the exception of those frequencies mentioned in § 5 below) may be assigned to each coast station, which uses these frequencies associated in pairs (see No. 52.226); each pair consists of a transmitting and a receiving frequency. The series shall be selected with due regard to the areas served and so as to avoid, as far as possible, harmful interference between the services of different coast stations. 4 The frequencies in Sub-Section B are provided for worldwide common use by ships of all categories, according to traffic requirements, for ship transmissions to coast stations and for intership communication. They are also authorized for worldwide common use for transmissions by coast stations (simplex operation) provided the peak envelope power does not exceed 1 kW. 5 purposes:
The following frequencies in Sub-Section A are allocated for calling
Channel No. 421 in the 4 MHz band; Channel No. 606 in the 6 MHz band; Channel No. 821 in the 8 MHz band; Channel No. 1221 in the 12 MHz band; Channel No. 1621 in the 16 MHz band; Channel No. 1806 in the 18 MHz band; Channel No. 2221 in the 22 MHz band; Channel No. 2510 in the 25 MHz band. Calling on the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz shall be permitted only to and from rescue coordination centres (see No. 30.6.1), subject to the safeguards of Resolution 352 (WRC-03) (see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A). The remaining frequencies in Sub-Sections A, B, C-1 and C-2 are working frequencies. (WRC-03)
202
5A
Maritime Manual
For the use of the carrier frequencies: 4 125 kHz (Channel No. 421); 6 215 kHz (Channel No. 606); 8 291 kHz (Channel No. 833); 12 290 kHz (Channel No. 1221); 16 420 kHz (Channel No. 1621);
in Sub-Section A, by coast and ship stations for distress and safety purposes, see Article 31. (WRC-07) 6 a) Maritime radiotelephone stations using single-sideband emissions in the bands between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz exclusively allocated to the maritime mobile service shall operate only on the carrier frequencies shown in the Sub-Sections A and B and, in the case of analogue radiotelephony, shall be in conformity with the technical characteristics specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173. b) Ship stations, when using frequencies for single-sideband emissions in the bands 4 000-4 063 kHz and ship and coast stations, when using frequencies for single-sideband emissions in the band 8 100-8 195 kHz should operate on the carrier frequencies indicated in Sub-Sections C-1 and C-2 respectively. In the case of analogue radiotelephony technical characteristics of the equipment shall be those specified in Recommendation ITU-R M.1173. c) Stations, when employing the single-sideband mode for analogue radiotelephony, shall use only class J3E emissions. For digital communications, class J2D emissions shall be used. (WRC-03) 7 The channelling plan established in Sub-Section C-2 does not prejudice the rights of administrations to establish, and to notify assignments to stations in the maritime mobile service other than those using radiotelephony in the band 8 1008 195 kHz, in conformity with the relevant provisions of these Regulations.
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
203
Sub-Section A Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for duplex (two-frequency) operation 4 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Ship stations Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
401 402 403 404 405
4 357 4 360 4 363 4 366 4 369
4 358.4 4 361.4 4 364.4 4 367.4 4 370.4
4 065 4 068 4 071 4 074 4 077
4 066.4 4 069.4 4 072.4 4 075.4 4 078.4
406 407 408 409 410
4 372 4 375 4 378 4 381 4 384
4 373.4 4 376.4 4 379.4 4 382.4 4 385.4
4 080 4 083 4 086 4 089 4 092
4 081.4 4 084.4 4 087.4 4 090.4 4 093.4
411 412 413 414 415
4 387 4 390 4 393 4 396 4 399
4 388.4 4 391.4 4 394.4 4 397.4 4 400.4
4 095 4 098 4 101 4 104 4 107
4 096.4 4 099.4 4 102.4 4 105.4 4 108.4
416 417 418 419 420
4 402 4 405 4 408 4 411 4 414
4 403.4 4 406.4 4 409.4 4 412.4 4 415.4
4 110 4 113 4 116 4 119 4 122
4 111.4 4 114.4 4 117.4 4 120.4 4 123.4
421 422 423 424 425
4 417 * 4 420 4 423 4 426 4 429
4 418.4 * 4 421.4 4 424.4 4 427.4 4 430.4
4 125 * 4 4 128 4 131 4 134 4 137
4 126.4 * 4 129.4 4 132.4 4 135.4 4 138.4
426 427 428 429
4 432 4 435 4 351 4 354
4 433.4 4 436.4 4 352.4 4 355.4
4 140 4 143
4 141.4 4 144.4
1, 3 1, 3
204
Maritime Manual
6 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations Carrier frequency
Ship stations
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
601 602 603 604 605
6 501 6 504 6 507 6 510 6 513
6 502.4 6 505.4 6 508.4 6 511.4 6 514.4
6 200 6 203 6 206 6 209 6 212
6 201.4 6 204.4 6 207.4 6 210.4 6 213.4
606 607 608
6 516 * 6 519 6 522
6 517.4 * 6 520.4 6 523.4
6 215 * 5 6 218 6 221
6 216.4 * 6 219.4 6 222.4
8 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
801 802 803 804 805
8 719 8 722 8 725 8 728 8 731
8 720.4 8 723.4 8 726.4 8 729.4 8 732.4
8 195 8 198 8 201 8 204 8 207
8 196.4 8 199.4 8 202.4 8 205.4 8 208.4
806 807 808 809 810
8 734 8 737 8 740 8 743 8 746
8 735.4 8 738.4 8 741.4 8 744.4 8 747.4
8 210 8 213 8 216 8 219 8 222
8 211.4 8 214.4 8 217.4 8 220.4 8 223.4
811 812 813 814 815
8 749 8 752 8 755 8 758 8 761
8 750.4 8 753.4 8 756.4 8 759.4 8 762.4
8 225 8 228 8 231 8 234 8 237
8 226.4 8 229.4 8 232.4 8 235.4 8 238.4
816 817 818 819 820
8 764 8 767 8 770 8 773 8 776
8 765.4 8 768.4 8 771.4 8 774.4 8 777.4
8 240 8 243 8 246 8 249 8 252
8 241.4 8 244.4 8 247.4 8 250.4 8 253.4
821 822 823 824 825
8 779 * 8 782 8 785 8 788 8 791
8 780.4 * 8 783.4 8 786.4 8 789.4 8 792.4
8 255 * 8 258 8 261 8 264 8 267
8 256.4 * 8 259.4 8 262.4 8 265.4 8 268.4
(continued)
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
205
8 MHz band (end) Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
826 827 828 829 830
8 794 8 797 8 800 8 803 8 806
8 795.4 8 798.4 8 801.4 8 804.4 8 807.4
8 270 8 273 8 276 8 279 8 282
8 271.4 8 274.4 8 277.4 8 280.4 8 283.4
831 832 833 834 835
8 809 8 812 8 291 8 707 8 710
8 810.4 8 813.4 8 292.4 8 708.4 8 711.4
8 285 8 288 8 291
8 286.4 8 289.4 8 292.4
836 837
3, 6 3, 6 3, 6 3, 6
7
8 713 8 716
7
8 714.4 8 717.4
12 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1201 1202 1203 1204 1205
13 077 13 080 13 083 13 086 13 089
13 078.4 13 081.4 13 084.4 13 087.4 13 090.4
12 230 12 233 12 236 12 239 12 242
12 231.4 12 234.4 12 237.4 12 240.4 12 243.4
1206 1207 1208 1209 1210
13 092 13 095 13 098 13 101 13 104
13 093.4 13 096.4 13 099.4 13 102.4 13 105.4
12 245 12 248 12 251 12 254 12 257
12 246.4 12 249.4 12 252.4 12 255.4 12 258.4
1211 1212 1213 1214 1215
13 107 13 110 13 113 13 116 13 119
13 108.4 13 111.4 13 114.4 13 117.4 13 120.4
12 260 12 263 12 266 12 269 12 272
12 261.4 12 264.4 12 267.4 12 270.4 12 273.4
1216 1217 1218 1219 1220
13 122 13 125 13 128 13 131 13 134
13 123.4 13 126.4 13 129.4 13 132.4 13 135.4
12 275 12 278 12 281 12 284 12 287
12 276.4 12 279.4 12 282.4 12 285.4 12 288.4
(continued)
206
Maritime Manual
12 MHz band (end) Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1221 1222 1223 1224 1225
13 137 * 13 140 13 143 13 146 13 149
13 138.4 * 13 141.4 13 144.4 13 147.4 13 150.4
12 290 * 8 12 293 12 296 12 299 12 302
12 291.4 * 12 294.4 12 297.4 12 300.4 12 303.4
1226 1227 1228 1229 1230
13 152 13 155 13 158 13 161 13 164
13 153.4 13 156.4 13 159.4 13 162.4 13 165.4
12 305 12 308 12 311 12 314 12 317
12 306.4 12 309.4 12 312.4 12 315.4 12 318.4
1231 1232 1233 1234 1235
13 167 13 170 13 173 13 176 13 179
13 168.4 13 171.4 13 174.4 13 177.4 13 180.4
12 320 12 323 12 326 12 329 12 332
12 321.4 12 324.4 12 327.4 12 330.4 12 333.4
1236 1237 1238 1239 1240
13 182 13 185 13 188 13 191 13 194
13 183.4 13 186.4 13 189.4 13 192.4 13 195.4
12 335 12 338 12 341 12 344 12 347
12 336.4 12 339.4 12 342.4 12 345.4 12 348.4
1241
13 197
13 198.4
12 350
12 351.4
16 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1601 1602 1603 1604 1605
17 242 17 245 17 248 17 251 17 254
17 243.4 17 246.4 17 249.4 17 252.4 17 255.4
16 360 16 363 16 366 16 369 16 372
16 361.4 16 364.4 16 367.4 16 370.4 16 373.4
1606 1607 1608 1609 1610
17 257 17 260 17 263 17 266 17 269
17 258.4 17 261.4 17 264.4 17 267.4 17 270.4
16 375 16 378 16 381 16 384 16 387
16 376.4 16 379.4 16 382.4 16 385.4 16 388.4
(continued)
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
207
16 MHz band (continued ) Channel No.
Coast stations Carrier frequency
Ship stations
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640
17 272 17 275 17 278 17 281 17 284 17 287 17 290 17 293 17 296 17 299 17 302 * 17 305 17 308 17 311 17 314 17 317 17 320 17 323 17 326 17 329 17 332 17 335 17 338 17 341 17 344 17 347 17 350 17 353 17 356 17 359
17 273.4 17 276.4 17 279.4 17 282.4 17 285.4 17 288.4 17 291.4 17 294.4 17 297.4 17 300.4 17 303.4* 17 306.4 17 309.4 17 312.4 17 315.4 17 318.4 17 321.4 17 324.4 17 327.4 17 330.4 17 333.4 17 336.4 17 339.4 17 342.4 17 345.4 17 348.4 17 351.4 17 354.4 17 357.4 17 360.4
16 390 16 393 16 396 16 399 16 402 16 405 16 408 16 411 16 414 16 417 16 420 * 9 16 423 16 426 16 429 16 432 16 435 16 438 16 441 16 444 16 447 16 450 16 453 16 456 16 459 16 462 16 465 16 468 16 471 16 474 16 477
16 391.4 16 394.4 16 397.4 16 400.4 16 403.4 16 406.4 16 409.4 16 412.4 16 415.4 16 418.4 16 421.4 * 16 424.4 16 427.4 16 430.4 16 433.4 16 436.4 16 439.4 16 442.4 16 445.4 16 448.4 16 451.4 16 454.4 16 457.4 16 460.4 16 463.4 16 466.4 16 469.4 16 472.4 16 475.4 16 478.4
1641 1642 1643 1644 1645
17 362 17 365 17 368 17 371 17 374
17 363.4 17 366.4 17 369.4 17 372.4 17 375.4
16 480 16 483 16 486 16 489 16 492
16 481.4 16 484.4 16 487.4 16 490.4 16 493.4
1646 1647 1648 1649 1650
17 377 17 380 17 383 17 386 17 389
17 378.4 17 381.4 17 384.4 17 387.4 17 390.4
16 495 16 498 16 501 16 504 16 507
16 496.4 16 499.4 16 502.4 16 505.4 16 508.4
(continued)
208
Maritime Manual
16 MHz band (end) Channel No.
1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
17 392 17 395 17 398 17 401 17 404 17 407
17 393.4 17 396.4 17 399.4 17 402.4 17 405.4 17 408.4
16 510 16 513 16 516 16 519 16 522 16 525
16 511.4 16 514.4 16 517.4 16 520.4 16 523.4 16 526.4
18/19 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1801 1802 1803 1804 1805
19 755 19 758 19 761 19 764 19 767
19 756.4 19 759.4 19 762.4 19 765.4 19 768.4
18 780 18 783 18 786 18 789 18 792
18 781.4 18 784.4 18 787.4 18 790.4 18 793.4
1806 1807 1808 1809 1810
19 770 * 19 773 19 776 19 779 19 782
19 771.4 * 19 774.4 19 777.4 19 780.4 19 783.4
18 795 * 18 798 18 801 18 804 18 807
18 796.4 * 18 799.4 18 802.4 18 805.4 18 808.4
1811 1812 1813 1814 1815
19 785 19 788 19 791 19 794 19 797
19 786.4 19 789.4 19 792.4 19 795.4 19 798.4
18 810 18 813 18 816 18 819 18 822
18 811.4 18 814.4 18 817.4 18 820.4 18 823.4
22 MHz band Channel No.
2201 2202 2203 2204 2205
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
22 696 22 699 22 702 22 705 22 708
22 697.4 22 700.4 22 703.4 22 706.4 22 709.4
22 000 22 003 22 006 22 009 22 012
Assigned frequency 22 001.4 22 004.4 22 007.4 22 010.4 22 013.4
(continued)
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
209
22 MHz band (continued) Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
2206 2207 2208 2209 2210
22 711 22 714 22 717 22 720 22 723
22 712.4 22 715.4 22 718.4 22 721.4 22 724.4
22 015 22 018 22 021 22 024 22 027
22 016.4 22 019.4 22 022.4 22 025.4 22 028.4
2211 2212 2213 2214 2215
22 726 22 729 22 732 22 735 22 738
22 727.4 22 730.4 22 733.4 22 736.4 22 739.4
22 030 22 033 22 036 22 039 22 042
22 031.4 22 034.4 22 037.4 22 040.4 22 043.4
2216 2217 2218 2219 2220
22 741 22 744 22 747 22 750 22 753
22 742.4 22 745.4 22 748.4 22 751.4 22 754.4
22 045 22 048 22 051 22 054 22 057
22 046.4 22 049.4 22 052.4 22 055.4 22 058.4
2221 2222 2223 2224 2225
22 756 * 22 759 22 762 22 765 22 768
22 757.4 * 22 760.4 22 763.4 22 766.4 22 769.4
22 060 * 22 063 22 066 22 069 22 072
22 061.4 * 22 064.4 22 067.4 22 070.4 22 073.4
2226 2227 2228 2229 2230
22 771 22 774 22 777 22 780 22 783
22 772.4 22 775.4 22 778.4 22 781.4 22 784.4
22 075 22 078 22 081 22 084 22 087
22 076.4 22 079.4 22 082.4 22 085.4 22 088.4
2231 2232 2233 2234 2235
22 786 22 789 22 792 22 795 22 798
22 787.4 22 790.4 22 793.4 22 796.4 22 799.4
22 090 22 093 22 096 22 099 22 102
22 091.4 22 094.4 22 097.4 22 100.4 22 103.4
2236 2237 2238 2239 2240
22 801 22 804 22 807 22 810 22 813
22 802.4 22 805.4 22 808.4 22 811.4 22 814.4
22 105 22 108 22 111 22 114 22 117
22 106.4 22 109.4 22 112.4 22 115.4 22 118.4
2241 2242 2243 2244 2245
22 816 22 819 22 822 22 825 22 828
22 817.4 22 820.4 22 823.4 22 826.4 22 829.4
22 120 22 123 22 126 22 129 22 132
22 121.4 22 124.4 22 127.4 22 130.4 22 133.4
(continued)
210
Maritime Manual
22 MHz band (end) Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
2246 2247 2248 2249 2250
22 831 22 834 22 837 22 840 22 843
22 832.4 22 835.4 22 838.4 22 841.4 22 844.4
22 135 22 138 22 141 22 144 22 147
22 136.4 22 139.4 22 142.4 22 145.4 22 148.4
2251 2252 2253
22 846 22 849 22 852
22 847.4 22 850.4 22 853.4
22 150 22 153 22 156
22 151.4 22 154.4 22 157.4
25/26 MHz band Channel No.
Coast stations
Ship stations
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
2501 2502 2503 2504 2505
26 145 26 148 26 151 26 154 26 157
26 146.4 26 149.4 26 152.4 26 155.4 26 158.4
25 070 25 073 25 076 25 079 25 082
25 071.4 25 074.4 25 077.4 25 080.4 25 083.4
2506 2507 2508 2509 2510
26 160 26 163 26 166 26 169 26 172 *
26 161.4 26 164.4 26 167.4 26 170.4 26 173.4 *
25 085 25 088 25 091 25 094 25 097 *
25 086.4 25 089.4 25 092.4 25 095.4 25 098.4 *
1
These coast station frequencies may be paired with a ship station frequency from the Table of simplex frequencies for ship and coast stations (see Sub-Section B) or with a frequency from the band 4 000-4 063 kHz (see Sub-Section C-1) to be selected by the administration concerned.
3
These channels may also be used for simplex (single frequency) operation.
4
For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz, see Nos. 52.224 and 52.225, and Appendix 15.
5
For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 6 215 kHz, see Appendix 15.
(WRC-07)
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
211
6
These coast station frequencies may be paired with a ship station frequency from the Table of simplex frequencies for ship and coast stations (see Sub-Section B) or with a frequency from the band 8 100-8 195 kHz (see Sub-Section C-2) to be selected by the administration concerned.
7
For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 8 291 kHz, see Appendix 15.
8
For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 12 290 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A and Appendix 15. (WRC-2000)
9
For the conditions of use of the carrier frequency 16 420 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A and Appendix 15. (WRC-2000)
*
The frequencies followed by an asterisk are calling frequencies (see Nos. 52.221 and 52.222).
Sub-Section B Table of single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for simplex (single-frequency) operation and for intership cross-band (two-frequency) operation (See § 4 of Section I of this Appendix)
4 MHz band1
6 MHz band
Carrier Assigned Carrier frequency frequency frequency
4 146 4 149
4 147.4 4 150.4
6 224 6 227 6 230
Assigned frequency
6 225.4 6 228.4 6 231.4
8 MHz band2
12 MHz band3
Carrier Assigned Carrier Assigned frequency frequency frequency frequency
8 294 8 297
8 295.4 8 298.4
12 353 12 356 12 362 12 365
12 354.4 12 357.4 12 363.4 12 366.4
1
These frequencies may be used for duplex operation with coast stations operating on Channel Nos. 428 and 429 (see Sub-Section A).
2
These frequencies may be used for duplex operation with coast stations operating on Channel Nos. 834 up to and including 837 (see Sub-Section A).
3
For use of frequencies 12 359 kHz and 16 537 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A. (WRC-2000)
212
Maritime Manual
16 MHz band3 Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
16 528 16 531 16 534
16 529.4 16 532.4 16 535.4
16 540 16 543 16 546
16 541.4 16 544.4 16 547.4
3
18/19 MHz band
22 MHz band
Carrier Assigned Carrier frequency frequency frequency
18 825 18 828 18 831 18 834 18 837 18 840 18 843
18 826.4 18 829.4 18 832.4 18 835.4 18 838.4 18 841.4 18 844.4
22 159 22 162 22 165 22 168 22 171 22 174 22 177
Assigned frequency
22 160.4 22 163.4 22 166.4 22 169.4 22 172.4 22 175.4 22 178.4
25/26 MHz band Carrier Assigned frequency frequency
25 100 25 103 25 106 25 109 25 112 25 115 25 118
25 101.4 25 104.4 25 107.4 25 110.4 25 113.4 25 116.4 25 119.4
For use of frequencies 12 359 kHz and 16 537 kHz, see Nos. 52.221A and 52.222A. (WRC-2000)
Sub-Section C-1 Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for ship stations in the band 4 000-4 063 kHz shared with the fixed service
The frequencies in this Sub-Section may be used: for supplementing ship-to-shore channels for duplex operation in Sub-Section A; for intership simplex (single-frequency) and cross-band operation; for cross-band working with coast stations on channels in Sub-Section C-2; for duplex operation with coast stations working in the band 4 438-4 650 kHz; for duplex operation with Channel Nos. 428 and 429.
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
*
Channel No.
Carrier frequency
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 000* 4 003* 4 006 4 009 4 012 4 015 4 018 4 021 4 024 4 027 4 030
213
Assigned frequency 4 001.4* 4 004.4* 4 007.4 4 010.4 4 013.4 4 016.4 4 019.4 4 022.4 4 025.4 4 028.4 4 031.4
Channel No.
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 033 4 036 4 039 4 042 4 045 4 048 4 051 4 054 4 057 4 060
4 034.4 4 037.4 4 040.4 4 043.4 4 046.4 4 049.4 4 052.4 4 055.4 4 058.4 4 061.4
Administrations are requested to urge ship stations under their jurisdiction to refrain from using the band 4 000-4 005 kHz when navigating in Region 3 (see also No. 5.126).
Sub-Section C-2 Table of recommended single-sideband transmitting frequencies (kHz) for ship and coast stations in the band 8 100-8 195 kHz shared with the fixed service (See § 7 of Section I of this Appendix)
The frequencies in this Sub-Section may be used: for supplementing ship-to-shore and shore-to-ship channels for duplex operation in Sub-Section A; for intership simplex (single frequency) and cross-band operation; for cross-band working with ship stations on channels in Sub-Section C-1; for ship-to-shore or shore-to-ship simplex operation; for duplex operation with Channel Nos. 834, 835, 836 and 837.
214
Maritime Manual
Channel No.
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
Channel No.
Carrier frequency
Assigned frequency
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 101 8 104 8 107 8 110 8 113 8 116 8 119 8 122 8 125 8 128 8 131 8 134 8 137 8 140 8 143 8 146
8 102.4 8 105.4 8 108.4 8 111.4 8 114.4 8 117.4 8 120.4 8 123.4 8 126.4 8 129.4 8 132.4 8 135.4 8 138.4 8 141.4 8 144.4 8 147.4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
8 149 8 152 8 155 8 158 8 161 8 164 8 167 8 170 8 173 8 176 8 179 8 182 8 185 8 188 8 191
8 150.4 8 153.4 8 156.4 8 159.4 8 162.4 8 165.4 8 168.4 8 171.4 8 174.4 8 177.4 8 180.4 8 183.4 8 186.4 8 189.4 8 192.4
Section II – Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy (paired frequencies) 1 Each coast station which uses paired frequencies is assigned one or more frequency pairs from the following series; each pair consists of a transmitting and a receiving frequency. 2 The speed of the narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy and data systems shall not exceed 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK. Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) Channel No.
4 MHz band 1 Transmit Receive
6 MHz band 3 Transmit Receive
8 MHz band 4 Transmit Receive
1 2 3 4 5
4 210.5 4 211 4 211.5 4 212 4 212.5
4 172.5 4 173 4 173.5 4 174 4 174.5
6 314.5 6 315 6 315.5 6 316 6 316.5
6 263 6 263.5 6 264 6 264.5 6 265
8 376.5 2 8 417 8 417.5 8 418 8 418.5
8 376.5 2 8 377 8 377.5 8 378 8 378.5
6 7 8 9 10
4 213 4 213.5 4 214 4 214.5 4 215
4 175 4 175.5 4 176 4 176.5 4 177
6 317 6 317.5 6 318 6 318.5 6 319
6 265.5 6 266 6 266.5 6 267 6 267.5
8 419 8 419.5 8 420 8 420.5 8 421
8 379 8 379.5 8 380 8 380.5 8 381
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
215
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz)
Channel No.
4 MHz band 1 (end) Transmit
11 12 13 14 15
4 177.5 4 215.5 4 216 4 216.5 4 217
16 17 18 19 20
4 217.5 4 218 4 218.5 4 219
2
6 MHz band 3 (end)
Receive 4 177.5 4 178 4 178.5 4 179 4 179.5
Transmit 2
2
Receive 2
8 MHz band 4 (end) Transmit
Receive
6 268 6 319.5 6 320 6 320.5 6 321
6 268 6 268.5 6 269 6 269.5 6 270
8 421.5 8 422 8 422.5 8 423 8 423.5
8 381.5 8 382 8 382.5 8 383 8 383.5
6 321.5 6 322 6 322.5 6 323 6 323.5
6 270.5 6 271 6 271.5 6 272 6 272.5
8 424 8 424.5 8 425 8 425.5 8 426
8 384 8 384.5 8 385 8 385.5 8 386
21 22 23 24 25
6 324 6 324.5 6 325 6 325.5 6 326
6 273 6 273.5 6 274 6 274.5 6 275
8 426.5 8 427 8 427.5 8 428 8 428.5
8 386.5 8 387 8 387.5 8 388 8 388.5
26 27 28 29 30
6 326.5 6 327 6 327.5 6 328 6 328.5
6 275.5 6 281 6 281.5 6 282 6 282.5
8 429 8 429.5 8 430 8 430.5 8 431
8 389 8 389.5 8 390 8 390.5 8 391
31 32 33 34 35
6 329 6 329.5 6 330 6 330.5
6 283 6 283.5 6 284 6 284.5
8 431.5 8 432 8 432.5 8 433 8 433.5
8 391.5 8 392 8 392.5 8 393 8 393.5
8 434 8 434.5 8 435 8 435.5 8 436
8 394 8 394.5 8 395 8 395.5 8 396
4 180 4 180.5 4 181 4 181.5
36 37 38 39 40 1
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working), with the exception of channel No. 11 (see Appendix 15).
2
For the conditions of use of this frequency, see Article 31.
3
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 25 up to and including 34 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).
4
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 29 up to and including 40 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).
216
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) Channel No.
12 MHz band 5 Transmit
Receive
16 MHz band 6 Transmit
Receive
18/19 MHz band Transmit
Receive
1 2 3 4 5
12 579.5 12 580 12 580.5 12 581 12 581.5
12 477 12 477.5 12 478 12 478.5 12 479
16 807 16 807.5 16 808 16 808.5 16 809
16 683.5 16 684 16 684.5 16 685 16 685.5
19 681 19 681.5 19 682 19 682.5 19 683
18 870.5 18 871 18 871.5 18 872 18 872.5
6 7 8 9 10
12 582 12 582.5 12 583 12 583.5 12 584
12 479.5 12 480 12 480.5 12 481 12 481.5
16 809.5 16 810 16 810.5 16 811 16 811.5
16 686 16 686.5 16 687 16 687.5 16 688
19 683.5 19 684 19 684.5 19 685 19 685.5
18 873 18 873.5 18 874 18 874.5 18 875
11 12 13 14 15
12 584.5 12 585 12 585.5 12 586 12 586.5
12 482 12 482.5 12 483 12 483.5 12 484
16 812 16 812.5 16 813 16 813.5 16 814
16 688.5 16 689 16 689.5 16 690 16 690.5
19 686 19 686.5 19 687 19 687.5 19 688
18 875.5 18 876 18 876.5 18 877 18 877.5
16 17 18 19 20
12 587 12 587.5 12 588 12 588.5 12 589
12 484.5 12 485 12 485.5 12 486 12 486.5
16 814.5 16 815 16 815.5 16 816 16 816.5
16 691 16 691.5 16 692 16 692.5 16 693
19 688.5 19 689 19 689.5 19 690 19 690.5
18 878 18 878.5 18 879 18 879.5 18 880
21 22 23 24 25
12 589.5 12 590 12 590.5 12 591 12 591.5
12 487 12 487.5 12 488 12 488.5 12 489
16 817 16 817.5 16 818 16 695 2 16 818.5
16 693.5 16 694 16 694.5 16 695 2 16 695.5
19 691 19 691.5 19 692 19 692.5 19 693
18 880.5 18 881 18 881.5 18 882 18 882.5
26 27 28 29 30
12 592 12 592.5 12 593 12 593.5 12 594
12 489.5 12 490 12 490.5 12 491 12 491.5
16 819 16 819.5 16 820 16 820.5 16 821
16 696 16 696.5 16 697 16 697.5 16 698
19 693.5 19 694 19 694.5 19 695 19 695.5
18 883 18 883.5 18 884 18 884.5 18 885
31 32 33 34 35
12 594.5 12 595 12 595.5 12 596 12 596.5
12 492 12 492.5 12 493 12 493.5 12 494
16 821.5 16 822 16 822.5 16 823 16 823.5
16 698.5 16 699 16 699.5 16 700 16 700.5
19 696 19 696.5 19 697 19 697.5 19 698
18 885.5 18 886 18 886.5 18 887 18 887.5
36 37 38 39 40
12 597 12 597.5 12 598 12 598.5 12 599
12 494.5 12 495 12 495.5 12 496 12 496.5
16 824 16 824.5 16 825 16 825.5 16 826
16 701 16 701.5 16 702 16 702.5 16 703
19 698.5 19 699 19 699.5 19 700 19 700.5
18 888 18 888.5 18 889 18 889.5 18 890
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
217
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) Channel No. 41 42 43 44 45
12 MHz band 5 (cont.)
16 MHz band 6 (cont.)
18/19 MHz band (end)
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
12 599.5 12 600 12 600.5 12 601 12 601.5
Receive
12 497 12 497.5 12 498 12 498.5 12 499
16 826.5 16 827 16 827.5 16 828 16 828.5
Receive
16 703.5 16 704 16 704.5 16 705 16 705.5
Receive
19 701 19 701.5 19 702 19 702.5 19 703
18 890.5 18 891 18 891.5 18 892 18 892.5
5
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 58 up to and including 156 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working), with the exception of channel No. 87 (see Appendix 15).
6
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channel Nos. 71 up to and including 193 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working). Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 12 MHz band 5 (cont.)
16 MHz band 6 (cont.)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
Transmit
Receive
46 47 48 49 50
12 602 12 602.5 12 603 12 603.5 12 604
12 499.5 12 500 12 500.5 12 501 12 501.5
16 829 16 829.5 16 830 16 830.5 16 831
16 706 16 706.5 16 707 16 707.5 16 708
51 52 53 54 55
12 604.5 12 605 12 605.5 12 606 12 606.5
12 502 12 502.5 12 503 12 503.5 12 504
16 831.5 16 832 16 832.5 16 833 16 833.5
16 708.5 16 709 16 709.5 16 710 16 710.5
56 57 58 59 60
12 607 12 607.5 12 608 12 608.5 12 609
12 504.5 12 505 12 505.5 12 506 12 506.5
16 834 16 834.5 16 835 16 835.5 16 836
16 711 16 711.5 16 712 16 712.5 16 713
61 62 63 64 65
12 609.5 12 610 12 610.5 12 611 12 611.5
12 507 12 507.5 12 508 12 508.5 12 509
16 836.5 16 837 16 837.5 16 838 16 838.5
16 713.5 16 714 16 714.5 16 715 16 715.5
66 67 68 69 70
12 612 12 612.5 12 613 12 613.5 12 614
12 509.5 12 510 12 510.5 12 511 12 511.5
16 839 16 839.5 16 840 16 840.5 16 841
16 716 16 716.5 16 717 16 717.5 16 718
218
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 12 MHz band 5 (cont.)
16 MHz band 6 (cont.)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
Transmit
Receive
71 72 73 74 75
12 614.5 12 615 12 615.5 12 616 12 616.5
12 512 12 512.5 12 513 12 513.5 12 514
16 841.5 16 842 16 842.5 16 843 16 843.5
16 718.5 16 719 16 719.5 16 720 16 720.5
76 77 78 79 80
12 617 12 617.5 12 618 12 618.5 12 619
12 514.5 12 515 12 515.5 12 516 12 516.5
16 844 16 844.5 16 845 16 845.5 16 846
16 721 16 721.5 16 722 16 722.5 16 723
81 82 83 84 85
12 619.5 12 620 12 620.5 12 621 12 621.5
12 517 12 517.5 12 518 12 518.5 12 519
16 846.5 16 847 16 847.5 16 848 16 848.5
16 723.5 16 724 16 724.5 16 725 16 725.5
86 87 88 89 90
12 622 12 520 2 12 622.5 12 623 12 623.5
12 519.5 12 520 2 12 520.5 12 521 12 521.5
16 849 16 849.5 16 850 16 850.5 16 851
16 726 16 726.5 16 727 16 727.5 16 728
91 92 93 94 95
12 624 12 624.5 12 625 12 625.5 12 626
12 522 12 522.5 12 523 12 523.5 12 524
16 851.5 16 852 16 852.5 16 853 16 853.5
16 728.5 16 729 16 729.5 16 730 16 730.5
96 97 98 99 100
12 626.5 12 627 12 627.5 12 628 12 628.5
12 524.5 12 525 12 525.5 12 526 12 526.5
16 854 16 854.5 16 855 16 855.5 16 856
16 731 16 731.5 16 732 16 732.5 16 733
101 102 103 104 105
12 629 12 629.5 12 630 12 630.5 12 631
12 527 12 527.5 12 528 12 528.5 12 529
16 856.5 16 857 16 857.5 16 858 16 858.5
16 733.5 16 739 16 739.5 16 740 16 740.5
106 107 108 109 110
12 631.5 12 632 12 632.5 12 633 12 633.5
12 529.5 12 530 12 530.5 12 531 12 531.5
16 859 16 859.5 16 860 16 860.5 16 861
16 741 16 741.5 16 742 16 742.5 16 743
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
219
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 12 MHz band 5 (cont.)
16 MHz band 6 (cont.)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
Transmit
Receive
111 112 113 114 115
12 634 12 634.5 12 635 12 635.5 12 636
12 532 12 532.5 12 533 12 533.5 12 534
16 861.5 16 862 16 862.5 16 863 16 863.5
16 743.5 16 744 16 744.5 16 745 16 745.5
116 117 118 119 120
12 636.5 12 637 12 637.5 12 638 12 638.5
12 534.5 12 535 12 535.5 12 536 12 536.5
16 864 16 864.5 16 865 16 865.5 16 866
16 746 16 746.5 16 747 16 747.5 16 748
121 122 123 124 125
12 639 12 639.5 12 640 12 640.5 12 641
12 537 12 537.5 12 538 12 538.5 12 539
16 866.5 16 867 16 867.5 16 868 16 868.5
16 748.5 16 749 16 749.5 16 750 16 750.5
126 127 128 129 130
12 641.5 12 642 12 642.5 12 643 12 643.5
12 539.5 12 540 12 540.5 12 541 12 541.5
16 869 16 869.5 16 870 16 870.5 16 871
16 751 16 751.5 16 752 16 752.5 16 753
131 132 133 134 135
12 644 12 644.5 12 645 12 645.5 12 646
12 542 12 542.5 12 543 12 543.5 12 544
16 871.5 16 872 16 872.5 16 873 16 873.5
16 753.5 16 754 16 754.5 16 755 16 755.5
136 137 138 139 140
12 646.5 12 647 12 647.5 12 648 12 648.5
12 544.5 12 545 12 545.5 12 546 12 546.5
16 874 16 874.5 16 875 16 875.5 16 876
16 756 16 756.5 16 757 16 757.5 16 758
141 142 143 144 145
12 649 12 649.5 12 650 12 650.5 12 651
12 547 12 547.5 12 548 12 548.5 12 549
16 876.5 16 877 16 877.5 16 878 16 878.5
16 758.5 16 759 16 759.5 16 760 16 760.5
146 147 148 149 150
12 651.5 12 652 12 652.5 12 653 12 653.5
12 549.5 12 555 12 555.5 12 556 12 556.5
16 879 16 879.5 16 880 16 880.5 16 881
16 761 16 761.5 16 762 16 762.5 16 763
220
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 12 MHz band 5 (end)
16 MHz band 6 (end)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
Transmit
Receive
151 152 153 154 155
12 654 12 654.5 12 655 12 655.5 12 656
12 557 12 557.5 12 558 12 558.5 12 559
16 881.5 16 882 16 882.5 16 883 16 883.5
16 763.5 16 764 16 764.5 16 765 16 765.5
156 157 158 159 160
12 656.5
12 559.5
16 884 16 884.5 16 885 16 885.5 16 886
16 766 16 766.5 16 767 16 767.5 16 768
161 162 163 164 165
16 886.5 16 887 16 887.5 16 888 16 888.5
16 768.5 16 769 16 769.5 16 770 16 770.5
166 167 168 169 170
16 889 16 889.5 16 890 16 890.5 16 891
16 771 16 771.5 16 772 16 772.5 16 773
171 172 173 174 175
16 891.5 16 892 16 892.5 16 893 16 893.5
16 773.5 16 774 16 774.5 16 775 16 775.5
176 177 178 179 180
16 894 16 894.5 16 895 16 895.5 16 896
16 776 16 776.5 16 777 16 777.5 16 778
181 182 183 184 185
16 896.5 16 897 16 897.5 16 898 16 898.5
16 778.5 16 779 16 779.5 16 780 16 780.5
186 187 188 189 190
16 899 16 899.5 16 900 16 900.5 16 901
16 781 16 781.5 16 782 16 782.5 16 783
191 192 193
16 901.5 16 902 16 902.5
16 783.5 16 784 16 784.5
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
221
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) Channel No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 7
22 MHz band 7 Transmit Receive 22 376.5 22 377 22 377.5 22 378 22 378.5 22 379 22 379.5 22 380 22 380.5 22 381 22 381.5 22 382 22 382.5 22 383 22 383.5 22 384 22 384.5 22 385 22 385.5 22 386 22 386.5 22 387 22 387.5 22 388 22 388.5 22 389 22 389.5 22 390 22 390.5 22 391 22 391.5 22 392 22 392.5 22 393 22 393.5 22 394 22 394.5 22 395 22 395.5 22 396 22 396.5 22 397 22 397.5 22 398 22 398.5 22 399 22 399.5 22 400 22 400.5 22 401
22 284.5 22 285 22 285.5 22 286 22 286.5 22 287 22 287.5 22 288 22 288.5 22 289 22 289.5 22 290 22 290.5 22 291 22 291.5 22 292 22 292.5 22 293 22 293.5 22 294 22 294.5 22 295 22 295.5 22 296 22 296.5 22 297 22 297.5 22 298 22 298.5 22 299 22 299.5 22 300 22 300.5 22 301 22 301.5 22 302 22 302.5 22 303 22 303.5 22 304 22 304.5 22 305 22 305.5 22 306 22 306.5 22 307 22 307.5 22 308 22 308.5 22 309
25/26 MHz band Transmit Receive 26 101 26 101.5 26 102 26 102.5 26 103 26 103.5 26 104 26 104.5 26 105 26 105.5 26 106 26 106.5 26 107 26 107.5 26 108 26 108.5 26 109 26 109.5 26 110 26 110.5 26 111 26 111.5 26 112 26 112.5 26 113 26 113.5 26 114 26 114.5 26 115 26 115.5 26 116 26 116.5 26 117 26 117.5 26 118 26 118.5 26 119 26 119.5 26 120 26 120.5
25 173 25 173.5 25 174 25 174.5 25 175 25 175.5 25 176 25 176.5 25 177 25 177.5 25 178 25 178.5 25 179 25 179.5 25 180 25 180.5 25 181 25 181.5 25 182 25 182.5 25 183 25 183.5 25 184 25 184.5 25 185 25 185.5 25 186 25 186.5 25 187 25 187.5 25 188 25 188.5 25 189 25 189.5 25 190 25 190.5 25 191 25 191.5 25 192 25 192.5
Ship stations may use the coast station receiving frequencies of channels No. 68 up to and including 135 for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working).
222
Maritime Manual
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 22 MHz band 7 (cont.)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
22 401.5 22 402 22 402.5 22 403 22 403.5 22 404 22 404.5 22 405 22 405.5 22 406 22 406.5 22 407 22 407.5 22 408 22 408.5 22 409 22 409.5 22 410 22 410.5 22 411 22 411.5 22 412 22 412.5 22 413 22 413.5 22 414 22 414.5 22 415 22 415.5 22 416 22 416.5 22 417 22 417.5 22 418 22 418.5 22 419 22 419.5 22 420 22 420.5 22 421
22 309.5 22 310 22 310.5 22 311 22 311.5 22 312 22 312.5 22 313 22 313.5 22 314 22 314.5 22 315 22 315.5 22 316 22 316.5 22 317 22 317.5 22 318 22 318.5 22 319 22 319.5 22 320 22 320.5 22 321 22 321.5 22 322 22 322.5 22 323 22 323.5 22 324 22 324.5 22 325 22 325.5 22 326 22 326.5 22 327 22 327.5 22 328 22 328.5 22 329
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
223
Table of frequencies for two-frequency operation by coast stations (kHz) 22 MHz band 7 (end)
Channel No.
Transmit
Receive
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135
22 421.5 22 422 22 422.5 22 423 22 423.5 22 424 22 424.5 22 425 22 425.5 22 426 22 426.5 22 427 22 427.5 22 428 22 428.5 22 429 22 429.5 22 430 22 430.5 22 431 22 431.5 22 432 22 432.5 22 433 22 433.5 22 434 22 434.5 22 435 22 435.5 22 436 22 436.5 22 437 22 437.5 22 438 22 438.5 22 439 22 439.5 22 440 22 440.5 22 441 22 441.5 22 442 22 442.5 22 443 22 443.5
22 329.5 22 330 22 330.5 22 331 22 331.5 22 332 22 332.5 22 333 22 333.5 22 334 22 334.5 22 335 22 335.5 22 336 22 336.5 22 337 22 337.5 22 338 22 338.5 22 339 22 339.5 22 340 22 340.5 22 341 22 341.5 22 342 22 342.5 22 343 22 343.5 22 344 22 344.5 22 345 22 345.5 22 346 22 346.5 22 347 22 347.5 22 348 22 348.5 22 349 22 349.5 22 350 22 350.5 22 351 22 351.5
224
Maritime Manual
Section III – Narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy (non-paired frequencies) 1 One or more frequencies are assigned to each ship station as transmitting frequencies. 2 All frequencies in this Appendix may also be used by ship stations for transmitting A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy (working). 3 All frequencies appearing in this Appendix may be used for NBDP duplex operation. The corresponding coast station frequencies should be selected by the administration concerned from the sub-bands for coast station wideband telegraphy, A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy, facsimile, special and data transmission systems and direct-printing telegraphy systems. 4 The speed of the narrow-band direct-printing telegraphy and data systems shall not exceed 100 Bd for FSK and 200 Bd for PSK.
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
225
Table of ship station transmitting frequencies (kHz) Frequency bands Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
22 MHz
25/26 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
4 202.5 4 203 4 203.5 4 204 4 204.5
6 300.5 6 301 6 301.5 6 302 6 302.5
8 396.5 8 397 8 397.5 8 398 8 398.5
12 560 12 560.5 12 561 12 561.5 12 562
16 785 16 785.5 16 786 16 786.5 16 787
18 893 18 893.5 18 894 18 894.5 18 895
22 352 22 352.5 22 353 22 353.5 22 354
25 193 25 193.5 25 194 25 194.5 25 195
6 7 8 9 10
4 205 4 205.5 4 206 4 206.5 4 207
6 303 6 303.5 6 304 6 304.5 6 305
8 399 8 399.5 8 400 8 400.5 8 401
12 562.5 12 563 12 563.5 12 564 12 564.5
16 787.5 16 788 16 788.5 16 789 16 789.5
18 895.5 18 896 18 896.5 18 897 18 897.5
22 354.5 22 355 22 355.5 22 356 22 356.5
25 195.5 25 196 25 196.5 25 197 25 197.5
11 12 13 14 15
6 305.5 6 306 6 306.5 6 307 6 307.5
8 401.5 8 402 8 402.5 8 403 8 403.5
12 565 12 565.5 12 566 12 566.5 12 567
16 790 16 790.5 16 791 16 791.5 16 792
18 898
22 357 22 357.5 22 358 22 358.5 22 359
25 198 25 198.5 25 199 25 199.5 25 200
16 17 18 19 20
6 308 6 308.5 6 309 6 309.5 6 310
8 404 8 404.5 8 405 8 405.5 8 406
12 567.5 12 568 12 568.5 12 569 12 569.5
16 792.5 16 793 16 793.5 16 794 16 794.5
22 359.5 22 360 22 360.5 22 361 22 361.5
25 200.5 25 201 25 201.5 25 202 25 202.5
21 22 23 24 25
6 310.5 6 311 6 311.5
8 406.5 8 407 8 407.5 8 408 8 408.5
12 570 12 570.5 12 571 12 571.5 12 572
16 795 16 795.5 16 796 16 796.5 16 797
22 362 22 362.5 22 363 22 363.5 22 364
25 203 25 203.5 25 204 25 204.5 25 205
26 27 28 29 30
8 409 8 409.5 8 410 8 410.5 8 411
12 572.5 12 573 12 573.5 12 574 12 574.5
16 797.5 16 798 16 798.5 16 799 16 799.5
22 364.5 22 365 22 365.5 22 366 22 366.5
25 205.5 25 206 25 206.5 25 207 25 207.5
31 32 33 34 35
8 411.5 8 412 8 412.5 8 413 8 413.5
12 575 12 575.5 12 576 12 576.5
16 800 16 800.5 16 801 16 801.5 16 802
22 367 22 367.5 22 368 22 368.5 22 369
25 208
36 37 38 39 40
8 414
16 802.5 16 803 16 803.5 16 804
22 369.5 22 370 22 370.5 22 371 22 371.5
16 MHz
18/19 MHz
226
Maritime Manual
Table of ship station transmitting frequencies (kHz) Frequency bands (end) Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
18/19 MHz
22 MHz
25/26 MHz
22 372 22 372.5 22 373 22 373.5 22 374
41 42 43 44 45
Section IV – Morse telegraphy (calling) Table of calling frequencies assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy at speeds not exceeding 40 Bd* (kHz) Group I
Common channel Common channel
*
Channel series
4 MHz band
6 MHz band
8 MHz band
12 MHz band
16 MHz band
22 MHz band
25/26 MHz band
1 2
4 182 4 182.5
6 277 6 277.5
8 366 8 366.5
12 550 12 550.5
16 734 16 734.5
22 279.5 22 280
Channel A 25 171.5 Groups I and II
3
4 184
6 276
8 368
12 552
16 736
22 280.5
Common channel C 25 172
4
4 184.5
6 276.5
8 369
12 553.5
16 738
22 281
II
5 6
4 183 4 183.5
6 278 6 278.5
8 367 8 367.5
12 551 12 551.5
16 735 16 735.5
22 281.5 22 282
Channel A 25 171.5 Groups I and II
III
7 8
4 185 4 185.5
6 279 6 279.5
8 368.5 8 369.5
12 552.5 12 553
16 736.5 16 737
22 282.5 22 283
Channel B 25 172.5
IV
9 10
4 186 4 186.5
6 280 6 280.5
8 370 8 370.5
12 554 12 554.5
16 737.5 16 738.5
22 283.5 22 284
Groups III and IV
Channel width in every band: 0.5 kHz. NOTES 1 Only the common channels in the 4, 6, 8, 12 and 16 MHz for A1A Morse telegraphy are harmonically related. 2 Administrations should assign the frequencies as they appear in this Appendix only to ship stations equipped with cristal controlled oscillators. 3 However, administrations may subdivide each appropriate group channel and common channel into specific calling frequencies on every full 100 Hz in the channel and assign these discrete frequencies to ships with synthetized transmitters.
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
227
Examples of subdivision of channels (centre frequencies are underlined) 4 181.8 4 181.9 4 182 4 182.1 4 182.2 4
5
6 276.8 6 276.9 6 277 6 277.1 6 277.2
8 365.8 8 365.9 8 366 8 366.1 8 366.2
12 549.8 12 549.9 12 550 12 550.1 12 550.2
16 733.8 16 733.9 16 734 16 734.1 16 734.2
Administrations should avoid as far as possible, assigning the two frequencies at related common channel.
22 279.3 22 279.4 22 279.5 22 279.6 22 279.7
25 171.3 25 171.4 25 171.5 25 171.6 25 171.7
100 Hz from the harmonically
In the 22 MHz bands and 25/26 MHz bands the channels are not harmonically related to those in the 4 to 16 MHz bands. However, the principle of subdivision of channels into specific calling frequencies on 100 Hz applies.
Section V – Morse telegraphy (working) Table of working frequencies (kHz) assignable to ship stations for A1A or A1B Morse telegraphy at speeds not exceeding 40 Bd (See also Part A, Note e)) Frequency bands Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
22 MHz
25/26 MHz
1 2 3 4 5
4 187 4 187.5 4 188 4 188.5 4 189
6 285 6 285.5 6 286 6 286.5 6 287
8 342 8 342.5 8 343 8 343.5 8 344
12 422 12 422.5 12 423 12 423.5 12 424
16 619 16 619.5 16 620 16 620.5 16 621
22 242 22 242.5 22 243 22 243.5 22 244
25 161.5 25 162 25 162.5 25 163 25 163.5
6 7 8 9 10
4 189.5 4 190 4 190.5 4 191 4 191.5
6 287.5 6 288 6 288.5 6 289 6 289.5
8 344.5 8 345 8 345.5 8 346 8 346.5
12 424.5 12 425 12 425.5 12 426 12 426.5
16 621.5 16 622 16 622.5 16 623 16 623.5
22 244.5 22 245 22 245.5 22 246 22 246.5
25 164 25 164.5 25 165 25 165.5 25 166
11 12 13 14 15
4 192 4 192.5 4 193 4 193.5 4 194
6 290 6 290.5 6 291 6 291.5 6 292
8 347 8 347.5 8 348 8 348.5 8 349
12 427 12 427.5 12 428 12 428.5 12 429
16 624 16 624.5 16 625 16 625.5 16 626
22 247 22 247.5 22 248 22 248.5 22 249
25 166.5 25 167 25 167.5 25 168 25 168.5
16 17 18 19 20
4 194.5 4 195 4 195.5 4 196 4 196.5
6 292.5 6 293 6 293.5 6 294 6 294.5
8 349.5 8 350 8 350.5 8 351 8 351.5
12 429.5 12 430 12 430.5 12 431 12 431.5
16 626.5 16 627 16 627.5 16 628 16 628.5
22 249.5 22 250 22 250.5 22 251 22 251.5
25 169 25 169.5 25 170 25 170.5 25 171
228
Maritime Manual
Frequency bands (cont.) Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
22 MHz
21 22 23 24 25
4 197 4 197.5 4 198 4 198.5 4 199
6 295 6 295.5 6 296 6 296.5 6 297
8 352 8 352.5 8 353 8 353.5 8 354
12 432 12 432.5 12 433 12 433.5 12 434
16 629 16 629.5 16 630 16 630.5 16 631
22 252 22 252.5 22 253 22 253.5 22 254
26 27 28 29 30
4 199.5 4 200 4 200.5 4 201 4 201.5
6 297.5 6 298 6 298.5 6 299 6 299.5
8 354.5 8 355 8 355.5 8 356 8 356.5
12 434.5 12 435 12 435.5 12 436 12 436.5
16 631.5 16 632 16 632.5 16 633 16 633.5
22 254.5 22 255 22 255.5 22 256 22 256.5
31 32 33 34 35
4 202
6 300
8 357 8 357.5 8 358 8 358.5 8 359
12 437 12 437.5 12 438 12 438.5 12 439
16 634 16 634.5 16 635 16 635.5 16 636
22 257 22 257.5 22 258 22 258.5 22 259
36 37 38 39 40
8 359.5 8 360 8 360.5 8 361 8 361.5
12 439.5 12 440 12 440.5 12 441 12 441.5
16 636.5 16 637 16 637.5 16 638 16 638.5
22 259.5 22 260 22 260.5 22 261 22 261.5
41 42 43 44 45
8 362 8 362.5 8 363 8 363.5 8 364
12 442 12 442.5 12 443 12 443.5 12 444
16 639 16 639.5 16 640 16 640.5 16 641
22 262 22 262.5 22 263 22 263.5 22 264
46 47 48 49 50
8 364.5 8 365 8 365.5 8 371 8 371.5
12 444.5 12 445 12 445.5 12 446 12 446.5
16 641.5 16 642 16 642.5 16 643 16 643.5
22 264.5 22 265 22 265.5 22 266 22 266.5
51 52 53 54 55
8 372 8 372.5 8 373 8 373.5 8 374
12 447 12 447.5 12 448 12 448.5 12 449
16 644 16 644.5 16 645 16 645.5 16 646
22 267 22 267.5 22 268 22 268.5 22 269
56 57 58 59 60
8 374.5 8 375 8 375.5 8 376
12 449.5 12 450 12 450.5 12 451 12 451.5
16 646.5 16 647 16 647.5 16 648 16 648.5
22 269.5 22 270 22 270.5 22 271 22 271.5
25/26 MHz
Part B – SECTION II – AP17
229
Frequency bands (cont.) Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
22 MHz
61 62 63 64 65
12 452 12 452.5 12 453 12 453.5 12 454
16 649 16 649.5 16 650 16 650.5 16 651
22 272 22 272.5 22 273 22 273.5 22 274
66 67 68 69 70
12 454.5 12 455 12 455.5 12 456 12 456.5
16 651.5 16 652 16 652.5 16 653 16 653.5
22 274.5 22 275 22 275.5 22 276 22 276.5
71 72 73 74 75
12 457 12 457.5 12 458 12 458.5 12 459
16 654 16 654.5 16 655 16 655.5 16 656
22 277 22 277.5 22 278 22 278.5 22 279
76 77 78 79 80
12 459.5 12 460 12 460.5 12 461 12 461.5
16 656.5 16 657 16 657.5 16 658 16 658.5
81 82 83 84 85
12 462 12 462.5 12 463 12 463.5 12 464
16 659 16 659.5 16 660 16 660.5 16 661
86 87 88 89 90
12 464.5 12 465 12 465.5 12 466 12 466.5
16 661.5 16 662 16 662.5 16 663 16 663.5
91 92 93 94 95
12 467 12 467.5 12 468 12 468.5 12 469
16 664 16 664.5 16 665 16 665.5 16 666
96 97 98 99 100
12 469.5 12 470 12 470.5 12 471 12 471.5
16 666.5 16 667 16 667.5 16 668 16 668.5
25/26 MHz
230
Maritime Manual
Frequency bands (end) Channel No.
4 MHz
6 MHz
8 MHz
12 MHz
16 MHz
101 102 103 104 105
12 472 12 472.5 12 473 12 473.5 12 474
16 669 16 669.5 16 670 16 670.5 16 671
106 107 108 109 110
12 474.5 12 475 12 475.5 12 476 12 476.5
16 671.5 16 672 16 672.5 16 673 16 673.5
111 112 113 114 115
16 674 16 674.5 16 675 16 675.5 16 676
116 117 118 119 120
16 676.5 16 677 16 677.5 16 678 16 678.5
121 122 123 124 125
16 679 16 679.5 16 680 16 680.5 16 681
126 127 128 129
16 681.5 16 682 16 682.5 16 683
22 MHz
25/26 MHz
Part B – SECTION II – AP18
231
APPENDIX 18 (Rev.WRC-07) Table of transmitting frequencies in the VHF maritime mobile band (See Article 52) NOTE A For assistance in understanding the Table, see Notes a) to q ) below.
(WRC-07)
NOTE B The Table below defines the channel numbering for maritime VHF communications based on 25 kHz channel spacing and use of several duplex channels, but also allows the use of 12.5 kHz channel spacing. The channel numbering for 12.5 kHz channels and the conversion of two-frequency channels for single-frequency operation shall be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1084-4 Annex 4, Tables 1 and 3. (WRC-07)
Channel designator
Notes
Transmitting frequencies (MHz) From ship stations
60 01 61 02 62 03 63 04 64 05 65 06 66 07 67
From coast stations
156.025
160.625
x*
x
x
156.050
160.650
x*
x
x
m), o)
156.075
160.675
x
x
x
m), o)
156.100
160.700
x
x
x
m), o)
156.125
160.725
x
x
x
m), o)
156.150
160.750
x
x
x
m), o)
156.175
160.775
x
x
x
m), o)
156.200
160.800
x
x
x
m), o)
156.225
160.825
x
x
x
m), o)
156.250
160.850
x
x
x
m), o)
156.275
160.875
x
x
x
f)
156.300
x
m), o)
156.325
160.925
x*
x
x
m), o)
156.350
160.950
x*
x
x
156.375
156.375
h)
68
x
x
x
156.425
156.425
i)
156.450
156.450
156.475
156.475
x
x
h), q )
156.500
156.500
x
x
f), j)
156.525
156.525
69 70
Two frequency
m), o)
156.400
10
Single frequency
Public correspondence
m), o)
08 09
Intership
Port operations and ship movement
x x
x
Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling
232
Maritime Manual – Part B – SECTION II – AP18
Channel designator
11
Notes
q) 71
12
Transmitting frequencies (MHz)
Intership
From ship stations
From coast stations
Single frequency
156.550
156.550
x
156.575
156.575
x
156.600
156.600
i)
156.625
k)
156.650
156.650
x
73
h), i)
156.675
156.675
x
156.700
156.700
14 74 15
g) 75
16 76 17
78 19
x
156.725
156.725
156.750
156.750
n)
156.775
156.775
f)
156.800
156.800
n)
156.825
156.825
g)
156.850
156.850
77 18
Two frequency
Public correspondence
x
72 13
Port operations and ship movement
156.875
x x x x
x
x x
DISTRESS, SAFETY AND CALLING x x
x
x
m)
156.900
161.500
x
x
x
m)
156.925
161.525
x*
x
x
m)
156.950
161.550
x*
x
x
79
m)
156.975
161.575
x*
x
x
m)
157.000
161.600
x*
x
x
80
m) m) m) m) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o) m), o)
157.025 157.050 157.075 157.100 157.125 157.150 157.175 157.200 157.225 157.250 157.275 157.300 157.325 157.350 157.375
161.625 161.650 161.675 161.700 161.725 161.750 161.775 161.800 161.825 161.850 161.875 161.900 161.925 161.950 157.375
x*
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
20
21 81 22 82 23 83 24 84 25 85 26 86 27 87
x* x*
x x x x x x x x x x x
Part B – SECTION II – AP18
Channel designator
28 88
Notes
233
Transmitting frequencies (MHz) From ship stations
From coast stations
157.400 157.425
162.000 157.425
Port operations and ship movement
Intership
Single frequency
Two frequency
x
Public correspondence
x
x
AIS 1 f ), l), p) 161.975 161.975 AIS 2 f ), l), p) 162.025 162.025 * Note by the Secretariat: Added by the RRB until the necessary action is taken by a future WRC. Notes referring to the Table General notes a) Administrations may designate frequencies in the inter-ship, port operations and ship movement services for use by light aircraft and helicopters to communicate with ships or participating coast stations in predominantly maritime support operations under the conditions specified in Nos. 51.69, 51.73, 51.74, 51.75, 51.76, 51.77 and 51.78. However, the use of the channels which are shared with public correspondence shall be subject to prior agreement between interested and affected administrations. b) The channels of the present Appendix, with the exception of channels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, 70, 75 and 76, may also be used for high-speed data and facsimile transmissions, subject to special arrangement between interested and affected administrations. c) The channels of the present Appendix, but preferably channel 28 and with the exception of channels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, 70, 75 and 76, may be used for direct-printing telegraphy and data transmission, subject to special arrangement between interested and affected administrations. d) The frequencies in this table may also be used for radiocommunications on inland waterways in accordance with the conditions specified in No. 5.226. e) Administrations may apply 12.5 kHz channel interleaving on a non-interference basis to 25 kHz channels, in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1084, provided: it shall not affect the 25 kHz channels of the present Appendix maritime mobile distress and safety frequencies, especially the channels 06, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 70, nor the technical characteristics set forth in Recommendation ITU-R M.489-2 for those channels; implementation of 12.5 kHz channel interleaving and consequential national requirements shall be subject to coordination with affected administrations. (WRC-07)
234
Maritime Manual – Part B – SECTION II – AP18
Specific notes f ) The frequencies 156.300 MHz (channel 06), 156.525 MHz (channel 70), 156.800 MHz (channel 16), 161.975 MHz (AIS 1) and 162.025 MHz (AIS 2) may also be used by aircraft stations for the purpose of search and rescue operations and other safety-related communication. (WRC-07) g) Channels 15 and 17 may also be used for on-board communications provided the effective radiated power does not exceed 1 W, and subject to the national regulations of the administration concerned when these channels are used in its territorial waters. h) Within the European Maritime Area and in Canada, these frequencies (channels 10, 67, 73) may also be used, if so required, by the individual administrations concerned, for communication between ship stations, aircraft stations and participating land stations engaged in coordinated search and rescue and anti-pollution operations in local areas, under the conditions specified in Nos. 51.69, 51.73, 51.74, 51.75, 51.76, 51.77 and 51.78. i) The preferred first three frequencies for the purpose indicated in Note a) are 156.450 MHz (channel 09), 156.625 MHz (channel 72) and 156.675 MHz (channel 73). j) Channel 70 is to be used exclusively for digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling. k) Channel 13 is designated for use on a worldwide basis as a navigation safety communication channel, primarily for intership navigation safety communications. It may also be used for the ship movement and port operations service subject to the national regulations of the administrations concerned. l) These channels (AIS 1 and AIS 2) are used for an automatic identification system (AIS) capable of providing worldwide operation, unless other frequencies are designated on a regional basis for this purpose. Such use should be in accordance with the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1371. (WRC-07) m) These channels may be operated as single frequency channels, subject to coordination with affected administrations. (WRC-07) n) The use of these channels (75 and 76) should be restricted to navigation-related communications only and all precautions should be taken to avoid harmful interference to channel 16, e.g. by limiting the output power to 1 W or by means of geographical separation. o) These channels may be used to provide bands for new technologies, subject to coordination with affected administrations. Stations using these channels or bands for new technologies shall not cause harmful interference to, and shall not claim protection from, other stations operating in accordance with Article 5. The design of such systems shall be such as to preclude the possibility of interference to the detection of AIS signals on 161.975 or 162.025 MHz. (WRC-07) p) Additionally, AIS 1 and AIS 2 may be used by the mobile-satellite service (Earth-to-space) for the reception of AIS transmissions from ships. (WRC-07) q) When using these channels (10 and 11), all precautions should be taken to avoid harmful interference to channel 70. (WRC-07)
SECTION III Resolutions (Extracts)
Part B – SECTION III – RES18
237
RESOLUTION 18 (Rev.WRC-07) Relating to the procedure for identifying and announcing the position of ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict1 The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2007), considering a) that ships and aircraft encounter considerable risk in the vicinity of an area of armed conflict; b) that for the safety of life and property it is desirable for ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict to be able to identify themselves and announce their position in such circumstances; c) that radiocommunication offers such ships and aircraft a rapid means of selfidentification and providing location information prior to their entering areas of armed conflict and during their passage through the areas; d) that it is considered desirable to provide a supplementary signal and procedure for use, in accordance with customary practice, in the area of armed conflict by ships and aircraft of States representing themselves as not parties to an armed conflict, resolves 1 that the frequencies for urgency signal and messages specified in the Radio Regulations may be used by ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict for self-identification and establishing communications. The transmission will consist of the urgency or safety signals, as appropriate, described in Article 33 followed by the addition of the single group “NNN” in radiotelegraphy and by the addition of the single word “NEUTRAL” pronounced as in French “neutral” in radiotelephony. As soon as practicable, communications shall be transferred to an appropriate working frequency; 2 that the use of the signal as described in the preceding paragraph indicates that the message which follows concerns a ship or aircraft of a State not party to an armed conflict. The message shall convey at least the following data: a)
call sign or other recognized means of identification of such ship or aircraft;
b)
position of such ship or aircraft;
_______________ 1 Administrations are invited to study the text of this Resolution and provide any proposals to a
future competent Conference.
238
Maritime Manual
c)
number and type of such ships or aircraft;
d)
intended route;
e)
estimated time en route and of departure and arrival, as appropriate;
f)
any other information, such as flight altitude, radio frequencies guarded, languages and secondary surveillance radar modes and codes;
3 that the provisions of Article 33 relating to urgency and safety transmissions, and medical transports shall apply as appropriate to the use of the urgency and safety signals, respectively, by such ship or aircraft; 4 that the identification and location of ships of a State not party to an armed conflict may be effected by means of appropriate standard maritime radar transponders. The identification and location of aircraft of a State not party to an armed conflict may be effected by the use of the secondary surveillance radar (SSR) system in accordance with procedures to be recommended by the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO); 5 that the use of the signals described above would not confer or imply recognition of any rights or duties of a State not party to an armed conflict or a party to the conflict, except as may be recognized by common agreement between the parties to the conflict and a non-party; 6
to encourage parties to a conflict to enter into such agreements, requests the Secretary-General
to communicate the contents of this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization, the International Civil Aviation Organization, the International Committee of the Red Cross, and the International Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies for such action as they may consider appropriate, requests ITU-R to recommend an appropriate signal in the digital selective calling system for use in the maritime mobile service and other appropriate information as necessary, in consultation with concerned organizations.
Part B – SECTION III – RES205
239
RESOLUTION 205 (Rev.Mob-87) Protection of the band 406-406.1 MHz allocated to the mobile-satellite service1 The World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services, Geneva, 1987, considering a) that WARC-79 allocated the band 406-406.1 MHz to the mobile-satellite service in the Earth-to-space direction; b) that Nos. 5.266 and 5.267 limit the use of the band 406-406.1 MHz to lowpower satellite emergency position-indicating radiobeacons (EPIRBs); c) that WARC Mob-83 made provision in the Radio Regulations for the introduction and development of a global distress and safety system; d)
that the use of satellite EPIRBs is an essential element of this system;
e) that, like any frequency band reserved for a distress and safety system, the band 406-406.1 MHz is entitled to full protection against all harmful interference; f) that WARC Mob-83 adopted Recommendation 604 (Rev.Mob-83)* which recommends that the ITU-R continue its studies on the technical and operational questions for EPIRBs, including those using the frequencies in the band 406406.1 MHz; g) that the ITU-R has initiated a study of the compatibility between satellite EPIRBs in the band 406-406.1 MHz and services using adjacent bands, considering further h) that some administrations have developed and implemented an operational low-altitude, near-polar orbiting satellite system (COSPAS-SARSAT) operating in the band 406-406.1 MHz to provide alerting and to aid in the locating of distress incidents; i) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has decided that EPIRBs operating in the COSPAS-SARSAT system will form part of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS); _______________ 1 WRC-97 made editorial amendments to this Resolution. * Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-07.
240
Maritime Manual
j) that observations of the use of frequencies in the band 406-406.1 MHz show that they are being used by stations other than those authorized by No. 5.266, and that these stations have caused harmful interference to the mobile-satellite service, and particularly to the reception of satellite EPIRB signals by the COSPAS-SARSAT system; k) that in the future, new satellite systems which may be either geostationary or non-geostationary may be introduced in this band, recognizing that it is essential for the protection of human life and property that bands allocated exclusively to a service for distress and safety purposes be kept free from harmful interference, resolves to instruct the Radiocommunication Bureau to organize monitoring programmes in the band 406-406.1 MHz in order to identify the source of any unauthorized emission in that band, to urge administrations 1 to take part in monitoring programmes requested by the Bureau in accordance with No. 16.5, in the band 406-406.1 MHz, with a view to identifying and locating stations of services other than those authorized in the band; 2 to ensure that stations other than those operated under No. 5.266 abstain from using frequencies in the band 406-406.1 MHz; 3 to take the appropriate measures to eliminate harmful interference caused to the distress and safety system, invites the ITU-R to continue on an urgent basis its study of compatibility between satellite EPIRBs in the band 406-406.1 MHz and services using adjacent bands.
Part B – SECTION III – RES207
241
RESOLUTION 207 (Rev.WRC-03) Measures to address unauthorized use of and interference to frequencies in the bands allocated to the maritime mobile service and to the aeronautical mobile (R) service The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2003), considering a) that the HF frequencies currently used by the aeronautical and maritime mobile services for distress, safety and other communications, including allotted operational frequencies, suffer from harmful interference and are often subject to difficult propagation conditions; b) that WRC-97 considered some aspects of the use of the HF bands for distress and safety communications in the context of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), especially with regard to regulatory measures; c) that unauthorized operations using maritime and aeronautical frequencies in the HF bands are continuing to increase and are already a serious risk to HF distress, safety and other communications; d) that some administrations have resorted to, for example, transmitting warning messages on operational HF channels as a means of deterring unauthorized users; e) that provisions of the Radio Regulations prohibit the unauthorized use of certain safety frequencies for communications other than those related to safety; f) that enforcing compliance with these regulatory provisions is becoming increasingly difficult with the availability of low-cost HF single side-band (SSB) transceivers; g) that monitoring observations of the use of frequencies in the band 2 1702 194 kHz and in the bands allocated exclusively to the maritime mobile service between 4 063 kHz and 27 500 kHz and to the aeronautical mobile (R) service between 2 850 kHz and 22 000 kHz show that a number of frequencies in these bands are still being used by stations of other services, many of which are operating in contravention of No. 23.2; h) that, in certain situations, HF radio is the sole means of communication for the maritime mobile service and that certain frequencies in the bands mentioned in considering g) are reserved for distress and safety purposes;
242
Maritime Manual
i) that, in certain situations, HF radio is the sole means of communication for the aeronautical mobile (R) service and that this is a safety service; j) that WRC-2000 and this Conference have reviewed the use of the HF bands by the aeronautical mobile (R) and maritime mobile services with a view to protecting operational, distress and safety communications; k) that this Resolution identifies several interference mitigation techniques that can be employed by administrations on a non-mandatory basis, considering in particular a) that it is of paramount importance that the distress and safety channels of the maritime mobile service be kept free from harmful interference, since they are essential for the protection of the safety of life and property; b) that it is also of paramount importance that channels directly concerned with the safe and regular conduct of aircraft operations be kept free from harmful interference, since they are essential for the safety of life and property, resolves to invite ITU-R and ITU-D, as appropriate to increase regional awareness of appropriate practices in order to help mitigate interference in the HF bands, especially on distress and safety channels, invites administrations 1 to ensure that stations of services other than the maritime mobile service abstain from using frequencies in distress and safety channels and their guardbands and in the bands allocated exclusively to that service, except under the conditions expressly specified in Nos. 4.4, 5.128, 5.129*, 5.137 and 4.13 to 4.15; and to ensure that stations of services other than the aeronautical mobile (R) service abstain from using frequencies allocated to that service except under the conditions expressly specified in Nos. 4.4 and 4.13; 2 to make every effort to identify and locate the source of any unauthorized emission capable of endangering human life or property and the safe and regular conduct of aircraft operations, and to communicate their findings to the Radiocommunication Bureau; 3 to participate, in accordance with item 4 in the Annex, in any monitoring programmes organized by the Bureau or administrations, if so agreed among those administrations, without adversely affecting the rights of other administrations or conflicting with any provisions of the Radio Regulations; _______________ * Note by the Secretariat: WRC-07 suppressed provision No. 5.129 and modified provision
No. 5.128 by merging the contents of former provisions Nos. 5.128 and 5.129.
Part B – SECTION III – RES207
243
4 to make every effort to prevent unauthorized transmissions in bands allocated to the maritime mobile service and the aeronautical mobile (R) service; 5 to request their competent authorities to take, within their respective jurisdiction, such legislative or regulatory measures which they consider necessary or appropriate in order to prevent stations from unauthorized use of distress and safety channels or from operating in contravention of No. 23.2; 6 to take all necessary steps in such cases of contravention of No. 23.2 to ensure the cessation of any transmissions contravening the provisions of the Radio Regulations on the frequencies or in the bands referred to in this Resolution; 7 to employ as many of the interference mitigation techniques referred to in the Annex as are appropriate for the maritime mobile and aeronautical mobile (R) services, instructs the Radiocommunication Bureau 1 to seek the cooperation of administrations in identifying the sources of those emissions by all available means and in securing the cessation of those emissions; 2 when the station of another service transmitting in a band allocated to the maritime mobile service or to the aeronautical mobile (R) service has been identified, to inform the administration concerned; 3 to include the problem of interference to maritime and aeronautical distress and safety channels on the agenda of relevant regional radiocommunication seminars, instructs the Secretary-General to bring this Resolution to the attention of the International Maritime Organization and the International Civil Aviation Organization for such actions as they may consider appropriate.
ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 207 (Rev.WRC-03) Interference mitigation techniques This Annex lists several possible HF interference mitigation techniques that may be used, either in combination or singly, depending on the resources of administrations. Use of any or all of these techniques is not mandatory.
244
1
Maritime Manual
Alternative modulation methods
The use of digitally modulated emissions, such as QPSK, to replace or supplement analogue SSB voice (J3E) and data (J2B) emissions. This initiative would need to be adopted internationally to allow the interoperability of equipment. For example, ICAO has adopted an HF data-link standard to provide packet data communications using automated link establishment and adaptive frequency control techniques as a supplement to analogue SSB voice communications (see ICAO Convention, Annex 10).
2
Passive and active/adaptive antenna systems
Use of passive and active/adaptive antenna systems to reject unwanted signals.
3
Channel barring
Administrations should ensure through their licensing, equipment standardization and inspection arrangements that, in compliance with No. 43.1, HF radio equipment cannot transmit on frequencies exclusively allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service, as detailed in Appendix 27, except for frequencies allocated for worldwide use and shared with the aeronautical mobile (OR) service (see Appendix 26/3.4).
4
Regional HF monitoring and direction-finding facilities
Collaboration and cooperation between regional administrations to coordinate the use of monitoring and direction-finding facilities.
5
Transmission of warning messages
Transmission of multilanguage warning messages on specific channels affected by strong or persistent interference. Such transmissions should be conducted after coordination with the users of the affected services and the administration(s) or competent authorities concerned.
6
Education and publicity initiatives
Administrations should provide education and publicity initiatives on the proper use of the radio-frequency spectrum in these bands.
Part B – SECTION III – RES331
245
RESOLUTION 331 (Rev.WRC-07) Transition to the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2007), noting that all ships subject to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, are required to be fitted for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), noting further a) that a number of administrations have taken steps to implement the GMDSS also for classes of vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended; b) that an increasing number of vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, are making use of the techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS prescribed in Chapter VII; c) that this Conference has amended Chapter VII to provide for maintaining interoperability between ships fitted for GMDSS and ships not yet fully equipped for GMDSS; d) that there may be a need to maintain existing shore-based distress and safety services for the reception of distress, urgency and safety calling by voice on VHF channel 16 so that vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended and not yet using the techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS will be able to attract attention and obtain assistance from these services; e) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) is of the view that SOLAS ships, while at sea, should be required to keep a listening watch on VHF channel 16, for the foreseeable future, with a view to providing: –
a distress alerting and communication channel for non-SOLAS ships; and
–
bridge-to-bridge communications;
f) that IMO has urged administrations to require all seagoing vessels under national legislation, and encourage all vessels voluntarily carrying VHF radio equipment to be fitted with facilities for transmitting and receiving distress alerts by digital selective calling (DSC) on VHF channel 70; g) that the Radio Regulations require GMDSS ships to keep watch on the appropriate DSC distress frequencies;
246
Maritime Manual
h) that separate provisions in the existing Radio Regulations designate VHF channel 16 as the international channel for general calling by radiotelephony; i) that several administrations have established Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) systems and require their vessels to keep watch on local VTS channels; j) that ships that are required by SOLAS to carry a radio station have been equipped with DSC, and many vessels subject to national carriage requirements are also being equipped with DSC, but the majority of vessels that carry a radio station on a voluntary basis might not yet have DSC equipment; k) that similarly, many administrations have established distress and safety service based on DSC watchkeeping, but the majority of port stations, pilot stations and other operational coast stations might not yet have been equipped with DSC facilities; l) that Nos 52.190 to 52.192 and 52.232 to 52.234 allow frequency 2 182 kHz and channel 16 to be used for call and reply, recognizing a) that, as indicated in noting further a), b), f), j) and k) above, stations in the maritime mobile service are increasingly making use of the frequencies and techniques of GMDSS; b) that this Conference has adopted provisions for distress, urgency and safety calling by radiotelephony on VHF channel 16, requiring ships, where practicable, to maintain watch on VHF channel 16; c) the need to maintain existing shore-based distress and safety services for reception of distress, urgency and safety calling by voice on VHF channel 16 for some years after this Conference so that vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, and not yet using the techniques and frequencies of the GMDSS, will be able to attract attention and obtain assistance from these services until such time as they are able to participate in the GMDSS; d) the need indicated in noting further d) above for maintaining existing shorebased distress, urgency and safety services on VHF channel 16, resolves 1 to retain the provisions permitting use of VHF channel 16 and the frequency 2 182 kHz for general voice-calling; 2
to urge all administrations to assist in enhancing safety at sea by:
–
encouraging all vessels to finalize the transition to the GMDSS as soon as possible;
Part B – SECTION III – RES331
247
–
encouraging, where appropriate, establishment of suitable shore-based facilities for GMDSS, either on an individual basis or in cooperation with other relevant parties in the area;
–
encouraging all vessels carrying maritime VHF equipment to be fitted with DSC on VHF channel 70 as soon as possible, taking into account the relevant decisions of IMO;
–
encouraging vessels to limit their use of VHF channel 16 and the frequency 2 182 kHz for calling to the minimum necessary, noting the provisions of No. 52.239;
3 that coast stations forming part of shore-based arrangements in the area concerned for reception of distress calling by radiotelephony on VHF channel 16 should maintain an efficient watch on VHF channel 16. Such watch should be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations; 4 that administrations may release their ship stations and coast stations from the listening watch on VHF channel 16 in respect of distress, urgency and safety calling by voice, in accordance with relevant decisions of IMO and ITU on aural watch-keeping requirements on channel 16, taking into account the GMDSS radio systems available in the area concerned; when doing so, administrations should: –
inform IMO of their decisions and submit to IMO details on the area concerned;
–
inform the Secretary-General of the necessary details for inclusion in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations, resolves further
that the Secretary-General should ensure that such arrangements and details regarding the area concerned be indicated in relevant maritime publications, invites ITU-R to monitor the development of and changes to the GMDSS, in particular: –
watch-keeping requirements;
–
distress alerting;
–
carriage requirements,
and report to a future world radiocommunication conference on when further rationalization of Chapter VII should be considered,
248
Maritime Manual
instructs the Secretary-General to bring this Resolution to the attention of IMO, the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the International Association of Marine Aids to Navigation and Lighthouse Authorities (IALA).
Part B – SECTION III – RES339
249
RESOLUTION 339 (Rev.WRC-07) Coordination of NAVTEX services The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2007), considering a) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has established a Coordinating Panel on NAVTEX to, inter alia, coordinate the operational aspects of NAVTEX services, such as allocation of transmitter identification character (B1) and time schedules, in the planning stages for transmissions on the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz or 4 209.5 kHz; b) that coordination in the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4 209.5 kHz is essentially operational; c) that the frequency band around 518 kHz is also allocated to the aeronautical radionavigation service on a primary basis, resolves to invite administrations to apply the procedures established by IMO, taking into account the IMO NAVTEX Manual, for coordinating the use of the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4 209.5 kHz, instructs the Secretary-General to invite IMO to provide ITU with information on a regular basis on operational coordination for NAVTEX services on the frequencies 490 kHz, 518 kHz and 4 209.5 kHz, instructs the Director of the Radiocommunication Bureau to publish this information in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations (List IV) (see No. 20.7).
250
Maritime Manual
RESOLUTION 342 (Rev.WRC-2000) New technologies to provide improved efficiency in the use of the band 156-174 MHz by stations in the maritime mobile service The World Radiocommunication Conference (Istanbul, 2000), considering a) that the agenda of this Conference included the consideration of the use of new technologies for the maritime mobile service in the band 156-174 MHz and the consequential revision of Appendix 18; b)
Recommendation 318 (Mob-87)*, particularly noting b) and c) thereof;
c) that Appendix 18 identifies frequencies to be used for distress and safety communications on an international basis; d) that the introduction of new technology in the maritime mobile service shall not disrupt distress and safety communications in the VHF band including those established by the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended; e) that the date for full implementation of the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) was 1 February 1999; f) that ITU-R is conducting studies on improving efficiency in the use of this band, and that these studies are still ongoing; g) that changes made in Appendix 18 should not prejudice the future use of these frequencies or the capabilities of systems or new applications required for use by the maritime mobile service; h) that the congestion on Appendix 18 frequencies calls for the implementation of efficient new technologies; i) that the use of new technology on maritime VHF frequencies will make it possible to better respond to the emerging demand for new services; j) that ITU-R has approved Recommendation ITU-R M.1312 relating to a longterm solution for improved efficiency in the use of the band 156-174 MHz by stations in the maritime mobile service; _______________ * Note by the Secretariat: This Recommendation was abrogated by WRC-07.
Part B – SECTION III – RES342
251
k) that ITU-R has approved Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 relating to technical characteristics for a universal shipborne automatic identification system using time-division multiple access in the VHF maritime mobile band; l)
that there is a need to maintain some duplex channels for specific applications, noting
a) that the global maritime market may not be of a sufficient size to warrant the development of a new system solely for the maritime service; b) that digital systems have been successfully implemented in the land mobile service, noting also that this Conference has modified Appendix 18, including the addition of note o), to permit the possible use on a voluntary basis of various channels or bands created by the conversion of some duplex channels to simplex channels, for the initial testing and the possible future introduction of new technologies, resolves 1 that, in order to provide full worldwide interoperability of equipment on ships, there should be one technology, or more than one interoperable worldwide technology, implemented under Appendix 18; 2 that, as soon as the ITU-R studies are complete, a future competent conference should consider any necessary changes to Appendix 18 to enable the use of new technologies by the maritime mobile service, invites ITU-R to finalize the following studies: a)
identify the future requirements of the maritime mobile service;
b)
identify suitable technical characteristics of the system or interoperable systems to replace existing technology;
c)
identify necessary modifications to the Table of frequencies contained in Appendix 18;
d)
recommend a transition plan for the introduction of new technologies;
e)
recommend how new technologies can be introduced while ensuring compliance with the distress and safety requirements,
252
Maritime Manual
instructs the Secretary-General to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization and the International Association of Lighthouse Authorities.
Part B – SECTION III – RES343
253
RESOLUTION 343 (WRC-97) Maritime certification for personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations for which a radio installation is not compulsory The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1997), considering a) that WRC-97 has considered the question of certification for personnel of ship stations and ship earth stations within the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS); b) that GMDSS will be fully implemented on 1 February 1999 by ships subject to an international agreement; c) that ships not subject to an international agreement have begun to adopt GMDSS systems and techniques; d) that use of GMDSS equipment should be accompanied by appropriate training and certification; e) that the Radio Regulations stipulate that the service of every ship radio station working on frequencies assigned for international use shall be performed by operators holding a certificate; f) that the present certificates described in Article 47 may be too demanding for radio operators of ship stations and ship earth stations on board ships for which a radio installation is not compulsory, noting that a number of administrations currently issue radio operator certificates specially designed for the non-compulsory sector, resolves that administrations wishing to implement special certification for the non-compulsory sector should implement the certificates contained in the Annex to this Resolution, invites ITU-R to develop a Recommendation describing these certificates,
254
Maritime Manual
instructs the Secretary-General to bring this Resolution to the attention of the International Maritime Organization (IMO).
ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 343 (WRC-97) Examination syllabus for radio operator’s certificates appropriate to vessels using the frequencies and techniques of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System on a non-compulsory basis Introduction The introduction of the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) in February 1992 made it necessary to harmonize the examination requirements for certificates for professional radio operators. Harmonized examination procedures for the general operator’s Certificate and restricted operator’s Certificate, based on the syllabuses described in Article 47, have already been introduced for maritime radio operators performing radiocommunication duties on board vessels subject to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended. The GMDSS will be fully implemented on 1 February 1999 for vessels subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended. For vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, and which install radiocommunication equipment on a voluntary basis, there are significant advantages to also using the GMDSS. However, it was foreseen by some administrations that such vessels would use some, but not all, of the frequencies and techniques of the GMDSS and that radio personnel on board such vessels would not need the same level of certification as radio personnel on board vessels which use all of the frequencies and techniques of the GMDSS on a compulsory basis. A syllabus has been developed which provides the flexibility for a depth of study, level of knowledge, and length of course appropriate to meet the certification requirements of radio personnel on board vessels which use some of the frequencies and techniques of the GMDSS on a non-compulsory basis. The syllabus also provides for certification in the use of satellite equipment where appropriate. This Annex describes the syllabus developed to meet the certification requirements referred to above, and which are implemented in a number of countries under the title “Long Range Certificate” and “Short Range Certificate”. The Short Range Certificate should at least contain those elements of the syllabus which are relevant to sea area A1.
Part B – SECTION III – RES343
255
Examination syllabus The examination should consist of theoretical and practical tests and should include at least: A
General knowledge of radiocommunications in the maritime mobile service
A.1
The general principles and basic features of the maritime mobile service.
B
Detailed practical knowledge and ability to use radio equipment
B.1
The VHF radio installation. Use of VHF equipment in practice.
B.2
The MF/HF radio installation. Use of MF/HF equipment in practice.
B.3
Purpose and use of digital selective calling facilities and techniques.
C
Operational procedures of the GMDSS and detailed practical operation of GMDSS subsystems and equipment
C.1
Basic introduction to GMDSS procedures.
C.2
Distress, urgency and safety communication procedures in the GMDSS.
C.3
Distress, urgency and safety communication procedures by radiotelephony in the old distress and safety system.
C.4
Protection of distress frequencies.
C.5
Maritime safety information (MSI) systems in the GMDSS.
C.6
Alerting and locating signals in the GMDSS.
D
Operational procedures and regulations for radiotelephone communications
D.1
Ability to exchange communications relevant to the safety of life at sea.
D.2
Regulations, obligatory procedures and practices.
D.3
Practical and theoretical knowledge of radiotelephone procedures.
D.4
Use of the international phonetic alphabet and, where appropriate, parts of the IMO Standard Marine Communication Phrases.
E
Optional examination module for the maritime mobile-satellite service for vessels not subject to a compulsory fit
E.1
The general principles and basic features of the maritime mobile-satellite service.
E.2
Operational procedures and detailed practical operation of ship earth stations in the GMDSS.
256
Maritime Manual
RESOLUTION 344 (Rev.WRC-03) Management of the maritime mobile service identity numbering resource The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2003), noting a) that the installation of digital selective calling equipment or Inmarsat B, C or M ship earth station equipment on ships participating in the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) on a mandatory or voluntary basis requires the assignment of a unique nine-digit maritime mobile service identity (MMSI); b) that such equipment offers the possibility to connect with public telecommunication networks; c) that only mobile-satellite systems have been able to resolve the various billing, routeing, charging and signalling requirements needed to provide full two-way automatic connectivity between ships and the international public correspondence service; d) that ships using the present generation of mobile-satellite ship earth stations have to be assigned an MMSI ending with three trailing zeros in order to support automatic access to public telecommunication networks through a diallable ship telephone number whose format is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation E.164 but can only accommodate the first six digits of the MMSI; e) that the first three digits of a ship station MMSI form the maritime identification digits (MID), which denote the ship’s administration or geographical area of origin; f) that each MID only has sufficient capacity to identify 999 ships using the three-trailing-zero number format, with the result that widespread use of MMSIs with three trailing zeros will rapidly exhaust the capacity of each MID, considering a) that digital selective calling distress alerts require valid identities recognizable by search and rescue authorities in order to ensure a timely response; b) that Recommendation ITU-R M.585 contains guidance for the assignment of MMSIs,
Part B – SECTION III – RES344
257
recognizing a) that even domestic ships which install the present generation of ship earth stations operating to Inmarsat B, C or M standards will require the assignment of MMSI numbers from those numbers originally intended for ships communicating worldwide, further depleting the resource; b) that future growth of Inmarsat B, C or M ship earth station use by non-compulsory ships may further deplete the MMSI and MID resources; c) that future generations of mobile-satellite systems offering access to public telecommunication networks and participating in the GMDSS will employ a free-form numbering system that need not include any part of the MMSI, noting further a) that ITU-T has recommended that ITU-R assume sole responsibility for managing the MMSI and MID numbering resources; b) that ITU-R can monitor the status of the MMSI resource, through regular reviews of the spare capacity available within the MIDs already in use, and the availability of spare MIDs, taking account of regional variations, resolves to instruct the Director of the Radiocommunication Bureau 1 to manage the allotment and distribution of the MID resource within the MMSI numbering format, taking into account: –
Sections II, V and VI of Article 19;
–
regional variations in MMSI use;
–
spare capacity within the MID resource; and
–
the guidelines on MID and MMSI management contained in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.585, in particular as regards the reuse of MMSIs;
2 to report to each world radiocommunication conference on the use and status of the MMSI resource, noting in particular the anticipated reserve capacity and any indications of rapid exhaustion of the resource,
258
Maritime Manual
invites ITU-R to keep under review the Recommendations for assigning MMSIs, with a view to: –
improving the management of the MID and MMSI resources; and
–
identifying alternative resources if there is an indication of rapid exhaustion of these resources, instructs the Secretary-General
to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization.
Part B – SECTION III – RES345
259
RESOLUTION 345 (WRC-97) Operation of Global Maritime Distress and Safety System equipment on and assignment of maritime mobile service identities to non-compulsory fitted vessels The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1997), noting a) that ships not required by international agreement to carry Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) equipment could elect to do so for safety purposes; b) that such vessels may only carry VHF digital selective calling (DSC) equipment; c) that some administrations may not require operators on such vessels to have appropriate training, certification or licence; d) that not all administrations assign and register identities to users of VHF DSC equipment on such ships, considering that VHF DSC false distress alerts are a problem for rescue coordination centres, particularly when incorrect identities are used, or when the radio is operated by persons untrained in its use, recognizing that administrations have different training requirements for users of VHF DSC equipment, resolves 1 to invite ITU-R to consider DSC standards and operating procedures in order to simplify operation of this equipment; 2 to invite ITU-T and ITU-R to review the process for assigning maritime mobile service identities for simplifying the process, taking into account cases of new installation, sale of the vessel or transfer of the equipment to a new ship;
260
Maritime Manual
3 to invite ITU-T and ITU-R to undertake studies to ensure the registration and continuous accessibility and availability of identities to rescue authorities, instructs the Secretary-General to communicate this Resolution to the International Maritime Organization for consideration and comments.
Part B – SECTION III – RES349
261
RESOLUTION 349 (WRC-97) Operational procedures for cancelling false distress alerts in the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 1997), considering a) that the 1974 International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), as amended, prescribes that ships subject to that Convention shall be fitted with Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) equipment as appropriate; b)
that non-SOLAS vessels are also being equipped with GMDSS equipment;
c) that the transmission and relay of false distress alerts is a significant problem within the GMDSS, noting that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has developed similar operational procedures to cancel false distress alerts, resolves 1 to urge administrations to take all necessary measures to avoid false distress alerts and to minimize the unnecessary burden on rescue organizations which occurs; 2 to urge administrations to encourage the correct use of GMDSS equipment, with particular attention to appropriate training; 3 to urge administrations to implement the operational procedures contained in the Annex to this Resolution; 4 that administrations should take any consequential appropriate action in this respect, instructs the Secretary-General to bring this Resolution to the attention of IMO.
262
Maritime Manual
ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 349 (WRC-97) Cancelling of false distress alerts If a distress alert is inadvertently transmitted, the following steps shall be taken to cancel the distress alert.
1
VHF digital selective calling
1)
Reset the equipment immediately;
2)
Set to channel 16; and
3)
Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, call sign and maritime mobile service identity (MMSI), and cancel the false distress alert.
2
MF digital selective calling
1)
Reset the equipment immediately;
2)
Tune for radiotelephony transmission on 2 182 kHz; and
3)
Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, call sign and MMSI, and cancel the false alert.
3
HF digital selective calling
1)
Reset the equipment immediately;
2)
Tune for radiotelephony on the distress and safety frequency in each band in which a false distress alert was transmitted (see Appendix 15); and
3)
Transmit a broadcast message to “All Stations” giving the ship’s name, call sign and MMSI, and cancel the false alert on the distress and safety frequency in each band in which the false distress alert was transmitted.
4
Inmarsat ship earth station
Notify the appropriate rescue coordination centre that the alert is cancelled by sending a distress priority message by way of the same coast earth station through which the false distress alert was sent. Provide ship name, call sign and Inmarsat identity with the cancelled alert message.
Part B – SECTION III – RES349
5
263
Emergency position indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB)
If for any reason an EPIRB is activated inadvertently, contact the appropriate rescue coordination centre through a coast station or land earth station and cancel the distress alert.
6
General
Notwithstanding the above, ships may use additional appropriate means available to them to inform the appropriate authorities that a false distress alert has been transmitted and should be cancelled.
264
Maritime Manual
RESOLUTION 352 (WRC-03) Use of the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz for safety-related calling to and from rescue coordination centres The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2003), considering a) that this Conference modified No. 52.221A to allow safety-related calling to and from rescue coordination centres on the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz; b) that this limited safety-related calling function on these carrier frequencies will enhance the capability of those search and rescue organizations which maintain watch on these distress and safety frequencies to call vessels not utilizing the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), noting a) that regulation IV/4.8 of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, requires that SOLAS ships, while at sea, be capable of transmitting and receiving general radiocommunications to and from shore-based radio systems or networks; b) that general communications may include safety-related communications necessary for the safe operation of vessels, further noting that safety-related communications require adequate, effective and immediate access and protection, recognizing a) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) notes that distress, urgency and safety radiocommunications include, but are not limited to: –
transmissions of maritime safety information;
–
distress calls and traffic;
–
acknowledgment and relaying of distress calls;
–
search and rescue coordination communications;
–
ship movement service communications;
Part B – SECTION III – RES352
–
communications related to the safe operation of ships;
–
communications related to navigation;
–
meteorological warnings;
–
meteorological observations;
–
ship position reports; and
–
medical emergencies (e.g. MEDICO/MEDIVAC);
265
b) that distress, urgency and safety communications are defined in Articles 32 and 33, resolves 1 that the carrier frequencies 12 290 kHz and 16 420 kHz be used only for distress, urgency and safety communications, and safety-related calling limited to that to and from rescue coordination centres; 2 that safety-related calling be initiated only after determination that other communications are not present on these frequencies; 3 that safety-related calling be minimized and not cause interference to distress, urgency and safety communications, invites administrations to encourage the coast and ship stations under their jurisdiction to use digital selective calling techniques, instructs the Secretary-General to bring this Resolution to the attention of the IMO.
266
Maritime Manual
RESOLUTION 354 (WRC-07) Distress and safety radiotelephony procedures for 2 182 kHz The World Radiocommunication Conference (Geneva, 2007), noting a) that all ships subject to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, are required to be fitted for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS); b) that some vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, may not be making use of the techniques and frequencies of GMDSS prescribed in Chapter VII and may wish to continue using radiotelephony procedures for distress and safety communications on 2 182 kHz until such time as they are able to participate in the GMDSS; c) that some administrations may have a need to maintain shore-based radiotelephony distress and safety services on 2 182 kHz so that vessels not subject to SOLAS, 1974, as amended, and not yet using the techniques and frequencies of GMDSS will be able to obtain assistance from these services until such time as they are able to participate in GMDSS, considering that there needs to be some recognized guidance for the use of radiotelephony on 2 182 kHz for distress and safety communications, resolves 1 that ships, when in distress or when engaged in urgency or safety-related communications on 2 182 kHz, use the radiotelephony procedures contained in the Annex to this Resolution; 2 that coast stations, in order to maintain communication with non-GMDSS ships that are in distress or engaged in urgency or safety related communications on 2 182 kHz, use the radiotelephony procedures contained in the Annex to this Resolution.
Part B – SECTION III – RES354
267
ANNEX TO RESOLUTION 354 (WRC-07) Distress and safety radiotelephony procedures for 2 182 kHz* PART A1 – GENERAL §1 The frequencies and techniques specified in this Resolution may be used in the maritime mobile service for stations1 not required by national or international regulation to fit GMDSS equipment and for communications between those stations and aircraft. However, stations of the maritime mobile service, when additionally fitted with any of the equipment used by stations operating in conformity with the provisions specified in Chapter VII, should, when using that equipment, comply with the appropriate provisions of that Chapter. §2 1) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by a mobile station or mobile earth station in distress of any means at its disposal to attract attention, make known its position, and obtain help. 2) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by stations on board aircraft or ships engaged in search and rescue operations, in exceptional circumstances, of any means at their disposal to assist a mobile station or mobile earth station in distress. 3) No provision of this Resolution prevents the use by a land station or coast earth station, in exceptional circumstances, of any means at its disposal to assist a mobile station or mobile earth station in distress (see also No. 4.16). §3 In cases of distress, urgency or safety, communications by radiotelephony should be made slowly and distinctly, each word being clearly pronounced to facilitate transcription. §4 The abbreviations and signals of Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 and the Phonetic Alphabet and Figure Code in Appendix 14 should be used where applicable2. _______________ * Distress and safety communications include distress, urgency and safety calls and messages. 1 These stations may include rescue coordination centres. The term “Rescue Coordination
Centre” as defined in the International Convention on Maritime Search and Rescue (1979) refers to a unit responsible for promoting the efficient organization of search and rescue services and for coordinating the conduct of search and rescue operations within a search and rescue region. 2 The use of the Standard Marine Communication Phrases and, where language difficulties
exist, the International Code of Signals, both published by the International Maritime Organization, is also recommended.
268
Maritime Manual
§5 Distress, urgency and safety communications may also be made using digital selective calling and satellite techniques and/or direct-printing telegraphy, in accordance with the provisions specified in Chapter VII and relevant ITU-R Recommendations. §6 Mobile stations3 of the maritime mobile service may communicate for safety purposes with stations of the aeronautical mobile service. Such communications shall normally be made on the frequencies authorized, and under the conditions specified, in Section I of Part A2 (see also § 2 1)). §7 Mobile stations of the aeronautical mobile service may communicate for distress and safety purposes with stations of the maritime mobile service in conformity with the provisions of this Resolution. §8 Any aircraft required by national or international regulations to communicate for distress, urgency or safety purposes with stations of the maritime mobile service shall be capable of transmitting and receiving class J3E emissions when using the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz or the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz.
PART A2 – FREQUENCIES FOR DISTRESS AND SAFETY Section I – Availability of frequencies
A – 2 182 kHz §1 1) The carrier frequency 2 182 kHz is an international distress frequency for radiotelephony; it may be used by ship, aircraft and survival craft stations when requesting assistance from the maritime services. It is used for distress calls and distress traffic, for the urgency signal and urgency messages and for the safety signal. Safety messages should be transmitted, when practicable, on a working frequency, after a preliminary announcement on 2 182 kHz. The class of emission to be used for radiotelephony on the frequency 2 182 kHz shall be J3E. Distress traffic on 2 182 kHz following the reception of a distress call using digital selective calling should take into account that some shipping in the vicinity may not be able to receive this traffic. 2) If a distress message on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz has not been acknowledged, the distress call and message may be transmitted again on a carrier frequency of 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz, as appropriate. _______________ 3
Mobile stations communicating with the stations of the aeronautical mobile (R) service in bands allocated to the aeronautical mobile (R) service shall conform to the provisions of the Regulations which relate to that service and, as appropriate, any special arrangements between the governments concerned by which the aeronautical mobile (R) service is regulated.
Part B – SECTION III – RES354
269
3) However, ship stations and aircraft which cannot transmit either on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz or on the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz may use any other available frequency on which attention might be attracted. 4) Coast stations using the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz for distress purposes and to send navigational warnings may transmit an audible alarm signal4 of short duration for the purpose of attracting attention to the message which follows.
B – 4 125 kHz §2 1) The carrier frequency 4 125 kHz is used to supplement the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz for distress and safety purposes and for call and reply. This frequency is also used for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony. 2) The carrier frequency 4 125 kHz may be used by aircraft to communicate with stations of the maritime mobile service for distress and safety purposes, including search and rescue.
C – 6 215 kHz §3 The carrier frequency 6 215 kHz is used to supplement the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz for distress and safety purposes and for call and reply. This frequency is also used for distress and safety traffic by radiotelephony. Section II – Protection of distress and safety frequencies
A – General §4 Test transmissions on any of the distress and safety frequencies described above shall be kept to a minimum and, wherever practicable, be carried out on artificial antennas or with reduced power. §5 Before transmitting on any of the frequencies identified for distress and safety communications, a station shall listen on the frequency concerned to make sure that no distress transmission is being sent (see Recommendation ITU-R M.1171). This does not apply to stations in distress. _______________ 4 Alarm signals may consist of transmissions of sinusoidal audio frequency tones 1 300 Hz,
2 200 Hz, or both. Different tone generation patterns may be used to signal the type of message which follows, and an alarm signal ending in a 10-second continuous tone could be used to identify a transmission by a coast station.
270
Maritime Manual
B – 2 182 kHz §6 1) Except for transmissions authorized on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz and on the frequencies 2 174.5 kHz, 2 177 kHz, 2 187.5 kHz and 2 189.5 kHz, all transmissions on the frequencies between 2 173.5 kHz and 2 190.5 kHz are forbidden (see also Appendix 15). 2) To facilitate the reception of distress calls, all transmissions on 2 182 kHz should be kept to a minimum. Section III – Watch on distress frequencies
A – 2 182 kHz §7 1) Coast stations may maintain a watch on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz if so directed by their Administration. Such assignments should be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations. 2) Ship stations not fitted with equipment compatible with the GMDSS are encouraged to keep the maximum watch practicable on the carrier frequency 2182 kHz.
B – 4 125 kHz, 6 215 kHz §8 Coast stations may maintain additional watch, as permitted, on the carrier frequencies 4 125 kHz and 6 215 kHz. Such assignments should be indicated in the List of Coast Stations and Special Service Stations.
PART A3 – DISTRESS COMMUNICATIONS Section I – General §1 The general provisions for distress communications are found in Section I of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.1, 32.3, and 32.4). Section II – Distress signal, call and message §2 The radiotelephone distress signal, call and message are described in Section II of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.13BA, 32.9, 32.13B, 32.13C, and 32.13D).
Part B – SECTION III – RES354
271
Section III – Procedures §3 After the transmission by radiotelephony of its distress message, the mobile station may be requested to transmit suitable signals, followed by its call sign or other identification, to permit direction-finding stations to determine its position. This request may be repeated at frequent intervals if necessary. §4 1) The distress message, preceded by the distress call, shall be repeated at intervals until an answer is received. 2) The intervals shall be sufficiently long to allow time for replying stations, in their preparations, to start their sending apparatus. §5 When the mobile station in distress receives no answer to a distress message sent on the distress frequency, the message may be repeated on any other available frequency on which attention might be attracted. Section IV – Transmission of a distress relay message by a station not itself in distress §6 The radiotelephone procedures for the transmission of a distress relay message by a station not itself in distress are found in Section II of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.16 to 32.19A and 32.19D to 32.19F).
Section V – Receipt and acknowledgement of a distress message §7 The procedures relating to the receipt and acknowledgement of a distress message are found in Section II of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.23, 32.26, 32.28, 32.29, 32.30 and 32.35).
Section VI – Distress traffic §8 The radiotelephone procedures relating to the distress traffic are found in Section III of Article 32 (see Nos. 32.39 to 32.42, 32.45 to 32.47, 32.49 to 32.52 and 32.54 to 32.59). §9 1) Every mobile station acknowledging receipt of a distress message shall, on the order of the person responsible for the ship, aircraft or other vehicle, transmit the following information in the order shown as soon as possible: –
its name;
–
its position;
–
the speed at which it is proceeding towards, and the approximate time it will take to reach, the mobile station in distress;
272
–
Maritime Manual
additionally, if the position of the ship in distress appears doubtful, ship stations should also transmit, when available, the true bearing of the ship in distress.
2) Before transmitting the message specified in § 9 1), the station shall ensure that it will not interfere with the emissions of other stations better situated to render immediate assistance to the station in distress.
PART A4 – URGENCY AND SAFETY COMMUNICATIONS Section I – Urgency communications §1 The radiotelephone procedures for urgency communications are found in Sections I and II of Article 33 (see Nos. 33.1 to 33.7 and 33.8, 33.8B to 33.9A and 33.11 to 33.16). Section II – Safety communications §2 The radiotelephone procedures for safety communications are found in Sections I and IV of Article 33 (see Nos. 33.31, 33.31C, 33.32, 33.34 to 33.35 and 33.38B).
___________
SECTION IV ITU-R Recommendations incorporated by reference (Extracts)
Note: In accordance with the decisions of WRC-2000, the editions of the Radio Regulations (RR) use a new numbering scheme which consists, inter alia, in abolishing the prefix “S” in front of the provision numbers, Article numbers and Appendix numbers. However, since the Recommendations included in this Section were not revised after 1999, the references made to the RR in these Recommendations refer to the (simplified) Radio Regulations, edition of 1998 (references commencing with “S”) which were provisionally applicable as from 1 January 1999, or to the former RR, edition of 1994 (complemented by Volume 4, edition of 1996) (references without “S”).
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.489-2
275
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.489-2* TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VHF RADIOTELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATING IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE IN CHANNELS SPACED BY 25 kHz
(1974-1978-1995)
Summary The Recommendation describes the technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephone transmitters and receivers (or transceivers) used in the maritime mobile service when operating in 25 kHz channels of Appendix S18 [Appendix 18] of the Radio Regulations (RR). It also contains those additional characteristics of transceivers required to operate digital selective calling.
The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a) that Resolution No. 308 of the World Administrative Radio Conference (Geneva, 1979) stipulated that: –
all maritime mobile VHF radiotelephone equipment shall conform to 25 kHz standards by 1 January 1983;
b) that RR Appendix S18 [Appendix 18] gives a table of transmitting frequencies which is based upon the principle of 25 kHz channel separations for the maritime mobile service; c) that in Opinion 42, the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has been invited to advise the ITU Radiocommunication Sector of any methods of measurement applicable to radio equipment used in land mobile services; and that such methods of measurement may also be suitable for radio equipment used in maritime mobile services; d) that there is a need to specify the technical characteristics of VHF radiotelephone equipment operating in the maritime mobile service in channels spaced by 25 kHz, recommends 1 that the following characteristics should be met by VHF (metric) FM radiotelephone equipment used for the maritime mobile services operating on the frequencies specified in RR Appendix S18 [Appendix 18].
_______________ Note by the Secretariat: The references made to the Radio Regulations (RR) in this Recommendation refer to the RR as revised by the World Radiocommunication Conference 1995. These elements of the RR will come into force on 1 June 1998. Where applicable, the equivalent references in the current RR are also provided in square brackets.
276
Maritime Manual
1.1
General characteristics
1.1.1
The class of emission should be F3E/G3E.
1.1.2
The necessary bandwidth should be 16 kHz.
1.1.3 Only phase modulation (frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis characteristic of 6 dB/octave) should be used. 1.1.4 The frequency deviation corresponding to 100% modulation should approach 5 kHz as nearly as practicable. In no event should the frequency deviation exceed 5 kHz. Deviation limiting circuits should be employed such that the maximum frequency deviation attainable should be independent of the input audio frequency. 1.1.5 Where duplex or semi-duplex systems are in use, the performance of the radio equipment should continue to comply with all the requirements of this Recommendation. 1.1.6 The equipment should be designed so that frequency changes between assigned channels can be carried out within 5 s. 1.1.7
Emissions should be vertically polarized at the source.
1.1.8
Stations using digital selective calling shall have the following capabilities:
a)
sensing to determine the presence of a signal on 156.525 MHz (channel 70); and
b)
automatic prevention of the transmission of a call, except for distress and safety calls, when the channel is occupied by calls.
1.2
Transmitters
1.2.1 The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed 5 parts in 106, and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed 10 parts in 106. 1.2.2 Spurious emissions on discrete frequencies, when measured in a non-reactive load equal to the nominal output impedance of the transmitter, should be in accordance with the provisions of RR Appendix S3 [Appendix 8]. 1.2.3
The carrier power for coast stations should not normally exceed 50 W.
1.2.4 The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W. Means should be provided to readily reduce this power to 1 W or less for use at short ranges, except for digital selective calling equipment operating on 156.525 MHz (channel 70) in which case the power reduction facility is optional (see also Recommendation ITU-R M.541 recommends 3.7). 1.2.5
The upper limit of the audio-frequency band should not exceed 3 kHz.
1.2.6 The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 W. In some radio environments, lower values may be required.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.489-2
1.3
277
Receivers
1.3.1 The reference sensitivity should be equal to or less than 2.0 V, e.m.f., for a given reference signal-to-noise ratio at the output of the receiver. 1.3.2
The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.
1.3.3
The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.
1.3.4
The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 65 dB.
1.3.5 The power of any conducted spurious emission, measured at the antenna terminals, should not exceed 2.0 nW at any discrete frequency. In some radio environments lower values may be required. 1.3.6 The effective radiated power of any cabinet radiated spurious emission on any frequency up to 70 MHz should not exceed 10 nW. Above 70 MHz, the spurious emissions should not exceed 10 nW by more than 6 dB/octave in frequency up to 1 000 MHz. In some radio environments, lower values may be required; 2 that reference should also be made to Recommendations ITU-R SM.331 and ITU-R SM.332 and to the relevant IEC publications on methods of measurement.
278
Maritime Manual
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.492-6 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR THE USE OF DIRECT-PRINTING TELEGRAPH EQUIPMENT IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE (Question ITU-R 5/8) (1974-1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1995) Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
Summary The Recommendation provides in Annex 1 operational procedures for the use of direct-printing telegraph equipment in communication between a ship and a coast station in the selective ARQmode on a fully automated or semi-automated basis and to a number of ship stations or a single ship in the broadcast FEC-mode. It also specifies interworking between equipments in accordance with technical characteristics given in Recommendations ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625. Appendix 1 contains procedures for setting up of calls.
The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a) that narrow-band direct-printing telegraph services are in operation using equipment as described in Recommendations ITU-R M.476, ITU-R M.625 and ITU-R M.692; b) that an improved narrow-band direct-printing telegraph system providing automatic identification and capable of using the 9-digit ship station identity is described in Recommendation ITU-R M.625; c)
that the operational procedures necessary for such services should be agreed upon;
d) that, as far as possible, these procedures should be similar for all services and for all frequency bands (different operational procedures may be required in frequency bands other than the HF and MF bands); e) exist;
that a large number of equipments complying with Recommendation ITU-R M.476
f) that interworking between equipments in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625 is required, at least for a transitionary period, recommends 1 that the operational procedures given in Annex 1 be observed for the use of narrowband direct-printing telegraph equipment in accordance with either Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 in the MF and HF bands of the maritime mobile service; 2 that when using direct-printing telegraphy or similar systems in any of the frequency bands allocated to the maritime mobile service, the call may, by prior arrangement, be made on a working frequency available for such systems.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
279
ANNEX 1
Operational procedures 1
Mode A (ARQ)
1.1 Methods used for setting up narrow-band direct-printing telegraph communications between a ship station and a coast station in the ARQ-mode should be on a fully automatic or semi-automatic basis, insofar that a ship station should have direct access to a coast station on a coast station receiving frequency and a coast station should have direct access to a ship station on a coast station transmitting frequency. 1.2 However, where necessary, prior contact by Morse telegraphy, radiotelephony or other means is not precluded. 1.3 Through connection to a remote teleprinter station over a dedicated circuit or to a subscriber of the international telex network may be achieved by manual, semi-automatic or automatic means. NOTE 1 – Before an international automatic service can be introduced, agreement has to be reached on a numbering plan, traffic routing and charging. This should be considered by both the ITU-T and the ITU-R. NOTE 2 – Recommendations ITU-R M.476 (see § 3.1.5) and ITU-R M.625 (see § 3.8) make provision for automatic re-establishment of radio circuits by rephasing in the event of interruption. However, it has been reported that this procedure has, in some countries, resulted in technical and operational problems when radio circuits are extended into the public switched network or to certain types of automated switching or store-and-forward equipments. For this reason, some coast stations do not accept messages if the rephasing procedure is used. NOTE 3 – When a connection is set up in the ARQ mode with the international telex network via a coast station, where practicable the general requirements specified in ITU-T Recommendation U.63 should be met. 1.4 When, by prior arrangement, unattended operation is required for communication from a coast station to a ship station, or between two ship stations, the receiving ship station should have a receiver tuned to the other station’s transmitting frequency and a transmitter tuned or a transmitter capable of being tuned automatically to the appropriate frequency and ready to transmit on this frequency. 1.5 For unattended operation a ship station should be called selectively by the initiating coast or ship station as provided for by Recommendations ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625. The ship station concerned could have available traffic stored ready for automatic transmission on demand of the calling station. 1.6 At the “over” signal, initiated by the calling station, any available traffic in the ship’s traffic store could be transmitted. 1.7 At the end of the communication, an “end of communication” signal should be transmitted, whereupon the ship’s equipment should automatically revert to the “stand-by” condition.
280
Maritime Manual
1.8 A “free channel” signal may be transmitted by a coast station where necessary to indicate when a channel is open for traffic. The “free channel” signals should preferably be restricted to only one channel per HF band and their duration should be kept as short as possible. In accordance with Article 18 of the Radio Regulations and recognizing the heavy loading of the frequencies available for narrow-band direct printing in the HF bands, “free channel” signals should not be used in future planned systems. 1.9 The format of the “free channel” signal should be composed of signals in the 7-unit error detecting code as listed in § 2 of Annex 1 to Recommendation ITU-R M.476 and § 2 of Annex 1 to Recommendation ITU-R M.625. Three of these signals should be grouped into a block, the middle signal being the “signal repetition” (RQ), the first signal of the block being any of the signals VXKMCF TBOZA and the third signal of the block being any of the signals VMPCYFS OIRZDA (see Recommendation ITU-R M.491). These signals should be indicated in the ITU List of Coast Stations. Selections of new signals should preferably be chosen to correspond to the first two digits of that coast station’s 4-digit identification number. If this is not possible because the characters needed are not listed above, or if this is not desired because this combination is already in use by another coast station, it is preferred that a combination of characters be selected from those listed above in the second part of each row, i.e. TBOZA for the first signal and OIRZDA for the third signal of the free channel block. The signals in the block are transmitted at a modulation rate of 100 Bd and the blocks are separated by pauses of 240 ms. For manual systems this “free channel” signal should be interrupted either by a period of no signal or by a signal or signals, that would enable an operator to recognize the “free channel” condition by ear. An aurally recognizable signal, e.g. a Morse signal, may be used alone as the “free channel” signal in manual systems. At least 8 blocks of the 7-unit signal should be transmitted before interruption. 1.10 In the case of single frequency operation, as described in Recommendation ITU-R M.692, the free channel signal should be interrupted by listening periods of at least 3 s. 1.11 General operational procedures for setting up calls between ship stations and between ship stations and coast stations are given below and specific procedures are given in Appendix 1.
1.12
Manual procedures
1.12.1
Ship to coast station
1.12.1.1 The operator of the ship station establishes communication with the coast station by A1A Morse telegraphy, telephony or by other means using normal calling procedures. The operator then requests direct-printing communication, exchanges information regarding the frequencies to be used and, when applicable, gives the ship station the direct-printing selective call number assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A. 1.12.1.2 The operator of the coast station then establishes direct-printing communication on the frequency agreed, using the appropriate identification of the ship.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
281
1.12.1.3 Alternatively the operator of the ship station, using the direct-printing equipment, calls the coast station on a predetermined coast station receive frequency using the identification of the coast station assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the coast station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A. 1.12.1.4 The operator of the coast station then establishes direct-printing communication on the corresponding coast station transmit frequency. 1.12.2
Coast station to ship
1.12.2.1 The operator of the coast station calls the ship station by A1A Morse telegraphy, telephony or other means, using normal calling procedures. 1.12.2.2 The operator of the ship station then applies the procedures of § 1.12.1.1 or § 1.12.1.3. 1.12.3
Intership
1.12.3.1 The operator of the calling ship station establishes communication with the called ship station by A1A Morse telegraphy, telephony, or by other means, using normal calling procedures. The operator then requests direct-printing communication, exchanges information regarding the frequencies to be used and, when applicable, gives the direct-printing selective call number of the calling ship station assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A. 1.12.3.2 The operator of the called ship station then establishes direct-printing communication on the frequency agreed, using the appropriate identification of the calling ship.
1.13
Procedures for automatic operation
1.13.1
Ship to coast station
1.13.1.1 The ship station calls the coast station on a predetermined coast station receive frequency, using the direct-printing equipment and the identification signal of the coast station assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the coast station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A. 1.13.1.2 The coast station’s direct-printing equipment detects the call and the coast station responds directly on the corresponding coast station transmit frequency, either automatically or under manual control. 1.13.2
Coast station to ship
1.13.2.1 The coast station calls the ship station on a predetermined coast station transmit frequency, using the direct-printing equipment and the ship station direct-printing selective call number assigned in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476 or ITU-R M.625 as appropriate, or the ship station identity assigned in accordance with the Preface to List VII A.
282
Maritime Manual
1.13.2.2 The ship station’s direct-printing equipment tuned to receive the predetermined coast station transmit frequency detects the call, whereupon the reply is given in one of the following ways: a)
the ship station replies either immediately on the corresponding coast station receive frequency or at a later stage, using the procedure of § 1.12.1.3; or
b)
the ship station’s transmitter is automatically started on the corresponding coast station receive frequency and the direct-printing equipment responds by sending appropriate signals to indicate readiness to receive traffic automatically.
1.14
Message format
1.14.1 Where the appropriate facilities are provided by the coast station, traffic may be exchanged with the telex network: a)
in a conversational mode where the stations concerned are connected directly, either automatically or under manual control; or
b)
in a store-and-forward mode where traffic is stored at the coast station until the circuit to the called station can be set up, either automatically or under manual control.
1.14.2 In the shore-to-ship direction, the message format should conform to normal telex network practice (see also Appendix 1, § 2). 1.14.3 In the ship-to-shore direction, the message format should conform to the operational procedures specified in Appendix 1, § 1.
2
Mode B (FEC)
2.1 Messages may, by prior arrangement, be sent in the B mode from a coast station or a ship station to a number of ships or to a single ship, preceded if desired by the selective call code of the ship(s) concerned where: 2.1.1
a receiving ship station is not permitted or not able to use its transmitter, or
2.1.2
communications are intended for more than one ship, or
2.1.3 unattended reception of the B mode is required and automatic acknowledgement is not necessary. In such cases, the ship station receivers should be tuned to the appropriate coast or ship station transmitting frequency. 2.2
All B mode messages should start with “carriage return” and “line feed” signals.
2.3 When the ship station receives phasing signals in the B mode, its teleprinter should start automatically and should stop automatically when reception of the emission ceases.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
283
2.4 Ship stations may acknowledge the reception of B mode messages by A1A Morse telegraphy, telephony or by other means.
3
Inter-working between equipments in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.476 and ITU-R M.625
3.1 Recommendation ITU-R M.625 provides for automatic inter-working with equipment which is in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476. The criteria for determining whether one or both stations are of the Recommendation ITU-R M.476 type are the length of the call signal and the composition of the call blocks. 3.2 If both stations have equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.625, automatic station identification is a part of the automatic call set-up procedures. However, if one or both stations have equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.476, no automatic station identification takes place. For this reason, and because Recommendation ITU-R M.625 accommodates the use of the 9-digit ship station identity for the direct-printing equipment call signal, it is desirable that all new equipment be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.625 at the earliest practicable time. 3.3 In order to attain full compatibility with the large number of existing equipment, it will be necessary to assign both a 9-digit and a 5- (or 4-) digit identity (i.e. 7- and 4-signal call signals) to such new stations. Ship and coast station lists should contain both signals.
284
Maritime Manual
APPENDIX 1
1
Procedure for setting up a call in the ship-to-coast station direction Step
Coast station
Ship station Ship initiates the call
Exchange answer-backs (1) GA (2)
MSG + TLX xy DIRTLX xy TGM URG RTL OPR WX NAV STA POS FREQ SVC MAN MED OBS HELP HELP... AMV BRK MULTLX xy xy xy STS x INF VBTLX xy FAX xy TEL xy DATA xy RPT ... TST TRF
+?
+?
or
(2.4) or (2.5) or (2.6) or (2.7) or (2.8) or (2.9) or (2.10) or (2.11) or (2.12) or (2.13) or (2.14) or (2.15) or (2.16) or (2.17) or (2.18) or (2.19) or (2.20) or (2.21) or (2.22) or (2.23) or (2.24) or (2.25) or (2.26) or (2.27) or (2.28) or (2.29)
or
(2.30)
6
Ship transmits its AAIC, followed by + ?
7 MSG
(2.3)
? (3)
5 QRC
(2.1) or (2.2) or
8
(5)
(3)
(4)
9
Message procedure (6) 10
(7)
11
Exchange answer-backs “Message reference charged time, etc.” (8) GA
12 13 14
FIGURE ...[D01] = 20 CM
(1)
Go to step 4 or end of communication
D01
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
2
285
Procedure for setting up a call in the coast-to-ship station direction
Operation in the direction coast station to ship may need to be in the store-and-forward mode owing to the fact that radio propagation conditions may not allow the setting up of a call at the intended time.
Coast station
Step
Coast station initiates call
1
Ship station
2 Exchange answer-backs (1)
3 Message procedure 4 Exchange answer-backs (1)
5
Go to step 3 or GA
6 7 If ship has traffic for coast station go to step 4 of Part 1
or End of communication
D02
FIGURE 1...[D02] = 9 CM
Notes relative to § 1 and 2: (1)
a) In automatic operation the answer-back exchange is initiated and controlled by the coast station. For calls set up by the ship station the answer-back exchange in manual operation may be initiated by the ship station. For calls set up by the coast station the answer-back exchange in manual operation is initiated by the coast station, thereby defining the order in which the exchange takes place. b) Answer-back code as defined in ITU-T Recommendations F.130 for ship stations and F.60 for coast stations.
(2)
A coast station need not provide all of the facilities indicated. However, where specific facilities are provided, the facility codes indicated should be used. The facility “HELP” should always be available.
(2.1)
MSG indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive any messages held for it at the coast station.
286
Maritime Manual
(2.2)
TLX xy indicates that the following message is for immediate connection to a store-and-forward facility located at the coast station. y indicates the subscriber’s national telex number. x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by 0 (when applicable). (Where the store-and-forward system is remote from the coast station, TLX alone may be used.) TLXA may optionally be used instead of TLX which indicates that ship wishes to be advised (using the normal shore-to-ship procedures) when the message has been delivered to the indicated telex number.
(2.3)
DIRTLX
xy indicates that a direct telex connection is required.
y indicates the subscriber’s national telex number. x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by 0 (when applicable). RDL + may optionally be used to indicate that the last DIRTLX redialled.
xy telex number should be
(2.4)
TGM indicates that the following message is a radio telegram.
(2.5)
URG indicates that the ship station needs to be connected immediately to a manual assistance operator and an audible alarm may be activated. This code should only be used in case of emergency.
(2.6)
RTL indicates that the following message is a radio telex letter.
(2.7)
OPR indicates that connection to a manual assistance operator is required.
(2.8)
WX indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive weather information.
(2.9)
NAV indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive navigational warnings.
(2.10)
STA indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive a status report of all store-andforward messages which have been sent by that ship station, but which the ship station has not already received on retransmitted or non-delivered information (see also (6)). STA x may also be used where the ship station needs to immediately receive a status report of such a message where x indicates the message reference provided by the coast station.
(2.11)
POS indicates that the following message contains the ship’s position. Some administrations use this information to assist in the subsequent automatic transmission or reception of messages (e.g. for calculating the optimum traffic frequency and/or the appropriate directional antennas to use).
(2.12)
FREQ indicates that the following message indicates the frequency on which the ship is keeping watch.
(2.13)
SVC indicates that the following message is a service message (for subsequent manual attention).
(2.14)
MAN indicates that the following message is to be stored and manually forwarded to a country which cannot be accessed automatically.
(2.15)
MED indicates that an urgent medical message follows.
(2.16)
OBS indicates that the following message is to be sent to the meteorological organization.
(2.17)
HELP indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive a list of available facilities within the system.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.492-6
287
(2.18)
If information is needed on the application of procedures for individual facilities at a coast station, request for further details concerning the specific procedure can be obtained by the facility code HELP followed by the appropriate facility code for which the information is needed, e.g.: < HELP DIRTLX + indicates that the ship station needs information on the procedures (action by ship operator) for ordering a dialogue-mode connection with a telex network subscriber via the coast station.
(2.19)
AMV indicates that the following message is to be sent to the AMVER organization.
(2.20)
BRK indicates that the use of the radio path is to be immediately discontinued (for use where the ship’s operator can only use a teleprinter for controlling the ARQ equipment).
(2.21)
MULTLX xy/xy/xy+ indicates that the following message is a multiple address message for immediate connection to a store-and-forward facility located at the coast station. y indicates the subscriber’s national telex number. x is used where applicable to indicate the country code (ITU-T Recommendation F.69) preceded by 0 (when applicable). Each separate xy indicates a different telex number to which the same message should be forwarded. At least two separate telex numbers should be included. MULTLXA may optionally be used instead of MULTLX which indicates that the ship wishes to be advised (using the normal shore-to-ship procedures) when the messages have been delivered to the indicated telex numbers.
(2.22)
STS x + indicates that the following message is for transmission to a ship using a store-andforward facility located at the coast station. x indicates the addressed ship’s 5- or 9-digit identity number.
(2.23)
INF indicates that the ship station needs to immediately receive information from the coast station’s database. Some administrations provide a variety of different database information in which case INF returns a directory listing and a subsequent facility code is used to select the desired information.
(2.24)
VBTLX xy indicates that the following message should be dictated, by the coast station, to a voicebank (voice messaging) telephone number for subsequent retrieval by the addressee, and that a copy of the message should be forwarded to telex number xy. The voicebank telephone number should be included in the first line of the message text.
(2.25)
FAX xy indicates that the following message should be forwarded, via the PSTN, by facsimile to the telephone number xy.
(2.26)
TEL xy indicates that the following message should be telephoned, by the coast station, to the telephone number xy.
(2.27)
DATA xy indicates that the following message should be forwarded by the coast station using data facilities to the subscriber number xy (via the PSTN).
(2.28)
RPT xy indicates that the ship needs to receive, using the ARQ mode, a specific identified message (e.g., earlier transmitted in the FEC mode), if still available for automatic retransmission. x is used as the message identifier.
(2.29)
TST indicates that the ship needs to receive an automatically transmitted test text (e.g. “the quick brown fox ”).
(2.30)
TRF indicates that the ship needs to receive information, automatically transmitted, on tariffs currently applicable to the coast station.
(3)
The symbol “?” is not necessary where the coast station is automatic. It is normally required only for manual systems.
288 (4)
Maritime Manual
In cases where the coast station requires information about the relevant Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC), this information should be provided by the ship operator on receipt of the combination < QRC + from the coast station. Some coast stations may request additional information, e.g. ship’s name, call sign, etc.
(5)
This sequence may be preceded where necessary by suitable prompts or facility selection information and, if appropriate, any consequent ship station reply, or may be deleted where not applicable (e.g. where facility codes WX, NAV, STA, MSG or HELP are input at step 4). Where facility code DIRTLX xy was input at step 4, this sequence may be replaced by the distant end answer-back or by any service signal (e.g. NC, OCC, etc.) received from the telex network.
(6)
Message procedures depend on which facility is used: For TLX where the store-and-forward system is remote from the coast station, ITU-T Recommendation F.72 may apply. Where the store-and-forward system is located at the coast station, the complete information content of the message sent at this step will be forwarded to the subscriber whose telex number is given by xy. For DIRTLX, see ITU-T Recommendation F.60. For TGM, see ITU-T Recommendations F.1 and F.31. For SVC and MED, the message will normally be plain text and no specific message procedure is required. For RTL, the message will be plain text but should include the postal address of the addressee. For STA, the appropriate status information is returned to the ship in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation F.72, § 11.3 and 11.4. For POS and FREQ, specific national procedures may apply.
(7)
This sequence of 4 K’s “KKKK” (4 combination No. 11 signals in the letter case) indicates that any network connection should be cleared but that the radio path should be maintained and that the procedure should immediately proceed to step 11. This sequence may be used elsewhere in the procedure in which case the procedure reverts to step 3.
(8)
This step is optional and may not apply to all facilities.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
289
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.541-9 Operational procedures for the use of digital selective-calling equipment in the maritime mobile service
(1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1994-1995-1996-1997-2004) Summary The Recommendation contains the operational procedures for digital selective-calling (DSC) equipment whose technical characteristics are given in Recommendation ITU-R M.493. The Recommendation contains five annexes. In Annexes 1 and 2 the provisions and procedures are described for distress, urgency and safety calls and for routine calls, respectively. In Annexes 3 and 4 the operational procedures for ships and for coast stations are described and Annex 5 lists the frequencies to be used for DSC. The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a) that digital selective-calling (DSC) will be used as described in Recommendation ITU-R M.493; b) that the requirements of Chapter IV of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974, as amended, for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) are based on the use of DSC for distress alerting and calling and that operational procedures are necessary for the use of that system; c) that, as far as is practicable, operational procedures in all frequency bands and for all types of communications should be similar; d) that DSC may provide a useful supplementary means of transmitting a distress alert in addition to the provisions of transmitting the distress alert by existing methods and procedures in the Radio Regulations (RR); e)
that conditions when alarms have to be actuated should be specified, recommends
1 that the technical characteristics of equipment used for DSC in the maritime mobile service should be in conformity with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations;
290
Maritime Manual
2 that the operational procedures to be observed in the MF, HF and VHF bands for DSC should be in accordance with Annex 1 for distress and safety calls and Annex 2 for other calls; 3
that provisions should be made at stations equipped for DSC for:
3.1 the manual entry of address, type of call, category and various messages into a DSC sequence; 3.2 the verification and if necessary the correction of such manually formed sequences; 3.3 a specific aural alarm and visual indication to indicate receipt of a distress or urgency call or a call having distress category. It should not be possible to disable this alarm and indication. Provisions should be made to ensure that they can be reset only manually; 3.4 aural alarm(s) and visual indication for calls other than distress and urgency. The aural alarm(s) may be capable of being disabled; 3.5
such visual indicators to indicate:
3.5.1 type of received call address (to all stations, to a group of stations, geographical, individual); 3.5.2
category;
3.5.3
identity of calling station;
3.5.4 numerical or alpha-numerical type of information, e.g. frequency information and telecommand; 3.5.5
type of “end of sequence” character;
3.5.6
detection of errors, if any;
3.6 monitoring the DSC channel to determine the presence of a signal and, except for distress, urgency, and non-test safety calls, provide facilities for automatically preventing the transmission of a DSC call until the channel is free; 4
that the equipment should be simple to operate;
5 that the operational procedures given in Annexes 3 and 4, which are based on the relevant procedures from Annexes 1 and 2 and from the RR, be used as guidance for ships and coast stations; 6 that the frequencies used for distress and safety purposes using DSC are those contained in Annex 5 to this Recommendation (see RR Appendix 15).
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
291
NOTE 1 – The following definitions are used throughout this Recommendation: Single frequency: the same frequency is used for transmission and reception. Paired frequencies: frequencies which are associated in pairs; each pair consisting of one transmitting and one receiving frequency. International DSC frequencies: those frequencies designated in the RR for exclusive use for DSC on an international basis. National DSC frequencies: those frequencies assigned to individual coast stations or a group of stations on which DSC is permitted (this may include working frequencies as well as calling frequencies). The use of these frequencies must be in accordance with the RR. Automatic DSC operation at a ship station: a mode of operation employing automatic tunable transmitters and receivers, suitable for unattended operation, which provide for automatic call acknowledgements upon reception of a DSC and automatic transfer to the appropriate working frequencies. Call attempt: one or a limited number of call sequences directed to the same stations on one or more frequencies and within a relatively short time period (e.g. a few minutes). A call attempt is considered unsuccessful if a calling sequence contains the symbol RQ at the end of the sequence and no acknowledgement is received in this time interval.
Annex 1 Provisions and procedures for distress, urgency and safety calls
1
Introduction
The terrestrial elements of the GMDSS adopted by the 1988 Amendments to the International Convention for SOLAS, 1974, are based on the use of DSC for distress and safety communications. 1.1
Method of calling
The provisions of RR Chapter VII are applicable to the use of DSC in cases of distress, urgency or safety.
292
2
Maritime Manual
DSC distress alert
The DSC distress alert provides for alerting, self-identification, ship’s position including time, and nature of distress as defined in the RR (See RR Chapter VII).
3
Procedures for DSC distress alerts
3.1
Transmission by a mobile unit in distress
3.1.1 The DSC equipment should be capable of being preset to transmit the distress alert on at least one distress alerting frequency. 3.1.2 The distress alert shall be composed in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493; the ship’s position information, the time at which it was taken and the nature of distress should be entered as appropriate. If the position of the ship cannot be entered, then the position information signals shall be transmitted automatically as the digit 9 repeated ten times. If the time cannot be included, then the time information signals shall be transmitted automatically as the digit 8 repeated four times. 3.1.3
Distress alert attempt
At MF and HF a distress alert attempt may be transmitted as a single frequency or a multi-frequency call attempt. At VHF only single frequency call attempts are used. 3.1.3.1
Single frequency call attempt
A distress alert attempt should be transmitted as 5 consecutive calls on one frequency. To avoid call collision and the loss of acknowledgements, this call attempt may be transmitted on the same frequency again after a random delay of between 3 ½ and 4 ½ min from the beginning of the initial call. This allows acknowledgements arriving randomly to be received without being blocked by retransmission. The random delay should be generated automatically for each repeated transmission, however it should be possible to override the automatic repeat manually. At MF and HF, single frequency call attempts may be repeated on different frequencies after a random delay of between 3 ½ and 4 ½ min from the beginning of the initial call. However, if a station is capable of receiving acknowledgements continuously on all distress frequencies except for the transmit frequency in use, then single frequency call attempts may be repeated on different frequencies without this delay. 3.1.3.2
Multi-frequency call attempt
A distress alert attempt may be transmitted as up to 6 consecutive (see Note 1) calls dispersed over a maximum of 6 distress frequencies (1 at MF and 5 at HF). Stations transmitting multi-frequency distress alert attempts should be able to receive acknowledgements continuously on all frequencies except for the transmit frequency in use, or be able to complete the call attempt within 1 min.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
293
Multi-frequency call attempts may be repeated after a random delay of between 3 ½ and 4 ½ min from the beginning of the previous call attempt. NOTE 1 – A VHF call may be transmitted simultaneously with an MF/HF call.
3.1.4
Distress
In the case of distress the operator should: 3.1.4.1 enter the desired mode of the subsequent communication and if time permits, enter the ship’s position and time (see Note 1) it was taken and the nature of distress (see Note 1); NOTE 1 – If these are not provided automatically.
3.1.4.2
select the distress frequency(ies) to be used (see Note 1 of § 3.1.4.1);
3.1.4.3
activate the distress alert attempt by a dedicated distress button.
3.2
Reception
The DSC equipment should be capable of maintaining a reliable watch on a 24-hour basis on appropriate DSC distress alerting frequencies. 3.3
Acknowledgement of distress alerts
Acknowledgements of distress alerts should be initiated manually. Acknowledgements should be transmitted on the same frequency as the distress alert was received. 3.3.1 Distress alerts should normally be acknowledged by DSC only by appropriate coast stations. Coast stations should, in addition, set watch on radiotelephony and, if the “mode of subsequent communication” signal in the received distress alert indicates teleprinter, also on narrow-band direct-printing (NBDP) (see Recommendation ITU-R M.493). In both cases, the radiotelephone and NBDP frequencies should be those associated with the frequency on which the distress alert was received. 3.3.2 Acknowledgements by coast stations of DSC distress alerts transmitted on MF or HF should be initiated with a minimum delay of 1 min after receipt of a distress alert, and normally within a maximum delay of 2 ¾ min. This allows all calls within a single frequency or multi-frequency call attempt to be completed and should allow sufficient time for coast stations to respond to the distress alert. Acknowledgements by coast stations on VHF should be transmitted as soon as practicable.
294
Maritime Manual
3.3.3 The acknowledgement of a distress alert consists of a single DSC acknowledgement call which should be addressed to “all ships” and include the identification (see Recommendation ITU-R M.493) of the ship whose distress alert is being acknowledged. 3.3.4 Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should set watch on an associated radiotelephone distress and safety traffic frequency and acknowledge the call by radiotelephony. If a ship station continues to receive a DSC distress alert on an MF or VHF channel, a DSC acknowledgement should be transmitted to terminate the call only after consulting with a Rescue Coordination Centre or a Coast Station and being directed to do so. 3.3.5 The automatic repetition of a distress alert attempt should be terminated automatically on receipt of a DSC distress acknowledgement. 3.3.6 When distress, urgency, and safety traffic cannot be successfully conducted using radiotelephony, an affected station may indicate its intention to conduct subsequent communications on the associated frequency for NBDP telegraphy. 3.4
Distress relays
Distress relay calls should be initiated manually. 3.4.1 A distress relay call should use the telecommand signal “distress relay” in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493 and the calling attempt should follow the procedures described in § 3.1.3 to 3.1.3.2 for distress alerts, except that the alert is sent manually as a single call on a single frequency. 3.4.2 Any ship, receiving a distress alert on an HF channel which is not acknowledged by a coast station within 5 min, should transmit a distress relay call to the appropriate coast station. 3.4.3 Distress relay calls transmitted by coast stations, or by ship stations addressed to more than one vessel, should be acknowledged by ship stations using radiotelephony. Distress relay calls transmitted by ship stations should be acknowledged by a coast station transmitting a “distress relay acknowledgement” call in accordance with the procedures for distress acknowledgements given in § 3.3 to 3.3.3.
4
Procedures for DSC urgency and safety calls
4.1 DSC, on the distress and safety calling frequencies, should be used by coast stations to advise shipping, and by ships to advise coast stations and/or ship stations, of the impending transmission of urgency, vital navigational and safety messages, except where the transmissions take place at routine times. The call should indicate the working frequency which will be used for the subsequent transmission of an urgent, vital navigational or safety message.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
295
4.2 The announcement and identification of medical transports should be carried out by DSC techniques, using appropriate distress and safety calling frequencies. Such calls should use the category “urgency”, and telecommand “medical transport” and be addressed to all ships at VHF and Geographic Area at MF/HF. 4.3 The operational procedures for urgency and safety calls should be in accordance with the relevant parts of Annex 3, § 2.1 or 2.2 and 3.1. or 3.2.
5
Testing the equipment used for distress and safety calls
Testing on the exclusive DSC distress and safety calling frequencies should be avoided as far as possible by using other methods. VHF, MF and HF test calls should be in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493 (see Table 4.7) and the call may be acknowledged by the called station. Normally there would be no further communication between the two stations involved.
Annex 2 Provisions and procedures for routine calls
1
Frequency/channels
1.1 As a rule, paired frequencies should be used at HF and MF, in which case an acknowledgement is transmitted on the frequency paired with the frequency of the received call. In exceptional cases for national purposes a single frequency may be used. If the same call is received on several calling channels, the most appropriate shall be chosen to transmit the acknowledgement. A single frequency channel should be used at VHF. 1.2
International calling
The paired frequencies listed in RR Appendix 17, Part A and in Annex 5 of this Recommendation should be used for international DSC calling. 1.2.1 At HF and MF international DSC frequencies should only be used for shoreto-ship calls and for the associated call acknowledgements from ships fitted for automatic DSC operation where it is known that the ships concerned are not listening to the coast station’s national frequencies.
296
Maritime Manual
1.2.2 All ship-to-shore DSC calling at HF and MF should preferably be done on the coast station’s national frequencies. 1.3
National calling
Coast stations should avoid using the international DSC frequencies for calls that may be placed using national frequencies. 1.3.1 Ship stations should keep watch on appropriate national and international channels. (Appropriate measures should be taken for an even loading of national and international channels.) 1.3.2 Administrations are urged to find methods and negotiate terms to improve the utilization of the DSC channels available, e.g.: –
coordinated and/or joint use of coast station transmitters;
–
optimizing the probability of successful calls by providing information to ships on suitable frequencies (channels) to be watched and by information from ships to a selected number of coast stations on the channels watched on-board.
1.4
Method of calling
1.4.1 The procedures set out in this section are applicable to the use of DSC techniques, except in cases of distress, urgency or safety, to which the provisions of RR Chapter VII are applicable. 1.4.2 The call shall contain information indicating the station or stations to which the call is directed, and the identification of the calling station. 1.4.3 The call should also contain information indicating the type of communication to be set up and may include supplementary information such as a proposed working frequency or channel; this information shall always be included in calls from coast stations, which shall have priority for that purpose. 1.4.4 An appropriate digital selective calling channel chosen in accordance with the provisions of RR Nos. 52.128 to 52.137 or Nos. 52.145 to 52.153, as appropriate, shall be used for the call.
2
Operating procedures
The technical format of the call sequence shall be in conformity with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. The reply to a DSC requesting an acknowledgement shall be made by transmitting an appropriate acknowledgement using DSC techniques.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
297
Acknowledgements may be initiated either manually or automatically. When an acknowledgement can be transmitted automatically, it shall be in conformity with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. The technical format of the acknowledgement sequence shall be in conformity with the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. For communication between a coast station and a ship station, the coast station shall finally decide the working frequency or channel to be used. The forwarding traffic and the control for working for radiotelephony shall be carried out in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1171. A typical DSC calling and acknowledgement sequence contains the following signals (see Recommendation ITU-R M.493). Composition of a typical routine DSC calling and acknowledgement sequence Signal – format specifier
Method of composition operator selected
– address
operator entered
– category (routine)
automatically selected
– self-identification
pre-programmed
– telecommand information
seleccionada por el operador
– frequency information (if appropriate)
operator selected or entered
– telephone number (semiautomatic/automatic ship-to-shore connections only)
operator entered
– end of sequence signal
automatically selected.
2.1
Coast station initiates call to ship station (see Note 1)
Figures 1 and 2 illustrate the procedures below in flow chart and by time sequence diagram respectively. NOTE 1 – See Recommendations ITU-R M.689 and ITU-R M.1082 for further details of procedures applicable only to the semi-automatic/automatic services.
2.1.2 If a direct connection exists between the calling subscriber and the coast station, the coast station asks the calling subscriber for the approximate position of the ship.
298
Maritime Manual
2.1.3 If the ship’s position cannot be indicated by the caller, the coast station operator tries to find the location in the information available at the coast station. 2.1.4 The coast station checks to see whether the call would be more appropriate through another coast station (see § 1.3.2). 2.1.5 The coast station checks to see whether the transmission of a DSC is inappropriate or restricted (e.g. ship not fitted with DSC or barred). 2.1.6 Assuming a DSC is appropriate the coast station composes the calling sequence as follows: –
selects format specifier,
–
enters address of the ship,
–
selects category,
–
selects telecommand information,
–
inserts working frequency information in the message part of the sequence, if appropriate,
–
usually selects “end of sequence” signal “RQ”. However, if the coast station knows that the ship station cannot respond or the call is to a group of ships the frequency is omitted and the end of sequence signal should be 127, in which case the following procedures (§ 2.1.13 to 2.1.15) relating to an acknowledgement are not applicable.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
299 FIGURE 1
Flow chart of operational procedures for calling in the shore-to-ship direction SHORE (coast station)
2.1.2 Ask caller for position of ship if a direct connection exists
No
Position?
Try to find the position of ship
Yes
2.1.4 2.1.5
SHIP
2.1.3
Is call appropriate?
No 2.1.6 2.1.7
Yes
2.1.13.3 2.1.13.4
2.1.13.1 Manual
TX autom. or manu.?
Autom.
2.1.13.1
Can acknowledgement be transmitted within 5 min of receipt?
2.1.13.1 2.1.13.3/4
No Transmit the calling sequence
See Fig. 3
Does transmitted sequence contain RQ?
No
2
Yes Monitor receiving channel 2.1.9
Is ack. received? 2.1.8.1
No
2.1.8.2 No
2.1.13.2 Check transmission interval 2.1.13.2 Is No interval long enough?
2.1.13.1 2.1.13.3/4
Compose and verify a calling sequence
1
See Fig. 3
Transmit automatically the acknowledgement
With “unable to comply”
Yes 2.1.14 No
Is the ship able to comply immediately?
2.1.14
Is interval long enough? Yes Is ship on working channel?
No
2.1.14.2 Yes
No Check transmission interval
2.1.14
Yes
Compose and verify an acknowledgement sequence
Busy?
2.1.8.1
Monitor working channel proposed if appropriate
Automatic composition of acknowledgement sequence
Monitor the selected calling frequency
Yes
No
Yes
2.1.13
Select calling frequency
2.1.8.1
Record and indicate message received
With acknowledgement RQ?
Compose and verify a calling sequence
2.1.8
2.1.12
Yes
Contact ship station on working channel agreed
Yes
Yes 2.1.13.4
2.1.13.3 No 2.1.14 Contact coast station on working channel agreed
Is contact successful?
No
2.1.15 No
Yes
Has call attempt been completed?
END END
2.1.11 Yes Check the number of call attempts
Yes
Can call attempt be repeated?
1/10 min 6/24 h
2.1.13.4 Wait for a call from ship station
No Contact with caller if necessary
END
0541-01
300
Maritime Manual FIGURE 2 Examples of timing diagrams for calling in shore-to-ship direction Coast station TX RX
Ship station RX TX
t1 t4 t1
Working frequencies f1
fl
Contact on working frequencies
t3
a) Automated transmitter (able to comply)
t1 t4 t1 t2 t1 t5 t1
Contact on working frequencies
t3
b) Automated transmitter (unable to comply)
t1 t2 t1 t5 t1
Contact on working frequencies
t3
c) Ship transmitter not automated. Ship makes a delayed (>5 min) response to coast station and encounters queue on working frequency t 1 : transmission time of a DSC sequence t 2: interval between the DSC reception at the ship and transmission from the ship after the operator’s appearance in the radio room (from several minutes up to several hours) t3 : transition time from calling to working frequency including, if necessary, the time for working channel clearing (queue waiting time) t 4 : as defined in § 2.1.13.2 t 5 : time for coast station to prepare acknowledgement (see § 2.2.6)
: format specifier : called station address : calling station suffix (c) or (s) indicates coast station or ship station respectively self-identification C : category T1 : first telecommand signal, (104) indicates unable to comply T2 : second telecommand signal, (103) indicates queue f1, f1 : working frequencies RQ, BQ : end of sequence signals
F A I
0541-02
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
2.1.7
301
The coast station verifies the calling sequence.
The call shall be transmitted once on a single appropriate calling channel or frequency only. Only in exceptional circumstances may a call be transmitted simultaneously on more than one frequency. 2.1.8 The coast station operator chooses the calling frequencies which are most suitable for the ship’s location. 2.1.8.1 After checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress, the coast station operator initiates the transmission of the sequence on one of the frequencies chosen. Transmission on any one frequency should be limited to no more than 2 call sequences separated by intervals of at least 45 s to allow for reception of an acknowledgement from the ship. 2.1.8.2 If appropriate, a “call attempt” may be transmitted, which may include the transmission of the same call sequence on other frequencies (if necessary with a change of working frequency information to correspond to the same band as the calling frequency) made in turn at intervals of not less than 5 min, following the same pattern as in § 2.1.8.1. 2.1.9 If an acknowledgement is received further transmission of the call sequence should not take place. The coast station shall then prepare to transmit traffic on the working channel or frequency it has proposed. 2.1.10 The acknowledgement of the received call should only be transmitted upon receipt of a calling sequence which terminates with an acknowledgement request. 2.1.11 When a station called does not reply, the call attempt should not normally be repeated until after an interval of at least 15 min. The same call attempt should not be repeated more than five times every 24 h. The aggregate of the times for which frequencies are occupied in one call attempt, should normally not exceed 1 min. The following procedures apply at the ship: 2.1.12 Upon receipt of a calling sequence at the ship station, the received message should be displayed. 2.1.13 When a received call sequence contains an end of sequence signal “RQ”, an acknowledgement sequence should be composed and transmitted. The format specifier and category information should be identical to that in the received calling sequence.
302
Maritime Manual
2.1.13.1 If the ship station is not equipped for automatic DSC operation, the ship’s operator initiates an acknowledgement to the coast station after a delay of at least 5 s but no later than 4 ½ min of receiving the calling sequence, using the ship-to-shore calling procedures detailed in § 2.2. However the transmitted sequence should contain a “BQ” end of sequence signal in place of the “RQ” signal. If such an acknowledgement cannot be transmitted within 5 min of receiving the calling sequence then the ship station should instead transmit a calling sequence to the coast station using the ship-to-shore calling procedure detailed in § 2.2. 2.1.13.2 If the ship is equipped for automatic DSC operation, the ship station automatically transmits an acknowledgement with an end of sequence signal “BQ”. The start of the transmission of this acknowledgement sequence should be within 30 s for HF and MF or within 3 s for VHF after the reception of the complete call sequence. 2.1.13.3 If the ship is able to comply immediately the acknowledgement sequence should include a telecommand signal which is identical to that received in the calling sequence indicating that it is able to comply. If no working frequency was proposed in the call, the ship station should include a proposal for a working frequency in its acknowledgement. 2.1.13.4 If the ship is not able to comply immediately the acknowledgement sequence should include the telecommand signal 104 (unable to comply), with a second telecommand signal giving additional information (see Recommendation ITU-R M.493). At some later time when the ship is able to accept the traffic being offered, the ship’s operator initiates a call to the coast station using the ship-to-shore calling procedures detailed in § 2.2. 2.1.14 If a call is acknowledged indicating ability to comply immediately and communication between coast station and ship station on the working channel agreed is established, the DSC call procedure is considered to be completed. 2.1.15 If the ship station transmits an acknowledgement which is not received by the coast station then this will result in the coast station repeating the call (in accordance with § 2.1.11). In this event the ship station should transmit a new acknowledgement. If no repeated call is received the ship station should transmit an acknowledgement or calling sequence in accordance with § 2.1.13.1.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
2.2
303
Ship station initiates call to coast station (see Note 1)
Figures 3 and 4 illustrate the procedures below in flow chart and by time sequence diagram respectively. This procedure should also be followed both as a delayed response to a call received earlier from the coast station (see § 2.1.13.1) and to initiate traffic from the ship station. NOTE 1 – See Recommendations ITU-R M.689 and ITU-R M.1082 for further details of procedures applicable only to the semi-automatic/automatic services.
2.2.1
The ship composes the calling sequence as follows:
–
operator selects the format specifier,
–
operator enters address,
–
automatically selected category,
–
pre-programmed self-identification,
–
operator selects the telecommand information,
–
operator inserts (selects or enters) working frequency, or enters position (for MF/HF only) information in the message part of the sequence if appropriate,
–
operator enters telephone number required (semi-automatic/automatic connections only),
–
automatically selected “end of sequence” signal RQ.
304
Maritime Manual FIGURE 3 Flow chart of operational procedures for calling in the ship-to-shore direction SHIP 2.2.1/2.2.2 Compose and verify a calling sequence 2.1.13.1 1 See Fig. 1
2.2.3 Select calling frequency 2.2.4 Monitor the calling frequency
Yes
Busy? SHORE (coast station)
Yes 2.2.4 Transmit the calling sequence
Record and indicate message received
No Is this a calling sequence?
No
2.1.13.1
2.2.6
2
Compose and verify an acknowledgement sequence
Transmit the acknowledgement sequence
See Fig. 1
Select acknowledgement frequency
2.2.6 Delay if necessary (manual connections)
Check receiving channel
Transmit the acknowledgement sequence
Yes
Is acknowledgement received?
2.2.5 No Yes
Is alternative frequency proposed?
Check transmission interval
No Is alternative frequency acceptable?
Is interval long enough?
Yes
2.2.5/2.2.9
2.2.7 No
Yes
Is another attempt required? No
Ship transmit call indicating “unable to comply”
No
Yes
No 2.2.8
2.2.8
Contact ship station on working channel agreed
Contact coast station on working channel agreed
END
END
With “unable to comply”?
Yes 2.1.13.4
0541-03
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
305
FIGURE 4 Examples of timing diagrams for calling in ship-to-shore direction Ship station
Coast station TX
RX
RX
TX
Working frequencies f1
f1
t1
t5 t1
Contact on working frequencies
t3
a) Able to comply immediately
t1 t5 t1
Contact on working frequencies
t3
b) Queue exists on working frequency : transmission time of a DSC sequence : transition time from calling to working frequency including, if necessary, the time for working channel clearing (queue waiting time) t5 : time for coast station to prepare acknowledgement (see § 2.2.6) : format specifier F : called station address A : calling station suffix (c) or (s) indicates coast station I self-identification or ship station respectively : category C : first telecommand signal, (104) indicates unable to comply T1 : second telecommand signal, (103) indicates queue T2 f1, f1' : working frequencies RQ, BQ : end of sequence signals t1 t3
0541-04
2.2.2
The ship verifies the calling sequence.
2.2.3 The ship selects the single most appropriate calling frequency preferably using the coast station’s nationally assigned calling channels, for which purpose it shall send a single calling sequence on the selected frequency. 2.2.4 The ship initiates the transmission of the sequence on the frequency selected after checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress on that frequency.
306
Maritime Manual FIGURE 5 Composition procedures for calling and acknowledgement sequences (for calls other than distress and safety) SHORE (coast station) or SHIP
Calling
Calling/ acknowledgement
2.1.6 (Coast) 2.2.1 (Ship)
Acknowledgement 2.1.13 (Ship) 2.2.6 (Coast) (2)
Select acknowledgement BQ as EOS signal
Select format specifier
Yes
Enter address
Unable to comply? No
Select category
“Routine” or “ship business priority”
Alternative frequency proposal?
(3)
Select telecommand information
No
Select 1st telecommand “unable to comply” (104) and 2nd telecommand as appropriate
Yes
No
Yes
Queue? Yes
Enter telecommands 104 and 103
Select frequency of working channel
(3)
Enter frequency proposal
(4)
With frequency?
No
No
(5)
Select telecommand information
Semiautomatic/automatic ship-to-shore connection
Yes
Enter telephone number
Select EOS signal(1)
END
(1) (2)
(3) (4) (5)
Normally acknowledgement RQ may automatically be selected as an EOS signal of a calling sequence to an individual station. The format specifier and the category are automatically transferred from the received call.The self-ID in the received sequence is automatically transferred into the address part of acknowledgement sequence by selecting acknowledgement BQ. The frequency information is automatically transferred from the received call. This procedure is only for coast stations. When able to comply, and no queue exists, then the telecommand information is 0541-05 automatically transferred from the received call.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
307
2.2.5 If a called station does not reply, the call sequence from the ship station should not normally be repeated until after an interval of at least 5 min for manual connections, or 5 s or 25 s in the case of semi-automatic/automatic VHF or MF/HF connections respectively. These repetitions may be made on alternative frequencies if appropriate. Any subsequent repetitions to the same coast station should not be made until at least 15 min have elapsed. 2.2.6 The coast station should transmit an acknowledgement sequence (after checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress on the frequency selected), after a delay of at least 5 s but not later than 4 ½ min for manual connections, or, within 3 s for semi-automatic/automatic connections, containing the format specifier, the address of the ship, the category, the coast station self-identification and: –
if able to comply immediately on the working frequency suggested, the same telecommand and frequency information as in the call request;
–
if no working frequency was suggested by the ship station then the acknowledgement sequence should include a channel/frequency proposal;
–
if not able to comply on the working frequency suggested but able to comply immediately on an alternative frequency, the same telecommand information as in the call request but an alternative working frequency;
–
if unable to comply immediately the telecommand signal 104 with a second telecommand signal giving additional information. For manual connections only, this second telecommand signal may include a queue indication.
The end of sequence signal BQ should also be included. 2.2.7 For manual connections, if a working frequency is proposed in accordance with § 2.2.6 but this is not acceptable to the ship station, then the ship station should immediately transmit a new call requesting an alternative frequency. 2.2.8 If an acknowledgement is received further transmission of the call sequence should not take place. On receipt of an acknowledgement which indicates ability to comply, the DSC procedures are complete and both coast station and ship station should communicate on the working frequencies agreed with no further exchange of DSC calls. 2.2.9 If the coast station transmits an acknowledgement which is not received at the ship station then the ship station should repeat the call in accordance with § 2.2.5. 2.3
Ship station initiates call to ship station
The ship-to-ship procedures should be similar to those given in § 2.2, where the receiving ship station complies with the procedures given for coast stations, as appropriate, except that, with respect to § 2.2.1, the calling ship should always insert working frequency information in the message part of the calling sequence.
308
Maritime Manual
Annex 3 Operational procedures for ships for DSC communications on MF, HF and VHF Introduction
Procedures for DSC communications on MF and VHF are described in § 1 to 5 below. The procedures for DSC communications on HF are in general the same as for MF and VHF. Special conditions to be taken into account when making DSC communications on HF are described in § 6 below.
1
Distress
1.1
Transmission of DSC distress alert
A distress alert should be transmitted if, in the opinion of the Master, the ship or a person is in distress and requires immediate assistance. A DSC distress alert should as far as possible include the ship’s last known position and the time (in UTC) when it was valid. The position and the time may be included automatically by the ship’s navigational equipment or may be inserted manually. The DSC distress alert is transmitted as follows: –
tune the transmitter to the DSC distress channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF (see Note 1)). NOTE 1 – Some maritime MF radiotelephony transmitters shall be tuned to a frequency 1 700 Hz lower than 2 187.5 kHz, i.e. 2 185.8 kHz, in order to transmit the DSC distress alert on 2 187.5 kHz;
–
if time permits, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard –
the nature of distress,
–
the ship’s last known position (latitude and longitude),
–
the time (in UTC) the position was valid,
–
type of subsequent distress communication (telephony),
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions; –
transmit the DSC distress alert;
–
prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning the transmitter and the radiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic channel in the same band, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF, while waiting for the DSC distress acknowledgement.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
1.2
309
Actions on receipt of a distress alert
Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should normally not acknowledge the distress alert by DSC since acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert by use of DSC is normally made by coast stations only (see Annex 1 § 3.3.4 and Annex 3 § 6.1.4). If a ship station continues to receive a DSC distress alert on an MF or VHF channel, a DSC acknowledgement should be transmitted to terminate the call only after consulting with a Rescue Coordination Centre or a Coast Station and being directed to do so. Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship should also defer the acknowledgement of the distress alert by radiotelephony for a short interval, if the ship is within an area covered by one or more coast stations, in order to give the coast station time to acknowledge the DSC distress alert first. Ships receiving a DSC distress alert from another ship shall: –
watch for the reception of a distress acknowledgement on the distress channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF and channel 70 on VHF);
–
prepare for receiving the subsequent distress communication by tuning the radiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic frequency in the same band in which the DSC distress alert was received, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF;
–
acknowledge the receipt of the distress alert by transmitting the following by radiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency in the same band in which the DSC distress alert was received, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF:
1.3
–
“MAYDAY”,
–
the 9-digit identity of the ship in distress, repeated 3 times,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity or the call sign or other identification of own ship, repeated 3 times,
–
“RECEIVED MAYDAY”.
Distress traffic
On receipt of a DSC distress acknowledgement the ship in distress should commence the distress traffic by radiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency (2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF) as follows: –
“MAYDAY”,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of the ship,
310
Maritime Manual
–
the ship’s position in latitude and longitude or other reference to a known geographical location,
–
the nature of distress and assistance wanted,
–
any other information which might facilitate the rescue.
1.4
Transmission of a DSC distress relay call
In no case is a ship permitted to transmit an all ships DSC distress relay call on receipt of a DSC distress alert on either VHF or MF channels. If no aural watch is present on the relative channel (2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF), the coast station should be contacted by sending an individual DSC distress relay call. 1.4.1
Transmission of a DSC distress relay call on behalf of someone else
A ship knowing that another ship is in distress shall transmit a DSC distress relay call if: –
the ship in distress is not itself able to transmit the distress alert,
–
the Master of the ship considers that further help is necessary.
The DSC distress relay call is transmitted as follows: –
tune the transmitter to the DSC distress channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF),
–
select the distress relay call format on the DSC equipment,
–
key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard: –
All Ships Call (VHF). Geographic Area Call (MF/HF) or the 9-digit identity of the appropriate coast station,
–
the 9-digit identity of the ship in distress, if known,
–
the nature of distress,
–
the latest position of the ship in distress, if known,
–
the time (in UTC) the position was valid (if known),
–
type of subsequent distress communication (telephony);
–
transmit the DSC distress relay call;
–
prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning the transmitter and the radiotelephony receiver to the distress traffic channel in the same band, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF and channel 16 on VHF, while waiting for the DSC distress acknowledgement.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
1.5
311
Acknowledgement of a DSC distress relay call received from a coast station
Coast stations, after having received and acknowledged a DSC distress alert, may if necessary, retransmit the information received as a DSC distress relay call, addressed to all ships (VHF only), all ships in a specific geographical area (MF/HF only), or a specific ship. Ships receiving a distress relay call transmitted by a coast station shall not use DSC to acknowledge the call, but should acknowledge the receipt of the call by radiotelephony on the distress traffic channel in the same band in which the relay call was received, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF. Acknowledge the receipt of the distress relay call by transmitting the following by radiotelephony on the distress traffic frequency in the same band in which the DSC distress relay call was received: –
“MAYDAY” RELAY,
–
the 9-digit identity or the call sign or other identification of the calling coast station,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of own ship,
–
“RECEIVED MAYDAY RELAY”.
1.6
Acknowledgement of a DSC distress relay call received from another ship
Ships receiving a distress relay call from another ship shall follow the same procedure as for acknowledgement of a distress alert, i.e. the procedure given in § 1.2 above. 1.7
Cancellation of an inadvertent distress alert
A station transmitting an inadvertent distress alert shall cancel the distress alert using the following procedure: 1.7.1 Immediately cancel the distress alert aurally over the telephony distress traffic channel associated with each DSC channel on which the “distress alert” was transmitted. 1.7.2 Monitor the telephony distress traffic channel associated with the DSC channel on which the distress was transmitted, and respond to any communications concerning that distress alert as appropriate.
312
Maritime Manual
2
Urgency
2.1
Transmission of urgency messages
Transmission of urgency messages shall be carried out in two steps: –
announcement of the urgency message,
–
transmission of the urgency message.
The announcement is carried out by transmission of a DSC urgency call on the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF). The urgency message is transmitted on the distress traffic channel (2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF). The DSC urgency call may be addressed to all stations at VHF, or a geographic area at MF/HF, or to a specific station. The frequency on which the urgency message will be transmitted shall be included in the DSC urgency call. The transmission of an urgency message is thus carried out as follows: Announcement: –
tune the transmitter to the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF);
–
select the appropriate calling format on the DSC equipment (all ships (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HF only) or individual);
–
key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard: –
specific area or 9-digit identity of the specific station, if appropriate,
–
the category of the call (urgency),
–
the frequency or channel on which the urgency message will be transmitted,
–
the type of communication in which the urgency message will be given (radiotelephony),
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions; –
transmit the DSC urgency call.
Transmission of the urgency message: –
tune the transmitter to the frequency or channel indicated in the DSC urgency call;
–
transmit the urgency message as follows: –
“PAN PAN”, repeated 3 times,
–
“ALL STATIONS” or called station, repeated 3 times,
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
2.2
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of own ship,
–
the text of the urgency message.
313
Reception of an urgency message
Ships receiving a DSC urgency call announcing an urgency message addressed to more than one station shall NOT acknowledge the receipt of the DSC call, but should tune the radiotelephony receiver to the frequency indicated in the call and listen to the urgency message.
3
Safety
3.1
Transmission of safety messages
Transmission of safety messages shall be carried out in two steps: –
announcement of the safety message,
–
transmission of the safety message.
The announcement is carried out by transmission of a DSC safety call on the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF). The safety message is normally transmitted on the distress and safety traffic channel in the same band in which the DSC call was sent, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, channel 16 on VHF. The DSC safety call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), ships in a specific geographical area (MF/HF only), or to a specific station. The frequency on which the safety message will be transmitted shall be included in the DSC call. The transmission of a safety message is thus carried out as follows: Announcement: –
tune the transmitter to the DSC distress calling channel (2 187.5 kHz on MF, channel 70 on VHF);
–
select the appropriate calling format on the DSC equipment (all ships (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HF only), or individual);
–
key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard: –
specific area or 9-digit identity of specific station, if appropriate,
–
the category of the call (safety),
314
Maritime Manual
–
the frequency or channel on which the safety message will be transmitted,
–
the type of communication in which the safety message will be given (radiotelephony),
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions; –
transmit the DSC safety call.
Transmission of the safety message: –
tune the transmitter to the frequency or channel indicated in the DSC safety call;
–
transmit the safety message as follows:
3.2
–
“SECURITE”, repeated 3 times,
–
“ALL STATIONS” or called station, repeated 3 times,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity and the call sign or other identification of own ship,
–
the text of the safety message.
Reception of a safety message
Ships receiving a DSC safety call announcing a safety message addressed to more than one station shall NOT acknowledge the receipt of the DSC safety call, but should tune the radiotelephony receiver to the frequency indicated in the call and listen to the safety message.
4
Public correspondence
4.1
DSC channels for public correspondence
4.1.1
VHF
The VHF DSC channel 70 is used for DSC for distress and safety purposes as well as for DSC for public correspondence. 4.1.2
MF
International and national DSC channels separate from the DSC distress and safety calling channel 2 187.5 kHz are used for digital selective-calling on MF for public correspondence. Ships calling a coast station by DSC on MF for public correspondence should preferably use the coast station’s national DSC channel.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
315
The international DSC channel for public correspondence may as a general rule be used between ships and coast stations of different nationality. The ships transmitting frequency is 2 189.5 kHz, and the receiving frequency is 2 177 kHz. The frequency 2 177 kHz is also used for DSC between ships for general communication. 4.2
Transmission of a DSC call for public correspondence to a coast station or another ship
A DSC call for public correspondence to a coast station or another ship is transmitted as follows: –
tune the transmitter to the relevant DSC channel;
–
select the format for calling a specific station on the DSC equipment;
–
key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard: –
the 9-digit identity of the station to be called,
–
the category of the call (routine),
–
the type of the subsequent communication (normally radiotelephony),
–
a proposed working channel if calling another ship. A proposal for a working channel should NOT be included in calls to a coast station; the coast station will in its DSC acknowledgement indicate a vacant working channel,
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions; –
transmit the DSC call.
4.3
Repeating a call
A DSC call for public correspondence may be repeated on the same or another DSC channel, if no acknowledgement is received within 5 min. Further call attempts should be delayed at least 15 min, if acknowledgement is still not received. 4.4
Acknowledgement of a received call and preparation for reception of the traffic
On receipt of a DSC call from a coast station or another ship, a DSC acknowledgement is transmitted as follows: –
tune the transmitter to the transmit frequency of the DSC channel on which the call was received,
316
Maritime Manual
–
select the acknowledgement format on the DSC equipment,
–
transmit an acknowledgement indicating whether the ship is able to communicate as proposed in the call (type of communication and working frequency),
–
if able to communicate as indicated, tune the transmitter and the radiotelephony receiver to the indicated working channel and prepare to receive the traffic.
4.5
Reception of acknowledgement and further actions
When receiving an acknowledgement indicating that the called station is able to receive the traffic, prepare to transmit the traffic as follows: –
tune the transmitter and receiver to the indicated working channel;
–
commence the communication on the working channel by: –
the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of the called station,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity or call sign or other identification of own ship.
It will normally rest with the ship to call again a little later in case the acknowledgement from the coast station indicates that the coast station is not able to receive the traffic immediately. In case the ship, in response to a call to another ship, receives an acknowledgement indicating that the other ship is not able to receive the traffic immediately, it will normally rest with the called ship to transmit a call to the calling ship when ready to receive the traffic.
5
Testing the equipment used for distress and safety
Testing on the exclusive DSC distress and safety calling frequency 2 187.5 kHz should be avoided as far as possible by using other methods. Test calls should be transmitted by the ship station and acknowledged by the called station. Normally there would be no further communication between the two stations involved. A VHF and MF test call to a station is transmitted as follows: –
tune the transmitter to the DSC distress and safety calling frequency (i.e. channel 70 and 2 187.5 kHz),
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
317
–
key in or select the format for the test call on the DSC equipment in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions,
–
key in the 9-digit identity of the station to be called,
–
transmit the DSC call after checking as far as possible that no calls are in progress on the frequency,
–
wait for acknowledgement.
6
Special conditions and procedures for DSC communication on HF
General
The procedures for DSC communication on HF are – with some additions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 below – equal to the corresponding procedures for DSC communications on MF/VHF. Due regard to the special conditions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 should be given when making DSC communications on HF. 6.1
Distress
6.1.1
Transmission of DSC distress alert
DSC distress alert should be sent to coast stations – e.g. in A3 and A4 sea areas on HF – and on MF and/or VHF to other ships in the vicinity. The DSC distress alert should as far as possible include the ship’s last known position and the time (in UTC) it was valid. If the position and time is not inserted automatically from the ship’s navigational equipment, it should be inserted manually. Ship-to-shore distress alert Choice of HF band Propagation characteristics of HF radio waves for the actual season and time of the day should be taken into account when choosing HF bands for transmission of DSC distress alert. As a general rule the DSC distress channel in the 8 MHz maritime band (8 414.5 kHz) may in many cases be an appropriate first choice. Transmission of the DSC distress alert in more than one HF band will normally increase the probability of successful reception of the alert by coast stations. DSC distress alert may be sent on a number of HF bands in two different ways: a)
either by transmitting the DSC distress alert on one HF band, and waiting a few minutes for receiving acknowledgement by a coast station;
318
Maritime Manual
if no acknowledgement is received within 3 min, the process is repeated by transmitting the DSC distress alert on another appropriate HF band etc.; b)
or by transmitting the DSC distress alert at a number of HF bands with no, or only very short, pauses between the calls, without waiting for acknowledgement between the calls.
It is recommended to follow procedure a) in all cases, where time permits to do so; this will make it easier to choose the appropriate HF band for commencement of the subsequent communication with the coast station on the corresponding distress traffic channel. Transmitting the DSC distress alert (see Note 1): –
tune the transmitter to the chosen HF DSC distress channel (4 207.5, 6 312, 8 414.5, 12 577, 16 804.5 kHz) (see Note 2);
–
follow the instructions for keying in or selection of relevant information on the DSC equipment keyboard as described in § 1.1;
–
transmit the DSC distress alert.
NOTE 1 – Ship-to-ship distress alert should normally be made on MF and/or VHF, using the procedures for transmission of DSC distress alert on MF/VHF described in § 1.1. NOTE 2 – Some maritime HF transmitters shall be tuned to a frequency 1 700 Hz lower than the DSC frequencies given above in order to transmit the DSC distress alert on the correct frequency.
In special cases, for example in tropical zones, transmission of DSC distress alert on HF may, in addition to ship-to-shore alerting, also be useful for ship-to-ship alerting. 6.1.2
Preparation for the subsequent distress traffic
After having transmitted the DSC distress alert on appropriate DSC distress channels (HF, MF and/or VHF), prepare for the subsequent distress traffic by tuning the radiocommunication set(s) (HF, MF and/or VHF as appropriate) to the corresponding distress traffic channel(s). Where multiple frequency call attempts are transmitted the corresponding distress traffic frequency should be 8 291 kHz. If method b) described in § 6.1.1 has been used for transmission of DSC distress alert on a number of HF bands: –
take into account in which HF band(s) acknowledgement has been successfully received from a coast station;
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
–
319
if acknowledgements have been received on more than one HF band, commence the transmission of distress traffic on one of these bands, but if no response is received from a coast station then the other bands should be used in turn.
The distress traffic frequencies are (see RR Appendix 15, Table 15-1): HF (kHz): Telephony Telex
4 125 4 177.5
6 215 6 268
8 291 8 376.5
12 290 12 520
16 420 16 695
MF (kHz): Telephony Telex
2 182 2 174.5
VHF: Channel 16 (156.800 MHz). 6.1.3
Distress traffic
The procedures described in § 1.3 are used when the distress traffic on MF/HF is carried out by radiotelephony. The following procedures shall be used in cases where the distress traffic on MF/HF is carried out by radiotelex: –
The forward error correcting (FEC) mode shall be used;
–
all messages shall be preceded by:
–
–
at least one carriage return,
–
line feed,
–
one letter shift,
–
the distress signal MAYDAY;
The ship in distress should commence the distress telex traffic on the appropriate distress telex traffic channel as follows: –
carriage return, line feed, letter shift,
–
the distress signal “MAYDAY”,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity and call sign or other identification of the ship,
320
6.1.4
Maritime Manual
–
the ship’s position if not included in the DSC distress alert,
–
the nature of distress,
–
any other information which might facilitate the rescue.
Actions on reception of a DSC distress alert on HF from another ship
Ships receiving a DSC distress alert on HF from another ship shall not acknowledge the alert, but should: –
watch for reception of a DSC distress acknowledgement from a coast station;
–
while waiting for reception of a DSC distress acknowledgement from a coast station: prepare for reception of the subsequent distress communication by tuning the HF radiocommunication set (transmitter and receiver) to the relevant distress traffic channel in the same HF band in which the DSC distress alert was received, observing the following conditions: –
if radiotelephony mode was indicated in the DSC distress alert, the HF radiocommunication set should be tuned to the radiotelephony distress traffic channel in the HF band concerned;
–
if telex mode was indicated in the DSC distress alert, the HF radiocommunication set should be tuned to the radiotelex distress traffic channel in the HF band concerned. Ships able to do so should additionally watch the corresponding radiotelephony distress channel;
–
if the DSC distress alert was received on more than one HF band, the radiocommunication set should be tuned to the relevant distress traffic channel in the HF band considered to be the best one in the actual case. If the DSC distress alert was received successfully on the 8 MHz band, this band may in many cases be an appropriate first choice;
–
if no distress traffic is received on the HF channel within 1 to 2 min, tune the HF radiocommunication set to the relevant distress traffic channel in another HF band deemed appropriate in the actual case;
–
if no DSC distress acknowledgement is received from a coast station within 5 min, and no distress communication is observed going on between a coast station and the ship in distress: –
inform a Rescue Coordination Centre (RCC) via appropriate radiocommunications means, transmit a DSC distress relay call.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
6.1.5
321
Transmission of DSC distress relay call
In case it is considered appropriate to transmit a DSC distress relay call: distress relay calls on HF should be initiated manually; –
tune the transmitter(s) to the relevant DSC distress channel, following the procedures described in § 6.1.1 above (except the call is sent manually as a single call on a single frequency);
–
follow the instructions for keying in or selection of call format and relevant information on the DSC equipment keyboard as described in § 1.4;
–
transmit the DSC distress relay call.
6.1.6
Acknowledgement of a HF DSC distress relay call received from a coast station
Ships receiving a DSC distress relay call from a coast station on HF, addressed to all ships within a specified area, should NOT acknowledge the receipt of the relay alert by DSC, but by radiotelephony on the telephony distress traffic channel in the same band(s) in which the DSC distress relay call was received. 6.2
Urgency
Transmission of urgency messages on HF should normally be addressed: –
either to all ships within a specified geographical area,
–
or to a specific coast station.
Announcement of the urgency message is carried out by transmission of a DSC call with category urgency on the appropriate DSC distress channel. The transmission of the urgency message itself on HF is carried out by radiotelephony or radiotelex on the appropriate distress traffic channel in the same band in which the DSC announcement was transmitted. 6.2.1
Transmission of DSC announcement of an urgency message on HF
–
choose the HF band considered to be the most appropriate, taking into account propagation characteristics for HF radio waves at the actual season and time of the day; the 8 MHz band may in many cases be an appropriate first choice;
–
tune the HF transmitter to the DSC distress channel in the chosen HF band;
–
key in or select call format for either geographical area call or individual call on the DSC equipment, as appropriate;
–
in case of area call, key in specification of the relevant geographical area;
322
Maritime Manual
–
follow the instructions for keying in or selection of relevant information on the DSC equipment keyboard as described in § 2.1, including type of communication in which the urgency message will be transmitted (radiotelephony or radiotelex);
–
transmit the DSC call; and
–
if the DSC call is addressed to a specific coast station, wait for DSC acknowledgement from the coast station. If acknowledgement is not received within a few minutes, repeat the DSC call on another HF frequency deemed appropriate.
6.2.2
Transmission of the urgency message and subsequent action
–
tune the HF transmitter to the distress traffic channel (telephony or telex) indicated in the DSC announcement;
–
if the urgency message is to be transmitted using radiotelephony, follow the procedure described in § 2.1;
–
if the urgency message is to be transmitted by radiotelex, the following procedure shall be used: –
use the forward error correcting (FEC) mode unless the message is addressed to a single station whose radiotelex identity number is known;
–
commence the telex message by: –
at least one carriage return, line feed, one letter shift,
–
the urgency signal “PAN PAN”,
–
“this is”,
–
the 9-digit identity of the ship and the call sign or other identification of the ship,
–
the text of the urgency message.
Announcement and transmission of urgency messages addressed to all HF equipped ships within a specified area may be repeated on a number of HF bands as deemed appropriate in the actual situation. 6.3
Safety
The procedures for transmission of DSC safety announcement and for transmission of the safety message are the same as for urgency messages, described in § 6.2, except that: –
in the DSC announcement, the category SAFETY shall be used,
–
in the safety message, the safety signal “SECURITE” shall be used instead of the urgency signal “PAN PAN”.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
323
Annex 4 Operational procedures for coast stations for DSC communications on MF, HF and VHF Introduction Procedures for DSC communications on MF and VHF are described in § 1 to 5 below. The procedures for DSC communications on HF are in general the same as for MF and VHF. Special conditions to be taken into account when making DSC communications on HF are described in § 6 below.
1
Distress (see Note 1)
1.1
Reception of a DSC distress alert
The transmission of a distress alert indicates that a mobile unit (a ship, aircraft or other vehicle) or a person is in distress and requires immediate assistance. The distress alert is a digital selective call using a distress call format. Coast stations in receipt of a distress alert shall ensure that it is routed as soon as possible to an RCC. The receipt of a distress alert is to be acknowledged as soon as possible by the appropriate coast station. NOTE 1 – These procedures assume that the RCC is sited remotely from the DSC coast station; where this is not the case, appropriate amendments should be made locally.
1.2
Acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert
The coast station shall transmit the acknowledgement on the distress calling frequency on which the call was received and should address it to all ships. The acknowledgement shall include the identification of the ship whose distress alert is being acknowledged. The acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency on which the distress alert was received;
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1): –
distress alert acknowledgement,
–
9-digit identity of the ship in distress,
324
Maritime Manual
–
nature of distress,
–
distress coordinates,
–
the time (in UTC) when the position was valid.
NOTE 1 – Some or all of this information might be included automatically by the equipment; –
transmit the acknowledgement;
–
prepare to handle the subsequent distress traffic by setting watch on radiotelephony and, if the “mode of subsequent communication” signal in the received distress alert indicates teleprinter, also on NBDP, if the coast station is fitted with NBDP. In both cases, the radiotelephone and NBDP frequencies should be those associated with the frequency on which the distress alert was received (on MF 2 182 kHz for radiotelephony and 2 174.5 kHz for NBDP, on VHF 156.8 MHz/channel 16 for radiotelephony; there is no frequency for NBDP on VHF).
1.3
Transmission of a DSC distress relay call
Coast stations shall initiate and transmit a distress relay call in any of the following cases: –
when the distress of the mobile unit has been notified to the coast station by other means and a broadcast alert to shipping is required by the RCC; and
–
when the person responsible for the coast station considers that further help is necessary (close cooperation with the appropriate RCC is recommended under such conditions).
In the cases mentioned above, the coast station shall transmit a shore-to-ship distress relay call addressed, as appropriate, to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area (MF/HF only) or to a specific ship. The distress relay call shall contain the identification of the mobile unit in distress, its position and other information which might facilitate rescue. The distress relay call is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress alerts (2 187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz/channel 70 on VHF);
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex): –
distress relay call,
–
the format specifier (all ships (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HF only), or individual station),
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
–
if appropriate, the address of the ship, or geographical area,
–
9-digit identity of the ship in distress, if known,
–
nature of distress,
–
distress coordinates,
–
the time (in UTC) when the position was valid;
325
–
transmit the distress relay call;
–
prepare for the reception of the acknowledgements by ship stations and for handling the subsequent distress traffic by switching over to the distress traffic channel in the same band, i.e. 2 182 kHz on MF, 156.8 MHz/channel 16 on VHF.
1.4
Reception of a distress relay call
If the distress relay call is received from a ship station, coast stations on receipt of the distress relay call shall ensure that the call is routed as soon as possible to an RCC. The receipt of the distress relay call is to be acknowledged as soon as possible by the appropriate coast station using a DSC distress relay acknowledgement addressed to the ship station. If the distress relay call is received from a coast station, other coast stations will normally not have to take further action.
2
Urgency
2.1
Transmission of a DSC announcement
The announcement of the urgency message shall be made on one or more of the distress and safety calling frequencies using DSC and the urgency call format. The DSC urgency call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area (MF/HF only), or to a specific ship. The frequency on which the urgency message will be transmitted after the announcement shall be included in the DSC urgency call. The DSC urgency call is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress calls (2 187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz /channel 70 on VHF);
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex): –
the format specifier (all ships call (VHF), geographical area (MF/HF only), or individual station),
–
if appropriate, the address of the ship, or geographical area,
326
–
Maritime Manual
–
the category of the call (urgency),
–
the frequency or channel on which the urgency message will be transmitted,
–
the type of communication in which the urgency message will be transmitted (radiotelephony);
transmit the DSC urgency call.
After the DSC announcement, the urgency message will be transmitted on the frequency indicated in the DSC call.
3
Safety
3.1
Transmission of a DSC announcement
The announcement of the safety message shall be made on one or more of the distress and safety calling frequencies using DSC and the safety call format. The DSC safety call may be addressed to all ships (VHF only), to a geographical area (MF/HF only), or to a specific ship. The frequency on which the safety message will be transmitted after the announcement shall be included in the DSC safety call. The DSC safety call is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the frequency for DSC distress alerts (2 187.5 kHz on MF, 156.525 MHz/channel 70 on VHF);
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex):
–
–
the format specifier (all ships call (VHF only), geographical area (MF/HF only), or individual station),
–
if appropriate, the address of the ship, or geographical area,
–
the category of the call (safety),
–
the frequency or channel on which the safety message will be transmitted,
–
the type of communication in which the safety message will be transmitted (radiotelephony);
transmit the DSC safety call.
After the DSC announcement, the safety message will be transmitted on the frequency indicated in the DSC call.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
4
Public correspondence
4.1
DSC frequencies/channels for public correspondence
4.1.1
VHF
327
The frequency 156.525 MHz/channel 70 is used for DSC for distress and safety purposes. It may also be used for calling purposes other than distress and safety, e.g. public correspondence. 4.1.2
MF
For public correspondence national and international frequencies are used which are different from the frequencies used for distress and safety purposes. When calling ship stations by DSC, coast stations should use for the call, in the order of preference: –
a national DSC channel on which the coast station is maintaining watch;
–
the international DSC calling channel, with the coast station transmitting on 2 177 kHz and receiving on 2 189.5 kHz. In order to reduce interference on this channel, it may be used as a general rule by coast stations to call ships of another nationality, or in cases where it is not known on which DSC frequencies the ship station is maintaining watch.
4.2
Transmission of a DSC call to a ship
The DSC call is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the appropriate calling frequency;
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex): –
the 9-digit identity of the ship to be called,
–
the category of the call routine,
–
the type of subsequent communication (radiotelephony),
–
working frequency information;
–
after checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress, transmit the DSC call.
4.3
Repeating a call
Coast stations may transmit the call twice on the same calling frequency with an interval of at least 45 s between the two calls, provided that they receive no acknowledgement within that interval.
328
Maritime Manual
If the station called does not acknowledge the call after the second transmission, the call may be transmitted again on the same frequency after a period of at least 30 min or on another calling frequency after a period of at least 5 min. 4.4
Preparation for exchange of traffic
On receipt of a DSC acknowledgement with the indication that the called ship station can use the proposed working frequency, the coast station transfers to the working frequency or channel and prepares to receive the traffic. 4.5
Acknowledgement of a received DSC call
Acknowledgements shall normally be transmitted on the frequency paired with the frequency of the received call. If the same call is received on several calling channels, the most appropriate channel shall be chosen for transmission of the acknowledgement. The acknowledgement of a DSC call is transmitted as follows: –
use a transmitter which is tuned to the appropriate frequency;
–
in accordance with the DSC equipment manufacturer’s instructions, key in or select on the DSC equipment keyboard (see Note 1 of § 1.2 of this Annex):
–
–
the format specifier (individual station),
–
9-digit identity of the calling ship,
–
the category of the call routine,
–
if able to comply immediately on the working frequency suggested by the ship station, the same frequency information as in the received call,
–
if no working frequency was suggested by the calling ship station, then the acknowledgement should include a channel/frequency proposal,
–
if not able to comply on the working frequency suggested, but able to comply immediately on an alternative frequency, the alternative working frequency,
–
if unable to comply immediately the appropriate information in that regard;
transmit the acknowledgement (after checking as far as possible that there are no calls in progress on the frequency selected) after a delay of at least 5 seconds, but not later than 4 ½ minutes.
After having transmitted the acknowledgement, the coast station transfers to the working frequency or channel and prepares to receive the traffic.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
5
329
Testing the equipment used for distress and safety calls
Perform VHF, MF and HF test calls in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493, Table 4.7. Acknowledgement of a DSC test call
The coast station should acknowledge test calls.
6
Special conditions and procedures for DSC communication on HF
General
The procedures for DSC communication on HF are – with some additions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 below – equal to the corresponding procedures for DSC communications on MF/VHF. Due regard to the special conditions described in § 6.1 to 6.3 should be given when making DSC communications on HF. 6.1
Distress
6.1.1
Reception and acknowledgement of a DSC distress alert on HF
Ships in distress may in some cases transmit the DSC distress alert on a number of HF bands with only short intervals between the individual calls. The coast station shall transmit DSC acknowledgement on all HF DSC distress channels on which the DSC distress alert was received in order to ensure as far as possible that the acknowledgement is received by the ship in distress and by all ships which received the DSC distress alert. 6.1.2
Distress traffic
The distress traffic should, as a general rule, be initiated on the appropriate distress traffic channel (radiotelephony or NBDP) in the same band in which the DSC distress alert was received. For distress traffic by NBDP the following rules apply: –
all messages shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, line feed, one letter shift and the distress signal MAYDAY;
–
FEC broadcast mode should be used.
330
6.1.3
Maritime Manual
Transmission of DSC distress relay call on HF
HF propagation characteristics should be taken into account when choosing HF band(s) for transmission of DSC distress relay call. IMO Convention ships equipped with HF DSC for distress and safety purposes are required to keep continuous automatic DSC watch on the DSC distress channel in the 8 MHz band and on at least one of the other HF DSC distress channels. In order to avoid creating on board ships uncertainty regarding on which band the subsequent establishment of contact and distress traffic should be initiated, the HF DSC distress relay call should be transmitted on one HF band at a time and the subsequent communication with responding ships be established before eventually repeating the DSC distress relay call on another HF band. 6.2
Urgency
6.2.1
Transmission of urgency announcement and message on HF
For urgency messages by NBDP the following apply: –
the urgency message shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, line feed, one letter shift, the urgency signal PAN PAN and the identification of the coast station;
–
FEC broadcast mode should normally be used. ARQ mode should be used only when considered advantageous to do so in the actual situation and provided that the radiotelex number of the ship is known.
6.3
Safety
6.3.1
Transmission of safety announcements and messages on HF
For safety messages by NBDP the following apply: –
the safety message shall be preceded by at least one carriage return, line feed, one letter shift, the safety signal SECURITE and the identification of the coast station;
–
FEC broadcast mode should normally be used. ARQ mode should be used only when considered advantageous to do so in the actual situation and provided that the radiotelex number of the ship is known.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.541-9
331
Annex 5 Frequencies used for DSC 1 The frequencies used for distress, urgency, and safety purposes using DSC are as follows (RR Appendix 15): 2 187.5
kHz
4 207.5
kHz
6 312
kHz
8 414.5
kHz
12 577
kHz
16 804.5
kHz
156.525 MHz (Note 1) NOTE 1 – The frequency 156.525 MHz may also be used for DSC purposes other than distress, urgency, and safety.
2 The frequencies assignable on an international basis to ship and coast stations for DSC, for purposes other than distress, urgency, and safety, are as follows (see Note 2): 2.1
Ship stations (see Note 2) 458.5
kHz
2 177 (Note 3)
2 189.5
kHz
4 208
4 208.5
4 209
kHz
6 312.5
6 313
6 313.5
kHz
8 415
8 415.5
8 416
kHz
12 577.5
12 578
12 578.5
kHz
16 805
16 805.5
16 806
kHz
18 898.5
18 899
18 899.5
kHz
22 374.5
22 375
22 375.5
kHz
25 208.5
25 209
25 209.5
kHz
156.525
MHz
332
2.2
Maritime Manual
Coast stations (see Note 2) 455.5
kHz
2 177
kHz
4 219.5
4 220
4 220.5
kHz
6 331
6 331.5
6 332
kHz
8 436.5
8 437
8 437.5
kHz
12 657
12 657.5
12 658
kHz
16 903
16 903.5
16 904
kHz
19 703.5
19 704
19 704.5
kHz
22 444
22 444.5
22 445
kHz
26 121
26 121.5
26 122
kHz
156.525
MHz
NOTE 2 – The following (kHz) paired frequencies (for ship/coast stations) 4 208/4 219.5, 6 312.5/6 331, 8 415/8 436.5, 12 577.5/12 657, 16 805/16 903, 18 898.5/19 703.5, 22 374.5/22 444 and 25 208.5/26 121 are the first choice international frequencies for DSC (See RR Appendix 17, Part A, footnote j) and l)). NOTE 3 – The frequency 2 177 kHz is available to ship stations for intership calling only.
3 In addition to the frequencies listed in § 2 above, appropriate working frequencies in the following bands may be used for DSC (see RR Chapter II, Article 5): 415-526.5
kHz
(Regions 1 and 3)
415-525
kHz
(Region 2)
1 606.5-3 400
kHz
(Regions 1 and 3)
1 605.5-3 400
kHz
(Region 2) (For the band 1 605-1 625 kHz, see RR No. 5.89)
4 000-27 500
kHz
156-174
MHz
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
333
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1171* RADIOTELEPHONY PROCEDURES IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE (1995) Rec. ITU-R M.1171
ANNEX 1
Section I. Introduction § 1. Radiotelephone stations should, as far as possible, be equipped with devices for instantaneous switching from transmission to reception and vice versa. This equipment is necessary for all stations participating in communication between ships and subscribers of the land telephone system. § 2. (1) Stations equipped for radiotelephony may transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelephony. Coast stations providing such service and open for public correspondence shall be indicated in the List of Coast Stations. (2) To facilitate radiocommunications Recommendation ITU-R M.1172 may be used.
the
service abbreviations
given in
Section II. Calls by Radiotelephony § 3. The provisions of this Section relating to the intervals between calls are not applicable to a station operating under conditions involving distress, urgency or safety. § 4. (1) As a general rule, it rests with the ship station to establish communication with the coast station. For this purpose the ship station may call the coast station only when it comes within the service area of the latter, that is to say, that area within which, by using an appropriate frequency, the ship station can be heard by the coast station. (2) However, a coast station having traffic for a ship station may call this station if it has reason to believe that the ship station is keeping watch and is within the service area of the coast station.
_______________ Note by the Secretariat: The references made to the Radio Regulations (RR) in this Recommendation refer to the RR as revised by the World Radiocommunication Conference 1995. These elements of the RR will come into force on 1 June 1998. Where applicable, the equivalent references in the current RR are also provided in square brackets.
334
Maritime Manual
§ 5. (1) In addition, each coast station shall, so far as practicable, transmit its calls in the form of “traffic lists” consisting of the call signs or other identification in alphabetical order of all ship stations for which it has traffic on hand. These calls shall be made at specified times fixed by agreement between the administrations concerned and at intervals of not less than two hours and not more than four hours during the working hours of the coast station. (2) Coast stations shall transmit their traffic lists on their normal working frequencies in the appropriate bands. The transmission shall be preceded by a general call to all stations. (3) The general call to all stations announcing the traffic lists may be sent on a calling frequency in the following form: –
“Hello all ships” or CQ (spoken as CHARLIE QUEBEC) not more than three times;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
“ . . . Radio” not more than three times;
–
“Listen for my traffic list on . . . kHz”.
In no case may this preamble be repeated. (4) However, in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz when the conditions for establishing contact are good, the call described in § 5.(3) above may be replaced by: –
“Hello all ships” or CQ (spoken as CHARLIE QUEBEC), once;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
“ . . . Radio”, twice;
–
“Listen for my traffic list on channel . . . ”.
In no case may this preamble be repeated. (5) The provisions of § 5.(3) are obligatory when 2 182 kHz or 156.8 MHz is used. (6) The hours at which coast stations transmit their traffic lists and the frequencies and classes of emission which they use for this purpose shall be stated in the List of Coast Stations. (7) Ship stations should as far as possible listen to the traffic lists transmitted by coast stations. On hearing their call sign or other identification in such a list they must reply as soon as they can do so. (8) When the traffic cannot be sent immediately, the coast station shall inform each ship station concerned of the probable time at which working can begin, and also, if necessary, the frequency and class of emission which will be used. § 6. When a coast station receives calls from several ship stations at practically the same time, it decides the order in which these stations may transmit their traffic. Its decision shall be based on the priority (see RR No. S53.1 [No. 4441]) of the radiotelegrams or radiotelephone calls that the ship stations have on hand and on the need for allowing each calling station to clear the greatest possible number of communications.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
335
§ 7. (1) When a station called does not reply to a call sent three times at intervals of two minutes, the calling shall cease. (2) However, when a station called does not reply, the call may be repeated at threeminute intervals. (3) In areas where reliable VHF communication with a called coast station is practicable, the calling ship station may repeat the call as soon as it is ascertained that traffic has been terminated at the coast station. (4) In the case of a communication between a station of the maritime mobile service and an aircraft station, calling may be renewed after an interval of five minutes. (5) Before renewing the call, the calling station shall ascertain that the station called is not in communication with another station. (6) If there is no reason to believe that harmful interference will be caused to other communications in progress, the provisions of § 7.(4) above are not applicable. In such cases the call, sent three times at intervals of two minutes, may be repeated after an interval of not less than three minutes. (7) However, before renewing the call, the calling station shall ascertain that further calling is unlikely to cause interference to other communications in progress and that the station called is not in communication with another station. (8) Ship stations shall not radiate a carrier wave between calls. § 8. When the name and address of the administration or private operating agency controlling a ship station are not given in the appropriate list of stations or are no longer in agreement with the particulars given therein, it is the duty of the ship station to furnish as a matter of regular procedure, to the coast station to which it transmits traffic, all the necessary information in this respect. § 9. (1) The coast station may, by means of the abbreviation TR (spoken as TANGO ROMEO), ask the ship station to furnish it with the following information: a)
position and, whenever possible, course and speed;
b)
next port of call.
(2) The information referred to in § 9.(1) above, preceded by the abbreviation TR, should be furnished by ship stations, whenever this seems appropriate, without prior request from the coast station. The provision of this information is authorized only by the master or the person responsible for the ship.
336
Maritime Manual
Section III. Method of Calling, Reply to Calls and Signals Preparatory to Traffic when Using Calling Methods Other than Digital Selective Calling A. Method of Calling § 10.
(1) The call consists of: –
the call sign or other identification of the station called, not more than three times;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
the call sign or other identification of the calling station, not more than three times.
(2) However, in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz when the conditions for establishing contact are good, the call described in § 10.(1) above may be replaced by: –
the call sign of the station called, once;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
the call sign or other identification of the calling station, twice.
(3) When calling a VHF coast station operating on more than one channel, a ship station calling on a working channel should include the number of that channel in the call. (4) When contact is established, the call sign or other identification may thereafter be transmitted once only. (5) When the coast station is fitted with equipment for selective calling in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.541, and the ship station is fitted with equipment for receiving such selective calls, the coast station shall call the ship by transmitting the appropriate code signals. The ship station shall call the coast station by speech in the manner given in § 10.(1) (see also Annex 2 to Recommendation ITU-R M.257). § 11. of:
Calls for internal communications on board ship when in territorial waters shall consist a)
From the master station: –
the name of the ship followed by a single letter (ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, etc.) indicating the sub-station not more than three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the ship followed by the word CONTROL;
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
b)
337
From the sub-station: –
the name of the ship followed by the word CONTROL not more than three times;
–
the words THIS IS;
–
the name of the ship followed by a single letter (ALFA, BRAVO, CHARLIE, etc.) indicating the sub-station.
B. Frequency to Be Used for Calling and for Preparatory Signals B1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz § 12. (1) A radiotelephone ship station calling a coast station should use for the call, in order of preference: a)
a working frequency on which the coast station is keeping watch;
b)
the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz;
c)
in Regions 1 and 3 and in Greenland, the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz (assigned frequency 2 192.4 kHz) when a carrier frequency of 2 182 kHz is being used for distress;
d)
in Region 2 except for Greenland, the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz as a supplementary calling frequency in those areas of heavy usage of 2 182 kHz.
(2) A radiotelephone ship station calling another ship station should use for the call: a)
the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz;
b)
an intership frequency, whenever and wherever traffic density is high and prior arrangements can be made.
(3) Subject to the provisions of § 12.(6), coast stations shall, in accordance with the requirements of their own country, call ship stations of their own nationality either on a working frequency or, when calls to individual ships are made, on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz. (4) However, a ship station which keeps watch simultaneously on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz and a working frequency should be called on the working frequency. (5) As a general rule, coast stations should call radiotelephone ship stations of another nationality on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz. (6) Coast stations may call ship stations equipped to receive selective calls in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.257 and ITU-R M.541.
338
Maritime Manual
B2. Bands Between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz § 13. (1) A ship station calling a coast station by radiotelephony shall use either one of the calling frequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.221 [No. 4375] or the working frequency associated with that of the coast station, in accordance with RR Appendix S17, Part B Section I, [Appendix 16, Section A]. (2) A coast station calling a ship station by radiotelephony shall use one of the calling frequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.222 [No. 4376], one of its working frequencies shown in the List of Coast Stations, or the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz or 6 215 kHz, in accordance with the provisions of RR Nos. S52.221.2 and S52.221.3 [Nos. 4375.2 and 4375.3]. (3) The preliminary operations for the establishment of radiotelephone communications may also be carried out by radiotelegraphy using the procedure appropriate to radiotelegraphy (see Recommendation ITU-R M.1170 § 17). (4) The provisions of § 13.(1) and § 13.(2) do not apply to communications between ship stations and coast stations using the simplex frequencies specified in RR Appendix S17, Part B, Section I [Appendix 16, Section B].
B3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz § 14. (1) In the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz, intership and coast station to ship calling should, as a general rule, be made on 156.8 MHz. However, coast station to ship calling may be conducted on a working channel or on a two-frequency calling channel which has been implemented in accordance with RR No. S52.236 [No. 4391]. Except for distress, urgency or safety communications, when 156.8 MHz should be used, ship to coast station calling should, whenever possible, be made on a working channel or on a two-frequency calling channel which has been implemented in accordance with RR No. S52.236 [No. 4391]. Ships wishing to participate in a port operations service or ship movement service should call on a port operations or ship movement working frequency, indicated in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations. (2) When 156.8 MHz is being used for distress, urgency or safety communications, a ship station desiring to participate in the port operations service may establish contact on 156.6 MHz, or another port operations frequency indicated in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations. B4. Procedure for Calling a Station Providing Pilot Service § 15. A radiotelephone ship station calling a station providing pilot service should use for the call, in order of preference: a)
an appropriate channel in the bands between 156 MHz and 174 MHz;
b)
a working frequency in the bands between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz;
c)
the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, and then only to determine the working frequency to be used.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
339
C. Form of Reply to Calls § 16.
The reply to calls consists of: –
the call sign or other identification of the calling station, not more than three times;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
the call sign or other identification of the station called, not more than three times.
D. Frequency for Reply D1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz § 17. (1) When a ship station is called on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, it should reply on the same carrier frequency unless another frequency is indicated by the calling station. (2) When a ship station is called by selective calling in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.257 it shall reply on a frequency on which the coast station keeps watch. (3) When a ship station is called on a working frequency by a coast station of the same nationality, it shall reply on the working frequency normally associated with the frequency used by the coast station for the call. (4) When calling a coast station or another ship station, a ship station shall indicate the frequency on which a reply is required if this frequency is not the normal one associated with the frequency used for the call. (5) A ship station which frequently exchanges traffic with a coast station of another nationality may use the same procedure for reply as ships of the nationality of the coast station, where this has been agreed by the administrations concerned. (6) As a general rule a coast station shall reply: a)
on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz to calls made on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, unless another frequency is indicated by the calling station;
b)
on a working frequency to calls made on a working frequency;
c)
on a working frequency to calls made in Regions 1 and 3 and in Greenland on the carrier frequency 2 191 kHz (assigned frequency 2 192.4 kHz).
340
Maritime Manual
D2. Bands Between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz § 18. (1) A ship station called by a coast station shall reply either on one of the calling frequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.221 [No. 4375] or on the working frequency associated with that of the coast station, in accordance with RR Appendix S17, Part B, Section I [Appendix 16, Section A]. (2) A coast station called by a ship station shall reply on one of the calling frequencies mentioned in RR No. S52.222 [No. 4376], or on one of its working frequencies shown in the List of Coast Stations. (3) When a station is called on the carrier frequency 4 125 kHz it should reply on the same frequency unless another frequency is indicated for that purpose by the calling station. (4) When a station is called on the carrier frequency 6 215 kHz it should reply on the same frequency unless another frequency is indicated for that purpose by the calling station. (5) The provisions of § 18.(1) and § 18.(2) do not apply to communication between ship stations and coast stations using the simplex frequencies specified in RR Appendix S17, Part B, Section I [Appendix 16, Section B].
D3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz § 19. (1) When a station is called on 156.8 MHz it should reply on the same frequency unless another frequency is indicated by the calling station. (2) When a coast station open to public correspondence calls a ship either by speech or by selective calling in accordance with Annex 2 to Recommendation ITU-R M.257, using a two-frequency channel, the ship station shall reply by speech on the frequency associated with that of the coast station; conversely, a coast station shall reply to a call from a ship station on the frequency associated with that of the ship station.
E. Indication of the Frequency to Be Used for Traffic E1. Bands Between 1 605 kHz and 4 000 kHz § 20. If contact is established on the carrier frequency 2 182 kHz, coast and ship stations shall transfer to working frequencies for the exchange of traffic.
E2. Bands Between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz § 21. After a ship station has established contact with a coast station, or another ship station, on the calling frequency of the band chosen, traffic shall be exchanged on their respective working frequencies.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
341
E3. Bands Between 156 MHz and 174 MHz § 22. (1) Whenever contact has been established between a coast station in the public correspondence service and a ship station either on 156.8 MHz or on a two-frequency calling channel (see RR No. S52.237 [No. 4392]), the stations shall transfer to one of their normal pairs of working frequencies for the exchange of traffic. The calling station should indicate the channel to which it is proposed to transfer by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably, to its channel designator. (2) When contact on 156.8 MHz has been established between a coast station in the port operations service and a ship station, the ship station should indicate the particular service required (such as navigational information, docking instructions, etc.) and the coast station shall then indicate the channel to be used for the exchange of traffic by reference to the frequency in MHz, or, preferably, to its channel designator. (3) When contact on 156.8 MHz has been established between a coast station in the ship movement service and a ship station, the coast station shall then indicate the channel to be used for the exchange of traffic by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably, to its channel designator. (4) A ship station, when it has established contact with another ship station on 156.8 MHz, should indicate the intership channel to which it is proposed to transfer for the exchange of traffic by reference to the frequency in MHz or, preferably, to its channel designator. (5) However, a brief exchange of traffic not to exceed one minute concerning the safety of navigation need not be transmitted on a working frequency when it is important that all ships within range receive the transmission. (6) Stations hearing a transmission concerning the safety of navigation shall listen to the message until they are satisfied that the message is of no concern to them. They shall not make any transmission likely to interfere with the message.
F. Agreement on the Frequency to Be Used for Traffic § 23.
(1) If the station called is in agreement with the calling station, it shall transmit: a)
an indication that from that moment onwards it will listen on the working frequency or channel announced by the calling station;
b)
an indication that it is ready to receive the traffic of the calling station.
(2) If the station called is not in agreement with the calling station on the working frequency or channel to be used, it shall transmit an indication of the working frequency or channel proposed. (3) For communications between a coast station and a ship station, the coast station shall finally decide the frequency or channel to be used. (4) When agreement is reached regarding the working frequency or channel which the calling station shall use for its traffic, the station called shall indicate that it is ready to receive the traffic.
342
Maritime Manual
G. Indication of Traffic § 24. When the calling station wishes to exchange more than one radiotelephone call, or to transmit one or more radiotelegrams, it should indicate this when contact is established with the station called.
H. Difficulties in Reception § 25. (1) If the station called is unable to accept traffic immediately, it should reply to the call as indicated in § 16 followed by “Wait . . . minutes” (or AS spoken as ALFA SIERRA . . . (minutes) in case of language difficulties), indicating the probable duration of waiting time in minutes. If the probable duration exceeds ten minutes the reason for the delay shall be given. Alternatively the station called may indicate, by any appropriate means, that it is not ready to receive traffic immediately. (2) When a station receives a call without being certain that such a call is intended for it, it shall not reply until the call has been repeated and understood. (3) When a station receives a call which is intended for it, but is uncertain of the identification of the calling station, it shall reply immediately asking for a repetition of the call sign or other identification of the calling station.
Section IV. Forwarding (Routing) of Traffic A. Traffic Frequency § 26. (1) Every station should transmit its traffic (radiotelephone calls or radiotelegrams) on one of its working frequencies in the band in which the call has been made. (2) In addition to its normal working frequency, printed in heavy type in the List of Coast Stations, a coast station may use one or more supplementary frequencies in the same band, in accordance with the provisions of RR Article S52 [Article 60]. (3) The use of frequencies reserved for calling shall be forbidden for traffic, except distress traffic (see RR Appendix S13 [Chapter IX]). (4) After contact has been established on the frequency to be used for traffic, the transmission of a radiotelegram or radiotelephone call shall be preceded by: –
the call sign or other identification of the station called;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
the call sign or other identification of the calling station.
(5) The call sign or other identification need not be sent more than once.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1171
343
B. Establishment of Radiotelephone Calls and Transmission of Radiotelegrams B1. Establishment of Radiotelephone Calls § 27. (1) In setting up a radiotelephone call, the coast station should establish connection with the telephone network as quickly as possible. In the meantime, the ship station shall maintain watch on the appropriate working frequency as indicated by the coast station. (2) However, if the connection cannot be quickly established, the coast station shall inform the ship station accordingly. The latter station shall then either: a)
maintain watch on the appropriate frequency until an effective circuit can be established; or
b)
contact the coast station later at a mutually agreed time.
(3) When a radiotelephone call has been completed, the procedure indicated in § 29.(3) shall be applied unless further calls are on hand at either station.
B2. Transmission of Radiotelegrams § 28.
(1) The transmission of a radiotelegram should be made as follows: –
radiotelegram begins: from . . . (name of ship or aircraft);
–
number . . . (serial number of radiotelegram);
–
number of words . . . ;
–
date . . . ;
–
time . . . (time radiotelegram was handed in aboard ship or aircraft);
–
service indicators (if any);
–
address . . . ;
–
text . . . ;
–
signature . . . (if any);
–
radiotelegram ends, over.
(2) As a general rule, radiotelegrams of all kinds transmitted by ship stations shall be numbered in a daily series; number 1 shall be given to the first radiotelegram sent each day to each separate station. (3) A series of numbers which has begun in radiotelegraphy should be continued in radiotelephony and vice versa. (4) Each radiotelegram should be transmitted once only by the sending station. However, it may, when necessary, be repeated in full or in part by the receiving or the sending station.
344
Maritime Manual
(5) In transmitting groups of figures, each figure shall be spoken separately and the transmission of each group or series of groups shall be preceded by the words “in figures”. (6) Numbers written in letters shall be spoken as they are written, their transmission being preceded by the words “in letters”.
B3. Acknowledgement of Receipt § 29. (1) The acknowledgement of receipt of a radiotelegram or a series of radiotelegrams shall be given by the receiving station in the following manner:
`
–
the call sign or other identification of the sending station;
–
the words THIS IS (or DE spoken as DELTA ECHO in case of language difficulties);
–
the call sign or other identification of the receiving station;
–
“Your No. . . . received, over” (or R spoken as ROMEO . . . (number), K spoken as KILO in case of language difficulties); or
–
“Your No. . . . to No. . . . received, over” (or R spoken as ROMEO . . . (numbers), K spoken as KILO in case of language difficulties).
(2) The radiotelegram, or series of radiotelegrams, shall not be considered as cleared until this acknowledgement has been received. (3) The end of work between two stations shall be indicated by each of them by means of the word “Out” (or VA spoken as VICTOR ALFA in case of language difficulties).
Section V. Duration and Control of Working § 30. (1) In communications between coast stations and ship stations, the ship station shall comply with the instructions given by the coast station in all questions relating to the order and time of transmission, to the choice of frequency, and to the duration and suspension of work. (2) In communications between ship stations, the station called controls the working in the manner indicated in § 30.(1) above. However, if a coast station finds it necessary to intervene, the ship stations shall comply with the instructions given by the coast station.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1173
345
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1173* TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SINGLE-SIDEBAND TRANSMITTERS USED IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE FOR RADIOTELEPHONY IN THE BANDS BETWEEN 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz REGION 2) AND 4 000 kHz AND BETWEEN 4 000 kHz AND 27 500 kHz (1995) Rec. ITU-R M.1173
ANNEX 1
Technical characteristics of single-sideband transmitters used in the maritime mobile service for radiotelephony in the bands between 1 606.5 kHz (1 605 kHz Region 2) and 4 000 kHz and between 4 000 kHz and 27 500 kHz
1
Power of the carrier:
For class J3E emissions the power of the carrier shall be at least 40 dB below the peak envelope power. 2
Coast and ship stations shall use only the upper sideband.
3 The transmitter audio-frequency band shall be 350 Hz to 2 700 Hz with a permitted amplitude variation of 6 dB. 4 The carrier frequencies shall be maintained within the tolerances specified in Recommendation ITU-R SM.1137. 5 The unwanted frequency modulation of the carrier shall be sufficiently low to prevent harmful distortion.
_______________ Note by the Secretariat: The references made to the Radio Regulations (RR) in this Recommendation refer to the RR as revised by the World Radiocommunication Conference 1995. These elements of the RR will come into force on 1 June 1998. Where applicable, the equivalent references in the current RR are also provided in square brackets.
346
Maritime Manual
6 When class H3E or J3E emissions are used, the power of any unwanted emission supplied to the antenna transmission line on any discrete frequency shall, when the transmitter is driven to full peak envelope power, be in accordance with the following Tables: a)
Transmitters installed before 2 January 1982:
Separation between the frequency of the unwanted emission 1 and the assigned frequency 4 (kHz) 1.6 4.8
Minimum attenuation below peak envelope power
4.8 8
8
28 dB 38 dB 43 dB without the unwanted emission power exceeding the power of 50 mW
Transmitters using suppressed carrier emission may, as far as concerns out-of-band emissions 2 and those spurious emissions 3 which are a result of the modulation process but do not fall in the spectrum of out-of-band emissions 2, be tested for compliance with this regulation by means of a two-tone-audio input signal with a frequency separation between the tones such that all intermodulation products occur at frequencies at least 1.6 kHz removed from the assigned frequency 4. b)
Transmitters installed after 1 January 1982:
Separation between the frequency of the unwanted emission 1 and the assigned frequency 4 (kHz)
Minimum attenuation below peak envelope power
1.5
4.5
31 dB
4.5
7.5
38 dB 43 dB without the unwanted emission power exceeding the power of 50 mW
7.5
Transmitters using suppressed carrier emission may, as far as concerns out-of-band emissions 2 and those spurious emissions 3 which are a result of the modulation process but do not fall in the spectrum of out-of-band emissions 2, be tested for compliance with this regulation by means of a two-tone-audio input signal with a frequency separation between the tones such that all intermodulation products occur at frequencies at least 1.5 kHz removed from the assigned frequency 4.
_______________ 1 Unwanted emission: see RR No. S1.146 [No. 140]. 2 Out-of-band emission: see RR No. S1.144 [No. 138]. 3 Spurious emission: see RR No. S1.145 [No. 139]. 4 The assigned frequency is 1 400 Hz higher than the carrier frequency: see RR No. S.52.177 [No. 4325].
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1174-2
347
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1174-2 Technical characteristics of equipment used for on-board vessel communications in the bands between 450 and 470 MHz (1995-1998-2004)
Annex 1 Technical characteristics of equipment used for on-board vessel communications in the bands between 450 and 470 MHz 1 The equipment should be fitted with sufficient channels for satisfactory operation in the area of intended use. 2 The effective radiated power should be limited to the maximum required for satisfactory operations, but should in no case exceed 2 W. Wherever practicable the equipment should be fitted with a suitable device to reduce readily the output power by at least 10 dB. 3 In the case of equipment installed at a fixed point on the ship, the height of its antenna should not be more than 3.5 m above the level of the bridge.
348
Maritime Manual
25 kHz channels
12.5 kHz channels
4
Only frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phase modulation) should be used.
Only frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phase modulation) should be used.
5
The frequency deviation corresponding to 100% modulation should approach 5 kHz as nearly as practicable. In no event should the frequency deviation exceed 5 kHz.
The frequency deviation corresponding to 100% modulation should approach 2.5 kHz as nearly as practicable. In no event should the frequency deviation exceed 2.5 kHz.
6
The frequency tolerance should be 5 parts in 106.
The frequency tolerance should be 2.5 parts in 106.
7
The audio-frequency band should be limited to 3 000 Hz.
The audio-frequency band should be limited to 2 550 Hz.
8 Control, telemetry and other non-voice signals such as paging, should be coded in such a manner as to minimize the possibility of false response to interfering signals. The frequencies specified in RR No. 5.287 for on-board communications may be used for single frequency and two-frequency simplex operation. 9 When used in the duplex mode the base transmitter frequency should be selected from the lower range for improved operability. 10 If the use of a repeater station is required on board a ship, the following frequency pairs should be used (see RR No. 5.287 and 5.288): 457.525 MHz
and
467.525 MHz
457.550 MHz
and
467.550 MHz
457.575 MHz
and
467.575 MHz
457.5375 MHz
and
467.5375 MHz
457.5625 MHz
and
467.5625 MHz.
Part B – SECTION IV – Rec. ITU-R M.1174-2
11
349
Frequencies
The frequencies specified in RR No. 5.287 (subject to national regulations) may be used: For 25 or 12.5 kHz channel spacing: 457.525 MHz 457.550 MHz 457.575 MHz 467.525 MHz 467.550 MHz 467.575 MHz. For equipment designed to operate with 12.5 kHz channel spacing the additional frequencies referred to in RR No. 5.287 are: 457.5375 MHz 457.5625 MHz 467.5375 MHz 467.5625 MHz.
_______________
PART C Extracts from other ITU-R Recommendations (M and SM Series)
353
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.493-13 Digital selective-calling system for use in the maritime mobile service (1974-1978-1982-1986-1990-1992-1994-1995-1997-1997-2000-2004-2007-2009)
Annex 1 General purpose equipment characteristics 1
General
1.1 The system is a synchronous system using characters composed from a ten-bit error-detecting code as listed in Table 1. 1.1.1 The first seven bits of the ten-bit code of Table 1 are information bits. Bits 8, 9 and 10 indicate, in the form of a binary number, the number of B elements that occur in the seven information bits, a Y element being a binary number 1 and a B element a binary number 0. For example, a BYY sequence for bits 8, 9 and 10 indicates 3 (0 4 + 1 2 + 1 1) B elements in the associated seven information bit sequence; and a YYB sequence indicates 6 (1 4 + 1 2 + 0 1) B elements in the associated seven information bit sequence. The order of transmission for the information bits is least significant bit first but for the check bits it is most significant bit first. 1.2
Time diversity is provided in the call sequence as follows:
1.2.1 Apart from the phasing characters, each character is transmitted twice in a time-spread mode; the first transmission (DX) of a specific character is followed by the transmission of four other characters before the re-transmission (RX) of that specific character takes place, allowing for a time-diversity reception interval of: 1.2.1.1 400 ms for HF and MF channels, and 1.2.1.2 331/3 ms for VHF radio-telephone channels. 1.3
The classes of emission, frequency shifts and modulation rates are as follows:
1.3.1 F1B or J2B 170 Hz and modulation rate of 100 Bs (bit/s) 30 × 106 for use on HF and MF DSC calling channels. When frequency-shift keying is effected by applying audio signals to the input of single-sideband transmitters (J2B), the centre of the audiofrequency spectrum offered to the transmitter is 1 700 Hz. When a DSC call is
354
Maritime Manual
transmitted on HF and MF working channels for public correspondence, the class of emission is J2B. In this case, audio tones with frequencies 1 700 Hz 85 Hz and modulation rate 100 Bs (bit/s) 30 × 106 are used in order for the DSC call to be transmitted. 1.3.2 Frequency modulation with a pre-emphasis of 6 dB/octave (phase modulation) with frequency-shift of the modulating sub-carrier for use on VHF channels: frequency-shift between 1 300 and 2 100 Hz; the sub-carrier being at 1 700 Hz; the frequency tolerance of the 1 300 and 2 100 Hz tones is 10 Hz; the modulation rate is 1 200 B s (bit/s) the index of modulation is 2.0
30 × 106;
10%.
1.3.3 The radio-frequency tolerances of new designs of both transmitters and receivers in the MF and HF bands should be: coast station: 10 Hz, ship station: 10 Hz, receiver bandwidth: should not exceed 300 Hz. 1.4 The higher frequency corresponds to the B-state and the lower frequency corresponds to the Y-state of the signal elements. 1.5 The information in the call is presented as a sequence of seven-bit combinations constituting a primary code. 1.5.1 The seven information bits of the primary code express a symbol number from 00 to 127, as shown in Table 1, and where: 1.5.1.1 the symbols from 00 to 99 are used to code two decimal figures according to Table 2; 1.5.1.2 the symbols from 100 to 127 are used to code service commands (see Table 3). 1.6 Where the distress alert repetitions described in § 11 apply, the following conditions are considered necessary: 1.6.1 the transmitter encoder must provide repetitive transmission of the call sequence in accordance with § 11; and 1.6.2 the receiver decoder should provide maximum utilization of the received signal, including use of the error-check character and by using an iterative decoding process with adequate memory provision. 1.7 When the transmission of a DSC distress alert is automatically repeated, ships DSC equipments must be capable of automatically receiving a subsequent distress acknowledgement (see Recommendation ITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3.1, 3.1.3.2 and 3.3.5).
355
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
TABLE 1 Ten-bit error-detecting code Symbol No.
Emitted signal and bit position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Symbol No.
Emitted signal and bit position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
BBBBBBBYYY YBBBBBBYYB BYBBBBBYYB YYBBBBBYBY BBYBBBBYYB YBYBBBBYBY BYYBBBBYBY YYYBBBBYBB BBBYBBBYYB YBBYBBBYBY BYBYBBBYBY YYBYBBBYBB BBYYBBBYBY YBYYBBBYBB BYYYBBBYBB YYYYBBBBYY BBBBYBBYYB YBBBYBBYBY BYBBYBBYBY YYBBYBBYBB BBYBYBBYBY YBYBYBBYBB BYYBYBBYBB YYYBYBBBYY BBBYYBBYBY YBBYYBBYBB BYBYYBBYBB YYBYYBBBYY BBYYYBBYBB YBYYYBBBYY BYYYYBBBYY YYYYYBBBYB BBBBBYBYYB YBBBBYBYBY BYBBBYBYBY YYBBBYBYBB BBYBBYBYBY YBYBBYBYBB BYYBBYBYBB YYYBBYBBYY BBBYBYBYBY YBBYBYBYBB BYBYBYBYBB
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
YYBYBYBBYY BBYYBYBYBB YBYYBYBBYY BYYYBYBBYY YYYYBYBBYB BBBBYYBYBY YBBBYYBYBB BYBBYYBYBB YYBBYYBBYY BBYBYYBYBB YBYBYYBBYY BYYBYYBBYY YYYBYYBBYB BBBYYYBYBB YBBYYYBBYY BYBYYYBBYY YYBYYYBBYB BBYYYYBBYY YBYYYYBBYB BYYYYYBBYB YYYYYYBBBY BBBBBBYYYB YBBBBBYYBY BYBBBBYYBY YYBBBBYYBB BBYBBBYYBY YBYBBBYYBB BYYBBBYYBB YYYBBBYBYY BBBYBBYYBY YBBYBBYYBB BYBYBBYYBB YYBYBBYBYY BBYYBBYYBB YBYYBBYBYY BYYYBBYBYY YYYYBBYBYB BBBBYBYYBY YBBBYBYYBB BYBBYBYYBB YYBBYBYBYY BBYBYBYYBB YBYBYBYBYY
B
0
Y
1
Order of bit transmission: bit 1 first.
Symbol No. 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
Emitted signal and bit position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BYYBYBYBYY YYYBYBYBYB BBBYYBYYBB YBBYYBYBYY BYBYYBYBYY YYBYYBYBYB BBYYYBYBYY YBYYYBYBYB BYYYYBYBYB YYYYYBYBBY BBBBBYYYBY YBBBBYYYBB BYBBBYYYBB YYBBBYYBYY BBYBBYYYBB YBYBBYYBYY BYYBBYYBYY YYYBBYYBYB BBBYBYYYBB YBBYBYYBYY BYBYBYYBYY YYBYBYYBYB BBYYBYYBYY YBYYBYYBYB BYYYBYYBYB YYYYBYYBBY BBBBYYYYBB YBBBYYYBYY BYBBYYYBYY YYBBYYYBYB BBYBYYYBYY YBYBYYYBYB BYYBYYYBYB YYYBYYYBBY BBBYYYYBYY YBBYYYYBYB BYBYYYYBYB YYBYYYYBBY BBYYYYYBYB YBYYYYYBBY BYYYYYYBBY YYYYYYYBBB
356
Maritime Manual
TABLE 2 Packing table for decimal numbers into ten-bit characters The digits for the Thousands of millions D2
Hundreds of millions D1
Tens of millions D2
Character 5
Millions D1
Hundreds of thousands D2
Character 4
Tens of thousands D1
Thousands D2
Character 3
Hundreds D1
Character 2
Tens D2
Units D1
Character 1
NOTE 1 Character 1 is the last character transmitted. The digit sequence D2-D1 varies from 00 to 99 inclusive in each character (character 1 to 5 inclusive). The character that represents a particular two-decimal figure is transmitted as the symbol number (see Table 1) that is identical to that particular two-decimal figure. When the number consists of an odd number of decimal digits, a zero shall be added in front of the most significant position to provide an integral number of ten-bit characters.
TABLE 3 Use of symbol Nos. 100 to 127 Symbol No.
Phasing and unique Format specifier(1) Category(1) functions
100
Routine
101
102
Geographical area
103
(3)
Nature of distress(1)
First telecommand(1)
Fire, explosion
F3E/G3E All modes TP
No reason given(2)
Flooding
F3E/G3E duplex TP
Congestion at maritime switching centre Busy(2)
Collision (3)
Second telecommand(1)
Grounding
Polling
Queue indication (2)
104
Phasing RX-0 position
Listing, in danger of capsizing
Unable to comply
Station barred(2)
105
Phasing RX-1 position
Sinking
End of call(4)
No operator available(2)
106
Phasing RX-2 position
Disabled and adrift
Data
Operator temporarily unavailable(2)
107
Phasing RX-3 position
108
Phasing RX-4 position
(6)
Safety
Undesignated distress
Equipment disabled(2)
Abandoning ship
Unable to use proposed channel(2)
357
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
TABLE 3 (cont.) Symbol No.
Phasing and unique Format specifier(1) Category(1) functions
Nature of distress(1)
First telecommand(1)
Second telecommand(1)
Piracy/armed robbery attack
J3E TP
Unable to use proposed mode(2)
Man overboard
Distress acknowledgeme nt
Ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict
(6)
Medical transports (as defined in 1949 Geneva Conventions and additional Protocols)
Distress relay
Pay-phone/public call office
F1B/J2B TTY-FEC
Facsimile/data according to Recommendation ITU-R M.1081
F1B/J2B TTY-ARQ
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
118
Test
(6)
119
(6)
(6)
120
Individual stations
(6)
(6)
121
Reserved for national non-calling purposes e.g. Report ITU-R M.1159
Ship position or location registration updating
(6)
(6)
(6)
109
Phasing RX-5 position
110
Phasing RX-6 position
111
Phasing RX-7 position
112
(5)
Distress
113
114
All ships(7)
116
122
Distress
EPIRB emission
Ships having common interest
115
117
Urgency
Ack. RQ (EOS)
Ack. BQ (EOS)
123
Individual station semi-automatic/ automatic service
(6)
(6)
124
(5)
(6)
(6)
358
Maritime Manual
TABLE 3 (end) Symbol No.
Phasing and unique Format specifier(1) Category(1) functions
Nature of distress(1)
First telecommand(1)
Second telecommand(1)
Phasing DX position
(6)
(6)
126
*
No information
No information
127
EOS
(6)
(6)
125
TP: TTY: ARQ:
Telephony Direct printing Rec. ITU-R M.476 or Rec. ITU-R M.625 equipment
(1)
Unassigned symbols should be rejected. The DSC equipment should take no action.
(2)
Currently unassigned when used with first telecommands other than symbol No. 104
(3)
Used for selective call to a group of ships in a specified VTS area (Rec. ITU-R M.825). Reception of calls having format specifier 103, for (or) category shall not activate any alarms on shipborne DSC controller. Should not be used in any future expansion.
for future use.
(4)
Only used for semi-automatic/automatic service.
(5)
Used in the automatic VHF/UHF service (Rec. ITU-R M.586). Should not be used in any future expansion.
(6)
Should not be used in any future expansion.
(7)
MF/HF used only for distress alert acknowledgment and coast station receive (see Table 4).
2
Technical format of a call sequence
2.1
The technical format of the call sequence is:
Dot pattern See § 3
Phasing sequence See § 3
Call content See Tables 4.1 to 4.10.2
Closing sequence See § 9, § 10 and Fig. 1 0493-00
2.2 Examples of typical call sequences and the construction of the transmission format are given in Figs. 1 to 3. 2.3 The flow charts illustrating the operation of the DSC system are shown in Figs. 4 and 5.
3
Dot pattern and phasing
3.1 The phasing sequence provides information to the receiver to permit correct bit phasing and unambiguous determination of the positions of the characters within a call sequence (see Note 1).
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
359
NOTE 1 Acquisition of character synchronization should be achieved by means of character recognition rather than, for example, by recognizing a change in the dot pattern, in order to reduce false synchronization caused by a bit error in the dot pattern.
3.2 The phasing sequence consists of specific characters in the DX and RX positions transmitted alternatively. Six DX characters are transmitted. 3.2.1
The phasing character in the DX position is symbol No. 125 of Table 1.
3.2.2 The phasing characters in the RX position specify the start of the information sequence (i.e. the format specifier) and consist of the symbol Nos. 111, 110, 109, 108, 107, 106, 105 and 104 of Table 1, consecutively. 3.3 Phasing is considered to be achieved when two DXs and one RX, or two RXs and one DX, or three RXs in the appropriate DX or RX positions, respectively, are successfully received. These three phasing characters may be detected in either consecutive or non-consecutive positions but in both cases all bits of the phasing sequence should be examined for a correct 3-character pattern. A call should be rejected only if a correct pattern is not found anywhere within the phasing sequence. 3.4 To provide appropriate conditions for earlier bit synchronization and to allow for scanning methods to monitor several HF and MF frequencies by ship stations, the phasing sequence should be preceded by a dot pattern (i.e. alternating B-Y or Y-B sequence bit synchronization signals) with duration of: 3.4.1
200 bits
At HF and MF for: distress alerts; distress acknowledgements; distress relays addressed to a geographic area; distress relay acknowledgements addressed to all ships; all calls addressed to a ship station other than those specified in § 3.4.2. 3.4.2
20 bits
At HF and MF, for all acknowledgements to individual calls having format specifiers 120 and 123 and for all calling to coast stations. At VHF for all calls.
4
Format specifier
4.1 The format specifier characters which are transmitted twice in both the DX and RX positions (see Fig. 1) are: 4.1.1
symbol No. 112 for a distress alert; or
4.1.2
symbol No. 116 for an all ships call; or
360
Maritime Manual
4.1.3 symbol No. 114 for a selective call to a group of ships having a common interest (e.g. belonging to one particular country, or to a single ship owner, etc.); or 4.1.4
symbol No. 120 for a selective call to a particular individual station; or
4.1.5 symbol No. 102 for a selective call to a group of ships in a particular geographic area; or 4.1.6 symbol No. 123 for a selective call to a particular individual station using the semi-automatic/automatic service. 4.2 It is considered that receiver decoders must detect the format specifier character twice for distress alerts and all ships calls to effectively eliminate false alerting. For other calls, the address characters provide additional protection against false alerting and, therefore, single detection of the format specifier character is considered satisfactory (see Table 3).
5
Address
5.1 Distress alerts and all ships calls do not have addresses since these calls are implicitly addressed to all stations (ship stations and coast stations). 5.2 For a selective call directed to an individual ship, to a coast station or to a group of stations having a common interest, the address consists of the characters corresponding to the station s maritime mobile service identity, the sequence consisting of characters coded in accordance with Table 2 (see Note 1). NOTE 1 According to RR Article 19, maritime mobile service identities are formed of a series of nine digits, consisting of three digits of the Maritime Identification Digits (MID) and six more digits. These identities are included in the address and self-identification parts of the call sequence and are transmitted as five characters C5C4C3C2C1, comprising the ten digits of:
(X1, X2) (X3, X4) (X5, X6) (X7, X8) and (X9, X10) respectively, whereas digit X10 is always the figure 0 unless the equipment is also designed in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1080.
Example: MID X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 being the ship station identity is transmitted by the DSC equipment as:
(M, I) (D, X4) (X5, X6) (X7, X8) (X9, 0) 5.3 For a selective call directed to a group of ships in a particular geographic area a numerical geographic coordinates address consisting of ten digits (i.e. 5 characters), is constructed as follows (see Fig. 6 and Note 1):
361
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
NOTE 1 In order to comply with commonly accepted practice, the order of entry and read-out should be: first latitude and then longitude.
5.3.1
the designated geographic area will be a rectangle in Mercator projection;
5.3.2 the upper left-hand (i.e. North-West) corner of the rectangle is the reference point for the area; 5.3.3 the first digit indicates the azimuth sector in which the reference point is located, as follows: 5.3.3.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit
,
5.3.3.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit 5.3.3.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit
, ,
5.3.3.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit
;
5.3.4 the second and third digits indicate the latitude of the reference point in tens and units of degrees; 5.3.5 the fourth, fifth and sixth digits indicate the longitude of the reference point in hundreds, tens and units of degrees; 5.3.6 the seventh and eighth digits indicate the vertical (i.e. North-to-South) side of the rectangle, , in tens and units of degrees; 5.3.7 the ninth and tenth digits indicate the horizontal (i.e. West-to-East) side of the rectangle, , in tens and units of degrees.
6
Category
6.1 The category information is coded as shown in Table 3 and defines the degree of priority of the call sequence. 6.2 For a distress alert the priority is defined by the format specifier and no category information is included in the call sequence. 6.2.1 For distress relays, distress relay acknowledgements the category is distress.
acknowledgements
6.3
For safety related calls, the category information specifies:
6.3.1
urgency; or
6.3.2
safety.
6.4
For other calls, the category information specifies:
6.4.1
routine.
and
distress
362
7
Maritime Manual
Self-identification
7.1 The maritime mobile service identity (MMSI) assigned to the calling station, coded as indicated in § 5.2 and its Note 1, is used for self-identification.
8
Messages
The messages that are included in a call sequence contain the following message elements, which are listed in the order in which they would appear in each message. All message formats are explicitly defined in Tables 4.1 through 4.10.2: 8.1 For a distress alert (see Table 4.1) the distress information is contained in four messages in the following order: 8.1.1
Message 1 is the nature of distress message, coded as shown in Table 3, i.e.:
8.1.1.1 fire, explosion; 8.1.1.2 flooding; 8.1.1.3 collision; 8.1.1.4 grounding; 8.1.1.5 listing, in danger of capsizing; 8.1.1.6 sinking; 8.1.1.7 disabled and adrift; 8.1.1.8 undesignated distress; 8.1.1.9 abandoning ship; 8.1.1.10 piracy/armed robbery attack; 8.1.1.11 man overboard; 8.1.1.12 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) emission. 8.1.2 Message 2 is the distress coordinates message, consisting of ten digits indicating the location of the vessel in distress, coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits (see Note 1 to § 5.3): 8.1.2.1 The first digit indicates the quadrant in which the incident has occurred, as follows: 8.1.2.1.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit
,
8.1.2.1.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit 8.1.2.1.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit 8.1.2.1.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit
, , .
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
363
8.1.2.2 The next four figures indicate the latitude in degrees and minutes. 8.1.2.3 The next five figures indicate the longitude in degrees and minutes. 8.1.2.4 If distress coordinates cannot be included, or if the position information has not been updated for 23½ h, the 10 digits following the nature of distress should be automatically transmitted as the digit 9 repeated 10 times. 8.1.3 Message 3 is the time indication (UTC) when the coordinates were valid consisting of four digits coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits. 8.1.3.1 The first two digits indicate the time in hours. 8.1.3.2 The third and fourth digits indicate the part of the hours in minutes. 8.1.3.3 If the time cannot be included the four time indicating digits should be transmitted automatically as 8 8 8 8 . 8.1.4 Message 4 is a single character to indicate the type of communication (telephone or FEC teleprinter) which is preferred by the station in distress for subsequent exchange of distress traffic. This character is coded as shown in Table 3 first telecommand. 8.2 For a distress relay, distress relay acknowledgement, distress acknowledgement (see Tables 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4) the distress information is contained in five messages in the following order: 8.2.1
Message 0 is the MMSI of the vessel in distress.
8.2.2
Message 1 is the nature of distress message, coded as shown in Table 3, i.e.:
8.2.2.1 fire, explosion; 8.2.2.2 flooding; 8.2.2.3 collision; 8.2.2.4 grounding; 8.2.2.5 listing, in danger of capsizing; 8.2.2.6 sinking; 8.2.2.7 disabled and adrift; 8.2.2.8 undesignated distress; 8.2.2.9 abandoning ship; 8.2.2.10 piracy/armed robbery attack; 8.2.2.11 man overboard; 8.2.2.12 emergency position-indicating radiobeacon (EPIRB) emission.
364
Maritime Manual
8.2.3 Message 2 is the distress coordinates message, consisting of ten digits indicating the location of the vessel in distress, coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits (see Note 1 to § 5.3): 8.2.3.1 The first digit indicates the quadrant in which the incident has occurred, as follows: 8.2.3.1.1 quadrant NE is indicated by the digit
,
8.2.3.1.2 quadrant NW is indicated by the digit 8.2.3.1.3 quadrant SE is indicated by the digit 8.2.3.1.4 quadrant SW is indicated by the digit
, , .
8.2.3.2 The next four figures indicate the latitude in degrees and minutes. 8.2.3.3 The next five figures indicate the longitude in degrees and minutes. 8.2.3.4 If distress coordinates cannot be included, or if the position information has not been updated for 23½ h, the 10 digits following the nature of distress should be automatically transmitted as the digit 9 repeated 10 times. 8.2.4 Message 3 is the time indication (UTC) when the coordinates were valid consisting of four digits coded on the principles described in Table 2, in pairs starting from the first and second digits. 8.2.4.1 The first two digits indicate the time in hours. 8.2.4.2 The third and fourth digits indicate the part of the hours in minutes. 8.2.4.3 If the time cannot be included the four time indicating digits should be transmitted automatically as 8 8 8 8 . 8.2.5 Message 4 is a single character to indicate the type of communication (telephone or FEC teleprinter) which is preferred by the station in distress for subsequent exchange of distress traffic. This character is coded as shown in Table 3 first telecommand. 8.3 For other types of calls (see Table 4.5 through 4.10.2 and Figs. 2 and 3) messages are included in the following order: 8.3.1 Message 1 is the telecommand information and consists of 2 characters (first and second telecommand) coded as shown in Table 3; 8.3.1.1 if no information additional to that conveyed by the first telecommand character is required, then the second telecommand signal should be symbol No. 126 (no information) (see Table 3); 8.3.1.2 if no telecommand information is used, symbol No. 126 is transmitted twice.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
365
8.3.1.3 If the telecommand 1 is F3E/G3E duplex TP (symbol 101) in a request, which can be complied with, the telecommand 1 F3E/G3E all modes TP (symbol 100) should be used in the acknowledgement. 8.3.2 Message 2 may contain two channel or frequency message elements, each of which always consists of three characters, character 1 , character 2 and character , indicating the proposed working frequency (in the F1B/J2B mode the assigned frequency should be used) in multiples of 100 Hz or the channel number (coded in accordance with Table 5) or the ship s position. The first frequency element (the RX field) in the call indicates the called station receive frequency and the second frequency element (the TX field) indicates the called station transmit frequency. In acknowledgements the RX and TX fields indicate the receive and transmit frequency of the acknowledging station respectively (see also Fig. 2 and Note 1). NOTE 1 If only one channel or frequency message element is used, this indicates the called station receive channel or frequency or a two-frequency (paired) channel. A second channel or frequency message element may be used to designate the called station transmit channel or frequency. If the calling station indicates only the called station receive frequency (for broadcast mode transmissions) then the symbol No. 126 repeated three times should be transmitted instead of the called station transmit channel or frequency message element. If no channel or frequency message elements are used, the symbol No. 126 is transmitted six times. For calls using the semi-automatic/automatic VHF service (see Table 4.10.1) then only one channel or frequency message element is transmitted which indicates the paired channel number. In the absence of this element the symbol No. 126 should be transmitted three times.
8.3.2.1
Frequency information
The frequency (in the F1B/J2B mode the assigned frequency should be used) in multiples of 100 Hz may only be indicated as such when the frequency is below 30 MHz. The three characters provide for the required six decimal digits. Character 1 represents the units (U) and tens (T) of 100 Hz, character 2 the hundreds (H) and thousands (M) and character 3 the tens of thousands (TM) and hundreds of thousands (HM) of 100 Hz. For MF/HF DSC, use frequency selection mode, vice channel selection mode, to ensure international interoperability. 8.3.2.2
Channel information
8.3.2.2.1 HF and MF channels If the HM digit is 3, this indicates that the number represented by the digits TM, M, H, T and U is the HF/MF working channel number (either single frequency or two frequency channels). This mode should only be used for decoding received calls, to ensure interoperability with older equipment.
366
Maritime Manual
8.3.2.2.2 VHF channels If the HM digit is 9, this indicates that the number represented by the values of the digits M, H, T and U is the VHF working channel number. If the M digit is 1, this indicates that the ship stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channel frequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 2, this indicates that the coast stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channel frequency for both ship and coast stations. 8.3.2.3
Ship s position information
8.3.2.3.1 For MF/HF calls, Message 2 may contain the ship s position, consisting of the digit 5 repeated two times and ten digits (five characters) indicating this position, coded in accordance with § 8.1.2 to § 8.1.2.3 (see Table 6). 8.3.2.3.2 For position requests message 2 consists of 6 no information symbols (symbol No. 126). 8.3.2.3.3 In acknowledgements to a call requesting ship s position (see Fig. 3d)) message 2 consists of twelve digits (six symbols), the first of which should be coded in accordance with § 8.1.2 to § 8.1.2.3 followed by one symbol No. 126. Message 3 follows message 2 in this case and contains the time (UTC) when the coordinates were valid, coded as indicated in § 8.1.3 to § 8.1.3.3. 8.3.3 Message 3 follows message 2 when using the DSC system for calls initiated by ship stations requiring a semi-automatic or automatic connection (see Table 4.10.1 and 4.10.2) and contains the public switched network number (e.g. telephone number). In this case the format specifier used is symbol No. 123. 8.3.3.1 This number is coded by up to nine symbols in a manner similar to that shown in Table 2, except that the first character transmitted should be either symbol No. 105 or No. 106 to indicate whether the network number contains an odd or even number of significant digits. As an example, the number 0012345 would be coded as symbol numbers 105 00 01 23 45 whereas the number 00123456 should be coded as symbol numbers 106 00 12 34 56. 8.4 For distress relay including shore-to-ship alerts, distress relay acknowledgement and distress acknowledgement calls, the message formats are indicated in Tables 4.3, 4.4 and 4.2 respectively. 8.4.1 When sending a distress alert on behalf of another ship which is unable to send its own alert, and where the identity of the station in distress is unknown, the distress relay call should contain the symbol No. 126 transmitted five times for the identification of the station in distress .
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
8.5
367
Test calls
Test calls on the distress and safety frequencies for MF and HF and VHF channel 70 may be conducted using the test call sequence in Table 4.7.
9
End of sequence
The end of sequence (EOS) character is transmitted three times in the DX position and once in the RX position (see Fig. 1b)). It is one of the three unique characters corresponding to symbol Nos. 117, 122 and 127 as follows: 9.1 symbol No. 117 if the call requires acknowledgement (Acknowledge RQ), used for individual and automatic/semiautomatic calls only; 9.2 symbol No. 122 if the sequence is an answer to a call that requires acknowledgement (Acknowledge BQ), used for individual and automatic/ semiautomatic calls and all distress relay acknowledgements; 9.3
symbol No. 127 for all other calls.
10
Error-check character
10.1 The error-check character (ECC) is the final character transmitted and it serves to check the entire sequence for the presence of errors which are undetected by the tenunit error-detecting code and the time diversity employed. 10.2 The seven information bits of the ECC shall be equal to the least significant bit of the modulo-2 sums of the corresponding bits of all information characters (i.e. even vertical parity). The format specifier and the EOS characters are considered to be information characters. The phasing characters and the retransmission (RX) characters shall not be considered to be information characters. Only one format specifier character and one EOS character should be used in constructing the ECC. The ECC shall also be sent in the DX and RX positions. 10.3 Automatic acknowledgement transmissions should not start unless the ECC is received and decoded correctly. A received ECC which does not match that calculated from the received information characters may be ignored if this was due to an error detected in the ten-unit error-detecting code of the information characters which was correctable by use of the time diversity code. 10.4 The receiver decoder should provide maximum utilization of the received signal, including use of the error-check character.
368
11
Maritime Manual
Distress alert attempt
11.1 Distress alerts may be transmitted as a single frequency or a multi-frequency call attempt preceded by a dot pattern. MF/HF equipment should be capable of using both single and multi-frequency call attempts. Where a distress alert attempt contains more than one consecutive distress alert on the same frequency (see Recommendation ITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3), these consecutive alerts should be transmitted with no gap between the end of one call and the start of the dot pattern of the following call to enable bit synchronization to be maintained (see Fig. 1c)). Multi-frequency call attempts should always include at least the MF and HF 8 MHz band DSC distress and safety frequencies. 11.2 A distress alert should be activated only by means of a dedicated distress button which should be clearly identified and be protected against inadvertent operation with a spring loaded lid or cover. The initiation of a distress alert should at least require two independent actions. 11.3 Calls with format specifier distress or category distress , urgency and safety should be initiated manually only. This applies also for ships equipped for automatic DSC operation. For automatic repetition of distress alerts see Recommendation ITU-R M.541, Annex 1, § 3.1.3 and 3.3.5. 11.4 Immediately following a distress alert a DSC expansion message giving enhanced position resolution according to Recommendation ITU-R M.821 should be transmitted in the following manner. 11.4.1 For a single frequency distress alert attempt the expansion message should be transmitted immediately after the last of five consecutive distress alerts. 11.4.2 For a multi-frequency distress alert attempt the expansion message should be transmitted immediately after each distress alert.
12
Shipborne human machine interface (HMI)
12.1
Shipborne aural alarm
Shipborne alarms should start softly and increase in volume if not silenced by the operator. This will give the operator the opportunity to acknowledge the alarm without interrupting the ship s current communications. It should be possible for the operator to disable all audible alarms except those of distress, priority and urgency. Distress and urgency calls should have a distinctive two tone alarm. The alarm should consist of two substantially sinusoidal audio-frequency tones, transmitted alternately. One tone should have a frequency of 2 200 Hz and the other a frequency of 1 300 Hz. The duration of each tone should be 250 ms.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
369
Distress calls and urgency calls should activate an alarm. For HF and MF distress calls, the alarm should activate only when a distress alert, distress acknowledgement, or a distress relay is received and the distress position is within 500 nm (926 km) of the receiving vessel s position, or if the distress position is in the polar areas (latitude greater than 70 N or 70 S). The alarm should also activate when the call is received and the distance between the vessel in distress and the receiving vessel cannot be determined. NOTE 1 Disabling of aural alarm does not affect handling of call.
For geographic area calls, the alarm appropriate to the category should activate when the receiving station s position is within the area specified by the call or the receiving station s position is not known. The alarm should not be activated where duplicate distress relay calls are received within one hour. A duplicate distress relay call is one having format specifier all ships or geographic area that contains identical message information, as defined in § 8.1 and an identical distress MMSI. 12.2
Inactivity timer
During normal operation, the equipment should include an inactivity timer to return the DSC system display to default or standby mode if the operator is in a menu where DSC call reception is disabled and does not make any selections or changes for 10 min. 12.3
Display
The information on the display should be visible in all shipboard lighting conditions. It should have the means to display, in plain language, the information contained in the received call. For Class A/B DSC equipment, the display should have a minimum of 160 characters in two or more lines. 12.4
MMSI
DSC equipment should not transmit any DSC call until own ship s MMSI allocated to the ship by the relevant administration has been configured and stored in the DSC equipment. Once stored, it should not be possible for the user to change the MMSI without advice from the manufacturer. The DSC equipment should display own ship s MMSI on start-up unless the MMSI has not been configured. If the MMSI has not been configured, the equipment will display a warning that the unit will not transmit any DSC calls until own ship s MMSI is entered. The equipment should stay in this state until the operator confirms he has read the display and input own ship s MMSI. The MMSI should be readily displayed on the HMI when the DSC equipment is on.
370
12.5
Maritime Manual
Disabling of DSC automatic channel switching function on VHF
Automatic switching to a subsequent communications channel on receipt of a DSC call might in some cases disrupt important ongoing communications. Where such capability exists, a means for disabling that function should therefore be provided for all calls other than individual station calls of category distress or urgency. The DSC equipment should provide visual indication that the automatic switching function is disabled. 12.6
Data interface
DSC equipment should be provided with facilities for exchange of data from shipborne navigational equipment or systems, or other shipborne equipment as necessary in accordance with IEC 61162 for purposes including automatic position updating. 12.7
Position updating
DSC equipment should accept valid IEC 61162 position information including the time at which the position was determined, from an external source utilizing the data interface described in § 12.6, for automatic update of own ship s DSC position. The DSC equipment may also be provided with an internal electronic position fixing device. In which case, the DSC equipment should automatically switch to the internal source if the external IEC 61162 position information is not valid or not available. If the automatic position update is not available, a displayed and audible reminder to manually update the position should occur before the position information is 4 h old. The displayed reminder should remain until position updating has been carried out. Any position information not updated for more than 23½ h should automatically be erased. Own ship s DSC position information and the source of that information (external, internal, or manually entered) should be displayed on the DSC equipment. 12.8
Geographic area entry
DSC equipment should be provided with means for transforming a geographical area specified by the user as a centre point and a range to the corresponding Mercator area call format specified in § 5.3. The centre point should default to the ships position information and the range should default to 500 nm (926 km). The transformation of the entered range and centre-point should result in the minimum rectangular area that encompasses the entered data. 12.9
Medical transport and neutral ships and aircraft
The capability of using second telecommands Ships and aircraft of States not parties to an armed conflict and Medical Transports should not be available by default but only after changing relevant parameters in the setup menu.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
371
372
Maritime Manual
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
373
374
Maritime Manual FIGURE 4 Transmitting
Example of operational flow chart
Message composition*
Operation in general
Transmit message
No (Yes) Branching (decision) Yes (No)
Receiving No(1)
Manual operation
Scanning? Yes (2) Address error free?
No
Beginning or end of the procedures
Yes Address corresponds to a stored address?
No
Yes Receive and process message
Store message
Receive message No
Received ECC matches?
Indicate ECC error
Yes Message received error free?
No
Read information of received message
Yes Address corresponds to a stored address?
Yes
Safety related?
No End of sequence
Yes No
Acknowledge BQ
Procedures as given in RR
Acknowledge RQ
No
Able to comply?
Yes No
All acceptable?
Yes Wait on working frequency/ channel
(1)
Message composition with new proposal
This method may be used when either single channel receivers (without scanning) or multi-channel receivers are used.
(2)
This method is preferable when scanning receivers are used on DSC channels.
*
Message composition flow chart is shown in Fig. 5b.
Note
This chart is informative only.
Message composition with acknowledge BQ
Message composition* Message composition with unable to comply
Message composition
Transmit message End
0493-04
375
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13 FIGURE 5 Example of message composition flow chart Distress ACK/relay, urgency, safety
Distress
Enter selfidentification**
All ships
Individual*
Routine
Group*
Area
Area
Group
Individual
Area address*
Group address*
Individual address*
Special sequences
Select address*
Enter nature of distress
Yes
Select address*
Include nature of distress?
No
Safety
Distress coordinates available?
No
Yes
Processor copies message
Distress
No
All acceptable?
Yes Enter telecommand information
Urgency
Acknowledge reply?
No
Yes Enter distress coordinates and time ***
Enter selfidentification**
Additional information?
No
Yes
Telecommand information?
No
Yes Specify telecommand information? Specify receiver frequency information
Receiver frequency information?
Yes
Ship s position information?
Yes
Enter ship s position***
Yes
Enter telephone number
No
Transmitter frequency information?
No
Yes
Specify transmitter frequency information
No Semiautomatic/ automatic ship-toshore required?
No BQ
Acknowledge RQ or BQ?
RQ
*
For reply message, processor copies self-identification of received message.
**
The self-identification of a calling sequence is automatically entered.
End of sequence Processor adds acknowledge BQ
Processor adds end of sequence End of message
Processor adds acknowledge RQ
*** This may be entered automatically. Note
This chart is informative only.
0493-05
376
Maritime Manual FIGURE 6 Geographic coordinates
N
c c
10°
c
5°
W
E 20°
15°
5° 0°
10°
5°
10°
15°
20°
5° 10° a
15°
b
20°
S
a) Format specifier
11° (South)
a
2
1
Sector b) Format specifier
b
2
c) Format specifier
0
1
2
0
3
= 5° 0
5
Category
a
10° (South) 0
= 10° (North) 1
= 3°
= 12° (East)
a
1
c
1
=
1
a
0
b
0
c
0
= 10°
= 10° (East) 1
=
0
1
20° (West) 2
0
0
= 10° 1
= 20° 2
0
0
Category
= 30° 3
0
Category
0493-06
377
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
Legend for Tables 4.1 to 4.10.2 Symbol/expression
Meaning Required Required for backward compatibility
Symbols 100-127
Symbols in accordance with Table 3
Area
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 5.3
Frequency
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.2.2
MMSI
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 5.2
Pos1
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.1.2
Pos2
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3.1
Pos3
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3.2
Pos4
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3.3
Pos5
Coded in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.821
UTC
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 8.1.3
n/a
This field is not included in this call
ECC
Coded in accordance with Annex 1, § 10.2
expan1
Expansion sequence 1
expan2
Expansion sequence 2
expan3
Expansion sequence 3
Does not apply NOTE 1 Class B.
For Class A and B all functions are identical for VHF and MF. HF does not apply to
TABLE 4.1 Distress alerts Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship station Class A/B Frequency band VHF
MF/HF
Type
Tx
Rx
Ship station Class D Tx
Rx
Ship station Class E Tx
Rx
1 Coast station Tx
Rx
Format specifier (2 identical)
Self-ID (5)
Nature of distress (1)
2
3
Distress coordinates Time (5) (2)
4 Subsequent communications (1)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence (9)
Distress (RT)
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress (EPIRB)
112
MMSI
Pos1
UTC
126
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress (RT)
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress (FEC)
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
127
ECC
127
expan1
112
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence Type
Expansion data specifier (1)
Enhanced position resolution (4)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
expan1
100
Pos5
127
ECC
127
TABLE 4.2 Distress acknowledgements Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship Ship station station station Coast Class A/B Class D Class E station Frequency band VHF
MF
HF
(1)
Tx
Type
Rx
0
1
2
3
4
Subsequent Distress Format commuspecifier Cate- Self- Tele- Distress Nature of coordiEOS nates Time nications EOS ECC (2 iden(2 iden- gory ID command MMSI distress (1) (1) (5) (1) (5) (2) (1) tical) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical) (5) (1) (1) (1)
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence (9)
Distress acknowledgement (RT)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowl-edgement (EPIRB)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
112
Pos1
UTC
126
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowledgement (RT)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowledgement (FEC)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowledgement (RT)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowledgement (FEC)
116
112 MMSI
110
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
127
ECC
127
expan1
Distress acknowledgments where the transmitting MMSI and ship in distress MMSI are the same, the message should be interpreted as a self Cancel operation. This should be displayed on all receiving stations. The function should be implemented on new equipment. (NOTE 1 Class D and E equipment should be capable of transmitting a self cancel.)
The message should match the received distress alert information, except for manually generated distress acknowledgements by coast stations.
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence Type
Expansion data specifier (1)
Enhanced position resolution (4)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
expan1
100
Pos5
127
ECC
127
TABLE 4.3 Distress relays Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship Ship station station station Class Class Class Coast E station D A/B
Frequency band VHF
Type
Category (1)
2
3
4
Subsequent comDistress SelfTele- Distress Nature of coordiEOS munica ID command MMSI distress nates Time tions EOS ECC (2 iden(5) (1) (1) (1) tical) (1) (5) (2) (5) (1)
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence (9)
120
MMSI
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
117 ECC
117
expan2
Individual (EPIRB)
(1)
120
MMSI
112
MMSI
112
MMSI
Pos1
UTC
126
117 ECC
117
expan2
Geographic area (RT)
(1)
102
Zone
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 à 111
Pos1
UTC
100
127 ECC
127
expan1
Geographic area (EPIRB)
(1)
102
Zone
112
MMSI
112
MMSI
Pos1
UTC
126
127 ECC
127
expan1
(1)
116
n/a
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
127 ECC
127
expan1
(1)
116
n/a
112
MMSI
112
MMSI
Pos1
UTC
126
127 ECC
127
expan1
Individual (RT)
120
MMSI
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
117 ECC
117
expan2
Individual (FEC)
120
MMSI
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
117 ECC
117
expan2
Geographic area (RT)
102
Zone
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
127 ECC
127
expan1
Geographic area (FEC)
102
Zone
112
MMSI
112
MMSI 100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
127 ECC
127
expan1
All ships (EPIRB)
(1)
Format specifier (2 iden- Address (5) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical)
1
(1)
Individual (RT)
All ships (RT)
MF/HF
0
This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.
112
112
112
TABLE 4.3 (end)
Applicable to Ship station Class A/B
Frequency band MF/HF (End )
Type
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship station station Class Class Coast D E station
0
1
2
3
4
Subsequent commu Distress Format EOS nicaTelespecifier Ad- CateDistress Nature of coordinates Time tions EOS ECC (2 iden(2 iden- dress gory Self-ID command MMSI distress tical) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (5) (5) (2) (5) (1) (5) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical)
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence (9)
All ships (RT)
116
n/a
112
MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
127 ECC
127
expan1
All ships (FEC)
116
n/a
112
MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
127 ECC
127
expan1
The message should match the received distress alert information, except for manually generated relays observed or notified by nonDSC means.
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence Type
Expansion data specifier (1)
Enhanced position resolution (4)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
expan1
100
Pos5
127
ECC
127
expan2
100
Pos5
117
ECC
117
TABLE 4.4 Distress relay acknowledgements Applicable to
Message Ship 0 1 2 3 4 station SubseClass Coast Distress E station Format quent EOS specifier Ad- Cate- SelfTelecommuDistress Nature of coordi(2 iden- dress gory ID command MMSI distress nates Time nications EOS ECC (2 iden(1) (1) tical) (5) (1) (5) (1) (1) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical) (5) (1) (5) (2) Ship station Class A/B
Frequency band VHF
MF/HF
(1)
Type
Technical format of call sequence
Ship station Class D
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence (9)
Individual (RT)
(1)
120
MMSI 112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
122 ECC
122
expan3
Individual (EPIRB)
(1)
120
MMSI 112 MMSI
112
MMSI
112
Pos1
UTC
126
122 ECC
122
expan3
All ships (RT)
(1)
116
n/a
112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
100
122 ECC
122
expan3
All ships (EPIRB)
(1)
116
n/a
112 MMSI
112
MMSI
112
Pos1
UTC
126
122 ECC
122
expan3
Individual (RT)
120
MMSI 112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
122 ECC
122
expan3
Individual (FEC)
120
MMSI 112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
122 ECC
122
expan3
All ships (RT)
116
n/a
112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
109
122 ECC
122
expan3
All ships (FEC)
116
n/a
112 MMSI
112
MMSI
100 to 111
Pos1
UTC
113
122 ECC
122
expan3
This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.
The message should match the received distress relay call information.
Rec. ITU-R M.821 expansion sequence Type
Expansion data specifier (1)
Enhanced position resolution (4)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
expan3
100
Pos5
122
ECC
122
TABLE 4.5 Urgency and safety calls All ships Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship station Class A/B Frequency band VHF
Type All modes RT
MF/HF
Tx
Rx
Ship station Class D Tx (2)
Rx
Ship station Class E Tx
Rx
1 Coast station Tx
Rx
Format specifier Category (2 identical) (1)
2
1st tele- 2nd teleSelf-ID command command Frequency (5) (1) (1) (6)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
116
108 or 110
MMSI
100
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
Duplex RT(1)
116
108 or 110
MMSI
101
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
Medical transports
116
110
MMSI
100
111
Frequency
127
ECC
127
Ships and aircraft (Res. 18)
116
110
MMSI
100
110
Frequency
127
ECC
127
J3E RT
116
108 or 110
MMSI
109
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
F1B FEC
116
108 or 110
MMSI
113
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
(1)
See § 8.3.1.3.
(2)
This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.
TABLE 4.6 Urgency and safety Geographic area calls Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship station Class A/B Frequency band
Type
MF/HF J3E (RT)
F1B (FEC)
Medical transports Ships and aircraft (Res. 18)
Tx
Rx
Ship station Class D Tx
Rx
Ship station Class E Tx
Rx
1 Coast station Tx
Rx
2
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
Frequency
127
ECC
127
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
109 or 113
111
Frequency
127
ECC
127
109 or 113
110
Frequency
127
ECC
127
Format specifier (2 identical)
Address (5)
Category (1)
1st teleSelf-ID command (5) (1)
102
Area
108 or 110
MMSI
102
Area
108 or 110
102
Area
102
Area
2nd telecommand (1)
Frequency (6)
109
126
MMSI
113
110
MMSI
110
MMSI
TABLE 4.7 Urgency and safety
Individual calls and their acknowledgements
Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship Ship station station station Class Class Class Coast E station D A/B Frequency band VHF
Type All modes RT (1)
1
Format specifier Address Category (5) (1) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx (2 identical)
2
1st tele- 2nd teleSelf-ID command command (5) (1) (1)
3
Frequency or pos number Time (6) (2)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
100
126
Frequency
n/a
117
ECC
117
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
101
126
Frequency
n/a
117
ECC
117
RT acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
100
126
Frequency
n/a
122
ECC
122
Unable to comply acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
104
100 to 109 Frequency
n/a
122
ECC
122
Position request
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
121
126
Pos3
n/a
117
ECC
117
Position acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
121
126
Pos4
UTC
122
ECC
122
Test
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
118
126
126
n/a
117
ECC
117
Test acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
118
126
126
n/a
122
ECC
122
Duplex RT
TABLE 4.7 (end) Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship Ship station station station Class Class Class Coast A/B D E station Frequency band MF/HF
(1)
See § 8.3.1.3.
Type
1
Format specifier Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx (2 identical)
Address (5)
2
3
1st tele- 2nd teleCategory Self-ID command command (1) (5) (1) (1)
Frequency or pos number Time (6) (2)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
J3E RT
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
109
126
Frequency
n/a
117
ECC
117
J3E RT with pos number
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
109
126
Pos2
n/a
117
ECC
117
J3E RT acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
109
126
Frequency
n/a
122
ECC
122
F1B FEC or ARQ
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115
126
Frequency
n/a
117
ECC
117
F1B FEC or ARQ with pos number
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115
126
Pos2
n/a
117
ECC
117
F1B FEC or ARQ acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI 113 or 115
126
Frequency
n/a
122
ECC
122
Unable to comply acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108 or 110 MMSI
100 to 109 Frequency
n/a
122
ECC
122
104
Position request
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
121
126
Pos3
n/a
117
ECC
117
Position acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
121
126
Pos4
UTC
122
ECC
122
Test
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
118
126
126
n/a
117
ECC
117
Test acknowledgement
120
MMSI
108
MMSI
118
126
126
n/a
122
ECC
122
TABLE 4.8 Routine group calls Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship Ship Ship station station station Class Class Class Coast E station D A/B
Frequency band VHF
MF/HF
(1)
Type
1
Format specifier Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx (2 identical)
Address (5)
Category (1)
Self-ID (5)
2
1st tele- 2nd tele- Frequenc command command y (1) (1) (6)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
All mode RT
114
MMSI
100
MMSI
100
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
Duplex RT(1)
114
MMSI
100
MMSI
101
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
J3E RT
114
MMSI
100
MMSI
109
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
F1B FEC
114
MMSI
100
MMSI
113
126
Frequency
127
ECC
127
See § 8.3.1.3.
TABLE 4.9 Routine individual calls and their acknowledgements Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship station Class A/B
Frequen cy band VHF
Type
Ship station Class D
Ship station Class E
1
2
Coast station
Format 1st tele- 2nd telespecifier Address Category Self-ID command command (5) (1) (5) (1) (1) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx (2 identical)
Frequency or pos number (6)
EOS (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
All mode RT
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
100
126
Frequency
117
ECC
117
Duplex RT(1)
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
101
126
Frequency
117
ECC
117
RT acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
100
126
Frequency
122
ECC
122
Data
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
106
126
Frequency
117
ECC
117
Data acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
106
126
Frequency
122
ECC
122
Unable to comply acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
104
100 to 109 Frequency
122
ECC
122
Polling
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
103
126
126
117
ECC
117
Polling acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
103
126
126
122
ECC
122
TABLE 4.9 (end) Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message
Ship station Class A/B
Frequency band MF/HF
(1)
Type
Ship station Class D
Ship station Class E
1
2
Coast station
Format specifier (2 iden- Address (5) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical)
Category (1)
Self-ID (5)
1st telecommand (1)
2nd telecommand (1)
Frequency or pos number EOS (1) (6)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
J3E RT
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
109
126
Frequency
117
ECC
117
J3E RT with pos number
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
109
126
Pos2
117
ECC
117
J3E RT acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
109
126
Frequency
122
ECC
122
F1B FEC, ARQ or data
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
113, 115, 106
126
Frequency
117
ECC
117
FEC, ARQ or data with pos number
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
113, 115, 106
126
Pos2
117
ECC
117
F1B FEC, ARQ or data acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
113, 115, 106
126
Frequency
122
ECC
122
Unable to comply acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
104
100 à 109 Frequency
122
ECC
122
Polling
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
103
126
126
117
ECC
117
Polling acknowledgement
120
MMSI
100
MMSI
103
126
126
122
ECC
122
See § 8.3.1.3.
TABLE 4.10.1 Semi/auto VHF (optional) Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message 1
Ship station Class A/B
Type Request Able to comply acknowledgement Start of call (on working channel) Unable to comply acknowledgement End of call request (on working channel) End of call acknowledgement (on working channel)(1)
Ship station Class D
Ship station Class E
2
3
Coast station
Format specifier (2 identical) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
Address (5)
Category (1)
Self-ID (5)
1st telecommand (1)
2nd telecommand Frequency Number EOS (1) (1) (3) (2-9)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
(2)
(2)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
100, 101, 106
126
Frequency Number
117
ECC
117
(2)
(2)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
100, 101, 106
126
Frequency Number
122
ECC
122
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
100, 101, 106
126
Frequency Number
127
ECC
127
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
104
100-109
Frequency Number
122
ECC
122
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
105
126
Frequency Number
117
ECC
117
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
105
126
122
ECC
122
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Duration
(1)
Upon call completion the coast station may send the end of call acknowledgement without a request from the ship station. The EOS symbol being 127.
(2)
This call is not applicable to hand-held equipment.
NOTE 1
See Recommendation ITU-R M.689.
NOTE 2
For Class D symbol 123 does not need to be displayed.
Number
TABLE 4.10.2 Semi/auto MF/HF (optional) Applicable to
Technical format of call sequence Message 1
Ship station Ship Ship Class station station A/B Class D Class E
Type
Coast Format station specifier (2 iden- Address Category (5) (1) Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx tical)
Self-ID (5)
1st tele command (1)
2
2nd telecommand (1)
3
Frequency or pos number (6)
Number EOS (2-9) (1)
ECC (1)
EOS (2 identical)
J3E RT/F1B FEC/ARQ Request coast station
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
Frequency
Number
117
ECC
117
Request ship station
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
126 or Pos2
Number
117
ECC
117
Able to comply acknowledgement
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
Frequency
Number
122
ECC
122
Signal strength test by ship (on working channel)(1)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
Frequency
Number
117
ECC
117
Coast station acknowledgement with new working frequency(1)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
New frequency
Number
122
ECC
122
Call start: Coast station acknowledgement with same working frequency(1)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI 109, 113, 115
126
Same frequency
Number
122
ECC
122
Unable to comply
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
104
100 a 109
Frequency
Number
122
ECC
122
End of call request (on working channel)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
105
126
Frequency
Number
117
ECC
117
End of call acknowledgement (on working channel)(2)
123
MMSI
100
MMSI
105
126
Duration
Number
122
ECC
122
(1)
This call involves signal strength testing. The ship requests call by sending the coast station its position. Once the ship or coast station is able to comply the ship station sends test DSCs on the working frequency. If the coast station acknowledges with a new working frequency, the ship station sends a test DSC on the new frequency. When the coast station acknowledges with an unchanged frequency, the subsequent communication may begin.
(2)
Upon call completion the coast station may send the end of call acknowledgement without a request from the ship station. The EOS symbol being 127.
NOTE 1
See Recommendation ITU-R M.1082.
NOTE 2
For Class E symbol 123 does not need to be displayed.
392
Maritime Manual
TABLE 5 Frequency or channel information
Frequency
Channels
0 1 2
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
The frequency in multiples of 100 Hz as indicated by the figures for the digits HM, TM, M, H, T, U. This should be used for MF, HF equipment.
3
X
X
X
X
X
The HF/MF working channel number indicated by the values of the digits TM, M, H, T and U. This should be used for backward compatibility in receive only mode.
8
X
X
X
X
X
Only used for Recommendation ITU-R M.586 equipment.
9
0
X(1)
X
X
X
The VHF working channel number indicated by the values of the digits M, H, T and U.
HM
TM
M
H
T
U
Character 2
Character 3
Character 1(2)
(1)
If the M digit is 1 this indicates that the ship stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channel frequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 2 this indicates that the coast stations transmitting frequency is being used as a simplex channel frequency for both ship and coast stations. If the M digit is 0, this indicates the frequency being used is in accordance with RR Appendix 18 for both single and two frequency channels.
(2)
Character 1 is the last character transmitted.
TABLE 6 Position information (Annex 1, § 8.3.2.3) Quadrant digit NE 0 NO 1 SE 2 SO 3 55 Character 6 (1)
X
Latitude
Longitude
Tens of degrees
Units of degrees
Tens of minutes
Units of minutes
Hundreds of degrees
Tens of degrees
X
X
X
X
X
X
Character 5
Character 4
Character 1 is the last character transmitted.
Character 3
Tens Units of of degrees minutes X
Character 2
X
Units of minutes X
Character 5(1)
393
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
Annex 2 Equipment classes
1
Equipment classes only apply to shipborne equipment
Class A equipment, which includes all the facilities defined in Annex 1, will comply with the IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for MF/HF installations and/or VHF installations. Class B equipment providing minimum facilities for equipment on ships not required to use Class A equipment and complying with the minimum IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for MF and/or VHF installations. Class D equipment is intended to provide minimum facilities for VHF DSC distress, urgency and safety as well as routing calling and reception, not necessarily in full accordance with IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for VHF installations. Class E equipment is intended to provide minimum facilities for MF and/or HF DSC distress, urgency and safety as well as routine calling and reception, not necessarily in full accordance with IMO GMDSS carriage requirements for MF/HF installations. Class A and Class B equipment may support the optional semi-automatic/automatic service in accordance with Recommendations ITU-R M.689, ITU-R M.1082 and Tables 4.10.1 and 4.10.2 and are encouraged to do so. Class D and Class E equipment may also support the optional semi-automatic/automatic service. NOTE 1 Class C, F and G equipment as defined in earlier versions of this Recommendation (e.g., Recommendations ITU-R M.493-5 (Geneva, 1992) and ITU-R M.493-7 (Geneva, 1995)) did not provide vital minimum DSC functions (transmitting and receiving distress alerts) and have therefore been withdrawn.
394
Maritime Manual
2
Class requirements for B, D and E are given in § 3, 4 and 5 (See Tables 4.1 to 4.10.2 for technical requirements)
3
Class B (MF and/or VHF only)
3.1
Transmit capabilities
3.1.1
Format specifier:
3.1.2
The numerical identification of the called station (address).
3.1.3
Category:
3.1.4
Self-identification (automatically inserted).
3.1.5
Messages
Distress All ships Geographic area Individual station Semi-automatic/automatic service Ships having common interest (group).
Distress Urgency Safety Routine.
3.1.5.1 For distress alerts: Message 1: Nature of distress, defaulting to undesignated distress Message 2: Distress coordinates Message 3: Time for last position update Message 4: Type of subsequent communication: MF: J3E VHF: F3E/G3E simplex. 3.1.5.2 For distress relay calls: First telecommand:
Distress relay
Identification of the ship:
As defined in Annex 1
Messages 1 to 4:
As § 3.1.5.1.
395
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
3.1.5.3 For distress acknowledgement calls: First telecommand:
Distress acknowledgement
Identification of the ship:
As defined in Annex 1
Messages 1 to 4:
As § 3.1.5.1.
3.1.5.4 For all other calls: First telecommand:
Unable to comply.
MF:
For individual station calls, J3E or test (see Annex 1 § 8.4); for calls using the semi-automatic/automatic MF-services, J3E or end of call .
VHF:
For individual station calls, F3E/G3E or polling (see Annex 1 § 8.4); for calls using the semi-automatic/automatic VHF-services F3E/G3E or end of call .
Second telecommand:
No information.
Frequency/channel or ship s position:
As defined in Annex 1.
Selection information (semiautomatic/automatic service):
3.1.6
End of sequence character:
3.2
Receive capabilities
Telephone number of public telephone subscriber. As defined in Annex 1.
3.2.1 Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 3.1 plus all distress relay calls having the format specifier geographical area calls , all distress acknowledgement calls and all unable to comply calls. 3.2.2
Audible alarm upon reception of any DSC call.
396
Maritime Manual
4
Class D (VHF only)1
4.1
Transmit capabilities
4.1.1
Format specifier:
4.1.2
The numerical identification of the called station (address).
4.1.3
Category:
4.1.4
Self-identification (automatically inserted).
4.1.5
Messages
Distress All ships Individual station Ships having common interest (group).
Distress Urgency Safety Routine.
4.1.5.1 For distress calls: Message 1: Nature of distress, defaulting to undesignated distress Message 2: Distress coordinates Message 3: Time for last position update Message 4: Type of subsequent communication: F3E/G3E simplex. 4.1.5.2 For all other calls: First telecommand:
F3E/G3E simplex Unable to comply Polling.
Second telecommand:
No information.
Frequency/channel information:
VHF working channel, defaulting to channel 16 for urgency and safety calls and a recognized intership channel (RR Appendix 18) for all other calls.
4.1.6
As defined in Annex 1.
End of sequence character:
_______________ 1 Requirements for sub-category hand-held equipment are specified in Annex 1 Tables 4.1
to 4.10.2.
397
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.493-13
4.2
Receive capabilities
Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 4.1 plus all distress relay calls except those having the format specifier geographical area calls , all distress acknowledgement calls and all unable to comply calls.
5
Class E (MF and/or HF only)
5.1
Transmit capabilities
5.1.1
Format specifier:
5.1.2
The numerical identification of the called station (address).
5.1.3
Category:
5.1.4
Self-identification (automatically inserted).
5.1.5
Messages
Distress Geographic area Individual station Ships having common interest (group).
Distress Urgency Safety Routine.
5.1.5.1 For distress calls: Message 1: Nature of distress, defaulting to undesignated distress Message 2: Distress coordinates Message 3: Time for last position update Message 4: Type of subsequent communication J3E. 5.1.5.2
For all other calls:
First telecommand:
J3E telephony Unable to comply Test.
Second telecommand:
No information.
Frequency/channel information:
MF/HF working channel, on MF defaulting to 2 182 kHz for urgency and safety calls.
398
Maritime Manual
5.1.6
End of sequence character:
5.2
Receive capabilities
As defined in Annex 1.
Receive and be capable of displaying all the information in calls listed in § 5.1 plus all distress relay calls having the format specifier geographical area calls , all distress acknowledgement calls and all unable to comply calls.
399
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.585-5
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.585-5 Assignment and use of maritime mobile service identities (1982-1986-1990-2003-2007-2009) The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a)
the need for a unique ship identity for safety and telecommunication purposes;
b) that the unique number should be the maritime mobile service identity (MMSI); c) the need for this identity to be usable with automated radiocommunication systems; d) that the identities assigned to ship stations, coast stations, aircraft participating in search and rescue operations, aids to navigation, craft associated with a parent ship, and used for establishing group calls should be of a similar nature; e) that it is possible to use the MMSI to establish a telephone call to a ship after routing through the public switched networks to an appropriate coast station; f) that the public switched networks in many countries have restrictions on the maximum number of digits that may be dialled or keyed to identify the called ship station and the routing coast station, which would prevent the translation of the complete MMSI directly into a diallable number for the ship that is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation E.164; g) that whatever restrictions may be required should, in the interests of the development of automatic shore-to-ship operations, be as few as possible; h) that mobile-satellite systems enable the maritime community to participate in or interwork with international public correspondence telecommunication systems on a fully automatic basis, utilizing the numbering, naming and addressing scheme pertaining to the service being used; j) that the current generation of mobile-satellite systems participating in the global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) have signalling and routing characteristics requiring ships using these networks to have an MMSI ending with three zeroes;
400
Maritime Manual
k) that the numbering scheme specified for future generations of mobile-satellite systems participating in the GMDSS will be designed to meet the needs of the international public correspondence service and is unlikely to offer the facility to incorporate any part of the MMSI in a diallable number for a ship, recommends 1 that ships complying with the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as amended, and other ships equipped with automated radiocommunication systems, including Automatic Identification Systems (AIS), Digital Selective Calling (DSC), and/or carrying alerting devices of the GMDSS should be assigned maritime mobile service identities in accordance with Annexes 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 to this Recommendation, as appropriate; 2 that ship, coast stations, and aircraft participating in search and rescue operations using digital selective calling equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.493 should use their 9-digit numerical identities transmitted as a 10-digit address/self-identity, normally with a digit 0 added at the end of the identity (see also Recommendation ITU-R M.1080); 3 that ship, coast stations, and non-shipborne stations using AIS equipment in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.1371 should use their 9-digit numerical identities; 4 for the purpose of ensuring compatibility with the GMDSS, the numbers, names and addresses of ship earth stations participating in international telecommunication services should be made readily available to all authorized entities by the telecommunication service providers concerned; 5 that the guidance given in Annex 6 to this Recommendation should be employed regarding the reuse of MMSI, particularly those with three trailing zeroes.
Annex 1 Assignment of identification to ship station
1 Ships participating in the maritime radio services mentioned in recommends 1 should be assigned a nine digit unique ship station identity in the format M1I2D3X4X5X6X7X8X9 where in the first three digits represent the Maritime Identification Digits (MID) and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID denotes the geographical area of the administration responsible for the ship station so identified.
401
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.585-5
2 Restrictions may apply with respect to the maximum number of digits, which can be transmitted on some national telex and/or telephone networks for the purpose of ship station identification. 3 The maximum number of digits that could be transmitted over the national networks of many countries for the purpose of determining ship station identity was six. The digits carried on the network to represent the ship station identity are referred to as the ship station number in this text and in the relevant ITU-R Recommendations. The use of the techniques described below should have made it possible for the coast stations of such countries to engage in the automatic connection of calls to ship stations. To obtain the required nine digit ship station identity a series of trailing zeros would have to be added automatically to the ship station number by the coast station in order to complete a shore-originated telephone call, for example, carried over the public switched telephone network:
Ship station number
Ship station identity
M1I2D3X4X5X6
M1I2D3X4X5X6070809
4 In accordance with the above, and the relevant ITU-T Recommendations, a numbering plan was instituted for Inmarsat Standard B, C and M systems, which also requires that MMSI with three trailing zeroes be assigned to ships fitting standard B, C and M ship earth stations. 5 The above restrictions do not necessarily apply to Inmarsat Standard C systems, as they are not diallable terminals from the public switched telephone network but are only data terminals. 6 With respect to Inmarsat Standard B and M systems and as long as the above restrictions apply, ships reasonably expected to be affected by the above limitations should only be assigned ship station identities with X7X8X9 000. 7 Group ship station call identities for calling simultaneously more than one ship are formed as follows: 01M2I3D4X5X6X7X8X9 where the first figure is zero and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the group ship station call identity and does not therefore prevent group calls to fleets containing more than one ship nationality.
402
Maritime Manual
8 With the evolution of global mobile-satellite systems, ships earth stations are able to participate in international public correspondence telecommunication services. Ship earth stations having this functionality may be assigned international telecommunication numbers that have no direct correspondence with the ship station MMSI. Those authorized to assign the numbers, names and addresses associated with such ship earth stations should maintain a record of the cross reference relationships with the MMSI, for example in an appropriate database. For the purposes of GMDSS the details of these relationships should be made available to authorized entities such as but not limited to the Rescue Coordination Centres (RCC)1. Such availability should be on an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year.
Annex 2 Assignment of identification to coast station 1 Coast stations and other stations on land participating in the maritime radio services mentioned in recommends 2 should be assigned a nine-digit unique coast station identity in the format 0102M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 represent the MID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID reflects the territory or geographical area in which the coast station or coast earth station is located. 2 As the number of coast stations decreases in many countries, an administration may wish to assign MMSI of the format above to harbour radio stations, pilot stations, system identities and other stations participating in the maritime radio services. The stations concerned should be located on land or on an island in order to use the 00MIDXXXX format. 3 The administration may use the sixth digit to further differentiate between certain specific uses of this class of MMSI, as shown in the example applications below: a)
00MID1XXX
Coast radio stations
b)
00MID2XXX
Harbour radio stations
c)
00MID3XXX
Pilot stations, etc.
4 This format scheme creates blocks of 999 numbers for each category of station, however the method is optional and should be used only as a guidance. Many other possibilities exist if the administration concerned wishes to augment the scheme. _______________ 1 IMO Resolution A.1001(25) requires that distress priority communications in these systems should, as far as possible, be routed automatically to an RCC.
403
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.585-5
5 Group coast station call identities for calling simultaneously more than one coast station are formed as a subset of coast station identities, as follows: 0102M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the first two figures are zeros and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the group coast station call identity. The identity may be assigned to stations of one administration which are located in only one geographical region as indicated in the relevant ITU-T Recommendations. 6 The combination 0102M3I4D506070809 should be reserved for a Group Coast Station Identity and should address all 00MIDXXXX stations within the administration. The administration may further augment this use with additional Group Call identities, i.e. 00MID1111, etc. 7 For the purpose of the GMDSS the details of these MMSI assignments should be made available to authorized entities such as, but not limited to, RCC. Such availability should be on an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year. 8 The combination 010293949506070809 is reserved for the All Coast Stations Identity and should address all VHF 00XXXXXXX stations. It is not applicable to MF or HF coast stations.
Annex 3 Assignment of identification to aircraft 1 When an aircraft is required to use maritime mobile service identities for the purposes of conducting search and rescue communications with stations in the maritime mobile service, the responsible administration should assign a nine-digit unique aircraft identity, in the format 111213M4I5D6X7X8X9 where the digits 4, 5 and 6 represent the MID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the aircraft call identity. 2 The format shown above will accommodate 999 aircraft per MID. If the administration concerned has more Search and Rescue (SAR) aircraft than 999 they may use an additional country code (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU. 3 The administration may use the seventh digit to differentiate between certain specific uses of this class of MMSI, as shown in the example applications below: a)
111MID1XX
Fixed-wing aircraft
b)
111MID5XX
Helicopters
404
Maritime Manual
4 This format scheme creates blocks of 99 numbers for each of the category of stations, however, the method shown here is optional. 5 The combination 111213M4I5D6070809 should be reserved for a Group Aircraft Identity and should address all 111MIDXXX stations within the administration. The administration may further augment this with additional Group Call identities, i.e. 111MID111, etc. 6 For the purpose of search and rescue the details of these MMSI assignments should be made available to authorized entities such as, but not limited to, RCC. Such availability should be on an automatic basis, 24 hours per day 365 days per year. 7 The MMSI assigned to SAR aircraft should also be available from the ITU MARS database (see Radio Regulations (RR) No. 20.16).
Annex 4 Assignment of identification to AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) 1 When a means of automatic identification is required for a station aiding navigation at sea, the responsible administration should assign a nine-digit unique number in the format 9192M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 represent the MID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the call identity for the navigational aid. 2 The format shown above applies to all types of AtoN as listed in the most recent version of Recommendation ITU-R M.1371, see AIS Message 21 parameter Type of aids to navigation and the associated table for this parameter. This format is used for all AIS stations for the transmission of messages that relate to AtoN. In the case where an AIS base station is collocated with an AIS AtoN station the messages related to the base station operation should be assigned an identification number in the format given in Annex 2. 3 The format scheme shown above will accommodate 10 000 AtoN per MID. If the administration concerned has more than 10 000 they may use an additional country code (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU giving a further 10 000 identities. 4 The administration may use the sixth digit to differentiate between certain specific uses of the MMSI, as shown in the example applications below: a)
99MID1XXX
Physical AIS AtoN
b)
99MID6XXX
Virtual AIS AtoN
405
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.585-5
5 This format scheme creates blocks of 999 numbers for each category of station, however the method shown here is optional and should be used only as a guidance. 6 In addition to the use of the sixth digit to differentiate between specific navigational aids as explained above, the seventh digit may be used for national purposes, to define areas where the AIS AtoN are located or types of AIS AtoN to the discretion of the administration concerned. 7 The details of these MMSI assignments should be made available but not limited to the International Association of Marine Aids to Navigation and Lighthouse Authorities (IALA) and appropriate national authorities. 8 The assigned MMSI to aids of navigation should also be available from the ITU MARS database (see RR No. 20.16).
Annex 5 Assignment of identification to craft associated with a parent ship 1 Craft associated with a parent ship, need unique identification. These crafts which participate in the maritime mobile service should be assigned a nine-digit unique number in the format 9182M3I4D5X6X7X8X9 where the digits 3, 4 and 5 represent the MID and X is any figure from 0 to 9. The MID represents only the territory or geographical area of the administration assigning the call identity for the craft associated with a parent ship. 2 This numbering format is only valid for devices on board craft associated with a parent ship. A craft may carry multiple devices which would be identified by the MMSI assigned to the craft. These devices may be located in lifeboats, life-rafts, MOBboats or other craft belonging to a parent ship. 3 A unique MMSI should be assigned for each craft associated with a parent ship and will have to be separately registered and linked to the MMSI of the parent ship. 4 The format scheme shown above will accommodate 10 000 crafts associated with parent ships per MID. If the administration concerned has more than 10 000 they may use an additional country code (MID) if it is already assigned by the ITU giving a further 10 000 identities. 5 The assigned MMSI to these craft associated with a parent ship should also be available from the ITU MARS database (see RR No. 20.16).
406
Maritime Manual
Annex 6 Guidance on the conservation and management of MMSI 1 Administrations should employ the following measures to manage the limited MMSI numbering resource, particularly for the reuse of MMSI with three trailing zeroes, in order to avoid depletion of MID and the corresponding MMSI series: a)
implement effective national procedures for MMSI assignment and registration;
b)
provide the Bureau with regular updates of assigned numbers in conformity with RR No. 20.16;
c)
ensure that the period from the expiration of the ship station licence associated with the number assignment until the date of reassignment of that number is sufficient for the changes to be incorporated in the relevant ITU service publications, taking into account the standard intervals between successive published editions;
d)
ensure that when ships move from the flag of registration of one administration to that of another administration, all of the assigned means of ship station identification, including the MMSI, are reassigned as appropriate and that the changes are notified to the Bureau as soon as possible (see RR No. 20.16).
2 It is essential for a lapsed number assignment to remain dormant before taking it back into use again, in order to avoid confusion over the origin of distress communications or over the responsible parties for billing and reconciling accounts for maritime radiocommunications. 3 The objective is to ensure that a period of five years should pass before a lapsed MMSI is reused and entered into national and international databases pursuant to RR No. 20.16. 4 Administrations could also with 2, 1 or no trailing zeroes in the and MID resources. However these assignment of an additional MID Article 19).
apply the above procedures to MMSI assigned interests of the long term conservation of MMSI number formats are normally not critical to the to an administration (see Section VI of RR
407
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.628-4 Technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transponders (1986-1990-1992-1994-2006) Scope This Recommendation contains technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transponders (SART). A SART is used for locating a ship or survival craft at sea when it is in distress. A ship or survival craft at sea can use a SART to indicate that it is in distress. The SART can be detected by radars operating in the 9 GHz frequency band.
The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a) that Regulations III/6.2.2 and IV/7.1.3 of the 1988 Amendments to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), 1974 require the carriage of radar transponders operating in the 9 GHz frequency band for locating the ship when it is in distress at sea or its survival craft; b) that such radar transponders may also be used by ships not subject to the 1974 SOLAS Convention; some of these radar transponders may be installed with a float-free release and activation arrangement or with a float-free Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon (EPIRB) or float-free satellite EPIRB; c) that Regulations V/19 of the 2000 Amendments to the 1974 SOLAS Convention require that passenger ships irrespective of size and cargo ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards carry a radar installation or if they are of 5 000 gross tonnage and upwards, two radar installations; from 1 February 1995, the radar installation or at least one of the radar installations shall be capable of operating in the 9 GHz frequency band; d) that the International Maritime Organization (IMO) has adopted a Recommendation on performance standards for survival craft radar transponders for use in search and rescue operations (Resolution A.802(19));
408
e)
Maritime Manual
that location is part of the basic requirements for the GMDSS;
f) that a locating system would be more effective if the radar transponder was in conformity with internationally agreed technical and operating characteristics, recommends 1 that the technical characteristics of search and rescue radar transponders (SART) operating in the frequency range 9 200-9 500 MHz should be in accordance with Annex 1; 2 that the maximum detection range of a SART having technical characteristics in accordance with Annex 1 by a radar conforming with IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) should be assessed using its measured technical characteristics in conjunction with the theoretical method given in Annex 2; 3
Notes 1 and 2 are part of this Recommendation.
NOTE 1 The propagation losses of a SART signal caused by a survival craft and its occupants are explained in Annex 3. NOTE 2 The technical characteristics of circular polarization SARTs are described in Annex 4.
Annex 1 Technical characteristics for search and rescue radar transponders operating over the band 9 200-9 500 MHz 1
Frequency: 9 200-9 500 MHz.
2
Polarization: horizontal or circular.
3
Sweep rate: 5 s per 200 MHz, nominal.
4
The response signal should consist of 12 sweeps.
5
Form of sweep: sawtooth,
6
Pulse emission: 100 s nominal.
7
e.i.r.p.: not less than 400 mW (equivalent to 26 dBm).
8
Effective receiver sensitivity: better than 50 dBm (equivalent to 0.1 mW/m2) (see Note 1).
forward sweep time: 7.5 s 1 s, return sweep time: 0.4 s 0.1 s. The response should commence with a return sweep.
409
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
9
Duration of operation:
96 h in stand-by condition followed by 8 h of transponder transmissions while being continuously interrogated with a pulse repetition frequency of 1 kHz.
10
Temperature range:
11
Recovery time following excitation: 10 s or less.
12
Effective antenna height: 1 m (see Note 2).
13
Delay between receipt of radar signal and start of transmission: 0.5 s or less.
14
Antenna vertical beamwidth:
15
Antenna azimuthal beamwidth: omnidirectional within
ambient: 20° C to 55° C, stowage: 30° C to +65° C.
at least 12.5° relative to transponders horizontal plane.
the radar
2 dB.
NOTE 1 Effective receiver sensitivity includes antenna gain. Effective receiver sensitivity of better than 50 dBm applies to interrogating radar pulses (medium and long) of 400 ns. Effective receiver sensitivity of better than 37 dBm applies to interrogating radar pulses (short) of 100 ns. The receiver should be capable of correct operation when subjected to the radiated field (28 dB(W/m2)) emitted from a shipborne radar complying with IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) at any distance 20 m. NOTE 2 This effective antenna height is applicable for equipment required by Regulations III/6.2.2 and IV/7.1.3 of the 1988 Amendments to the 1974 SOLAS Convention.
Annex 2 The maximum detection range of a SART of given or measured e.i.r.p. and effective receiver sensitivity when deployed with a radar conforming with IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) may be assessed using Fig. 1. The essential parameters of the radar are: transmitter power 25 kW, antenna gain 30 dBi, antenna height 15 m, receiver sensitivity 94 dBm.
410
Maritime Manual
Figure 1 shows the propagation curves for SARTs of height 0.5 m, 1 m and 1.5 m in a fairly calm sea (wave height 0.3 m). For rougher seas, the sea reflection coefficient is reduced and the propagation curves move back towards the free space line depending on atmospheric refraction. For an SART of 1 m height, the maximum detection range is at least 5 NM. The method of using Fig. 1 is as follows: calculate the radar received power (Pr) at range 1 NM using the formula: Pr SART e.i.r.p. radar antenna gain ( /4 R)2 that is Pr (dBm) SART e.i.r.p. (dBm) 87 dB; set the calculated Pr against point A on the radar received power scale and complete the scale (10 dB per division); set the SART effective receiver sensitivity (ERS) on the transponder received power scale and read the intercept with the appropriate propagation curve at that level to obtain the radar to SART maximum detection range; take the 94 dBm level on the radar received power scale and read the intercept with the appropriate propagation curve at that level to obtain the SART to radar maximum detection range. The smaller of the two maximum detection ranges so obtained is the required assessment of SART maximum detection range, which should be at least 5 NM as required by IMO Resolution A.802(19).
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
411
412
Maritime Manual
Annex 3 Effects of antenna height and obstruction of the signal path by a survival craft and its occupants on the detection range of SARTs 1
Introduction
This Annex discusses the effects on the propagation path of SART signals, taking into account the height of the SART antenna above the surface of the sea and also the attenuation caused by the materials of the survival craft and its occupants.
2
Effects of SART antenna height on detection range
This Recommendation requires that the height of the installed SART antenna should be at least 1 m above the sea surface in order to obtain the five nautical mile detection range required by IMO Resolution A.802(19). Practical tests have confirmed this performance. Tests on a sample of six SARTs from different manufacturers gave detection ranges between 8.2 NM and 9.2 NM with an antenna height of 1 m. 2.1 Tests have also shown the importance of maintaining a SART antenna height of at least 1 m. The following results were obtained with a SART in a survival craft:
3
SART lying flat on the floor:
range 1.8 NM
SART standing upright on the floor:
range 2.5 NM
SART floating in the water:
range 2.0 NM
Effects of survival craft on SART signal
Tests have been made with a SART mounted on a survival craft to give a 1 m antenna height, in order to determine whether the body of the survival craft and its occupants may cause an obstruction. 3.1 Figures 2-4 give the results of these tests carried out on two different models of an eight-man SOLAS life-raft. In each case, the SART was placed at the centre of a turntable in an open field site, and was triggered with a pulsed radar signal. Each set of measurements was conducted with and without the life-raft and "survivors" present, keeping the SART at the centre of the turntable. 3.2 Figure 2 shows the results obtained from a SART mounted on a telescopic pole fitted to the life-raft s antenna mounting. In this case, the SART antenna was level with the canopy support tube of the raft. One of the rafts had little effect on the SART signal, whereas the other (which has carbon in the material of the support tube) caused a dip in the signal through an angle of about 30°.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
413
3.3 Figure 3 shows the results obtained with the same rafts, but with a SART designed to hang from the support tube, inside the canopy of the raft. A smaller loss of signal was noted due to the carbon loaded tubes, as the signal was only passing through the vertical sections. Dips were also noted, however, due to the presence of retroreflective tape on the outside of the life-raft canopies. On one raft, there was a severe reduction in signal over a very small angle, due to the proximity of a Lithium battery pack mounted on the canopy for powering the life-raft location light. 3.4 Figure 4 shows the blanking effect caused by a survivor holding the SART at arm s length. In this case however the SART height was only 0.5 m.
414
Maritime Manual FIGURE 2 Pole mounted SART 4 2 0
8
7.5 7.2 7
6.5
0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315
6.1 360
Azimuth angle Signal masked by carbon loaded canopy support tube
Mounted on raft 1 Mounted on raft 2
0628-02
415
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4 FIGURE 3 SART hung inside raft 2 0
8 7.5 7.2 7 6.5 Dips caused by reflective tape and/or carbon in support tube
6.1 6
0
90
180 Azimuth angle
Signal masked by battery for light
Mounted in raft 1 Mounted in raft 2
0628-03
416
Maritime Manual FIGURE 4 Hand-held SART 2 0
7 6.5 6.1 6 5.2 5 Azimuth angle
Hand held in raft 1
0628-04
417
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
3.5 On each figure approximate detection ranges are given. These are derived theoretically assuming an 8 NM detection range for a 1 m height SART and a 7 NM range for 0.5 m height. 3.6 It can be seen from the figures that best performance was obtained with the pole mounted SART where the reduction in detection range due to the survival craft was generally no more than 0.5 NM. In all cases there was reduced performance over narrow sectors of 1.5-2.0 NM but in practice with the survival craft moving in the sea this will not be a serious operational problem. The reduction shown in Fig. 4 caused by a person, will not be significant in practice as a person seated in a survival craft is lower in height than 1 m. 3.7 The above results were obtained with the survival craft dry as it was on a test site. Table 1 gives the propagation loss for the canopy and air tube cloths used in a number of different manufacturers survival crafts. The last two entries give the loss when the materials are sprayed with sea water. It can be seen that in the worst case the additional loss for wet material was 3.35 dB which equates to a reduction in detected range of about a further 0.5 NM.
TABLE 1 Transmission loss through canopy of life-raft (measurement results) Transmission loss (dB) vs. slant of canopy Test
Sample
Thickness (mm)
Weight (kg/m2)
Slant = 0°
= 30°
= 45°
= 60°
1
Canopy cloth of company A
0.18
0.22
0
0.1
0.2
0
2
Air tube cloth of company A
0.53
0.7
0.05
0.05
0.3
0.2
3
Canopy cloth of company B
0.25
0.27
0
0.1
0.15
0.05
4
Air tube cloth of company B
0.57
0.67
0
0.4
0.4
0.45
5
Canopy cloth of company C
0.26
0.3
0.2
0.5
0.3
0.4
6
Air tube cloth of company C
0.54
0.67
0.6
1.4
1.9
2.4
418
Maritime Manual
TABLE 1 (end)
Test
Thickness (mm)
Sample
Weight (kg/m2)
Transmission loss (dB) vs. slant of canopy Slant = 0°
= 30°
= 45°
= 60°
7
Spraying salt water (4.8% NaCl) over
0.35
0.55
0.95
1.1
8
Spraying salt water (4.8% NaCl) over
1.3
1.9
2.6
3.4
Measurement freqency: 9.4 GHz Sample size: 600 800 mm
4
Conclusions
The tests indicated that properly mounted SARTs will achieve the detection range required by IMO, even allowing for the blanketing effects of the survival craft. There is no necessity to mount the SART more than 1 m above the sea particularly if the extra height is likely to lead to difficulties by survivors in achieving the mounting, but in future improved antenna mountings may be feasible giving additional detection range. 4.1 The tests did not consider the effect on SART performance of a radar reflector but it would be expected that this would seriously degrade the SART response. Survivors are advised not to deploy a SART and a radar reflector on the same survival craft because the reflector may obscure the SART.
Annex 4 Performance of circular polarization SARTs Foreword Horizontal polarization has been used as the method of polarization for SARTs. Recent examinations in Japan have shown that circular polarization would be suitable for use with SARTs. A SART using circular polarization with a helical antenna was made for trial purposes, and water tank experiments and sea trials were conducted. The results showed the superiority of circular polarization used with SARTs and it was concluded that this will enable a reduction in the size of SARTs.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.628-4
1
419
Characteristics of SART signal in the tank tests
Measurements of the received power of the SART signal and observations of visibility of the signal on radar PPI were carried out in an artificial waves water tank at a research laboratory in Japan. The results showed that circular polarization was superior to horizontal polarization for SARTs.
2
Characteristics of SART signal in the on-sea trial
This experiment was conducted in 2000, in cooperation with ships and aircraft of the maritime authorities of Japan in Sagami Bay, by observing the visibility of the SART signal on the radars on board the ships and aircraft. In the meantime, the received power of the SART signal was measured by a land-based radar. The following results were obtained: a)
With aircraft radar, the maximum visible distance of the SART signal of circular polarization was 37 NM, while that of horizontal polarization was 30 NM. This confirms the superiority of circular polarization.
b)
With marine radar, the maximum visible distance of the SART signal of circular polarization was 14 NM, while that of horizontal polarization was 11.5 NM. These results confirm the superiority of circular polarization.
c)
With land-based marine radar, the result shown in Fig. 5 was obtained. The SART of circular polarization was moved on the sea by an escorting small vessel. The distance between the radar and the SART was changed. The received power of the SART was measured by the land-based marine radar. In Fig. 5, the black dots show the actually measured SART signal of circular polarization, and dotted lines show the theoretical value of SART signal of horizontal polarization. The measured data always appears above the theoretical value curve for SART to radar . The appearance of the SART signal of circular polarization on the radar PPI was stronger and clearer than that of horizontal polarization. These results confirm the superiority of circular polarization. The reason is as follows: Because the electric field revolves, circular polarization is resolved in the horizontal polarization element and the vertical polarization element. For these two composition elements, the reflection characteristic of the surface of the sea is different. Therefore the curve of reception strength when the direct wave and the surface of the sea reflection wave interfere changes with distance. This phenomenon leads to the detectable distance of a circular polarization wave SART increasing over horizontal polarization SART by 30% or more.
420
Maritime Manual FIGURE 5 Observed data of SART signal of circular polarization and theoretical value of horizontal polarization
Furthermore, in 2004, measurements of the received power of a SART signal were carried out in rough weather conditions using a marine radar of a research laboratory in Japan. As a result, it was confirmed that a SART with circular polarization was not inferior compared with that of horizontal polarization.
421
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2 RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.689-2 INTERNATIONAL MARITIME VHF RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM WITH AUTOMATIC FACILITIES BASED ON DSC SIGNALLING FORMAT** (Question ITU-R 93/8)
(1990-1992-1994) Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, recommends 1. that the operational procedures described in Annex 1 be observed when operating an international radiotelephone system with automatic facilities based on the DSC signalling format, and using the public correspondence channels listed in RR Appendix 18; 2. that the same RR Appendix 18 channel can be used for both automatic and manual operation by the same coast station depending on the requirements of the ship stations; 3. that the technical characteristics of the ship and coast station equipment should be in accordance with Annex 2.
ANNEX 1
Operational procedures
1.
Introduction
These procedures are initiated by using DSC on the VHF calling channel and based on the technical characteristics and operational procedures detailed in Recommendations ITU-R M.493 and ITU-R M.541. Connection to the PSTN is effected using any appropriate VHF public correspondence working channel listed in RR Appendix 18 without in any way impairing their use for manual operation. Appendix 1 illustrates the timing of the call set-up, calling and acknowledgement sequences described by these procedures in the ship-to-shore direction and in the shore-to-ship direction.
_______________ ** Coast stations may also use other procedures with automatic facilities based on DSC signalling format directly on VHF radiotelephone working channels.
422
Maritime Manual
2.
Operational procedures in the ship-to-shore direction
2.1
Ship station initiates call
2.1.1 The user aboard the ship (hereafter referred to as the user) composes the calling sequence (see Note 1) on his DSC equipment as follows: selects the format specifier 123 (automatic/semi-automatic service); enters address (identification) of required VHF coast station; selects the category routine (100); (the ship station self-identification is entered automatically); selects first telecommand 101 (duplex F3E/G3E) or 100 (simplex F3E/G3E) or 106 (data) (see Note 2) and second telecommand as appropriate; inserts subscriber number required (e.g. telephone number); selects end of sequence signal RQ . Note 1 It is assumed that commercial equipment will be produced which simplifies the composition of the calling sequence. In practice the user should only need to key the VHF coast station address and the required subscriber number, all other information being inserted automatically. Note 2 Duplex mode of operation should be used for data communications. 2.1.2 The user selects the VHF DSC calling channel (channel 70 of RR Appendix 18) and initiates transmission of the sequence on the calling channel. In order to reduce the probability of call collisions, the DSC equipment should automatically inhibit transmission of this sequence until the calling channel is clear of any signal. 2.1.3 If the ship station does not receive an error-free acknowledgement from the called coast station (see § 2.2) within 5 s, the calling sequence should be automatically repeated. If an error-free acknowledgement is still not received within a further 5 s, then any further repetitions should be effected by manually initiating a new calling sequence. Such further repetitions to the same coast station should not, however, be initiated until at least 15 min have elapsed.
2.2
Coast station acknowledgement
2.2.1 The coast station should, within 3 s of receipt of the calling sequence, initiate the transmission of an acknowledgement sequence on the DSC calling channel. The coast station equipment should also automatically inhibit transmission of the acknowledgement until the calling channel is clear. 2.2.2 If the coast station can comply immediately with the call request, then it should immediately: radiate an engaged channel appropriate working channel;
signal on the coast station transmit frequency of the
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
423
transmit the acknowledgement sequence which should contain the same information as in the call request with the following exceptions: the address will be that of the ship; the self-identification will be that of the coast station; the working channel number will be included; the end of sequence signal will be BQ . 2.2.3 If the coast station cannot comply immediately with the call request due to the appropriate working channel(s) being busy, then the acknowledgement sequence should be as in § 2.2.2 except that the first telecommand will be 104 (unable to comply) and the second telecommand will be 103 (queue) if the optional ring-back procedure is applied, else 102 (busy) and three symbols No. 126 should be included in the channel information field. 2.2.4 If the coast station cannot comply for other reasons, the acknowledgement sequence should be as in § 2.2.3, except that the second telecommand signal should be one of symbol numbers 100-109 as appropriate. 2.2.5 The ship station, on receipt of an error-free acknowledgement in accordance with § 2.2.2 (ability to comply), should, within 5 s of receipt, change to the working channel indicated in the acknowledgement and transmit, on that working channel, a carrier for a minimum period of 2 s. Fully automated ship station equipment should, within that transmission, transmit a DSC call which is identical to the initial call (see § 2.1.1) except that the end of sequence signal should be 127 (see Note 1). Note 1 In some regional applications, ships do not transmit DSC signals on the working channels. Equipment on ships sailing beyond these regional applications and participating in the automated service, should be able to comply with the requirements for the fully automated service. 2.2.6 If the ship station receives an error-free acknowledgement in accordance with § 2.2.3 indicating unable to comply queue then, if the user still requires the call connection, the ship station should continue to monitor the DSC calling channel for any calls from the coast station. 2.2.7 The ship station, on receipt of an acknowledgement indicating unable to comply in accordance with § 2.2.4 (or, if the coast station does not operate the ring-back procedure (§ 2.3.2), in accordance with § 2.2.3), should, if an automatic connection is still required, initiate an appropriate new call in accordance with § 2.1. 2.2.8 If the coast station transmitted an acknowledgement indicating unable to comply in accordance with § 2.2.4 (or, if the coast station does not operate the ring-back procedure (§ 2.3.2), in accordance with § 2.2.3), then it should take no further action with respect to the call request.
424
Maritime Manual
2.3
Procedures subsequent to the exchange of initial DSC calls
2.3.1
Mandatory procedure
2.3.1.1 If the coast station transmitted an acknowledgement indicating able to comply (§ 2.2.2) then, if a DSC call (§ 2.2.5) containing the same self-identification as that of the calling ship is detected on the coast station receive frequency of the working channel, the coast station should immediately start to dial the required subscriber number (see Note 1, § 2.3.1.2). 2.3.1.2 If a further call identical to the original calling sequence is received from the ship station within 16 s of receipt of the original calling sequence (see § 2.1.1) then the coast station should repeat the acknowledgement (§ 2.2.2). If a DSC call in accordance with § 2.3.1.1 (Note 1) is not detected within this 16 s period then the coast station should remove the engaged channel signal. Note 1 Some coast stations detect only the presence of a carrier at this stage. In areas of hightraffic density, carrier detection may not ensure that the calling ship has transferred to the working channel and should be avoided where practicable.
2.3.2
Optional ring-back procedure
The following additional sequence will tend to reduce repetitive ship calling and provide a better service to the ship: 2.3.2.1 If the coast station transmitted an unable to comply queue acknowledgement (see § 2.2.3) then the ship s identification and required subscriber number should be stored until an appropriate working channel becomes available. This information should be retained for a period of 15 min. 2.3.2.2 If an appropriate working channel becomes available within the 15 min period, the coast station should immediately radiate an engaged channel signal on the coast station transmit frequency of that working channel and initiate a DSC call on the DSC calling channel to the ship station with the same format as the acknowledgement (see § 2.2.2) except that the end of sequence should be RQ . If no appropriate working channel becomes available within this 15 min period then the information should be cleared and no further action taken by the coast station. 2.3.2.3 If an acknowledgement of the above call is not received from the ship station (see § 2.3.2.4) within 5 s then the coast station should repeat the call. If there is no acknowledgement to this second call then the ship s call details should be cleared and the engaged channel signal removed. 2.3.2.4 The ship station, on receipt of such a calling sequence (§ 2.3.2.2) should, if the call connection is still required, automatically initiate an acknowledgement within 2 s on the calling channel (the acknowledgement being transmitted only when the channel is clear). This acknowledgement should be identical to the received calling sequence except that the address should be that of the coast station, the self-identification should be that of the ship station and the end of sequence should be BQ .
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
425
2.3.2.5 The ship station should then continue to listen to the calling channel for a further 5 s, then change to the working channel and transmit a carrier and DSC call as described in § 2.2.5. If a further calling sequence is received within this 5 s period, the acknowledgement should be repeated. 2.3.2.6 The coast station, after receipt of an acknowledgement from the ship station, should, when a DSC call in accordance with § 2.3.1.1 (see Note 1, § 2.3.1.2) is detected on this working channel, immediately start to dial the subscriber number. 2.3.2.7 If, after a period of 15 min a ship has not received a call as indicated in § 2.3.2.2 then, if the call connection is still required, a new call should be manually initiated in accordance with § 2.1.1.
2.4
Call connection
2.4.1 Once the coast station begins dialling the subscriber number it should connect the line circuit to the radio path. Timing of the call for billing purposes should commence after the subscriber answers, i.e. off-hook condition detected. The call connection is now retained and the user should commence communication as soon as the subscriber answers. For a ship working on a duplex basis (see Note 1) the carrier must be transmitted for the total duration of the call. For a ship not working on a duplex basis the carrier must be activated at least once every 45 s. Such activation, when it does not occur naturally (due to the ship transmitting) should preferably be automatic. If automatic activation is not provided then means could be provided to timely alert the user that carrier activation is necessary. Note 1 Ships capable of working duplex but using a semi-duplex operation should use the telecommand signal 100. 2.4.2 If the called subscriber does not answer within a period of 1 min from completion of dialling, then the call should be considered as not started and the coast station should clear the circuit in accordance with § 2.5.5. The user, on hearing the ringing tones stop or hearing anything other than ringing tones (e.g. engaged, number unobtainable, etc.) should refrain from any further transmissions on the working channel. If a further call is required, the user should initiate a new call on the DSC calling channel. The ship s equipment should prevent the transmission of a new call on the DSC calling channel until at least 5 s have elapsed after clearance to prevent malfunction of the coast station call completion due to ship station clearance procedure (see § 2.4.4.1, 2.4.4.2 and 2.5.5). 2.4.3 If a further call is attempted from the same ship within the time-out period (semiduplex operation, see § 2.4.4.2), the coast station may use the information derived from the call to disconnect the previously allocated working channel. 2.4.4 If, during any period of the call, the coast station equipment detects the absence of the ship s carrier, the following procedures apply: 2.4.4.1 If the first telecommand indicated duplex operation and the coast station equipment detects the absence of the ship s carrier for a period greater than 5 s, then the call should be considered to be complete.
426
Maritime Manual
2.4.4.2 If the first telecommand indicated simplex operation and the coast station equipment detects the absence of the ship s carrier for a period greater than 45 s, then the call should be considered to be complete. 2.4.5 If during any period of the call, a fully automated ship station equipment detects the absence of the coast station s carrier for a period greater than 5 s, the call should be considered to be complete.
2.5
Call completion (Note 1, § 2.2.5 applies to § 2.5.1 to 2.5.4)
2.5.1 When the ship station wishes to terminate the call connection to the PSTN, it transmits an end of call DSC call on the working channel and removes the carrier. The format of this call should be the same as that described in § 2.1.1 except that the first telecommand should be 105 (end of call) and the second telecommand should be 126. 2.5.2 On receipt of that call (see Note 1), if it contains the same self-identification as that of the calling ship, the landline is disconnected, the call timing is stopped, the coast station transmits a DSC acknowledgement on the working channel within 1 s of receipt and removes its carrier from the working channel. The format of that acknowledgement should be the same as that described in § 2.5.1 except that the end of sequence signal should be BQ and: the chargeable duration of the call should be inserted in the frequency/channel field by coding the three characters as hours, minutes, seconds, e.g. a chargeable duration of 6 min and 50 s would be coded as 00 06 50; if the chargeable duration of the call is not available then the frequency/channel field should contain three symbols 126. Note 1 Some coast stations do not recognize this end of call DSC call or transmit the above acknowledgement but rely solely on the procedures described in § 2.5.5. 2.5.3 If the coast station receives a second end of call DSC from the ship station within 4 s then it should repeat the procedure given in § 2.5.2. 2.5.4 If the ship station does not receive an end of call acknowledgement within 2 s then it should automatically repeat the end of call , then after a further 2 s or after receipt of an end of call acknowledgement (whichever occurs first) it should consider the call to be complete and remove the carrier from the working channel. 2.5.5 If the coast station does not receive the end of call as described in § 2.5.1, then the call will be considered to be complete when the on-hook condition is detected from the PSTN or if no reply within 1 min or loss of ship s carrier for more than 5 s (duplex) or 45 s (simplex) is detected (see § 2.4.2 to 2.4.4.2). When this indication is registered at the coast station, the following action should take place: call timing is stopped; the line is cleared and disconnected from the radio circuit; the coast station transmits an end of call DSC call whose format is the same as that of the acknowledgement described in § 2.5.2 except that the end of sequence signal should be 127; the coast station s carrier is removed from the working channel.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
427
The radio channel is now free to handle other traffic. 2.5.6 If the ship station detects the absence of the coast station s carrier for a period greater than 5 s, then it should cease to transmit on the working channel. If further calls are required by the ship then a new call should be initiated on the DSC calling channel.
3.
Operational procedures in the shore-to-ship direction
3.1
Coast station initiates call
3.1.1 The equipment of a VHF coast station should provide the capability to distinguish the ship s identity, in accordance with Recommendation ITU-R M.585, when transmitted from the PSTN. 3.1.2 When receiving a call request from the PSTN and if there is a working channel available, the coast station equipment should radiate an engaged channel signal on the coast station transmit frequency of that working channel. 3.1.3 If the coast station cannot comply immediately with the call request because no working channel is available, then it should transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber. 3.1.4 If there is a working channel available and a ship s identity is detected in accordance with § 3.1.1, the coast station should transmit a calling sequence on the DSC calling channel in accordance with the following conditions: the format specifier will be 123 (automatic/semi-automatic service), the address will be that of the ship, the category will be 100 (routine), the self-identification will be that of the coast station, the first telecommand will be 101 (duplex F3E/G3E) or 100 (simplex F3E/G3E) or 106 (data) (see Note 1) and second telecommand as appropriate, the working channel number will be included, the PSTN subscriber number may follow if known, the end of sequence signal will be RQ. Note 1 Duplex mode of operation should be used for data communications. 3.1.5 If the coast station has not received an error-free acknowledgement from the called ship station (see § 3.2) within 5 s, the calling sequence should be repeated automatically. If an error-free acknowledgement of the repeated call is not received within the following 5 s, the call is regarded as not started. The engaged channel signal is then removed and a busy signal is transmitted to the calling subscriber for 5 s, after which the line is cleared.
428
3.2
Maritime Manual
Ship station acknowledgement
3.2.1 On receipt of an error-free calling sequence in accordance with § 3.1.4, the ship station should, within 3 s of receiving it, automatically initiate the transmission of an acknowledgement sequence on the DSC calling channel. 3.2.2 If the ship station can comply immediately with the call request, the acknowledgement sequence should contain the same information as in the call request (§ 3.1.4), with the following exceptions: the address will be that of the coast station, the self-identification will be that of the ship, the first and second telecommands will be as appropriate, the end of sequence signal will be BQ. 3.2.3 If the ship station cannot comply immediately with the call request, the acknowledgement sequence should be as in § 3.2.2, except that the first telecommand should be 104 (unable to comply) and the second telecommand should be as appropriate to indicate the reason for being unable to comply or symbol No. 126. 3.2.4 If the coast station receives an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.2 then it should transmit a ringing signal to the calling subscriber. 3.2.5 If the coast station receives an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.3 then it should remove the engaged channel signal and transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber for 5 s and then release the line.
3.3
Procedures subsequent to the exchange of initial DSC calls
3.3.1 If the ship station transmitted an acknowledgement in accordance with § 3.2.2 then it should continue to listen to the calling channel for a further 5 s, and when the ship subscriber indicates that he is able to accept the call (e.g. by lifting the handset) it should change to the working channel and transmit a carrier as described in § 2.2.5. A DSC call, if contained within that transmission, should be in accordance with § 3.2.2. If a further calling sequence in accordance with § 3.1.4 is received within this 5 s period, the acknowledgement should be repeated. If the ship subscriber does not accept the call within 1 min then the call should be considered as not started and the procedures described in § 2.4.2 to 2.5.5 applied. 3.3.2 If the coast station does not receive a transmission on the working channel within 1 min, the call is regarded as not started, the carrier is removed from the working channel, and a busy signal is transmitted to the calling subscriber for 5 s, after which the PSTN subscriber is disconnected from the coast station.
3.4
Call connection
The coast station, on receipt of a transmission on the working channel in accordance with § 3.3.1, should stop transmitting the ringing signal to the calling subscriber and begin timing the call.
429
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
3.5
Call completion
The procedures for completion of the call should be as described in § 2.5, except that indication of chargeable duration of the call in the end of call sequence to the ship may be omitted.
APPENDIX 1* Timing diagram of call set-up sequences when the ship station initiates the call Coast station able to comply Time (s)
Ship
Coast station unable to comply (busy) Coast station
Ship
Coast station
0
Initiate call (§ 2.1.2)
Initiate call (§ 2.1.2)
1
....................
Receive call and radiate engaged channel signal (§ 2.2.2)
Receive call
4
....................
Initiate acknowledgement (able) (§ 2.2.2)
Initiate acknowledgement (unable) (§ 2.2.3 and 2.2.4) Store ship ID and telephone number (§ 2.3.2.1) if ring back procedure
5
Receive acknowledgement (§ 2.2.5) {or initiate 2nd call (§ 2.1.3)}
2 3
6
Receive acknowledgement and continue monitoring DSC channel (§ 2.2.4) {or initiate 2nd call (§ 2.1.3)}
....................
{Receive 2nd call (and radiate engaged channel signal if 1st call not received § 2.2.2)}
{Receive 2nd call}
....................
{Initiate acknowledgement due to 2nd call (§ 2.3.1.2 and § 2.2.2)}
{Initiate acknowledgement due to 2nd call (§ 2.3.1.2, § 2.2.2.3 and § 2.2.2.4)}
7 8 9
_______________ * This timing diagram is only applicable to fully automated ship station equipment that operate with coast stations employing DSC signalling on the working channels.
430
Maritime Manual
Coast station able to comply Time (s)
Ship
10
Transmit carrier and DSC call on working channel (§ 2.2.5) {or receive 2nd acknowledgement}
11
....................
Coast station unable to comply (busy) Coast station
Ship
Coast station
{Receive 2nd acknowledgement and continue monitoring DSC channel (§ 2.2.6)} Recognize DSC call then dial (§ 2.3.1.1)
12 13 14
<
15
{If not already done so, transmit carrier and DSC call on working channel (§ 2.2.5)}
16
....................
{If not already done so, recognize DSC call then dial (§ 2.3.1.1)}
17
....................
{If no DSC call recognized, remove engaged channel signal and delete calling record (§ 2.3.1.2)}
15 min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.........................................
If working channel available then radiate engaged channel signal on working channel and transmit DSC ringback call (§ 2.3.2.2)
Receive ring-back call
6 7.........................................
Transmit ring-back acknowledgement (§ 2.3.2.4)
8...............................................................
Receive ring-back acknowledgement
9...............................................................
{Initiate 2nd ring-back call (§ 2.3.2.3)}
10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
{Receive 2nd ringback call}
11 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmit carrier and DSC call on working channel {and transmit acknowledgement due to 2nd call} (§ 2.3.2.5)
431
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2 Coast station able to comply Time (s)
Ship
Coast station unable to comply (busy) Coast station
Ship
Coast station
13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recognize DSC call then dial (§ 2.3.2.6) {and receive 2nd ring-back acknowledgement}
14 15 16 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
{If not already done so, transmit carrier and DSC call on working channel due to 2nd call (§ 2.3.2.5)}
18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
{If not already done so recognize DSC call then dial (§ 2.3.2.6) or, if no DSC call and acknowledgement, remove engaged channel signals and clear call details (§ 2.3.2.3)}
Timing diagram of call set-up sequences when the coast station initiates the call Time
Coast station
Ship station
(s) 0
Transmit DSC call on calling channel (§ 3.1.4) and engaged channel signal on the reserved working channel (§ 3.1.2)
1
...........................................
Receive call on calling channel (§ 3.2.1)
4
...........................................
Initiate acknowledgement able (§ 3.2.2) or unable (§ 3.2.3)
5
Receive acknowledgement on calling channel If able, transmit ringing signal to the calling subscriber (§ 3.2.4) If unable, remove the engaged channel signal and transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber (§ 3.2.5)
6
{Transmit 2nd call if error-free acknowledgement not received (§ 3.1.5)}
7
...........................................
{Receive 2nd call (§ 3.3.1)}
10
...........................................
{Transmit 2nd acknowledgement (§ 3.3.1)}
11
{Receive 2nd acknowledgement (§ 3.3.1)} If error-free acknowledgement still not received, remove the engaged channel signal and transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber (§ 3.2.5)
432 Time
Maritime Manual Coast station
Ship station
(s) Lift handset and transmit within 5 s on working channel (§ 3.3.1)
71 76
Receive call on working channel (§ 3.4). Connect radio path to the calling subscriber. If no call received, remove the engaged channel signal, transmit a busy signal to the calling subscriber and release the line (§ 3.3.2)
Note 1 – Timing diagram assumes 1 s between call initiation and reception and assumes maximum timing between calls and acknowledgements. Note 2 Sequences in parentheses { . . . } are only applicable if repeat calls or acknowledgements are necessary.
ANNEX 2
Technical characteristics
1.
Ship station
1.1 The DSC equipment should meet the VHF technical characteristics detailed in Recommendation ITU-R M.493, Annexes 1 or 2. This equipment need not necessarily provide all combinations of codes, e.g. it may be simplified DSC equipment (with no distress functions), but it must provide all the necessary formats for automatic/semi-automatic VHF DSC signalling. 1.2 The VHF transceiver should be capable of operating on all public correspondence working channels listed in RR Appendix 18 and on the DSC calling channel and be capable of automatic channel selection and carrier transmission under control of the DSC equipment. 1.3 The equipment should be capable of sensing the presence of a signal on the DSC calling channel (see RR Appendix 19). 1.4 After initiation of a DSC call, the equipment should be capable of automatic prevention of the transmission of that call, when the calling channel is occupied by calls (see RR Appendix 19). 1.5 The equipment should be capable of operating in accordance with the operational procedures described in Annex 1.
2.
Coast station
2.1 The DSC equipment should meet the VHF technical characteristics detailed in Recommendation ITU-R M.493, Annex 1. The installation should be capable of receiving and transmitting all types of VHF DSC calls on the DSC calling channel.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.689-2
433
2.2 The VHF installation should be capable of operating in full duplex mode on the coast station s designated public correspondence working channels and in simplex mode on the DSC calling channel. 2.3 After initiation of a DSC call, the equipment should be capable of automatic prevention of the transmission of that call when the calling channel is occupied by calls (see RR Appendix 19). 2.4 The coast station equipment should be capable of detecting the presence of a DSC call on a working channel and also the line subscriber s off-hook and on-hook conditions. 2.5 The coast station should be capable of radiating an engaged channel signal on any of its working channels which should be dissimilar from any present line signalling tones. 2.6 The equipment should be capable of operating in accordance with the operational procedures described in Annex 1.
434
Maritime Manual
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R SM.1138-2 Determination of necessary bandwidths including examples for their calculation and associated examples for the designation of emissions (1995-2007-2008)
Annex 1 Determination of necessary bandwidths, including examples for their calculation and associated examples for the designation of emissions 1 The necessary bandwidth is not the only characteristic of an emission to be considered in evaluating the interference that may be caused by that emission. 2
In the formulation of the table, the following terms have been employed: Bn: necessary bandwidth (Hz) B: modulation rate (Bd) N: maximum possible number of black plus white elements to be transmitted per second, in facsimile M: maximum modulation frequency (Hz) C: sub-carrier frequency (Hz) D: peak deviation, i.e. half the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the instantaneous frequency. The instantaneous frequency (Hz) is the time rate of change in phase (rad) divided by 2 t:
pulse duration (s) at half-amplitude
tr: pulse rise time (s) between 10% and 90% amplitude K: an overall numerical factor which varies according to the emission and which depends upon the allowable signal distortion. In the case of orthogonal frequency division multiplexed multi-carrier signal, K is the number of active sub-carriers as defined by equation (52) in Recommendation ITU-R SM.328 Nc: number of baseband channels in radio systems employing multichannel multiplexing
435
Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2
fp: continuity pilot sub-carrier frequency (Hz) (continuous signal utilized to verify performance of frequency-division multiplex systems) Ns: frequency separation between two sub-carriers (kHz). Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
I. NO MODULATING SIGNAL Continuous wave emission
NONE II. AMPLITUDE MODULATION 1. Signal with quantized or digital information Bn = BK K = 5 for fading circuits K = 3 for non-fading circuits
25 words per minute B = 20, K = 5 Bandwidth: 100 Hz
100HA1AAN
Telegraphy by on-off keying of a tone modulated carrier, Morse code
Bn = BK + 2M K = 5 for fading circuits K = 3 for non-fading circuits
25 words per minute B = 20, M = 1 000, K = 5 Bandwidth: 2 100 Hz = 2.1 kHz
2K10A2AAN
Selective calling signal using sequential single frequency code, singlesideband full carrier
Bn = M
Maximum code frequency is: 2 110 Hz M = 2 110 Bandwidth: 2 110 Hz = 2.11 kHz
Direct-printing telegraphy using a frequency shifted modulating sub-carrier, with error-correction, single-sideband, suppressed carrier (single channel)
Bn = 2M + 2DK B M 2
B = 50 D = 35 Hz (70 Hz shift) K = 1.2 Bandwidth: 134 Hz
Telegraphy, multichannel with voice frequency, error-correction, some channels are timedivision multiplexed, single-sideband, reduced carrier
Bn = highest central frequency + M + DK B M 2
15 channels; highest central frequency is: 2 805 Hz B = 100 D = 42.5 Hz (85 Hz shift) K = 0.7 Bandwidth: 2 885 Hz = 2.885 kHz
Continuous wave telegraphy, Morse code
2K11H2BFN
134HJ2BCN
2K89R7BCW
2. Telephony (commercial quality) Telephony, double-sideband (single channel)
Bn = 2M
M = 3 000 Bandwidth: 6 000 Hz = 6 kHz
6K00A3EJN
436
Maritime Manual Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
2. Telephony (commercial quality) Telephony, singlesideband, full carrier (single channel)
Bn = M
M = 3 000 Bandwidth: 3 000 Hz = 3 kHz
Telephony, singlesideband, suppressed carrier (single channel)
Bn = M lowest modulation frequency
M = 3 000 lowest modulation frequency = 300 Hz Bandwidth: 2 700 Hz = 2.7 kHz
Telephony with separate frequency modulated signal to control the level of demodulated speech signal, single-sideband, reduced carrier (Lincompex) (single channel)
Bn = M
Telephony with privacy, singlesideband, suppressed carrier (two or more channels)
Bn = Nc M lowest modulation frequency in the lowest channel
Telephony, independent sideband (two or more channels)
Bn = sum of M for each sideband
Maximum control frequency = 2 990 Hz M = 2 990 Bandwidth: 2 990 Hz = 2.99 kHz
Nc = 2 M = 3 000 lowest modulation frequency = 250 Hz Bandwidth: 5 750 Hz = 5.75 kHz 2 channels M = 3 000 Bandwidth: 6 000 Hz = 6 kHz
3K00H3EJN
2K70J3EJN
2K99R3ELN
5K75J8EKF
6K00B8EJN
3. Sound broadcasting Sound broadcasting, double-sideband
Bn = 2M M may vary between 4 000 and 10 000 depending on the quality desired
Speech and music M = 4 000 Bandwidth: 8 000 Hz = 8 kHz
8K00A3EGN
Sound broadcasting, single-sideband, reduced carrier (single channel)
Bn = M M may vary between 4 000 and 10 000 depending on the quality desired
Speech and music M = 4 000 Bandwidth: 4 000 Hz = 4 kHz
4K00R3EGN
Sound broadcasting, single-sideband, suppressed carrier
Bn = M lowest modulation frequency
Speech and music M = 4 500 lowest modulation frequency = 50 Hz Bandwidth: 4 450 Hz = 4.45 kHz
4K45J3EGN
437
Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2 Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
4. Television Television, vision and sound
Refer to relevant ITU-R documents for the bandwidths of the commonly used television systems
Number of lines: 625 Nominal video bandwidth 5 MHz Sound carrier relative to video carrier: 5.5 MHz Total vision Bandwidth: 6.25 MHz FM sound bandwidth including guardbands: 750 kHz RF channel Bandwidth: 7 MHz
6M25C3F -750KF3EGN
5. Facsimile Analogue facsimile by sub-carrier frequency modulation of a singlesideband emission with reduced carrier, monochrome
Analogue facsimile; frequency modulation of an audio frequency sub-carrier which modulates the main carrier, single-sideband suppressed carrier
Bn = C +
N + DK 2
K = 1.1 (typically)
N = 1 100 corresponding to an index of cooperation of 352 and a cycler rotation speed of 60 rpm. Index of cooperation is the product of the drum diameter and number of lines per unit length. C = 1 900 D = 400 Hz Bandwidth: 2 890 Hz = 2.89 kHz N = 1 100 D = 400 Hz Bandwidth: 1 980 Hz = 1.98 kHz
Bn = 2M + 2DK N M= 2 K = 1.1 (typically)
2K89R3CMN
1K98J3C --
6. Composite emissions Double-sideband, television relay
Double-sideband radio-relay system, frequency division multiplex
Bn
Bn
2C
2M
2M
2D
Video limited to 5 MHz, audio on 6.5 MHz, frequency modulated sub-carrier, sub-carrier deviation 50 kHz: C 6.5 106 D 50 103 Hz M 15 000 Bandwidth: 13.13 106 Hz 13.13 MHz 10 voice channels occupying baseband between 1 kHz and 164 kHz M 164 000 Bandwidth: 328 000 Hz 328 kHz
13M1A8W --
328KA8E --
438
Maritime Manual Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
6. Composite emissions Double-sideband emission of VOR with voice (VOR: VHF omnidirectional radio range)
Independent sidebands; several telegraph channels with errorcorrection together with several telephone channels with privacy; frequency division multiplex
Bn 2Cmax 2DK K 1 (typically)
2M
Bn sum of M for each sideband
The main carrier is modulated by: a 30 Hz sub-carrier a carrier resulting from a 9 960 Hz tone frequency modulated by a 30 Hz tone a telephone channel a 1 020 Hz keyed tone for continual Morse identification Cmax 9 960 M 30 D 480 Hz Bandwidth: 20 940 Hz 20.94 kHz Normally composite systems are operated in accordance with standardized channel arrangements (e.g. Rec. ITU-R F.348). 3 telephone channels and 15 telegraphy channels require the bandwidth: 12 000 Hz 12 kHz
20K9A9WWF
12K0B9WWF
7. Standard frequency and time signals 7.1 High frequency (voice) Voice announcements, double-sideband
Bn
Speech M = 4 000 Bandwidth: 8 000 Hz = 8 kHz
2M
8K00A3XGN
7.2. High frequency (time code) Time code as telegraphy
Bn
BK
2M
B = 1/s M=1 K=5 Bandwidth: 7 Hz
7H00A2XAN
7.3. Low frequency (time code) Time code as telegraphy
Bn
BK
2M
B = 1/s M=1 K=3 Bandwidth: 5 Hz
5H00A2XAN
439
Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2 Description of emission
Necessary bandwidth Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
III-A. FREQUENCY MODULATION 1. Signal with quantized or digital information Telegraphy without error-correction (single channel)
Bn = 2M + 2DK B M 2 K 1.2 (typically)
B 100 D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift) Bandwidth: 304 Hz
304HF1BBN
Telegraphy, narrowband direct-printing with error-correction (single channel)
Bn = 2M + 2DK B M 2 K 1.2 (typically)
B 100 D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift) Bandwidth: 304 Hz
304HF1BCN
Selective calling signal
Bn = 2M + 2DK B M 2 K 1.2 (typically)
B 100 D 85 Hz (170 Hz shift) Bandwidth: 304 Hz
304HF1BCN
Bn = 2M + 2DK B: modulation rate (Bd) of the faster channel. If the channels are synchronized: B M (otherwise, 2 M 2B) K 1.1 (typically)
Spacing between adjacent frequencies 400 Hz Synchronized channels B 100 M 50 D 600 Hz Bandwidth: 1 420 Hz 1.42 kHz
1K42F7BDX
Four-frequency duplex telegraphy
2. Telephony (commercial quality) Commercial telephony
Bn = 2M + 2DK K 1 (typically, but under certain conditions a higher value of K may be necessary)
For an average case of commercial telephony, D 5 000 Hz M 3 000 Bandwidth: 16 000 Hz 16 kHz
16K0F3EJN
3. Sound broadcasting Sound broadcasting
Bn = 2M + 2DK K 1 (typically)
Monaural D 75 000 Hz M 15 000 Bandwidth: 180 000 Hz
180 kHz
180KF3EGN
440
Maritime Manual Description of emission
Necessary bandwidth Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
4. Facsimile Facsimile by direct frequency modulation of the carrier; black and white
Bn = 2M + 2DK N M 2 K 1.1 (typically)
N 1 100 elements/s D 400 Hz Bandwidth: 1 980 Hz
1.98 kHz
1K98F1C --
Analogue facsimile
Bn = 2M + 2DK N M 2 K 1.1 (typically)
N 1 100 elements/s D 400 Hz Bandwidth: 1 980 Hz
1.98 kHz
1K98F3C --
5. Composite emissions (see Table III-B) Radio-relay system, frequency division multiplex
Radio-relay system, frequency division multiplex
Bn 2fp 2DK K 1 (typically)
Bn 2M 2DK K 1 (typically)
60 telephone channels occupying baseband between 60 kHz and 300 kHz; r.m.s. per-channel deviation: 200 kHz; continuity pilot at 331 kHz produces 100 kHz r.m.s. deviation of main carrier. D 200 103 3.76 2.02 1.52 106 Hz fp 0.331 106 Hz Bandwidth: 3.702 106 Hz 3.702 MHz 960 telephone channels occupying baseband between 60 kHz and 4 028 kHz; r.m.s. per-channel deviation: 200 kHz; continuity pilot at 4 715 kHz produces 140 kHz r.m.s. deviation of main carrier. D 200 103 3.76 5.5 4.13 106 Hz M 4.028 106 fp 4.715 106 (2M 2DK) 2 fp Bandwidth: 16.32 106 Hz 16.32 MHz
3M70F8EJF
16M3F8EJF
441
Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2 Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
5. Composite emissions (see Table III-B) Radio-relay system, frequency division multiplex
Stereophonic sound broadcasting with multiplexed subsidiary telephony sub-carrier
Bn
2fp
Bn 2M 2DK K 1 (typically)
600 telephone channels occupying baseband between 60 kHz and 2 540 kHz; r.m.s. per-channel deviation: 200 kHz; continuity pilot at 8 500 kHz produces 140 kHz r.m.s. deviation of main carrier. D 200 103 3.76 4.36 3.28 106 Hz M 2.54 106 K 1 fp 8.5 106 (2M 2DK) 2 fp Bandwidth: 17 106 Hz 17 MHz Pilot tone system; M 75 000 D 75 000 Hz Bandwidth: 300 000 Hz
300 kHz
17M0F8EJF
300KF8EHF
442
Maritime Manual III-B. MULTIPLYING FACTORS FOR USE IN COMPUTING D, PEAK FREQUENCY DEVIATION, IN FM FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEX (FM-FDM) MULTI-CHANNEL EMISSSIONS
For FM-FDM systems the necessary bandwidth is: Bn
2M
2DK
The value of D, or peak frequency deviation, in these formulae for Bn is calculated by multiplying the r.m.s. value of per-channel deviation by the appropriate multiplying factor shown below. In the case where a continuity pilot of frequency fp exists above the maximum modulation frequency M, the general formula becomes: 2fp
Bn
2DK
In the case where the modulation index of the main carrier produced by the pilot is less than 0.25, and the rms frequency deviation of the main carrier produced by the pilot is less than or equal to 70% of the r.m.s. value of per-channel deviation, the general formula becomes either: Bn = 2fp
or
Bn = 2M
2DK
whichever if greater. Multiplying factor(1) Number of telephone channels Nc
3
Nc
12
12
Nc
60
(Peak factor ) antilog
4.47 antilog
value in dB above modulation reference level 20
a value in dB specified by the equipment manufacturer or station licensee, subject to administration approval 20
3.76 antilog
2.6 2 log N c 20
Multiplying factor(2) Number of telephone channels Nc 60
Nc
Nc
240
240
( Peak factor ) antilog
value in dB above modulation reference level 20
3.76 antilog
3.76 antilog
1 4 log N c 20 15 10 log N c 20
(1)
In the above chart, the multipliers 3.76 and 4.47 correspond to peak factors of 11.5 and 13.0 dB, respectively.
(2)
In the above chart, the multipliers 3.76 correspond to peak factors of 11.5 dB.
443
Part C – Rec. ITU-R SM.1138-2
Necessary bandwidth
Description of emission
Formula
Sample calculation
Designation of emission
IV. PULSE MODULATION 1. Radar Unmodulated pulse emission
2K t K depends upon the ratio of pulse duration to pulse rise time. Its value usually falls between 1 and 10 and in many cases it does not need to exceed 6 Bn
Primary radar range resolution 150 m K 1.5 (triangular pulse where t ~ tr, only components down to 27 dB from the strongest are considered) Then: 2
t
(range resolution) velocity of light
2
150
3
108
1
10 6 s
Bandwidth: 3
3M00P0NAN 6
10 Hz
3 MHz
2. Composite emissions Radio-relay system
Bn K
2K t 1.6
Pulse position modulated by 36 voice channel baseband; pulse width at half amplitude 0.4 s Bandwidth: 8 106 Hz 8 MHz (Bandwidth independent of the number of voice channels)
8M00M7EJT
3. Standard frequency and time signals 3.1 High frequency (tone bursts) Ticks used for epoch measurement
Bn = 2/tr
tr = 1 ms Bandwidth: 2 000 Hz = 2 kHz
2K00K2XAN
3.2 Low frequency (time code) Time code leading edge used for epoch measurement
Bn = 2/tr
tr = 1 ms Bandwidth = 2 000 Hz = 2 kHz
2K00K2XAN
V. MISCELLANEOUS Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or coded OFDM (COFDM)
Bn = Ns·K
53 active sub-carriers are used, each spaced 312.5 kHz apart (K = 53 and Ns = 312.5 kHz). Data sub-carriers can be BPSK, QPSK, QAM modulated Bn = 312.5 kHz × 53 = 16.6 MHz
16M6W7D
444
Maritime Manual
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1467-1 Prediction of sea area A2 and NAVTEX ranges and protection of the A2 global maritime distress and safety system distress watch channel (Question ITU-R 92/8) (2000-2006)
Annex 1 Prediction of A2 and NAVTEX ranges 1
Overview
In order to establish a new A2 sea area it is necessary to account for variations in the propagation conditions. A2 coverage is by groundwave, which is largely stable, enabling the extent of the service area to be confirmed by measurement, as is recommended by the IMO, before committing capital expenditure. The design criteria to be used for establishing A2 and NAVTEX sea areas are defined by the IMO in Annex 3 to their Resolution A.801(19).
2
Prediction of A2 and NAVTEX ranges
2.1
IMO performance criteria
The criteria developed by the IMO for determination of A2 and NAVTEX ranges are reproduced in Table 1 and should be used in the determination of ranges for A2 and NAVTEX services.
445
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
TABLE 1 Performance criteria for A2 and NAVTEX transmissions Distress channel
Radiotelephony
DSC
ARQ NBDP
NAVTEX
2 182
2 187.5
2 174.50
490 and 518
Frequency (kHz) Bandwidth (Hz) Propagation
3 000
300
300
300
Groundwave
Groundwave
Groundwave
Groundwave
Ship s power (W)
60
60
60
Ship s antenna efficiency (%)
25
25
25
25
RF full bandwidth signal/ noise ratio (S/N) (dB)
9
12
18 min(1)
8
Mean Tx power below peak (dB)
8
0
0
0
Fading margin (dB)
3
Not stated
IMO reference for above
Res. A.801(19)
Res. A.804(19)
Rec. ITU-R F.339
Res. A.801(19)
Availability required (%)
95(2)
Not stated
Not stated
90
DSC:
digital selective calling
NBDP:
narrow-band direct printing
3
(1)
Stated as 43 dB(Hz) under stable and 52 dB(Hz) under fading conditions with 90% traffic efficiency.
(2)
Availability can be relaxed to 90% in cases where the noise data used or performance achieved can be proven by measurement.
2.2
Achieving the required quality of signal
2.2.1
The effect of received noise
On a very quiet site, man-made noise dominates below 4 MHz and galactic noise above. These combine, at the receive antenna with seasonal levels of atmospheric noise, and also transmitter sideband noise, as shown in Fig. 1. Recommendation ITU-R P.372 should be used to account for atmospheric and normal man-made noise levels.
446
Maritime Manual
Paragraph 3.5 should be used to ensure that the levels of transmitter sideband noise and intermodulation products reaching the receive antenna by groundwave do not exceed the tolerable limit for protection of the A2 DSC watch frequency. 2.2.2
C/N required for single sideband (SSB) radiotelephony
In order to maintain the intelligibility of a received SSB radiotelephony signal it is necessary to provide the operator with a minimum AF signal/noise plus distortion ratio (SINAD), which in turn defines the RF C/N required at the receive antenna. The capture range for an A2 receive system should be calculated assuming an RF C/N density figure of 52 dB(Hz) at the shore-based receive antenna. This will ensure that a ship s transmitter operating with a peak-to-mean ratio of 8 dB provides the shore-based operator with a 9 dB S/N in a 3 000 Hz bandwidth, as stipulated by the IMO. The receive antenna and multicoupler should be designed to offer good linearity to minimize the risk of intermodulation products being generated on the watch frequencies. With good electronic design the noise generated within the receive system itself can be ignored below 3 MHz. 2.2.3
C/N required for NAVTEX broadcasts
The transmit range for NAVTEX broadcasts should be calculated assuming an RF C/N density figure of 35 dB(Hz) at the ship s antenna. This will ensure that the NAVTEX receiver is provided with an RF S/N of 8 dB in a 300 Hz bandwidth.
447
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
2.3
Accounting for ships topside noise
Topside noise refers to the environmental noise generated by ship-borne machinery, and other sources, and a figure is required for entry into NOISEDAT and other programs. Table 2 shows a number of published figures, and for reference purposes includes galactic and quasi-minimum noise levels, which is accepted as representing the best achievable noise floor. TABLE 2 Naval environmental categories for topside noise Environmental category
dB below 1 W ref. 3 MHz
DOD Cat 1 mobile platform
137.0
IPS ship (ASAPS and GWPS)
142.0
AGARD ship
148.0
Quasi-minimum noise
156.7
Noise galactic (Rec. ITU-R P.372)
163.6
ASAPS:
advanced stand alone prediction system
GWPS:
groundwave prediction system
The Australian Department of Defence (DOD) and Advisory Group for Aeronautical Research and Development (AGARD) have both published relevant figures. The AGARD figure represents a naval vessel under normal cruise conditions, whilst the DOD figure represents the maximum level under battle conditions with all machinery in operation. The levels of noise to be expected on commercial vessels can be expected to range between these figures. The IPS Radio and Space Services (IPS) of the Australian Department of Industry have adopted an intermediate figure in their GWPS, which is well accepted as representing the noise level encountered on container vessels, pleasure cruisers, and utility ships. This figure, 142 dBW, should be used in prediction of coverage area of shore-based GMDSS transmitters. 2.4
Determination of external noise factor, Fa, for the required availability
An A2 area in the GMDSS is defined as the area within which ship stations can alert shore stations by using DSC on MF and communicate with the shore stations using MF radiotelephony (class of emission J3E). The communications ranges for voice signals are shorter than for DSC and the IMO criteria for determination of A2 areas should therefore be based on the communication of voice signals.
448
Maritime Manual
The range achieved by a transmitter or a receiver depends upon the radiated power, the propagation loss, and the ability of the receiver to discriminate between the wanted signal and the unwanted noise or interference. The level of each component in the received signal will drift as the propagation conditions change with time, and therefore arrive at the receive antenna in varying proportions. The final system design should therefore ensure that the level of the signal will exceed the level of the noise by an adequate amount for an adequate proportion of the time. This proportion is called the availability, and is determined by quantifying the behaviour of the signal and the noise with time as shown in Fig. 2.
Equation (1) should be used to calculate an upper value Fa for the external noise factor which corresponds to the required availability:
Fa
Fam
D t2
D s2
dB above k T0 B
(1)
449
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
where: Fam :
median external noise factor
Ds :
variation in signal level expected for the required time percentage, to which is ascribed the figure of 3 dB specified by the IMO as fading margin
Dt :
variation in noise level expected for the required percentage of time.
90% availability is required for NAVTEX broadcasts, and so the upper decile value Du should be substituted for Dt in equation (1). 95% availability is required for A2 coverage. To achieve this, substitute Dt = Du in equation (1).
3 dB
First Fam and Du should be determined by running the Noise1 program, which comes with the ITU NOISEDAT package. The program requests seasons required, site location, frequency, level or category of man-made noise, and type of data output required (select Fa), local mean time, and statistical parameters required (select overall median). For prediction of external noise factor on ship stations, the reference figure of 142 dBW should be used to account for topside noise, if no better data is available. The data is presented in seasonal blocks as shown in Table 3, the data fields being explained in Table 4. TABLE 3 Sample NOISEDAT output LAT
51.45,
WINTER
LONG FMHZ
57.56,
2.182,
DUMMY SITE
QUIET RURAL NOISE OVERALL NOISE
TIME BLOCK
ATMO
GAL
MANMADE
OVERALL
DL
DU
SL
SM
SU
0000-0400
59.3
44.2
43.9
59.6
7.2
9.2
2.3
3.5
2.6
0400-0800
54.0
44.2
43.9
54.5
4.1
1.9
3.2
3.4
2.7
0800-1200
28.2
44.2
43.9
45.9
4.3
9.0
2.2
3.4
1.3
1200-1600
31.0
44.2
43.9
46.0
4.2
8.9
2.2
3.3
1.3
1600-2000
53.5
44.2
43.9
53.9
10.4
12.2
3.6
3.9
2.9
2000-2400
54.3
44.2
43.9
55.2
7.2
9.2
2.3
3.7
2.6
450
Maritime Manual
TABLE 4 Fields presented for use in the NOISEDAT output Field
Symbol
Description
TIME BLOCK
Time block during which original measurements were made
ATMO
Level of atmospheric component
GAL
Level of galactic component
MANMADE
Level of man-made component
OVERALL
Fam
Median level of Fa
DL
Dl
Lower decile of deviation from median
DU
Du
Upper decile of deviation from median
SL
Dl
Standard deviation of Dl
SM
Fam
Standard deviation of Fam
SU
Du
Standard deviation of Du
The median and upper values for Fa should be organized as shown in Table 5, and the seasonal spread in the value of Fa for the required availability should be plotted as a bar graph in Fig. 3. This presentation enables the process to be reviewed if any anomalies occur.
TABLE 5 External noise factor, Fa Fa for required availability Median value, Fam
Fam
D2t
D2s
Time block
Winter
Spring
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
Summer
Autumn
0000-0400
59.6
55.9
52
52.2
71.7
65.2
60.2
60.9
0400-0800
54.5
43.7
45.9
46
66.8
56.2
55.6
59.5
0800-1200
45.9
45.9
45.8
45.9
55.4
55.4
55.3
55.4
1200-1600
46
41.9
37.7
45.8
55.4
54.8
52.5
55.7
1600-2000
53.9
43.2
43.6
43.9
66.5
59.7
59.5
58.2
2000-2400
55.2
55
54.4
55.8
64.9
63.2
61.4
64.3
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
451
IMO Resolution A.801(19) states Administrations should determine time-periods and seasons appropriate to their geographic area based on prevailing noise levels . 2.5
Accounting for propagation by groundwave
2.5.1
Introduction
Horizontally polarized waves will not propagate along the surface of normal ground, as the electric vector runs tangential to the surface causing a current to flow, which results in absorption and heavy transmission losses. For this reason groundwaves have to be vertically polarized, and can only be generated by a vertical antenna, or to a limited extent by an antenna which is not perfectly horizontal, either because one end is higher than the other, or because the elements droop. The prime mover for groundwave propagation is the cymomotive force (c.m.f.) exerted by the transmit antenna. In free space, power flux-density (W/m2) decreases inversely with the square of distance, and so the field strength decreases inversely with distance and has a value equal to the product of c.m.f. and distance. The c.m.f. is synonymous with the effective monopole radiated power (e.m.r.p.), which is the power (kW) which
452
Maritime Manual
would have to be fed into a short lossless monopole to achieve the same c.m.f., and in dB terms the two have the same value. A short lossless monopole on a perfect ground fed with 1 kW has a c.m.f. of 300 V, which is the reference used in the groundwave curves given in Recommendation ITU-R P.368. Subsequent calculation of the transmitter power required should take account of the following losses associated with the antenna: the transmitter output power may be de-rated by an antenna offering a poor match; power will be absorbed by the ground and the feeder; whereas an ideal monopole will produce maximum radiation along the ground, the radiation from a real antenna will peak a few degrees above the ground and tuck in to a lower value along the ground. 2.5.2
Proof of performance tests
IMO Resolution A.801(19) stipulates that the range of the A2 sea area should be verified by field strength measurement. The c.m.f. of any shore-based transmitter and antenna should therefore be determined by operating the transmitter continuously at peak power, and measuring the resulting field strength using a portable field strength meter. This should be done on an arc around the station with an approximate radius of 1 km in the required directions of propagation. The precise location of the antenna and each measurement point should be fixed using a GPS navigator. The c.m.f. on each bearing is then the product of field strength (mV/m) and range (km) for each measurement point. The antenna drive point current should also be recorded before and after the measurement. The procedures in this Recommendation should be used by administrations to determine the c.m.f. required to establish coverage, which should then be demonstrated by the equipment supplier, effectively eliminating uncertainties in performance due to local ground conditions, and the antenna and station earthing system. 2.5.3
Determination of extent of A2 service area
The extent of the A2 service area is determined by the range over which SSB communication is effective at 2 182 kHz between ship and shore. The ship is considered to be fitted with a 60 W transmitter, feeding a short monopole antenna with an efficiency of 25%, as given in Table 1. The range is fixed by the maximum distance at which the ship can be from the shore station to produce an S/N of 9 dB in a 3 kHz bandwidth out of the receive antenna at the shore station. The shore transmit station must transmit sufficient power to return the same S/N at the output of the ship s receive antenna.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
453
The range in both directions depends upon the sensitivity of the receive antenna, which depends upon the levels of natural and man-made noise present, and the ability of the antenna to discriminate between the wanted signal and the unwanted radiated noise. Although some improvement can be achieved by using a directional receive antenna, this often proves to be uneconomic and impractical, and is outside the scope of this Recommendation. It will be assumed that a short whip antenna is used for reception, that it has been installed on clear ground on an earth mat, and that it is regularly maintained to avoid the effects of corrosion. The noise factor of the receive system connected to the antenna can be ignored at 2 182 kHz. 2.5.3.1
Determination of shore-based receive range
The IMO minimum range thus achieved should be determined for all seasonal values of Fa using the 15 W curve in Fig. 4. Additional curves have been included to demonstrate the benefit of vessels using higher transmit powers.
454
2.5.3.2
Maritime Manual
Determination of shore-based transmit power required
Effective two-way SSB radiotelephony requires matched conditions in both directions. Since the transmission loss is the same in both directions the power required to return a call depends primarily upon the difference in noise levels at each end, and also the difference in transmit antenna efficiency. However the following additional factors have a direct impact on the power to be transmitted by the shore station: peaks and troughs in the radiation pattern of the receive antenna on the ship, due to interaction with the ship s hull; losses due to the condition of the ship s receive antenna on the ship. Tests on scale models of a number of vessels indicate that variability in gain of receive antennas is typically 5 dB. Furthermore, allowance should be made for ships whose antennas are in poorly maintained condition. A figure of 10 dB has been included in the calculation of shore-ship power budget to take account of these factors. To determine the radiated power required from the shore-based transmitter the external noise factors for the receive stations on shore, Fac, and ship, Fas, should first be established as described in § 2.4. The minimum e.m.r.p. required to return a GMDSS call at the same S/N to a ship on the limit of the service area should then be calculated using equation (2): Pe.m.r.p.
(Fas
Fac) 16
Rpm
dB(kW)
(2)
where: Rpm:
peak-to-mean ratio of the transmitter used on the shore station (dB).
The transmitter power required, PTx, should then be determined from equation (3), in which La should account for all the losses associated with the antenna described in § 2.5.1: PTx
Pe.m.r.p.
La
(3)
Substituting typical figures (Fas Fac) 10 dB, Rpm 3 dB, and La 3 dB yields a typical value of 1 000 W for the minimum required transmitter power at the coast station. If the antenna efficiency Effant is required it should then be determined from equation (4): Effant
Pe.m.r.p./PTx
(4)
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
2.5.4
455
Determination of the range achieved using NAVTEX operation
The range achieved by a given NAVTEX transmitter depends upon the efficiency of the transmit antenna, and the external noise factor on board the ship, as shown in Fig. 5. The antenna efficiency depends upon the quality of the Earth system provided, and once the required c.m.f. has been determined, it should be measured as described in § 2.5.2, and the efficiency determined.
456
Maritime Manual
IMO Resolution A.801(19) specifies 90% availability and so the upper decile value for Fa should be calculated using the statistical data produced by NOISEDAT.
3
Protection of A2 watch frequency
The IMO specify that the distress channels should be watched 24 h per day. The system should be designed so that the watch function is not desensitized by noise or interference. It is essential therefore that all transmit channels assigned for use on the transmitting station are selected so that no intermodulation products are allowed to fall within the frequency bands of the watch channels. For very close channel separations the watch process can be threatened by energy in upper sideband of the adjacent SSB transmission falling within the receiver passband, where the wanted signal could be swamped by blocking or reciprocal mixing. Where channel separation is large enough to remove the threat of reciprocal mixing, a further, but lesser threat to the watch process may be sideband noise from the transmitter falling in the receiver passband. The resulting DSC signal level reaching the shore station will depend upon the declared A2 range for the shore station, and in turn depend upon the sensitivity, Fa. The level to be protected would be the level reaching the shore station after suffering a 3 dB fading loss, and is shown in Fig. 6.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
3.1
Impact of site separation on system performance
3.2
Estimating the level of the interference field
457
The tolerable amount of sideband noise leaving the transmit antenna, and the level of adjacent channel isolation required by the watch receiver both depend upon the separation between the transmit and receive antenna, and Fig. 7 provides a reference power Pref (mW), which corresponds to the radiated power which would produce a field strength at the receive antenna equal to the DSC field strength to be protected and Fig. 8 provides a rule of thumb to relate this to transmitter and receiver characteristics.
458
Maritime Manual
459
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
3.3
Required adjacent channel selectivity
The level of adjacent channel isolation required by the watch receiver depends upon the separation between transmit and receive antennas. Figure 7 provides a reference power, Pref, which corresponds to the radiated power which would produce a field strength at the receive antenna equal to the DSC field strength to be protected. If the receiver has an adjacent channel isolation figure of Iadj (dB), then the maximum power radiated by the station should be limited to: Prad = Pref
(5)
Iadj
Three grades of receiver may be considered for providing the DSC watch: commercial communications receivers, ship s DSC watch receivers, or high performance crystallized DSC watch receivers, conforming with Table 6: TABLE 6 Selectivity (dB)
3.4
Offset (Hz)
6
Between 150 and 220
30
Less than 270
60
Below 400
80
Less than 550
Protection from adjacent channel interference
The maximum permitted transmitter power should be determined using equation (6): PTx = 30
10 log(Pref)
Iadj
10 log(Effant)
(6)
where: PTx:
transmitter power (dBW)
Iadj:
adjacent channel isolation figure for the receiver
Effant:
antenna efficiency.
For example, consider a receiver of the grade used on board ship having a typical adjacent channel isolation figure of 60 dB, on a site offering an Fa of 65 dB located 2.5 km from a transmit antenna with an efficiency of 75%. Figure 7 gives a Pref of 0.1 mW and so the maximum level of radiated power would be 60 dB above 0.1 mW, which is 100 W. Allowing for antenna efficiency the maximum transmitter power would be 133 W. In order to benefit from a 500 W transmitter a pre-filter offering an additional 4 dB adjacent channel isolation would be required.
460
3.5
Maritime Manual
Protection from transmitter sideband noise
The maximum tolerable level of sideband noise is determined by the required C/N at the receive antenna. In the above example, for a S/N of 10 dB, the maximum tolerable level of sideband power would be 10 mW, which is quite low, and may call for use of a post-selector to reduce the noise leaving the transmitter modulator unit. 3.6
Co-site operation
Figure 9 shows the effect of reducing the separation between the transmit and receive antenna below 1 km to 300 m, the minimum value computed using GRWAVE. By way of example, if a station close to the shoreline had a maximum annual median external noise factor Fa of 65 dB then from Fig. 4 the range achieved would be just over 200 nautical miles. If the adjacent channel isolation were 80 dB, then for an e.m.r.p. of 200 W the antenna separation should be not less than 450 m.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1467-1
461
Under such circumstances a long feeder would be required to attain the separation required. As the frequency increases there is a considerable reduction in external noise and increase in feeder loss. At 2 MHz the external noise factor is very much greater than the system noise factor, and for a system noise factor of 15 dB up to 10 dB of feeder loss would be tolerable on a well designed and maintained system. A costeffective way to avoid the cost of a very long low loss coaxial cable would be to use a separate antenna for A2.
4
Software requirements
4.1
Noise calculation
To simplify the determination of range for A2 and NAVTEX transmissions a modified form of NOISEDAT is ideally required including calculation of Fam in accordance with the procedures of this Recommendation. 4.2
Intermodulation
In order to protect the DSC watch channels from the harmful effects of interference caused by intermodulation products, a new program is ideally required to enable the frequencies assigned for use on a shore-based transmitting station to be checked to ensure that no intermodulation products are produced within the passbands of the DSC watch receivers, down to at least the 9th order. Such software should account for the offset spectrum occupied by SSB transmissions to be used.
462
Maritime Manual
RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1842-1 Characteristics of VHF radio systems and equipment for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service RR Appendix 18 channels (2008-2009) The ITU Radiocommunication Assembly, considering a) that Resolution 342 (Rev.WRC-2000) of the World Radiocommunication Conference invites ITU-R to finalize studies currently ongoing, inter alia: identify the future requirements of the maritime mobile service; identify suitable technical characteristics of the system or interoperable systems; identify necessary modifications to the table of frequencies contained in Appendix 18; b) that IMO has stated that the maritime industry has a need for radiocommunications for business and safety. At IMO the future need for harmonization of systems using maritime VHF channels was considered, and ITU-R has been informed of the possible future need for worldwide systems for the exchange of data and electronic mail on maritime VHF channels, recognizing that in accordance with RR Appendix 18 channels used for VHF data shall not cause harmful interference to and shall not claim protection from other stations operating in accordance with RR Article 5. This includes SOLAS applications such as GMDSS on channel 70 and AIS 1 and AIS 2, recommends 1 that the characteristics for VHF data described in the Annexes to this Recommendation should be considered as examples of such systems; 2 this Recommendation should be used as a guideline for future digital technologies in the maritime mobile service VHF bands; 3 that new VHF data systems introduced should provide characteristics that are compatible with the existing voice and data system, particularly the AIS.
463
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1
Annex 1 VHF data system example 1 The following characteristics should be indicative of a VHF radio system for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service.
1
General characteristics
1.1
The class of emission should be 16K0F1DDN.
1.2
The necessary band should cater for the channels in RR Appendix 18 designated with footnote o), each with 25 kHz bandwidth.
1.3
The modulation may be either /4 DQPSK at 28.8 kbit/s or /8 D8-PSK at 43.2 kbit/s, depending on required station-station radio range and channel signal fidelity.
1.4
The access method may be carrier sense time division multiple access (CSTDMA).
1.5
The following area coverage techniques may be used: cellular channel reuse; time sharing transmission.
1.6
The following handover techniques may be utilized: uninterrupted handover (channel and base station); uninterrupted file transfer.
1.7
The equipment should be designed so that frequency changes between assigned channels can be carried out in less than 100 ms.
1.8
Switching between reception and transmission should not take more than 2 ms.
1.9
The serial communication channels (SCC) on a single radio modem may be: Ethernet; RS232 (NMEA).
1.10
The radio equipment should meet the following norms: radio parameters: ETSI EN 300 113-1; EMC: ETSI EN 301 489-5.
464
Maritime Manual
2
Transmitters
2.1
The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed 5 parts in 106, and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed 10 parts in 106.
2.2
Spurious emissions should be in accordance with the provisions of RR Appendix 3.
2.3
The carrier power for coast station transmitters should not exceed 50 W.
2.4
The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W.
2.5
The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 µW.
2.6
The adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) should be at least 70 dB (see Fig. 3).
3
Receivers
3.1
The receiver sensitivity for bit error rate (BER) 10 than 107 dBm.
3.2
The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.
3.3
The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.
3.4
The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.
3.5
The power of any conducted spurious emission at the antenna terminals should not exceed 2.0 nW.
4
Sample emissions spectrum based on variations of ETSI TETRA standard modulation
3
should be better
This proposal refers to the work of RTCM Special Committee 123 (RTCM SC123) which evaluated the ETSI TETRA modulation schemes for use in RR Appendix 18.
465
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1 FIGURE 1 36 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 54 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulation spectra RTCM SC123 test results for TETRA-TEDS modulation Results Figure 1 presents the spectra for TETRA and TEDS modulations, at their normal 36/54 kbit/s data rates, along with the IEC 61993-2 25 kHz mask for comparison. It is apparent these modulations fail to meet the mask; their power exceeds the 25 dBm limit at a 10 kHz offset from the carrier.
466
Maritime Manual FIGURE 2 Family of spectrum plots for different data rates RTCM test results for slightly reduced data rates to fit Appendix 18 emissions mask Somewhat lower 32/48 kbit/s and 28.8/43.2 kbit/s data rate combinations were then tested. Figure 2 overlays these results with those of Fig. 1. It is evident 32 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 48 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulations just barely fit or violate the mask whereas 28.8 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 43.2 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulations comfortably fit the mask.
467
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1 FIGURE 3 Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) performance RTCM test results: 28.8 kbit/s /4-DQPSK and 43.2 kbit/s /8-D8-PSK modulation
468
5
Maritime Manual
Conclusions on emissions
Emissions spectrum requirements for RR Appendix 18 based on maritime IEC test standards will allow both /4 DQPSK at 28.8 kbit/s and /8 D8-PSK at 43.2 kbit/s modulation to be used.
6
System interoperability
6.1
Ship-to-shore
In the ship-to-shore direction interoperability is maintained by the internet service provider (ISP) at the internet protocol (IP) level. Typically, a ship will enter an electronic mail, with or without attachments, in the electronic mail system and then click on the send button. 6.2
Shore-to-ship
In this system, there are no interoperability concerns on the part of the shore-side user. The shore-based sender of an electronic mail to a ship can merely: a)
click on the reply button, or
b)
address the message to
[email protected] or
[email protected].
The electronic mail will be delivered via whatever system the ship is using. If there is a system failure, there will be an automatic re-route via an alternate system. These automated decisions are based on the contents of an extensive database. Consequently, the electronic mail may be delivered via HF or an alternate satellite-based system. If there is an overall system failure, addressing problem or non-delivery for any reason, the system support operators will be alerted and take corrective action. This ensures that shore-based users need not be concerned about what system or network the ship is using. They need only address the electronic mail and click on send . 6.3
Ship-to-ship
The VDL protocol should also provide for direct transmission between ships where possible (within radio propagation range) in the simplex ship-ship mode. The duplex ship-shore-ship mode should be used for extended range (beyond the ship-ship radio propagation range). 6.4
Efficient use of the VHF data link (VDL)
System interoperability should be achieved for all transmission modes, ship-to-shore, shore-to-ship, and ship-to-ship. Spectrum efficiency and data throughput should also be considered. For example, application of the electronic mail internet protocol (IP) at the network level and not on the VDL would result in an efficiency improvement of 3:1.
469
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1
Annex 2 VHF data system example 2 Introduction This Annex describes an existing narrowband VHF data system for the exchange of data and electronic mail in the maritime mobile service. The system is currently in use, operating from base stations ashore and on offshore installations.
1
General characteristics
1.1
The system is operating on nine duplex 25 kHz channels in the maritime VHF band.
1.2
The class of emission is 16K0F1DDN.
1.3
The modulation is 4-level GMSK. Transmitted bit rate 21.1 kbit/s.
1.4
The access method is time division multiple access (TDMA).
1.5
The following area coverage techniques are used: cellular channel reuse; time sharing transmission.
1.6
The following handover techniques are utilized: uninterrupted handover (channel and base station); uninterrupted file transfer.
1.7
The equipment is designed so that frequency changes between assigned channels can be carried out in less than 100 ms.
1.8
Emissions are vertically polarized at the source.
1.9
Switching between reception and transmission should not take more than 2 ms.
1.10
The serial communication channels (SCC) on a single radio modem should be: Ethernet; RS232 (NMEA); IEC 61162.
1.11
The radio equipment should meet the following norms: radio parameters: ETSI EN 300 113-1; EMC: ETSI EN 301 489-5 and IEC 60945.
470
Maritime Manual
2
Transmitters
2.1
The frequency tolerance for coast station transmitters should not exceed five parts in 106, and that for ship station transmitters should not exceed ten parts in 106.
2.2
In order to prevent harmful interference to other users of the maritime VHF band, spurious emissions should be in accordance with the provisions of RR Appendix 3.
2.3
The carrier power for coast station transmitters should not exceed 50 W.
2.4
The carrier power for ship station transmitters should not exceed 25 W.
2.5
The cabinet radiated power should not exceed 25 µW.
2.6
Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) should be at least 70 dB.
3
Receivers
3.1
The receiver sensitivity for bit-error rate (BER) 10 than 107 dBm .
3.2
The adjacent channel selectivity should be at least 70 dB.
3.3
The spurious response rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.
3.4
The radio frequency intermodulation rejection ratio should be at least 70 dB.
3.5
The power of any conducted spurious emission at the antenna terminals should not exceed 2.0 nW.
4
Possibilities and advantages
4.1
Coverage and stability
3
should be better
The VHF band has very good qualities regarding range and stability. Typical range from a land-based station is up to 70 NM. 4.2
IP – Ethernet The common used Ethernet protocol that makes connection to local data networks and other data services easy.
4.3
Fixed IP address at the radio on board the ship This makes it possible to send data to the ship without anyone being needed to activate the link. The ship may also have ten local IP addresses.
Part C – Rec. ITU-R M.1842-1
4.4
471
Always connected There is no connection time. This makes the system very effective for realtime applications, e.g. banking terminals.
4.5
Several services in parallel from one radio on the ship The system is based on packets all the way. From one radio on the ship one may carry out several different services at the same time. The system is therefore frequency efficient.
4.6
Automatic reconnection after disruption The system will automatically reconnect and continue the tasks again at the right point. This happens both after short breaks as well as long breaks, e.g. outside radio coverage area.
4.7
Integrated data router The radio is delivered with an integrated router. It means that tasks may be programmed directly into the radio and may be carried out without the use of a PC. For example, the fishing boat positioning and moving report system is programmed into the radio/router. In addition, the router has very large capacity to carry out several tasks, among other things compression and decompression of electronic mail, web applications and weather maps.
4.8
Several inputs to the radio Ethernet cable may be plugged directly into the radio or the router, enabling easy establishment of a local net on board the ship. Other digital or analogue inputs may be used for GNSS, measuring instruments, etc.
4.9
Connection to local WLAN The system may be combined with local wireless networks on board the ship.
4.10
External communication carriers The system may be delivered with possibilities for seamless connection to external networks, e.g. wireless LANs in harbour areas or to satellite communication.
5
Applications
Some current and possible future applications of VHF data are listed below: safe SeaNet reporting (ISPS);
472
Maritime Manual
fishery catch reporting; fishing boat position and movement reporting; weather maps; general electronic mail; messages to the ship s agent, the pilot or harbour authorities; banking terminals, especially on passenger ships; safety-related information; telemetry information; updating of electronic maps.
6
System interoperability
6.1
Ship-to-shore In the ship-to-shore direction interoperability is maintained by the Internet service provider (ISP) at the internet protocol (IP) level. Typically, a ship will enter an electronic mail, with or without attachments, in the electronic mail system and then click on the send button.
6.2
Shore-to-ship In this system, there are no interoperability concerns on the part of the shoreside user. The shore-based sender of an electronic mail to a ship can merely: a)
click on the reply button, or
b) address the message to
[email protected] or
[email protected]. The electronic mail will be delivered via whatever system the ship is using. If there is a system failure, there will be an automatic re-route via an alternate system. These automated decisions are based on the contents of an extensive database. Consequently, the electronic mail may be delivered via HF or an alternate satellite-based system. If there is an overall system failure, addressing problem or non-delivery for any reason, the system support operators will be alerted and take corrective action. This ensures that shore- based users need not be concerned about what system or network the ship is using. They need only address the electronic mail and click on send .
_______________
PART D Extracts from the International Telecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988)
Note by the Secretariat: In preparing the extracts from the International Telecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988), the Secretariat made editorial changes, where appropriate, to reflect the ITU structural changes (world administrative radio conference to world radiocommunication conference, CCIR to ITU-R, CCITT to ITU-T, IFRB to the Radiocommunication Bureau, Administrative Council to Council, etc.) In addition, the term “Member(s)” has been replaced by the term “Member State(s) ‡” to correspond with the terminology employed currently within the ITU. The symbol “‡” indicates that this replacement was made by the Secretariat.
Part D – ITR
475
INTERNATIONAL TELECOMMUNICATION REGULATIONS Article 1 Purpose and Scope of the Regulations 2
1.1 a) These Regulations establish general principles which relate to the provision and operation of international telecommunication services offered to the public as well as to the underlying international telecommunication transport means used to provide such services. They also set rules applicable to administrations*.
3
b) These Regulations recognize in Article 9 the right of Member States‡ to allow special arrangements.
4
1.2 In these Regulations, “the public” is used in the sense of the population, including governmental and legal bodies.
5
1.3 These Regulations are established with a view to facilitating global interconnection and interoperability of telecommunication facilities and to promoting the harmonious development and efficient operation of technical facilities, as well as the efficiency, usefulness and availability to the public of international telecommunication services.
6
1.4 References to ITU-T Recommendations and Instructions in these Regulations are not to be taken as giving to those Recommendations and Instructions the same legal status as the Regulations.
7
1.5 Within the framework of the present Regulations, the provision and operation of international telecommunication services in each relation is pursuant to mutual agreement between administrations*.
8
1.6 In implementing the principles of these Regulations, administrations* should comply with, to the greatest extent practicable, the relevant ITU-T Recommendations, including any Instructions forming part of or derived from these Recommendations.
9
1.7
a) These Regulations recognize the right of any Member State‡, subject to national law and should it decide to do so, to require that administrations* and private operating agencies, which operate in its territory and provide an international telecommunication service to the public, be authorized by that Member State‡.
10
b) The Member State‡ concerned shall, as appropriate, encourage the application of relevant ITU-T Recommendations by such service providers.
11
c) The Member States‡, where appropriate, shall cooperate in implementing the International Telecommunication Regulations (for interpretation, also see Resolution No. 2). _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
476
12
Maritime Manual
1.8 The Regulations shall apply, regardless of the means of transmission used, so far as the Radio Regulations do not provide otherwise.
Article 2 Definitions 13
For the purpose of these Regulations, the following definitions shall apply. These terms and definitions do not, however, necessarily apply for other purposes.
21
2.6 International route: Technical facilities and installations located in different countries and used for telecommunication traffic between two international telecommunication terminal exchanges or offices.
22
2.7 Relation: Exchange of traffic between two terminal countries, always referring to a specific service if there is between their administrations*:
23
24
a) a means for the exchange of traffic in that specific service: –
over direct circuits (direct relation), or
–
via a point of transit in a third country (indirect relation), and
b) normally, the settlement of accounts.
25
2.8 Accounting rate: The rate agreed between administrations* in a given relation that is used for the establishment of international accounts.
26
2.9 Collection charge: The charge established and collected by an administration* from its customers for the use of an international telecommunication service.
27
2.10 Instructions: A collection of provisions drawn from one or more ITU-T Recommendations dealing with practical operational procedures for the handling of telecommunication traffic (e.g., acceptance, transmission, accounting).
Article 3 International Network 28
3.1 Member States‡ shall ensure that administrations* cooperate in the establishment, operation and maintenance of the international network to provide a satisfactory quality of service. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
Part D – ITR
477
29
3.2 Administrations* shall endeavour to provide sufficient telecommunication facilities to meet the requirements of and demand for international telecommunication services.
30
3.3 Administrations* shall determine by mutual agreement which international routes are to be used. Pending agreement and provided that there is no direct route existing between the terminal administrations* concerned, the origin administration* has the choice to determine the routing of its outgoing telecommunication traffic, taking into account the interests of the relevant transit and destination administrations*.
31
3.4 Subject to national law, any user, by having access to the international network established by an administration*, has the right to send traffic. A satisfactory quality of service should be maintained to the greatest extent practicable, corresponding to relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
Article 4 International Telecommunication Services 32
4.1 Member States‡ shall promote the implementation of international telecommunication services and shall endeavour to make such services generally available to the public in their national network(s).
33
4.2 Member States‡ shall ensure that administrations* cooperate within the framework of these Regulations to provide by mutual agreement, a wide range of international telecommunication services which should conform, to the greatest extent practicable, to the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
34
4.3 Subject to national law, Member States‡ shall endeavour to ensure that administrations* provide and maintain, to the greatest extent practicable, a minimum quality of service corresponding to the relevant ITU-T Recommendations with respect to:
35
a) access to the international network by users using terminals which are permitted to be connected to the network and which do not cause harm to technical facilities and personnel;
36
b) international telecommunication facilities and services available to customers for their dedicated use;
37
c) at least a form of telecommunication which is reasonably accessible to the public, including those who may not be subscribers to a specific telecommunication service; and
38
d) a capability for interworking between different services, as appropriate, to facilitate international communications. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
478
Maritime Manual
Article 5 Safety of Life and Priority of Telecommunications 39
5.1 Safety of life telecommunications, such as distress telecommunications, shall be entitled to transmission as of right and shall, where technically practicable, have absolute priority over all other telecommunications, in accordance with the relevant Articles of the Convention and taking due account of relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
40
5.2 Government telecommunications, including telecommunications relative to the application of certain provisions of the United Nations Charter, shall, where technically practicable, enjoy priority over telecommunications other than those referred to in No. 39, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the Convention and taking due account of relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
41
5.3 The provisions governing the priority enjoyed by all other telecommunications are contained in the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
Article 6 Charging and Accounting 42
6.1
Collection charges
43
6.1.1 Each administration* shall, subject to applicable national law, establish the charges to be collected from its customers. The level of the charges is a national matter; however, in establishing these charges, administrations* should try to avoid too great a dissymmetry between the charges applicable in each direction of the same relation.
44
6.1.2 The charge levied by an administration* on customers for a particular communication should in principle be the same in a given relation, regardless of the route chosen by that administration*.
45
6.1.3 Where, in accordance with the national law of a country, a fiscal tax is levied on collection charges for international telecommunication services, this tax shall normally be collected only in respect of international services billed to customers in that country, unless other arrangements are made to meet special circumstances.
46
6.2
47
6.2.1 For each applicable service in a given relation, administrations* shall by mutual agreement establish and revise accounting rates to be applied between them, in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 1 and taking into account relevant ITU-T Recommendations and relevant cost trends.
Accounting rates
_______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
Part D – ITR
479
51
6.4
Establishment of accounts and settlement of balances of account
52
6.4.1 Unless otherwise agreed, administrations* shall follow the relevant provisions as set out in Appendices 1 and 2.
Article 7 Suspension of Services 55
7.1 If a Member State‡ exercises its right in accordance with the Convention to suspend international telecommunication services partially or totally, that Member State‡ shall immediately notify the Secretary-General of the suspension and of the subsequent return to normal conditions by the most appropriate means of communication.
56
7.2 The Secretary-General shall immediately bring such information to the attention of all other Member States‡, using the most appropriate means of communication.
Article 9 Special Arrangements 58
9.1 a) Pursuant to Article 31 of the International Telecommunication Convention (Nairobi, 1982), special arrangements may be entered into on telecommunication matters which do not concern Member States‡ in general. Subject to national laws, Member States‡ may allow administrations* or other organizations or persons to enter into such special mutual arrangements with Member States‡, administrations* or other organizations or persons that are so allowed in another country for the establishment, operation, and use of special telecommunication networks, systems and services, in order to meet specialized international telecommunication needs within and/or between the territories of the Member States‡ concerned, and including, as necessary, those financial, technical, or operating conditions to be observed.
59
b) Any such special arrangements should avoid technical harm to the operation of the telecommunication facilities of third countries.
60
9.2 Member States‡ should, where appropriate, encourage the parties to any special arrangements that are made pursuant to No. 58 to take into account relevant provisions of ITU-T Recommendations. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
480
Maritime Manual
Article 10 Final Provisions 61
10.1 These Regulations, of which Appendices 1, 2 and 3 form integral parts, shall enter into force on 1 July 1990 at 0001 hours UTC.
62
10.2 On the date specified in No. 61, the Telegraph Regulations (Geneva, 1973) and the Telephone Regulations (Geneva, 1973) shall be replaced by these International Telecommunication Regulations (Melbourne, 1988) pursuant to the International Telecommunication Convention.
63
10.3 If a Member State‡ makes reservations with regard to the application of one or more of the provisions of these Regulations, other Member States‡ and their administrations* shall be free to disregard the said provision or provisions in their relations with the Member State‡ which has made such reservations and its administrations*.
_______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
Part D – ITR
481
APPENDIX 1 General Provisions Concerning Accounting ITR
1.
Accounting rates
1.1 For each applicable service in a given relation, administrations* shall by mutual agreement establish and revise accounting rates to be applied between them, taking into account the Recommendations of the ITU-T and trends in the cost of providing the specific telecommunication service, and shall divide such rates into terminal shares payable to the administrations* of terminal countries, and where appropriate, into transit shares payable to the administrations* of transit countries. 1.2 Alternatively, in traffic relations where ITU-T cost studies can be used as a basis, the accounting rate may be determined in accordance with the following method: a) administrations* shall establish and revise their terminal and transit shares taking into account the Recommendations of the ITU-T; b) the accounting rate shall be the sum of the terminal shares and any transit shares. 1.3 When one or more administrations* acquire, either by flat rate remuneration or other arrangements, the right to utilize a part of the circuit and/or installations of another administration*, the former have the right to establish their share as mentioned in 1.1 and 1.2 above, for this part of the relation. 1.4 In cases where one or more routes have been established by agreement between administrations* and where traffic is diverted unilaterally by the administration* of origin to a route which has not been agreed with the administration* of destination, the terminal shares payable to the administration* of destination shall be the same as would have been due to it had the traffic been routed over the agreed primary route and the transit costs are borne by the administration* of origin, unless the administration* of destination is prepared to agree to a different share. 1.5 In cases where the traffic is routed via a transit point without authorization and/or agreement to the transit share, the transit administration* has the right to set the level of the transit share to be included in the international accounts. 1.6 Where an administration* has a duty or fiscal tax levied on its accounting rate shares or other remunerations, it shall not in turn impose any such duty or fiscal tax on other administrations*. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
482
2.
Maritime Manual
Establishment of accounts
2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the administrations* responsible for collecting the charges shall establish a monthly account showing all the amounts due and send it to the administrations* concerned. 2.2 The accounts shall be sent as promptly as possible and, except in cases of force majeure, before the end of the third month following that to which they relate. 2.3 In principle an account shall be considered as accepted without the need for specific notification of acceptance to the administration* which sent it. 2.4 However, any administration* has the right to question the contents of an account for a period of two calendar months after the receipt of the account, but only to the extent necessary to bring any differences within mutually agreed limits. 2.5 In relations where there are no special agreements, a quarterly settlement statement showing the balances of the monthly accounts for the period to which it relates shall be prepared as soon as possible by the creditor administration* and shall be sent in duplicate to the debtor administration*, which, after verification, shall return one of the copies endorsed with its acceptance. 2.6 In indirect relations where a transit administration* acts as an accounting intermediary between two terminal points, it shall include accounting data for transit traffic in the relevant outgoing traffic account to administrations* beyond it in the routing sequence as soon as possible after receiving that data from the originating administration*. 3.
Settlement of balances of accounts
3.1
Choice of the currency of payment
3.1.1 The payment of balances of international telecommunication accounts shall be made in the currency selected by the creditor after consultation with the debtor. In the event of disagreement, the choice of the creditor shall prevail in all cases subject to the provisions in 3.1.2 below. If the creditor does not specify a currency, the choice shall rest with the debtor. 3.1.2 If a creditor selects a currency with a value fixed unilaterally or a currency the equivalent value of which is to be determined by its relationship to a currency with a value also fixed unilaterally, the use of the selected currency must be acceptable to the debtor. 3.2
Determination of the amount of payment
3.2.1 The amount of the payment in the selected currency, as determined below, shall be equivalent in value to the balance of the account. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
Part D – ITR
483
3.2.2 If the balance of the account is expressed in the monetary unit of the IMF, the amount of the selected currency shall be determined by the relationship in effect on the day before payment, or by the latest relationship published by the IMF, between the monetary unit of the IMF and the selected currency. 3.2.3 However, if the relationship of the monetary unit of the IMF to the selected currency has not been published, the amount of the balance of account shall, at a first stage, be converted into a currency for which a relationship has been published by the IMF, using the relationship in effect on the day before payment or the latest published relationship. The amount thus obtained shall, at a second stage, be converted into the equivalent value of the selected currency, using the closing rate in effect on the day prior to payment or the most recent rate quoted on the official or generally accepted foreign exchange market of the main financial centre of the debtor country. 3.2.4 If the balance of the account is expressed in gold francs, the amount shall, in the absence of special arrangements, be converted into the monetary unit of the IMF in accordance with the provisions of section 6.3 of the Regulations. The amount of payment shall then be determined in compliance with the provisions of 3.2.2. above. 3.2.5 If, in accordance with a special arrangement, the balance of the account is expressed neither in the monetary unit of the IMF nor in gold francs, the payment shall also be the subject of this special arrangement and: a) if the selected currency is the same as the currency of the balance of account, the amount of the selected currency shall be the amount of the balance of account; b) if the selected currency for payment is different from the currency in which the balance is expressed, the amount shall be determined by converting the balance of account to its equivalent value in the selected currency in accordance with the provisions of 3.2.3 above. 3.3
Payment of balances
3.3.1 Payment of balances of account shall be effected as promptly as possible, but in no case later than two calendar months after the day on which the settlement statement is despatched by the creditor administration*. Beyond this period, the creditor administration* may, subject to prior notification in the form of a final demand for payment, and unless otherwise agreed, charge interest at a rate of up to 6% per annum, reckoned from the day following the date of expiry of the said period. 3.3.2 The payment due on a settlement statement shall not be delayed pending settlement of a query on that account. Adjustments which are later agreed shall be included in a subsequent account. 3.3.3 On the date of payment, the debtor shall transmit the amount of the selected currency as computed above by a bank cheque, transfer or any other means acceptable to the debtor and the creditor. If the creditor expresses no preference, the choice shall fall to the debtor. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
484
Maritime Manual
3.3.4 The payment charges imposed in the debtor country (taxes, clearing charges, commissions, etc.) shall be borne by the debtor. Any such charges imposed in the creditor country, including payment charges imposed by intermediate banks in third countries, shall be borne by the creditor. 3.4
Additional provisions
3.4.1 Provided the periods of payment are observed, administrations* may by mutual agreement settle their balances of various kinds by offsetting: – credits and debits in their relations with other administrations*; and/or – debts arising from postal services, if appropriate. 3.4.2 If, between the time the remittance (bank transfer, cheques, etc.) is effected and the time the creditor is in receipt of that remittance (account credited, cheque encashed, etc.), a variation occurs in the equivalent value of the selected currency calculated as indicated in paragraph 3.2, and if the difference resulting from such variations exceeds 5% of the amount due as calculated following such variations, the total difference shall be shared equally between debtor and creditor. 3.4.3 If there should be a radical change in the international monetary system which invalidates or makes inappropriate one or more of the foregoing paragraphs, administrations* are free to adopt, by mutual agreement, a different monetary basis and/or different procedures for the settlement of balances of accounts, pending a revision of the above provisions.
_______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
Part D – ITR
485
APPENDIX 2 Additional Provisions Relating to Maritime Telecommunications ITR
1.
General
The provisions contained in Article 6 and Appendix 1, taking into account the relevant ITU-T Recommendations, shall also apply to maritime telecommunications in so far as the following provisions do not provide otherwise. 2.
Accounting authority
2.1 Charges for maritime telecommunications in the maritime mobile service and the maritime mobile-satellite service shall in principle, and subject to national law and practice, be collected from the maritime mobile station licensee: a) by the administration that has issued the licence; or b) by a recognized private operating agency; or c) by any other entity or entities designated for this purpose by the administration referred to in a) above. 2.2 The administration or the recognized private operating agency or the designated entity or entities listed in paragraph 2.1 are referred to in this Appendix as the “accounting authority”. 2.3 References to administration* contained in Article 6 and Appendix 1 shall be read as “accounting authority” when applying the provisions of Article 6 and Appendix 1 to maritime telecommunications. 2.4 Member States‡ shall designate their accounting authority or authorities for the purposes of implementing this Appendix and notify their names, identification codes and addresses to the Secretary-General for inclusion in the List of Ship Stations; the number of such names and addresses shall be limited taking into account the relevant ITU-T Recommendations. 3.
Establishment of accounts
3.1 In principle, an account shall be considered as accepted without the need for specific notification of acceptance to the accounting authority that sent it. 3.2 However, any accounting authority has the right to question the contents of an account for a period of six calendar months after dispatch of the account. _______________ * or recognized private operating agency(ies)
486
4.
Maritime Manual
Settlement of balances of account
4.1 All international maritime telecommunication accounts shall be paid by the accounting authority without delay and in any case within six calendar months after dispatch of the account, except where the settlement of accounts is undertaken in accordance with paragraph 4.3 below. 4.2 If international maritime telecommunication accounts remain unpaid after six calendar months, the administration that has licensed the mobile station shall, on request, take all possible steps, within the limits of applicable national law, to ensure settlement of the accounts from the licensee. 4.3 If the period between the date of dispatch and receipt exceeds one month, the receiving accounting authority should at once notify the originating accounting authority that queries and payments may be delayed. The delay shall, however, not exceed three calendar months in respect of payment, or five calendar months in respect of queries, both periods commencing from the date of receipt of the account. 4.4 The debtor accounting authority may refuse the settlement and adjustment of accounts presented more than eighteen calendar months after the date of the traffic to which the accounts relate.
_______________
PART E Extracts from the ITU-T Recommendations
_______________ See Note by the Secretariat, Part D.
Part E
489
Notes 1. In these Recommendations, the expression Administration is used for conciseness to indicate both a telecommunication administration and a recognized operating agency. 2. Should there be any conflict regarding the time scale in the ITU-T Recommendation D.90 and those stated in Appendix 2 of the International Telecommunication Regulations then the latter would prevail. 4. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110, the references commencing with the letters J, K, L and M concern provisions in Divisions J, K, L and M respectively of ITU-T Recommendation D.90 entitled Charging, billing, international accounting and settlement in the Maritime Mobile Service. 5. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110 the term Maritime Mobile Service should be understood to embrace the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service as well as the MF, HF, VHF and UHF radio media, unless specifically stated otherwise. 6. Throughout the ITU-T Recommendation F.110 the term Administration means that recognized private operating agency/agencies are included. However, where this term is used in respect of notification by Administrations to the General Secretariat of the ITU, this applies only to recognized private operating agencies that have been authorized by Administrations to carry out such notification. 7. For the purpose of the ITU-T Recommendation F.110, the terms mobile station and land station should be considered as analogous to ship station and coast station respectively used in the Radio Regulations.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
491
ITU-T Recommendation D.90 CHARGING, BILLING, INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING AND SETTLEMENT IN THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE (Revised in 1995)
1
Introduction
1.1 This Recommendation sets out the principles for charging, billing, international accounting and settlement for the maritime mobile service. It covers:
1.2
–
the procedures for the rendering of a bill by a service provider in respect of the collection charges payable by a maritime mobile station;
–
the payment procedures related to the bill;
–
the inter-Administration/ROA (service provider) international accounting procedures when maritime mobile traffic involves a terrestrial international call and, where applicable, the use of a land station in a country other than the one where the call originates/terminates.
The following provides an explanation of terminology used in this Recommendation.
1.2.1 Maritime mobile service – The term is used in this Recommendation to cover the Maritime Mobile Satellite Service as well as the MF, HF and VHF radio media, unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.2.2 Service provider – The Administration/ROA who provides the communication service to/from maritime mobile stations. 1.2.3 Land Station (LS) – This term is used to cover both fixed Land Earth Station and Coast Station. 1.2.4 Land Station Operator (LSO) – An entity which operates a Land Station in the Maritime Mobile Service. This can be an Administration/ROA or other entity(ies) designated by the Administration to operate the Land Station. 1.2.5 Maritime mobile station – This term is used to include a maritime mobile satellite station, and in the context of billing refers to the Licensee, equating to the use of the term customer in the terrestrial service. It equates to Ship Station used in die Radio Regulations. 1.2.6 Maritime bill – The bill issued by the service provider in respect of collection charges for maritime mobile traffic originated by a maritime mobile station. 1.2.7 Land line charge – The charge relating to the transmission over the terrestrial public switched telecommunications network. 1.2.8 Land station charge – The charge relating to the use of facilities provided by the land station, which will include the space segment costs in the maritime mobile satellite case and which may be presented by the LSO in its component parts. 1.2.9
Accounting Authority/Accounting Authority Identification Code – (See annex A.)
492
Maritime Manual
3
Collection charges
3.1
General principles
See also Annex E – Case studies 3.1.1
The charge structure and level is a national matter.
3.1.2
The collection charges may take account of the following elements: a)
the national/international (if applicable) link = the landline;
b)
the land station;
c)
the space segment (if applicable);
d)
any special services or facilities.
3.1.3 For communication between a maritime mobile station and a country other than that of the land station (cases 3, 4): 3.1.3.1 The international land line charges shall normally be the collection charges applicable in the international relation concerned for the services used. 3.1.3.2 Service providers may choose to establish a combined collection charge covering both the landline and the land station. 3.1.4
Communications between maritime mobile stations:
3.1.4.1 When a single land station is used as an intermediary between maritime mobile stations, two maritime land station charges are collected. If the land station charge applicable to traffic with the origin maritime mobile station is different from that applicable to traffic with the destination maritime mobile station, the sum of these two charges is collected. 3.1.4.2 When it is necessary to use two land stations in different countries as intermediaries between two maritime mobile stations (case 6), the landline charge for the section between the two land stations (normally the collection charge applicable in the international relation concerned for the service used) is collected in addition to the two land station charges. 3.1.4.3 When it is necessary to use two land stations in the same country as intermediary between two maritime mobile stations a national landline charge between the two land stations is collected in addition to the two land station charges. 3.1.5 If authorised to do so by its licensing Administration, a maritime mobile station may collect on board a fee from users, for the use of facilities provided, in addition to the service provider's collection charges. Such a fee will be retained by the maritime mobile station. The licensing Administration may set an upper limit to these fees. 3.2
Publication of collection charges by the ITU
3.2.1 The landline and land station charges shall be notified by the service provider to the Radiocommunication Bureau in the unit of the IMF, currently the SDR (Special Drawing Right), or in Gold Francs which is the equivalent to 1/3.061 SDR (1 SDR = 3.061 GFcs).
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
493
3.2.2 The landline and land station charges notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau will be published in the List of Coast Stations. 3.2.3 For countries that have not introduced banded collection charges for international services, only a limited number of charges, for routes in frequent use, will be published. In such cases, the Radiocommunication Bureau will need to be informed which charges should be published. 3.2.4 Maritime mobile stations must be aware of the collection charges. They are authorized, where necessary, to obtain such information directly from land stations. Charges furnished by land stations should be expressed either in SDRs or in Gold Francs (see 3.2.1 above). 3.3
Changes to collection charges
3.3.1 New or modified collection charges shall not come into effect for international traffic for countries other than the one which establishes the charges until the first day of the month following expiry of the period specified below. The period will be counted from the day after the publication date of the ITU Operational Bulletin which contains this notification. Service providers providing information for publication in the Operational Bulletin should observe the deadlines indicated in the Bulletin in forwarding this information to the Radiocommunication Bureau. 3.3.2
The period to be taken into account is as follows: a)
for traffic from maritime mobile station to land: I month and 15 days;
b)
for traffic from land to maritime mobile station: 15 days, except for changes to bring charges into line with those on competing routes where the period is 10 days.
3.4
Special charging arrangements
3.4.1
Communications of immediate general interest ( including safety and distress)
No charge is raised, against the maritime mobile station, for transmission in the maritime mobile service provided that the communications are : a)
distress calls/messages or replies to such calls/messages;
b)
messages originating in maritime mobile stations requiring shore rescue authority support, e.g. man overboard, oil pollution or piracy attack; messages originating in maritime mobile stations notifying the presence of dangers to navigation (e.g. icebergs, derelicts, mines) or announcing cyclones, storms or fog;
c)
d)
messages originating in maritime mobile stations notifying sudden changes in the position of buoys, the working of lighthouses, devices connected with buoyage etc.; or
e)
messages originating in martime mobile stations notifying unexpected phenomena threatening air navigation or the sudden occurrence of obstacles at airports or special landing/berthing places at sea.
494
Maritime Manual
Any land station and landline charges for Safety and Distress communications will be billed to the appropriate shore authority. 3.4.2
Communications relating to medical advice
No charge is raised against the originating maritime mobile station for communications using the maritime mobile service which relate to medical advice provided that: a)
they are exchanged directly between maritime mobile stations and either Land Stations shown in the List of Radiodetermination and Special Service Stations as providing such a service, or Land Earth Stations which offer the service; and
b)
they are addressed in accordance with the conditions published in the above List, or as specificied by the satellite service operator.
Any land station and landline charges for medical advice communications will be billed to the appropriate shore authority. 3.4.3
Meteorological communications
Charges for meteorological communications are a national matter. 3.4.4
Communications relating to persons protected in time of war
Radio telegrams concerning persons protected in time of war by the Geneva Convention of 12 August 1949 (RCT) will be accepted in accordance with Recommendation F.1, and will be charged in accordance with Recommendation D.40. 3.4.5
Service communications in the maritime mobile service
Service telegrams or service telexes relating to the maritime mobile service should be treated in accordance with Recommendation D.192. 3.5
Service specific charging principles
3.5.1
Radiotelegrams (see Recommendation F.110)
3.5.1.1 The land station charge is established on the basis of a word charge – see Recommendation F.1. 3.5.1.2 No additional charge shall be made when acknowledgment of receipt of a radiotelegram is made through another maritime mobile station or land station by service advice, or when an intermediate maritime mobile station assists in the forwarding of a radiotelegram. 3.5.2
Radiomaritime letters (see Recommendation F.110)
3.5.2.1 Except as otherwise provided below, radiomaritime letters may be accepted, taking into account ITU-T Recommendations relating to letter telegrams, if the telegram service is used to convey radiomaritime letters. 3.5.2.2 The total charge shall include the postal charge (by ordinary letter or airmail letter) due for delivery in the land station country.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
495
3.5.2.3 An additional charge may be collected where delivery is to be made to a country other than that of the land station. 3.5.2.4
3.5.3
The following charges are added where applicable: a)
charges due for special services;
b)
the landline charge when transmission on the land section is exceptionally by telegraph.
Radiotelephone and radiotelex calls (see Recommendation F.110)
3.5.3.1 If no uniform charges apply in respect of the land stations of a country, different land station charges shall be fixed for the MF, HF and VHF bands and for the maritime mobile satellite service. 3.5.3.2 If, due to the lack of technical facilities, no extra charges apart from the normal international landline charges can be levied by the origin Service Providers, no land station charges will be collected for international automatic VHF radiotelephone calls in the to-maritime mobile station direction, if so decided by the land station Service Providers. The List of Coast Stations [1] shall indicate which Service Providers accept such calls without levying land station charges. 3.5.3.3 When handled through a land station, the chargeable duration of a manual or singleoperator call will be fixed at the end of the call by the land station; if two land stations are participating in the handling of the call, the record of the land station that accepted the call from the originating maritime mobile station will prevail. 3.5.4
Radiotelexograms (see Recommendation F.110)
3.5.4.1
The charge for the landline element shall be that applicable to a telex call.
3.5.4.2 The charge for the landstation element shall be that applicable to a radiotelegram or converted into chargeable duration units.
4
Maritime billing
4.1
Billing responsibilities
4.1.1 Collection charges for calls from shore to maritime mobile stations (cases 2, 4) will be billed by the service provider to the calling customer in the normal customer billing process and are not the subject of this subclause. 4.1.2 Collection charges for communications from maritime mobile stations to shore (cases 1, 3, 5 & 6) shall in principle and subject to national law and practice, be billed by the service provider to: a)
An accounting authority or other third party agreed between the service provider and the maritime mobile station;
b)
the maritime mobile station; or
c)
a credit/charge card company designated by the service provider.
496
Maritime Manual
NOTE – In cases b) and c) above the accounting authority of the maritime mobile station is not responsible for payment of the bills for communications originating from the maritime mobile station. For cases b) and c) above, 4.2.2, 4.3.2., 4.4, 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7 do not apply, as the billing arrangements are the subject of agreement between the service provider and the maritime mobile station or the credit/charge card company.
4.1.3 The registration, responsibilities and identification of accounting authorities are described in Annex A. 4.2
Billing processes and associated timescales
4.2.1 The processes involved in the billing of maritime mobile stations are described in 4.4, 4.5, and 4.7 below. The timescales associated with the various processes are summarized in Annex D and represent the recommended maximum timescales. Variations to the timescales and processes may be agreed between the service provider and the billed party (as defined in 4.1.2) as part of their commercial arrangements. 4.2.2 In some instances, the International Telecommunications Regulations (ITR Appendix 2) provide for a longer maximum timescale than that recommended in this Recommendation. The ITR timescales will be regarded as applicable in exceptional cases, for example, where delays in rendering the bill to the correct accounting authority are encountered. The timescales contained in this Recommendation shall be regarded as the normal maximum timescales to be followed. 4.3
Billing procedures
4.3.1 The bills for communications originating in martime mobile stations should be based on the following data gathered at the Land Station: a) b)
the maritime mobile station name, the maritime mobile station identification and/or call sign; the accounting authority identification code when required by the service provider;
c)
the credit/charge card details if applicable;
d)
the number or identification of the addressee, including, for example, country code and area codes;
e)
the chargeable units;
f)
date communication commenced, and time if appropriate;
g)
traffic category;
h)
type of call (automatic, operator assisted, collect, etc.);
i)
special services/facilities used.
4.3.2 In the case of communications originating in maritime mobile stations, the service provider shall bill, in accordance with the collection charges notified to the ITU in SDRs or Gold Francs (see 3.2): a)
the land station charges;
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
4.4
b)
the landline charges;
c)
any charges for special services or facilities;
d)
where appropriate, postal charges on radiomaritime letters.
497
Preparation and despatch of bills
4.4.1 Bills are prepared monthly by the service provider and despatched to the accounting authority responsible for the maritime mobile station, unless other arrangements have been agreed between the service provider and the maritime mobile station. 4.4.2 Bills should be despatched as promptly as possible and by the most expeditious means practicable but in any case before the end of the second month following that to which they relate. (See Note 1.) 4.4.3 The bill will consist of two parts: a summary statement and a detailed communications statement. This shall contain as a minimum the information identified in the specimen formats shown in Annexes B and C. Both statements should be identified by the same unique bill number and show the same date. In the communication statement, the calls shall be entered individually with all necessary particulars for a given month. A separate statement for each maritime mobile station should be established. The total charges for each maritime mobile station should be included in the summary statement. 4.4.4 In the case of single-operator service, if bilaterally agreed between the service providers concerned, the land station operator may despatch a bill directly to the booking caller (see case 4). 4.4.5 In the case of collect calls to a maritime mobile station in the international maritime mobile service, where permitted by the service provider, the total amount of the charges shall be collected from the maritime mobile station. 4.5
Acceptance/queries/rejection
4.5.1 In principle, a bill shall be considered as accepted without the need for specific notification of acceptance to the service provider that sent it. 4.5.2 The accounting authority should notify the billing service provider of any preliminary rejections immediately upon receipt of a bill, for example if maritime mobile stations included in the bill are not or no longer their responsibility. 4.5.3 However, any accounting authority shall have the right to question the contents of a bill for a period of four months after its dispatch even if the bill has been paid. Any adjustments which are later agreed shall he included in a subsequent bill. 4.6
Payment of bills
4.6.1 All bills shall be paid by the accounting authority without delay and in any event within three months of receipt by the accounting authority or within four months of dispatch whichever is the shorter period. The unique bill numbers and the traffic period(s) covered by the
498
Maritime Manual
payment should be quoted at the time of payment. The exception is where the provisions of 4.6.3 below apply. (See Note 1.) 4.6.2 If a bill remains unpaid after four months from dispatch, the Administration that has licensed the maritime mobile station shall on request, take all possible steps within the limits of applicable national law to ensure payment of the bill, provided that notification of late receipt has not been advised as described in 4.6.3 below. 4.6.3 If the period between the date of dispatch of the bill and receipt exceeds twenty-one days, the receiving accounting authority should at once notify the originating service provider that queries and payment may be delayed. However, the delay shall not exceed three months from date of receipt of the bill in respect of payment and in respect of queries even if the bill has been paid. 4.6.4 The debtor accounting authority may refuse to pay or adjust bills rendered more than fifteen months after the date of the traffic to which the bills relate. (See Note 2.) 4.6.5 When a potential non payment has been identified and notified by the accounting authority to the service providers, the accounting authority is responsible for the debt incurred only up to the date of notification and provided that the service providers bill all outstanding charges within 45 working days of receipt of such notification. Notification shall be by telex, or other confirmable means of communication, to the office designated by the service providers. 4.8
Refunds
4.8.1
Radiotelegrams
4.8.1.1
The provisions of Recommendation D.43 shall apply with the following exceptions.
4.8.1.2 Where a radiotelegram remains undelivered after the required period of retention (Recommendation E.200/F.110), the Service Provider may determine the basis of the refund of charge either under the provisions of Recommendation D.43 or refund the land station charge in full. In the second case, the Service Provider may charge a compensatory flat rate handling charge per undelivered message. 4.8.1.3 In the case of a radiotelegram that has been forwarded by the land station to a maritime mobile station in port by means other than radio (see Recommendation F.110), only the land station charge shall be debited. 4.8.2
Radiomaritime letters
4.8.2.1 When a radiomaritime letter fails to reach its destination due to the failure of the postal service, only the charges in respect to the services not carried out are refundable. 4.8.2.2 Refund of charges is applicable when, through the fault of the telegraph or radiotelegraph service, a radiomaritime letter has not reached its destination, taking into account Recommendation D.43.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
4.8.3
499
Radiotelephone and radiotelex calls
4.8.3.1 When, through any fault of the service, the booking of a call is not followed by the calling and called maritime mobile stations being placed in communication, no charge shall be payable. If the amount of the charge has been paid, it shall be refunded. 4.8.3.2 In order to simplify operating and accounting procedures, Service Providers may decide that no charge shall be payable when a requested connection has not been set up, whatever the reason. 4.8.3.3 However, Service Providers may decide to collect charges in cases where there is no fault of service. In that case the basis of charging shall be notified to the Radiocommunication Bureau for inclusion in the List of Coast Stations [1]. 4.8.3.4 When, through any fault of the service, difficulty is experienced in the course of a call, the chargeable duration of the call shall be reduced to the total time during which transmission conditions have been satisfactory, taking account the relevant ITU-T Recommendations. 4.8.4
Radiotelexograms
4.8.4.1
The principles for refunds for radiotelegrams and telex calls shall apply as appropriate.
5
International accounting and settlement
5.1 International accounting for maritime mobile traffic to/from maritime mobile stations arises when maritime mobile communications involve the use of a land station in a country other than the one in which either the called or calling party is located, or where two land stations in different countries are involved in the call (cases 3, 4, 6 ) and covers: a)
the landline charge / accounting rate;
b)
the land station charge / accounting rate where applicable (cases 4, 6).
5.1.1 Landline – The international call from the land station in one country to the called party in another country, or between two land stations in different countries. This will be accounted at the agreed international accounting rate applying in the international relation concerned for the service used and shall be included in the relevant international traffic accounts in accordance with the provisions of the International Telecommunications Regulations and relevant ITU-T Recommendations. 5.1.2
Land station – The amount is set by the LSO
5.2 A single accounting rate covering both the landline and the land station elements may be bilaterally agreed where the origin Administration is able to record all the necessary data. 5.3 The land station administration in a country other than that where a call originates is considered for the purposes of the landline accounting to be the origin or destination country (as appropriate) of the call, and not as a transit point.
500
Maritime Manual
5.4
Manual or Single-Operator (LSO) Service (see Case 3 and Case 4 – VHF/HF/MF)
5.4.1 In single-operator service, subject to bilateral agreement a terrestrial customer in one country and an LSO in another country may call each other without the intermediary of an operator in the first country (see Recommendation F.110). 5.4.2 For traffic to a maritime mobile station which originates in a country other than that of the land station (case 4), the land station Administration shall, unless otherwise bilaterally agreed, debit the originating Administration with the land station charges based on data gathered by the LSO. 5.4.3 Except where calls are made collect, the call details are forwarded by the LSO at least monthly to the originating Administration. The amounts due are included in the periodic statement of accounts to the credit of the land station Administration. 5.4.4 When handled through a land station, the duration for international accounting of a manual or single-operator call will be fixed at the end of the call by the land station: if two land stations are participating in the handling of the call, the record of the land station that accepted the call from the originating maritime mobile station will prevail. 5.5
Automatic and semi-automatic service (see Case 4 – satellite)
5.5.1 Traffic to a maritime mobile station which has originated in a country other than that of the land station (case 4), both the landline and the land station charges shall be included in the relevant traffic accounts by the origin Administration on the basis of its own record of chargeable units. 5.5.2 Accounts for charges relating to the maritime mobile satellite services shall show the country of origin/ destination ocean area and chargeable duration/words and if possible the number of calls/messages. Such accounts shall include the total chargeable duration for any broadcast calls sent over the international public switched network to a land (earth) station in the maritime mobile satellite service, separately listed. 5.6 Collect calls where permitted by the service provider are, for accounting purposes, regarded as originating in the destination country or destination maritime mobile station as applicable. Collect calls will be identified separately in the international accounts. 5.7
Settlement of international accounts
5.7.1 Exchange and verification of international traffic accounts and payment of balances of those accounts shall be carried out in accordance with the International Telecommunication Regulations and the relevant ITU-T Recommendations.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
501
Annex A Accounting authorities (This Annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation)
Background Accounting authorities came into existence to reduce the number of bills, both issued by Service Providers and received by shipowners and which required extensive administrative effort to progress, e.g. identify calls, convert call charges in various currencies and reconcile charges. The accounting authority acts as a billing intermediary between the maritime mobile station and service providers. A.1
Role of an accounting authority
A.1.1
The role of an accounting authority may be undertaken by: a)
an Administration;
b)
a Recognized Operating Agency (ROA);
c)
any other entity or entities designated for this purpose by the Administration referred to in a) above.
A.1.2 When acting on behalf of a maritime mobile station for which it has accepted responsibility, an accounting authority shall be responsible for: A.1.2.1 obtaining payment of the collection charges for maritime mobile communications from the maritime mobile station. A.1.2.2 guaranteeing payment of the collection charges to the service providers for traffic originated by the maritime mobile station, ensuring that these payments are made in accordance with the ITU Regulations and Recommendation D.90. A.1.2.3 maintaining up-to-date and accurate records of the maritime mobile stations for which it has responsibility. Any change in status, shipowner if known, termination/commencement of contract must be notified immediately to interested/regularly used service providers and to the Administration that licensed the maritime mobile station. Where changes have occurred, a new and updated list of maritime mobile stations should be issued by the accounting authority at least every 90 days to interested/regularly used service providers and to the Administration who licensed the maritime mobile station, with changes to the previously issued information clearly indicated. Alternatively, a “no change” notification may be issued. The updated information should consist of: –
satellite identity number/ships call sign;
–
ship/mobile name;
–
commencement date;
–
termination date;
–
previous Agent or new Agent, if known;
502
Maritime Manual
–
shipowner, if known.
A.1.2.4 ensuring that its Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) is known by all Administrations recognizing it and all maritime mobile stations for which it is responsible. A.1.3 An accounting authority should notify service providers and the Administration which has licensed the maritime mobile station concerned, as soon as it has been established that it is unable to collect payment from that maritime mobile station. This information will enable the service providers to cease accepting calls from that maritime mobile station in order to prevent the uncollectable debt from further increasing. A.1.4 The licensing Administration may authorize accounting authorities recognized by it to notify the Radiocommunication Bureau directly of additions, modifications and deletions to be made in the List of Ship Stations as regards maritime mobile stations for which they have billing responsibility. Such additions, modifications and deletions should contain whenever possible, the full details required for the List (see A.1.2.3 above). When a licensing Administration gives such authorization, it will notify the ITU that it has done so. Before an Accounting Authority (AA) accepts responsibility maritime mobile station which has previously been the responsibility of another AA, the new AA jointly with the previous AA should check the maritime mobile station’s payment record. A.2
Registration of an accounting authority
A.2.1 An accounting authority must be registered with their Administration. Registration should be subject to a periodic review (for example, annual) by the Administration or national Regulatory Body of the financial position and effectiveness of each accounting authority. Should the registration be suspended or cancelled, the registering Administration shall inform the Radiocommunication Bureau by means of a notice for inclusion in the ITU Operational Bulletin, that the registration has been suspended or cancelled. A.2.2 Each accounting authority will be allocated a discrete Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC – see A.3.1 below) by the registering Administration. A.2.3 The registering Administration shall notify the name(s) and address(es) of the accounting authority(ies) with their respective identification codes to the Radiocommunication Bureau for inclusion in the List of Ship Stations. A.2.4 The number of accounting authorities responsible for maritime mobile stations licensed by an Administration shall be limited as far as possible and should not exceed 25 (whether all are based in the licensing Administration’s country or based abroad – see A.3.2.3 and A.3.4.3 below). A.3
Identification of accounting authorities – AAICs
A.3.1
Code format
The discrete Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) consists of two parts: a)
the first part will be two letters denoting the country in which the accounting authority is based, and must be in line with those given in the official service
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
503
document which is published in accordance with Recommendation F.96 (List of Indicators for the Telegram Retransmission System). In case of doubt, information may be obtained from the Radiocommunication Bureau. b) A.3.2
the second part will be numeric, denoting the particular accounting authority.
Code allocation
A.3.2.1 The AAIC will be allocated by the Administration of the country in which the accounting authority is based, regardless of whether or not the accounting authority concerned is responsible for maritime mobile stations licensed by that Administration. A.3.2.2 An Administration may recognize an accounting authority based in another country to have responsibility for maritime mobile stations which it has licensed. In such cases, the recognizing Administration shall notify this fact to the Administration of the country in which the accounting authority is based and ask for confirmation of its AAIC. A.3.2.3 The limitation of accounting authorities to 25 refers only to the number of accounting authorities which an Administration may recognize to act as an accounting authority for maritime mobile stations which it has licensed (List a). It does not necessarily apply to the number of accounting authorities based within that Administration’s country (List b), see A.3.4.3 below. It is possible therefore that the number of AAICs for any one country will exceed 25. A.3.2.4 Exceptionally, an Administration may agree that an individual maritime mobile station to be licensed by it may retain its existing accounting authority even if this is not one of those on the licensing Administration’s List a, provided:
A.3.3
–
that the accounting authority is one of those recognized by the Administration of the country in which it is based for its Lists a and b; and
–
prior agreement is reached between the licensing Administration and the accounting authority concerned.
Notification of AAICs
A.3.3.1 An accounting authority will notify its AAIC to the Administration of each country recognizing it as an accounting authority for maritime mobile stations which it has licensed. The Administration concerned must include the AAIC in any notification to the ITU concerning an accounting authority, for example, notification of an accounting authority’s address for inclusion in the List of Ship Stations. A.3.3.2 Each accounting authority is responsible for ensuring that all maritime mobile stations for which it is responsible are notified of its AAIC and that these maritime mobile stations are aware of their responsibilities as regards using the AAIC when originating maritime mobile communications. A.3.3.3 When an accounting authority accepts responsibility for a maritime mobile station which may previously have been the responsibility of another accounting authority, it must ensure that the maritime mobile station is advised immediately of the new AAIC to be used.
504
A.3.4
Maritime Manual
Publication of AAICs
A.3.4.1 The Administration of the country in which the accounting authority is based is responsible for notifying the ITU of the AAIC allocated. A.3.4.2 An Administration that accepts an accounting authority outside its own country for maritime mobile stations under its flag, is responsible for notifying the ITU of this fact and of the AAIC allocated to that accounting authority. A.3.4.3 The information should be published in the ITU List of Ship Stations, List V, in a special section with the following sub-sections:
A.3.4.4
–
Sub-section A – Alphabetical listing of all accounting authorities by order of their AAICs, giving their names, addresses, telephone and telefax numbers.
–
Sub-section B – Alphabetical listing of all accounting authorities by their names, giving their AAICs and addresses, telephone and telefax numbers.
–
Sub-section C – Alphabetical listing of countries, with the following entries under each country: •
List a: accounting authorities, by AAICs code, responsible for maritime mobile stations licensed by that country’s Administration (maximum of 25 AAICs);
•
List b: accounting authorities, by AAICs code, based in that country (list may exceed 25).
From these three sub-sections, it will be possible to: i)
extract the name and address of an accounting authority when only the AAIC is known;
ii)
find the AAIC when only the name and address are known; and
iii) determine which accounting authorities are recognized as acting for maritime stations of a particular registry. A.3.4.5 In the body of the ITU List of Ship Stations, the AAIC of the accounting authority concerned should be shown against each maritime mobile station’s entry.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
505
A.3.4.6 Examples Allocation of Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) Country that licensed the maritime mobile station Netherlands
Country where the accounting authority is based and where the AAIC is allocated (see A.3.2.1) Netherlands
Accounting authority is one of the maximum of 25 (A.2.4) designated by:
AAIC
Netherlands
NL...
Netherlands
United Kingdom
Netherlands
GB...
United Kingdom
Netherlands
United Kingdom
NL...
Belgium
Netherlands
Belgium
NL...
Belgium
Belgium
Belgium
BE...
etc.
BRM List a*
BE02 BM01 BM02 BM03 CY03 DP02 JP02 JP03
List b**
BM01 BM02 BM03
*
Indicates accounting authorities, by their discrete AAIC, authorized to account for Ship Stations licensed by the Administration of the country and is limited to a maximum of 25.
**
Indicates accounting authorities, by their discrete AAIC, based within the country and there is no limit to the number of listing per country.
506
Maritime Manual
Annex B Specimen statement of maritime communication bill “Summary” Page – see 4.4.3 (This annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation)
(Preferably on paper size 210 × 297 mm) Date of dispatch2)
...............................: (Sender of bill) Accounting authority: (Recipient of bill) STATEMENT OF MARITIME COMMUNICATION – SUMMARY
Page:
Period (MMYY): Bill number1): Category: Name of maritime mobile station
Call sign
Maritime mobile station ID
ALFA
511 1234
100.00
HOTEL
311 1234
200.00
MIKE
111 1234
500.00
ROMEO
211 1234
200.00
ZULU
411 1234
200.00
Total amount due *
Amount due*
1200.00
Expressed in Monetary Unit: SDR or GFR (1 SDR is equivalent to 3.061 GFRs).
____________ 1)
“The Communications Information Statements” and the associated “Summary Statement” should be identified by the same unique bill number.
2)
This should be the actual date of dispatch and not the date when the bill is raised.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. D.90
507
Annex C Specimen statement of maritime communication bill “Communication Information” Statement – see 4.4.3 (This annex forms an integral part of this Recommendation) (Separate statement for each mobile station)3) For a description of service and facility codes to be used, see Annex A/D.91, Appendices I/D.91 and II/D.91. Date of dispatch4)
...............................: (Sender of bill) Accounting authority: (Recipient of bill) Bill number:
Page:
STATEMENT OF MARITIME STATION BILLS for Mobile Station: ALFA Call sign: 5Bxxx Maritime mobile station identification: Date/time Land station
Destination
Chargeable unit (Duration/words)
Service type
Amount due*
Remarks*/ special services
30.00 5.00 10.00 15.00 40.00 Total amount due *
100.00
Expressed in Monetary Unit: SDR or GFR (1 SDR is equivalent to 3.061 GFRs).
____________ 3)
Exceptionally, this statement may contain data on more than one maritime mobile station where the volume of traffic for each maritime mobile station is low.
4)
This should be the actual date of dispatch and not the date when the statement was raised.
508
Maritime Man nual
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.60
509
ITU-T Recommendation F.60 OPERATIONAL PROVISIONS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL TELEX SERVICE
(revised 1992)
3
Operation of the international telex service
TABLE 1/F.60 Expanded form of DER code expression
Code expression
DER
Additional information characters a)
Meaning b)
EXM
Out of order due to no text recording medium
NAB
Out of order due to failure of answerback mechanism
PFL
Out of order due to no power at the called terminal
a)
These characters may appear anywhere on the line preceding the DER signal and are an integral part of the expanded service signal.
b)
Or technical failure presenting the same condition at the exchange.
Note 1 – The implementation of these expanded forms of the service signal is a national matter. Note 2 – See also Recommendation U.45.
3.6
Subscribers’ operating procedure for telex calls
3.6.1 Administrations may wish to advise their customers on how to make best use of the international telex service. To that end, an example for such provisions is given in Annex A. Such instructions may also include information regarding the code expressions used in the international telex service, which are listed in § 4.1 and which could usefully be inserted within national telex directories.
4
Miscellaneous provisions
4.1
Code expressions used in the international telex service
4.1.1 The following code expressions may be used in operator-to-operator correspondence, generated by the network or used by the originating subscriber for special purposes. In certain
510
Maritime Manual
cases, they may also be followed by the clear signal. Subscribers may also find it useful to use some of these codes during a conversational call. ABS
Absent subscriber/office closed
ADD
Please input your international telex number
ANUL
Delete
BCT
Broadcast call
BK
I cut off
BMC
No end of message or end of transmission received, therefore message cancelled
CFM
Please confirm/I confirm
4)
CI
COL
Conversation impossible 5)
CRV
Collation please/I collate Do you receive well?/I receive well
DER
Out of order (see Table 1/F.60)
DF
You are in communication with the called subscriber
EXM
Connection cleared due to exhaustion of text recording medium at either the called or calling terminal
FMT
Format error
GA
You may transmit/May I transmit?
IAB
Invalid answerback from destination
IMA
Input message acknowledgement
INF
Subscriber temporarily unobtainable, call the information service
ITD
Input transaction accepted for delivery
ITL
I transmit later
JFE
Office closed because of holiday
LDE
Maximum acceptable message length or duration has been exceeded
MNS
Minutes
MOM
Wait/waiting
MUT
Mutilated
NA
Correspondence with this subscriber is not admitted
NC
No circuits
NCH
Subscriber’s number has been changed
_______________ 4)
This code expression is intended to be generated only by automatic means and not normally used in service correspondence between operators.
5)
Repetition of, for example, isolated figures, mixed figures or other sensitive information.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.60
511
NDN
Non-delivery notification
NI
No line identification available
NP
The called party is not, or is no longer, a subscriber
NR
Indicate your call number/My call number is . . .
OCC
Subscriber is engaged
OK
Agreed/Do you agree?
PPR
Paper
R
Received
RAP
I shall call you back
RDI
Redirected call
REF
Reference of the message delivered to the telex side from a conversion facility for telex/teletex interworking
REI
Address validation failure/non-compliant answerback received
RPT
Repeat/I repeat
RSBA
Retransmission still being attempted
SSSS
Change of alphabet
SVP
Please
6)
T Stop your transmission (or figure 5)6) TAX
What is the charge?/The charge is . . .
TEST MSG
Please send a test message
THRU
You are in communication with a telex position
TMA
Maximum number of addresses exceeded
TPR
Teleprinter
TTX
Designation of the conversion facility (CF) for telex-teletex interworking
VAL
Validation response
W
Words
WRU
Who is there?
XXXXX
Error
_______________ 6)
To be repeated until the transmission is brought to a stop.
512
Maritime Manual
ANNEX A
(to Recommendation F.60) Operating procedure for telex calls A.1
Setting up a telex call
A.1.1 In the automatic service the subscriber selects the telex number required. The establishment of a connection is recognized by the reception of the answerback from the wanted subscriber. The caller should check whether the answerback he has received is in fact that of the appropriate subscriber. If it is not, he should disconnect and reselect the number of the subscriber required. When the caller has received the correct answerback he should release his own answerback before starting the transmission of a message. A.1.2 In the manual or semi-automatic service a connection is established through the intermediary of an international telex position. The establishment of a connection is indicated by the reception of the answerback from the called subscriber, followed by that of the calling subscriber. The subscribers must not intervene during this procedure. The caller checks whether the answerback he has received is in fact that of the wanted subscriber. If it is not, he should disconnect and inform the international telex position accordingly. A.1.3 If the called telex station is continuously unattended, e.g. automatic answering equipment, store-and-forward equipment or other reception equipment, a dialogue with the called telex station is impossible. A.1.4 If the telex machine of the called subscriber is attended, a dialogue between subscribers is possible, in which case the end of each transmission should be indicated by the plus sign and question mark ( ?) followed by a letter-shift, thus inviting the other party to transmit in his turn. A.2
Setting out the message
A.2.1 Where the recipient may be in doubt about the identity of the caller, it is recommended that the calling subscriber indicate: a)
name and place of the sender, preceded by the word FROM;
b)
name and place of the addressee, preceded by the word TO;
c)
if required, name and place of information addressee(s), preceded by the word COPY.
Practice has shown that the observation of this recommendation will often save additional work for the recipient especially when messages have to be distributed for action. A.2.2 After the exchange of answerbacks as set out in § A.1 and following the recommendation in § A.2.1, the calling subscriber can transmit his message, for which the following uniform procedure is recommended: a)
start a new line and mention own reference, if any, and the date of dispatch;
b)
start a new line and indicate the priority of the message, if desirable, such as URGENT, VERY URGENT, etc.;
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.60
A.3
513
c)
start a new line and indicate the subject if appropriate and/or the name of the person or department for whose attention the message is intended;
d)
start a new line and mention any references, such as REF YOUR TELEX 123 OF 15.7, REF YOUR LETTER 456 OF 25.7, REF OUR TELECON, etc.;
e)
start a new line and transmit the text of the message;
f)
after having completed the message, start a new line and transmit a plus sign ( ) indicating the end of the message or NNNN;
g)
obtain the answerback of the called subscriber, check it in order to be sure that the connection is still in good order and generate own answerback;
h)
if there are more messages, they should be separated from each other by at least 8 line-feeds, after the exchange of the answerbacks as mentioned in g);
i)
after transmission of the last message and the exchange of the answerbacks send at least 8 line-feeds and give the clearing signal.
Additional instructions
A.3.1 When a group, or part of a group, is composed of a whole number and an ordinary fraction, the fraction should be separated from the number by means of a dash without space. Example: for one and three quarters: 1-3/4 A.3.2 In order to avoid misunderstanding, a whole number, a fractional number, or a fraction followed by a % or %o should be transmitted by joining them up to the % or %o. sign by a dash, or transmitted in full as appropriate. Examples: for 2% transmit 2-0/0 or 2 PER CENT Examples: for 4 ½ %o, transmit 4-1/2-0/00 or 4-1/2 PER MILLE A.3.3 When important figures or words appear in the text it is desirable to repeat them immediately after the group followed by a space either in brackets or preceded by the word REPEAT. Examples: 1500 (1500) Examples: 1500 REPEAT 1500 Examples: NOT REPEAT NOT A.3.4 To pass to the beginning of the next line, i.e. to start a new line, first press carriagereturn and then line-feed. Some terminals may also provide a new line key which combines these functions. A.3.5
An error is corrected in the following manner: a)
In manual transmission, by the sequence XXXXX (letter X repeated five times and followed by a space)7) joined to the erroneous word.
_______________ 7)
It is to be noted that the sequence E E E (space and letter E repeated three times followed by a space and repetition of the last correct word) is in use but is not preferred.
514
Maritime Manual
Example: PLEASE DISPATCH FITXXXXX FIVE PARCELS b)
In automatic transmission, when preparing perforated tape, by backspacing (if necessary by counting the number of characters to be erased, including spaces and shifts, and backspacing by that number) to the erroneous character and then operating the letter-shift key to erase all the characters up to and including the last punched character. Then start again with the character to be sent immediately after the last correctly punched character.
c)
If the procedure mentioned under b) for one reason or other cannot be followed, an error could be corrected as indicated under a).
d)
If an error is detected after the transmission of a message but before the exchange of the answerbacks it should be corrected by clearly indicating under the text of the message what change is required, e.g.: CORRECT 4TH WORD 2ND LINE TO READ NOT REPEAT NOT DELETE 4TH WORD 2ND LINE INSERT THE WORD “WITH” BETWEEN THE 4TH AND 5TH WORD OF 2ND LINE
A.3.6 If, for some reason or other, a message has to be cancelled during transmission this should be clearly indicated on a new line by transmitting three times the word ANUL. A.3.7
In preparing a perforated tape for automatic transmission, care should be taken that: a)
the signal Who are you? (figure case D) does not appear on the tape, in order to prevent the text from being garbled by the returned answerback of the other party;
b)
the procedure mentioned in § A.3.4 above is followed;
c)
the tape is perforated to the end with a series of letter-shifts.
A.3.8 Since figure case signs or letters coupled with the letters F, G and H are not universally standardized, they must not be used in international communications, but should be transmitted in full, e.g. DOLLARS, POUNDS STERLING, etc. A.4
Ineffective call attempts when calling from a manual terminal
A.4.1 If an attempt to set up a call is unsuccessful (for example, if the wanted subscriber is engaged), the network will return a service code indicating the reason. It will also disconnect automatically except in the particular cases of changed number interception and call redirection as described in Recommendation U.41. A.4.2 The commonly used service codes, their meaning and the appropriate action for the subscriber to take are given in Table A-1/F.60. A.5
Idle connections
A.5.1 To avoid incurring unnecessary charges, care should always be taken to clear the connection once all messages have been sent (see § A.2.2).
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.60
515
A.5.2 In some national telex networks a prolonged idle condition may cause a warning message to appear followed, possibly after a short delay, by clearing. Normally, this action will not commence until the idle condition has persisted for a period to be determined by the Administration. A.5.3 Should a subscriber wish to maintain an idle condition for a period in excess of that stipulated by the Administration, it is advisable to make that intention clear by sending at least one character periodically.
TABLE A-1/F.60 Procedure after ineffective call attempts when calling from a manual terminal Service code
OCC
Meaning
What to do
The called subscriber is engaged
NC
No circuits (or equipment) are available at the moment
Wait for at least one minute, then call again
DER
Called subscriber’s terminal is out of order, or temporarily out of service whilst paper, ribbon or tape is replaced
Check the number and try again after about 5 minutes. If DER persists, refer the problem to the Telex Enquiries Service
ABS NA NP
Called subscriber is absent. Office is closed Access to called service not admitted The called number is not, or is no longer, a working line Called susbcriber’s number has been changed (NCH may be followed by the new number)
NCH
Check the number. If correct, try again. If the same service signal is returned refer the problem to the Telex Enquiries Service
Note – Recommendation U.40 describes the procedure after ineffective call attempts when calling from an automatic telex terminal.
516
Maritime Manual
ITU-T Recommendation F.110 OPERATIONAL PROVISION FOR THE MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE (revised in 1996)
DIVISION A – GENERAL 3
Definitions
A4
3.1.1 controlling operator: The controlling operator is the first land-based operator handling the radiotelegram, radiotelex call or radiotelephone call in the direction from the mobile station.
A5
3.1.2 accounting authority identification code: An accounting authority identification code is assigned to each accounting authority (defined in the International Telecommunication Regulations [1]). In effect the accounting authority acts as a billing intermediary between mobile stations and ROAs.
A6
3.1.3 recognized operating agency (ROA): The term is defined in the International Telecommunication Constitution (Geneva, 1992) [2]. For the purpose of this CCITT Recommendation an ROA is, in effect, any individual, company, corporation or governmental agency that operates an international telecommunication service to carry public correspondence (as defined in the Constitution). Each ROA is authorized by an ITU Member, which imposes certain obligations on the ROA. (For further details, see the Constitution.)
A12
3.1.9 ship station identity: Ship’s identification X1, X2 ... Xn identifying the ship uniquely. The ship station identity may be transmitted on the radio path.
A13
3.1.10 coast station identity: The coast station identification X1, X2 ... Xn transmitted on the radio path.
4
Order of priority
A15
4.1 The order of priority for communications in the maritime mobile service shall be as follows, except where impracticable in a fully automated system in which, nevertheless, communications described in A16 shall receive priority:
A16
a)
distress calls, distress messages and distress traffic;
A17
b)
communications preceded by the urgency signal;
A18
c)
communications preceded by the safety signal;
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
517
A19
d)
communications relating to radio direction-finding;
A20
e)
communications relating to the navigation and safe movement of aircraft engaged in search and rescue operations;
A21
f)
communications relating to the navigation, movements and need of ships, aircraft and weather observations messages destined for an official meteorological service;
A22
g)
radiotelegrams relative to the application of the United Nations Charter (ETATPRIORITE);
A23
h)
government radiotelegrams with priority (ETATPRIORITE) and government calls for which priority has been expressly requested;
A24
i)
ordinary private radiotelegrams and RCT radiotelegrams for which urgent transmission and delivery has been requested;
A25
j)
service communications relating to the operation2) of the telecommunication service or to communications previously exchanged;
A26
k)
government communications other than those shown in A29 ordinary private communications and RCT radiotelegrams;
A27
l)
radiomaritime letters.
DIVISION B – RADIOTELEGRAMS 1
Preparation and handing-in of radiotelegrams
1.1
Indication of station of origin
B1
1.1.1 When, because of duplication of names, the name of a station is followed by its call sign/ship station identity, the latter shall be joined to the name of the station by a fraction bar. Examples3):
OREGON/OZOC (not OREGONOZOC); ROSE/DDOR (not ROSEDDOR).
_______________ 2)
For the operational aspects of service telecommunications, see Recommendation F.17, which describes basic principles, acceptable content for service telecommunications and the principle of reciprocity regarding both service providers and services. More detailed provisions for specific telecommunication services may be found in Recommendations F.105, F.1 and F.60.
3)
In the provision regarding the non-voice services, letters, figures and signs that are transmitted electrically are shown in bold font.
518
Maritime Manual
B2
1.1.2 When a land station retransmits a radiotelegram received from a mobile station, it shall transmit, as office of origin, the name of the mobile station in which the radiotelegram originated as this name appears in the List of Ship Stations [5], followed by its own name. Where appropriate, B1 shall also apply.
B3
1.1.3 In order to avoid any confusion with a telegraph office or a fixed station of the same name, the land station may, if desirable, complete the indication of the name of the mobile station of origin by the word SHIP or AIRCRAFT, placed before the station of origin.
1.2
Use of accounting authority identification codes by mobile stations
B4
1.2.1 The mobile station operator should, as a standard operating procedure, give the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) at the end of the preamble line. If the AAIC is missing, the land station operator should request QRC.
1.3
Time of handing-in
B5
1.3.1 In the transmission of radiotelegrams originating in a mobile station, the date and time of handing-in at this station are given by two groups of figures in the preamble line, the first indicating the day of the month (1 to 31) and the second consisting of a group of figures (0001 to 2400) indicating the hours and the minutes.
B6
1.3.2
The time of handing-in is indicated in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
NOTE – For practical operating purposes, UTC may be considered as equivalent to Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
1.4
Address
B7
1.4.1 The address of radiotelegrams destined for mobile stations should be as complete as possible and must include:
B8
a)
the name or the designation of the addressee, with supplementary particulars, if necessary;
B9
b)
the name of the mobile station followed, when necessary, by its call sign/ship station identity, the latter joined by a fraction bar to the name of the station as shown in the List of Ship Stations [5];
B10
c)
the name of the land station through which the radiotelegram is to be forwarded, as it appears in the List of Coast Stations [4].
B11
1.4.2 If the mobile station does not appear in the List of Ship Stations [5], the sender should, if possible, indicate the nationality and route followed by the mobile station.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
519
B12
1.4.3 However, the name and call sign/ship station identity required under B10 may be replaced, at the risk of the sender, by particulars of the passage made by such a mobile station, indicated by the names of the ports or airports of departure and of destination, or by any equivalent indication.
B13
1.4.4
Mobile stations may add to the name of the office of destination:
–
the name of the territorial subdivision; and/or
–
the destination country,
if it is doubtful whether, without such addition, the radiotelegram could be correctly routed without difficulty. B14
1.4.5 The controlling operator retains or deletes the particulars in B13 or further amends the name of the office of destination as is necessary or sufficient for forwarding the radiotelegram to its proper destination.
2
Counting of words
B15
2.1 The word count of the office of origin is decisive in the case of radiotelegrams destined for mobile stations, and that of the controlling operator is decisive in the case of radiotelegrams originating in mobile stations.
B16
2.2 If two land stations participate in the handling of a radiotelegram, the decision of the controlling operator accepting the radiotelegram from the originating mobile station will prevail and will be valid for international accounting.
3
Routing of radiotelegrams
B17
3.1 Radiotelegrams, originating in or destined to a mobile station should be routed via the land station that is considered most suitable in relation to the mobile station concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land station and radio conditions.
B18
3.2 However, to expedite or to facilitate the routing of radiotelegrams to a land station, a mobile station may transmit them to another mobile station. The latter shall dispose of such radiotelegrams in the same manner as if they originated with itself (see B39 to B42).
B19
3.3 If the sender of a radiotelegram handed in at a mobile station has indicated the land station to which the radiotelegram be sent, the mobile station shall, in order to effect this transmission to the land station indicated, wait, if necessary until the conditions specified in B17 and B18 are fulfilled.
B20
3.4 In order to facilitate disposal of traffic, and subject to such conditions as individual ROAs may apply, land stations may, in exceptional circumstances and with discretion, without incurring additional charges, exchange radiotelegrams and service telegrams relating thereto.
520
Maritime Manual
4
Transmission of radiotelegrams
4.1
Routine repetition
B21A
4.1.1 Routine repetition means the repetition of isolated figures and mixed groups containing figures in the address and text parts. Any such repetition should be given after the text part and be preceded by the code COL.
B21B
4.1.2 In view of CCITT Recommendation F.1 (A103) routine repetition may be used between land station and mobile station at the discretion of the sending station where the transmission conditions warrant it.
B21C
4.1.3 Where a mobile station gives a routine repetition, the land station shall use the repeated groups to check the received address and text parts, but should not retransmit the routine repetition.
4.2
Doubtful reception
B22
4.2.1 In the mobile service, when communication becomes difficult, the two stations in communication should make every effort to complete the radiotelegram in course of transmission. The receiving station may request not more than two repetitions of a radiotelegram of which the reception is doubtful.
B23
4.2.2 If this triple transmission is ineffective, the radiotelegram is kept on hand in case a favourable opportunity for completing its transmission occurs.
B24
4.2.3 If the transmitting station considers that it will not be possible to re-establish communications with the receiving station within twenty-four hours, it proceeds as follows:
B25
4.2.4 If the transmitting station is a mobile station, it immediately informs the sender of the reason for the non-transmission of his radiotelegram. The sender may then request:
B26
a)
that the radiotelegram be transmitted through another land station or through other mobile stations; or
B27
b)
that the radiotelegram be held until it can be transmitted without additional charge; or
B28
c)
that the radiotelegram be cancelled.
B29
4.2.5 If the transmitting station is a land station, it applies the provision of B43 to B52 to the radiotelegram.
B30
4.2.6 When a mobile station subsequently transmits a radiotelegram thus held to the land station that incompletely received it, this new transmission must bear the service instruction AMPLIATION at the end of the preamble line of the radiotelegram.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
521
B31
4.2.7 However, if the radiotelegram is transmitted to another land station operated by the same ROA, the new transmission must bear, at the end of the preamble line, the service instruction AMPLIATION VIA ... (insert here the call sign/coast station identity of the land station to which the radiotelegram was transmitted in the first instance) and the ROA in question may claim only the charges relating to a single transmission.
B32
4.2.8 The other land station, which thus forwards the radiotelegram, may claim from the mobile station of origin any additional charges resulting from the transmission of the radiotelegram between itself and the office of destination.
B33
4.2.9 When the land station designated in the address as the station by which the radiotelegram is to be forwarded cannot reach the destination mobile station and has reason to believe that such mobile station is within the service area of another land station of the ROA by which it is operated, it may, if no additional charge is incurred thereby, forward the radiotelegram to this other land station.
B34
4.2.10 A station of the mobile service that has received a radiotelegram and has been unable to acknowledge its receipt in the usual way must take the first favourable opportunity to give such acknowledgement.
B35
4.2.11 When the acknowledgement of receipt of a radiotelegram transmitted between mobile station and land station cannot be given directly, it is forwarded through another mobile or land station by service advice (see Recommendation F.1, Division D) if the latter is able to communicate with the station that has transmitted the radiotelegram in question. In any case, no additional charge shall result.
4.3
Long distance radiocommunications
B36
4.3.1 An ROA may organize a long-distance radiocommunication service between land station and mobile stations, with deferred acknowledgement of receipt or without any acknowledgement of receipt.
B37
4.3.2 Each ROA designates the land station or stations participating in the longdistance radio service. An indication to this effect shall appear in the List of Coast Stations [4].
B38
4.3.3 When there is doubt about the accuracy of any part of a radiotelegram transmitted under either of the systems mentioned in B36, the indication doubtful reception is entered on the copy delivered to the addressee, and the doubtful words or groups of words are underlined. If words are missing, blanks are left in the places where these words should be.
4.4
Routine retransmission by mobile stations
B39
4.4.1 When a land station cannot reach the mobile station for which a radiotelegram is destined, the land station may, in order to forward the radiotelegram to its destination, have recourse to the help of another mobile station provided that the latter consents. The radiotelegram is then transmitted to this other mobile station. The help of the latter is given free of charge.
522
Maritime Manual
B40
4.4.2 The same provision is also applicable to traffic from mobile stations to land stations, when necessary.
B41
4.4.3 The station assisting in the free retransmission in accordance with B39 and B40 must enter the service abbreviation QSP ... (name or call sign/ship station identity of the mobile station) at the end of the preamble line of the radiotelegram.
B42
4.4.4 In order that a radiotelegram thus forwarded may be considered as having reached its destination, the station that has made use of this indirect route must have obtained the regular acknowledgement of receipt, either direct or by an indirect route, from the mobile station for which the radiotelegram was destined or from the land station to which it was to be forwarded, as the case may be.
4.5
Period of retention of radiotelegrams at land stations
B43
4.5.1 When it has not been possible for a land station to transmit a radiotelegram to a mobile station by the morning of the fifth day (not including the day of handingin), the land station treats the radiotelegram as undelivered and notifies the office of origin accordingly.
B44
4.5.2 The sender of a radiotelegram destined for a mobile station may specify the number of days during which the land station may hold the radiotelegram. In that case, the service indication Jx (x days), specifying the number of days (ten at the most) exclusive of the day of handing-in of the radiotelegram, shall be shown before the address. When it has not been possible for a land station to transmit a radiotelegram bearing the service indication Jx within the prescribed period, the land station treats the radiotelegram as undelivered and informs the office of origin accordingly.
B45
4.5.3 The periods mentioned in B43 and B44 shall be ignored if the land station is sure that the mobile station will soon come within its service area.
B46
4.5.4 On the other hand, the lapse of those periods is not awaited when the land station is sure that the mobile station, being in course of a voyage, either has definitely left its service area or will not enter it.
B47
4.5.5 If there is reason to believe that no other land station of the ROA by which it is operated is or will be in touch with it, the land station cancels the radiotelegram as far as concerns the section between itself and the mobile station and informs the office of origin, which notifies the sender.
B48
4.5.6 In the contrary case, the land station forwards the radiotelegram to the land station believed to be in touch with the mobile station, provided, however, that no additional charge results therefrom.
B49
4.5.7 The land station that carries out the redirection alters the address of the radiotelegram by placing after the name of the mobile station that of the new land station charged with the transmission and adding at the end of the preamble line the service instruction REDIRECTED FROM ... RADIO, which must be transmitted throughout the course of the radiotelegram.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
523
B50
4.5.8 If, within the limits of the requisite period of retention of radiotelegrams, the land station that has redirected a radiotelegram to another land station is subsequently in a position to transmit the radiotelegram direct to the destination mobile station, it does so by inserting the service instruction AMPLIATION at the end of the preamble line.
B51
4.5.9 It shall then transmit to the land station to which the radiotelegram had been redirected a service advice informing the latter of the transmission of the said radiotelegram.
B52
4.5.10 When a radiotelegram cannot be transmitted to a mobile station owing to the arrival of the latter in a port near the land station, the latter station may, according to circumstances, forward the radiotelegram to the mobile station by other means of communication, at the same time informing the office of origin by service advice of the delivery.
5
Advice of non-delivery
B53
5.1 When, for any reason, a radiotelegram originating in a mobile station and destined for a place on land cannot be delivered to the addressee, a service advice of non-delivery is addressed to the land station or the telegraph office that received the radiotelegram.
B54
5.2 After checking the address, the land station forwards the service advice, when possible, to the mobile station, if necessary by way of another land station of the same country or of a neighbouring country, as far as existing conditions or special agreements permit.
B55
5.3 When a radiotelegram received at a mobile station cannot be delivered, that station so informs the office or mobile station of origin by a service advice.
B56
5.4 In the case of a radiotelegram originating on land, this service advice is sent, whenever possible, to the land station through which the radiotelegram passed, or, if necessary, to another land station of the same country or of a neighbouring country, as far as existing conditions or special arrangements permit.
B57
5.5 In such cases the name or call sign/ship station identity of the station from which the radiotelegram was received is quoted.
6
Radiomaritime letters
B58
6.1 An ROA may organize a service of radiomaritime letters between mobile stations and its land stations.
B59
6.2 Such correspondence is transmitted by radio between mobile and land stations.
B60
6.3
They may be forwarded on the land section:
524
Maritime Manual
B61
a)
wholly or partly by post (ordinary or airmail);
B62
b)
exceptionally by telefax or other electronic means, but with low priority.
B63
6.4 Routine retransmission by mobile stations of radiomaritime letters is not permitted.
B64
6.5 Radiomaritime letters shall be addressed only to places in the country in which the land station is situated, unless the List of Coast Stations [4] indicates that the station concerned will accept such traffic for onward transmission by post to places in other countries.
B65
6.6 Radiomaritime letters bear the service indication SLT. This indication precedes the address.
B66
6.7 Except as otherwise provided in B58 to B68, radiomaritime letters may be accepted, taking into account ITU-T CCITT Recommendations relating to letter telegrams if the telegram service is used to convey radiomaritime letters.
B67
6.8 The address must enable delivery to be effected without enquiry or requests for information. Registered or abbreviated code addresses may be accepted where B62 above applies, exceptionally, radiomaritime letters are forwarded by means of telegram on the land section.
B68
6.9 Radiomaritime letters rank, for radio transmission, after ordinary radiotelegrams on hand. Those that have not been transmitted within 24 hours of handing-in are sent concurrently with ordinary radiotelegrams.
7
Special services
B69
7.1 Telegrams with special services of urgent transmission and de luxe form are admitted, provided that the ROAs concerned accept them.
8
Special conditions relating to the maritime mobile-satellite service
B70
8.1 In the maritime mobile-satellite service radiotelegrams should normally be transmitted by radiotelex only.
B71
8.2 The radiotelegram service in B70 should be arranged in such a way that automatic retransmission is possible.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
525
DIVISION C – RADIOTELEX 1
General
1.1
Routing of calls
C1
1.1.1 A radiotelex call, originating in or destined to a mobile station should be set up via the land station that is considered to be most suitable in relation to the mobile station concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land stations and radio conditions.
C2
1.1.2 For radiotelex calls in the direction from land station to mobile station, originator should give, if possible, the approximate geographical position and should also indicate the land station to be used unless the ROA has established a specific route to be followed. Such requests should be respected as far as is practicable.
C3
1.1.3 For radiotelex calls in the direction from mobile station to land station, the mobile station may call a particular land station it desires to use. This land station should either handle the call itself or advise the mobile station to use another land station that is more suitable.
1.2
Information to be supplied, as necessary by the calling party
C4
1.2.1
C5
C5A
Calls from a subscriber of the international telex service to a mobile station:
a)
international telex number and/or answer-back code of the calling telex subscriber;
b)
telex number or mobile station number of the destination mobile station;
c)
name or call sign/ship station identity of the destination mobile station;
d)
international telex number and/or name of the land station to be used, or the approximate geographical position of the destination mobile station;
e)
priority when specifically requested.
1.2.2
Calls from a mobile station to a subscriber of the international telex service:
a)
telex number or mobile station number of the calling mobile station;
b)
the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) in accordance with CCITT Recommendation D.90 in the single-operator or manual operation;
c)
destination country and/or network;
d)
telex number and/or answer-back code of the destination telex subscriber;
e)
priority when specifically requested.
1.2.3 C4 and C5 above apply to mobile station-to-mobile stations calls as appropriate.
526
Maritime Manual
1.3
Call duration
C6
1.3.1
The chargeable duration of a call will be fixed at the end of the call:
a)
by the controlling operator for a call originating from a mobile station;
b)
for a call originating in the international telex service; –
by the land station operator in either manual or single-operator operation;
–
by the operator of the international position of the originating country in the semi-automatic operation.
C7
1.3.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and where two land stations participate in the handling of the call, the decision of the controlling operator who has accepted the call from the originating mobile station shall prevail.
C8
1.3.3 Should service difficulties be experienced in the course of a call, the chargeable duration shall be reduced automatically or manually to the total time during which transmission conditions were satisfactory, taking into account ITU-T Recommendations (F.60 and F.61).
1.4
Validity of requests
C9
1.4.1 For a call to a mobile station where it becomes obvious that the required mobile station cannot be reached by the land station, the originating telex subscriber should be informed as soon as possible in order to have the opportunity to have the call cancelled if required. In any event, the caller should be informed no later than in the morning of the second day following the day on which the call request was made.
C10
1.4.2 In the automatic service any information concerning unsuccessful call attempts shall be provided to the calling subscriber using the service signal format described in Recommendation F.60. The period of validity for store-and-forward messages in the automatic service shall be in accordance with Recommendation F.72.
1.5
Exchange of radiotelegrams by radiotelex
C11
1.5.1 Stations of the maritime mobile service that are equipped for radiotelex may transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelex.
C12
1.5.2 Stations of the maritime mobile-satellite service should normally transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelex only.
2
Traffic from mobile stations to subscribers of the international telex service
2.1
Automatic operation
C13
2.1.1
Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
527
C14
2.1.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and after connection with the desired land station is established, the mobile station should forward the international telex number, including the telex destination code in accordance with Recommendation F.69. The selection procedures for calls from a mobile station in the maritime mobile-satellite service to a subscriber of the international telex service are described in clause 6 of Division C.
2.2
Single-operator operation
C15
2.2.1 The land station operator should select the destination telex subscriber directly via the international telex network if fully automatic procedures (C13) are not possible.
2.3
Semi-automatic operation
C16
2.3.1 The destination telex subscriber should be automatically selected if fully automatic procedures (C13) or single operator procedures (C15) cannot be applied.
2.4
Manual operation
C17
2.4.1 The land station operator should apply manual procedures if fully automatic (C13), single-operator (C15) or semi-automatic (C16) procedures are not possible.
2.5
Store-and-forward service
C17A
2.5.1 The mobile station should transmit the message to the land station using automatic procedures. The land station should forward the message via the international telex network to the destination telex subscriber.
C17B
2.5.2 The procedures for store-and-forward in the operation international telex network, as laid down in Recommendations F.72, U.80 and U.81, should be taken into account.
2.6
Operational procedures
C18
2.6.1 The manual, semi-automatic and fully automatic procedures for the international telex service, as laid down in Recommendations F.60 and F.61, should be taken into account.
3
Traffic from subscribers of the international telex service-to-mobile stations
3.1
Fully automatic operation
C19
3.1.1
Whenever possible fully automatic procedures should be used.
528
Maritime Manual
C20
3.1.2 A subscriber of the international telex service should forward the international telex number of the destination mobile station including the mobile station number and if necessary the telex destination code of the ocean region in which the mobile station is thought to be located. The call will then be routed, through an appropriate land station to the destination mobile station. The selection procedures for calls from a subscriber of the international telex service to mobile earth station are described in clause 6 of Division C.
C21
3.1.3 If the originating telex subscriber, for some technical reason, cannot use fully automatic procedures to establish contact with the mobile station, semi-automatic (C35) or single-operator (C24) procedures should be used.
C22
3.1.4 On international telex links a destination code in accordance with Recommendation F.69 will be used unless otherwise agreed bilaterally.
C23
3.1.5 Normal telex procedure should be forwarded once the connection between the subscriber of the international telex service and the mobile service and the mobile station has been established.
3.2
Single-operator operation (direct access by a calling telex subscriber to a foreign land station)
3.2.1
Booking
C24
3.2.1.1 If automatic operation (C19) is not possible and where an ROA allows its subscribers to book a call directly with a land station in another country, the originating telex subscriber should select the desired foreign land station, when known, using automatic procedures and submit the call details to the land station operator.
C25
3.2.1.2 The charges fixed by the land station operator should be levied on the calling subscriber through international accounting.
C26
3.2.1.3 In addition to the information in C4, the calling subscriber should designate the originating national telex network.
C27
3.2.1.4 As an alternative to C25 and C26, a land station may accept direct calls from foreign subscribers in other countries provided that the calling telex subscriber supplies the name and address of a party in the country in which the land station is located who will take responsibility for the payment of charges.
C28
3.2.1.5 The procedures described in C25 and C27 may only be applied when an appropriate bilateral agreement exists between the two ROAs concerned. If such an agreement does not exist, the land station should refuse such calls to avoid accounting difficulties.
C29
3.2.1.6 In C24 and C27 above, the call to the foreign land station will be charged as an ordinary international telex call for its entire duration, regardless of whether it merely serves the purpose of booking the radiotelex call or whether the land station can extend the connection to the mobile station without having to recall the originating subscriber.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
529
3.2.2
Setting-up
C30
3.2.2.1 When the connection to the destination mobile station can be immediately established, the originating telex subscriber should be released by the land station. When appropriate, the land station operator should recall the originating telex subscriber using automatic procedures. In this particular case, the country in which the land station is located is to be considered as the outgoing country for the call.
C31
3.2.2.2
In case C30, the land station should include in the maritime bill:
a)
the landline charge;
b)
the land station charge.
C32
3.2.2.3 When the connection to the destination mobile station can be immediately established, the maritime bill made out by the land station operator should include only the land station charge.
C33
3.2.2.4 All information regarding collection of charges for single-operator calls (see C15) should be submitted by the land station ROA on a regular basis to be determined by the ROAs involved.
C34
3.2.2.5 The methods to be used in collecting the charges are described in Recommendation D.90.
3.3
Semi-automatic operation (access by a calling subscriber to one’s international centre for the establishment of a direct connection)
C35
3.3.1 If fully automatic (C19) or single-operator (C24) procedures are not possible, the telex operator of the outgoing international centre should receive the booking and selects the mobile station directly. The procedures of Recommendation F.60 should be applied.
3.4
Manual operation
3.4.1
Booking
C36
3.4.1.1 If fully automatic (C19), single-operator (C24) or semi-automatic (C35) procedures are not available, the originating telex subscriber should make his booking at the international telex centre of the outgoing country or network.
C37
3.4.1.2 Where conditions permit, the international telex position should select directly the appropriate foreign land station. Alternatively, the international telex position of the outgoing country or network should contact the international telex position in the country or network in which the desired land station is located for the necessary assistance to obtain contact with the land station.
3.4.2
Setting-up
C38
3.4.2.1 The land station operator will establish a connection with the originating telex subscriber either directly or with the assistance of the own international telex position in the country of the land station.
530
Maritime Manual
C39
3.4.2.2 Within 24 hours of the call’s termination, the land station shall pass the following information to the international telex position of the origin country, where it is recorded for charging and accounting purposes: a)
the calling subscriber’s telex number;
b)
the mobile station’s call sign/ship station identity;
c)
the chargeable duration of the call;
d)
the land station charge to be collected.
3.5
Store-and-forward
C39A
3.5.1 The originating telex subscriber should select the appropriate land station and deposit the message using the procedures desired in Recommendations F.72 and U.80.
4
Traffic exchanged between mobile stations
C39B
4.1 Provisions from C13 to C39A apply to traffic exchanged between mobile stations.
5
Radiomaritime telex letter
5.1
Definition
C40
5.1.1 Radiomaritime telex letter: A message sent by radiotelex direct from a mobile station to a selected land station or to a selected public telegraph office for delivery by mail or any other appropriate means.
5.2
Operational procedures
C41
5.2.1 The mobile station should select the access code allocated for the radiomaritime telex letter service, or the access code allocated for the fully automatic telex service followed, if appropriate, by the telex number of the selected land station telegraph office.
C42
5.2.2
The mobile station should supply the following information:
a)
international telex number of the mobile station or mobile station number (as provided in Recommendation F.125);
b)
the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC);
c)
destination name and address;
d)
the words “RADIOMARITIME TELEX LETTER”.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
531
DIVISION D – RADIOTELEPHONE 1
General
1.1
Language to be used
D1
1.1.1 Where applicable and where language difficulties exist, the abbreviations and signals in related provisions of Radio Regulations [3] should be used in radiotelephone communications between land stations and mobile stations.
1.2
Priority
D2
1.2.1 Apart from the general order of priority shown in A15 to A27, radiotelephone calls shall have precedence in the terrestrial network, so far as possible, over other telephone calls of the same class.
1.3
Routing of calls
D3
1.3.1 A radiotelephone call, originating in or destined to a mobile station, should be set up via the land station that is considered to be the most suitable in relation to the mobile station concerned in terms of the coverage and of the land station and radio condition.
D4
1.3.2 For radiotelephone calls in the direction from land station to mobile station, the caller should give the one approximate geographical position if possible and may also indicate the land station to be used unless the ROA has established a specific route to be followed. Such requests should be respected as far as is practicable.
D5
1.3.3 For radiotelephone calls in the direction from mobile station to land station, the mobile station may call a land station it desires to use. This land station shall either handle the call itself or advise the mobile station to use another land station that is more suitable.
1.4
Information to be supplied, as necessary, by the calling party
D6
1.4.1
Calls from a telephone subscriber to a mobile station:
a)
complete telephone number of the calling subscriber;
b)
appropriate identification of the mobile station;
c)
name of the land station to be used or the approximate geographical position of the destination mobile station;
d)
name of the called party, if applicable. All calls to mobile stations in the maritime mobile service are treated as personal calls, with the possible exception of the maritime mobile-satellite service;
e)
priority when specifically requested.
532
D7
Maritime Manual
1.4.2
Call from a mobile station to a telephone subscriber:
a)
appropriate identification of the mobile station;
b)
the Accounting Authority Identification Code (AAIC) in accordance with Recommendation D.90 in the single-operator or manual operation;
c)
the information specified in Article 63 of the Instructions for the International Telephone Service;
d)
priority when specifically requested.
D7A
1.4.3 D6 and D7 above apply to mobile station-to-mobile station calls as appropriate.
1.5
Call duration
D8
1.5.1
The chargeable duration of a call shall be fixed at the end of the call:
a)
by the controlling operator for a call originating from a mobile station;
b)
for a call originating in the terrestrial telephone network; –
by the land station operator in manual or single-operator operation;
–
by the operator of the international position of the outgoing country in the semi-automatic operation.
D9
1.5.2 For a call originating from a mobile station where two land stations participate in the handling of the call, decision of the controlling operator that has accepted the call from the originating mobile station shall prevail.
D10
1.5.3 Should service difficulties be experienced in the course of a call, the chargeable duration shall be reduced automatically or manually to the total time during which transmission conditions were satisfactory, taking into account ITU-T Recommendations.
1.6
Validity of requests
D11
1.6.1 If not cancelled by the caller or refused by the called party, requests for calls from land to mobile stations: a)
in the VHF and MF bands shall remain valid until 0800 local time on the day following the day on which the request was made;
b)
in the HF band shall remain valid until 0800 local time on the second day following the day on which the request was made.
D12
1.6.2 However, if it becomes obvious that the required mobile station is outside the coverage area of the land station, the caller shall be informed as soon as possible in order to have the call cancelled.
D13
1.6.3 All requests for calls from mobile to land stations shall be cancelled where the call is not immediately attended to or on completion of the successive attempts provided for by the rules of each ROA, unless there has been an express request to the
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
533
contrary by the calling mobile station, which shall be able to determine the waiting period for listening in on the land station frequency with a view to making a further attempt to set up the call.
1.7
Exchange of radiotelegrams by radiotelephony
D14
1.7.1 Stations of the maritime mobile service that are equipped for radiotelephony may transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelephony. Stations of the maritime mobile-satellite service should normally transmit and receive radiotelegrams by means of radiotelex only.
2
Traffic from mobile stations to telephone subscribers
2.1
Automatic operation
D15
2.1.1
D16
2.1.2 For a call originating from a mobile station and after connection with desired land station has been established, the mobile station should forward appropriate telephone country code (Recommendation E.164) and the number of subscriber of an ROA’s telephone network. The selection procedures for calls in maritime mobile-satellite service, see clause 4 of Division D.
2.2
Single-operator operation
D17
2.2.1 The land station operator should select the called subscriber directly via the automatic telephone networks if automatic procedures (D15) are not possible.
2.3
Semi-automatic operation
D18
2.3.1 The called telephone subscriber should be automatically selected by a telephone operator in the country in which land station is situated if fully automatic (D15) or single-operator (D17) procedures cannot be applied.
2.4
Manual operation
D19
2.4.1 The land station operator should apply manual procedures if fully automatic (D15), single-operator (D17) or semi-automatic (D18) procedures are not possible.
2.5
Operational procedures
D20
2.5.1 The fully automatic, semi-automatic and manual procedures for the terrestrial telephone network, as laid down in Recommendations E.105 and E.140 and the Instructions for the International Telephone Service [6] should be taken into account.
Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used. the the the the
534
Maritime Manual
3
Traffic from telephone subscribers to mobile stations
3.1
Fully automatic operation
D21
3.1.1
D22
3.1.2 The subscriber of an ROA’s telephone network should select the appropriate international telephone number, which would include the mobile station number. The call routing will be determined by the appropriate country code which is chosen and which will form part of the international telephone number (see D41). The call will then be routed through an appropriate land station to the destination mobile station. The selection procedures for calls from a subscriber of the international telephone service are described in clause 5 of Division D.
D23
3.1.3 If the calling subscriber, for some technical reason, cannot use fully automatic procedures to establish contact with mobile station, semi-automatic or single operator procedures should be used.
3.2
Single-operator operation (direct access by a calling subscriber to a foreign land station)
3.2.1
Booking
D24
3.2.1.1 If fully automatic operation is not possible and where an appropriate bilateral agreement between ROA’s allows its subscriber to book a call directly with a land station in another country, the calling telephone subscriber should select desired foreign land station, where known, using automatic procedures and submit the call details to the land station operator. If such an agreement does not exist, the land station should refuse such calls to avoid accounting difficulties.
D25
3.2.1.2 The charges fixed by the land station operator should be levied on the calling subscriber through international accounting.
D26
3.2.1.3 In addition to the information in D6, the calling subscriber must designate his country and national telephone number.
D27
3.2.1.4 As an alternative to D25, land stations may accept direct calls from telephone subscribers in other countries provided that the calling telephone subscriber supplies the name and address of a party in the country, in which the land station is located, who will take responsibility for the payment of charges.
D28
3.2.1.5 The procedures described in D25 and D27 may only be applied when an appropriate bilateral agreement exists between the two ROAs concerned.
D29
3.2.1.6 D24 and D27 above, the call to the foreign land station will be charged as an ordinary international telephone call for its entire duration, regardless of whether it merely serves the purpose of booking the radiotelephone call or whether the land station can extend the connection to the mobile station without having to recall the originating subscriber.
Whenever possible, fully automatic procedures should be used.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
535
3.2.2
Setting-up
D30
3.2.2.1 When demand operation cannot be used, the calling telephone subscriber will be disconnected by the land station. When the land station operator then recalls the caller using automatic direct selection, the land station country is considered as the outgoing country for the call.
D31
3.2.2.2
D32
In case D30, the land station includes in the maritime bill:
a)
the land-line charge;
b)
the land station charge.
3.2.2.3 When demand operation has been used, the maritime bill made out by land station operator includes only: –
the land station charge.
D33
3.2.2.4 All information regarding collection of charges for single-operator calls (see D17) should be submitted by the land station ROA on a regular basis to be determined by the ROAs involved.
D34
3.2.2.5 The methods to be used in collecting the charges are described in Recommendation D.90.
3.3
Semi-automatic procedure (access by a calling subscriber to one’s international centre for the establishment of a direct connection)
D35
3.3.1 If automatic (D21) or single-operator (D24) procedures are not possible, the telephone operator of the international centre of the outgoing country receives the booking and selects the mobile station directly. Normal international semi-automatic telephone procedures shall be applied.
3.4
Manual operation
3.4.1
Booking
D36
3.4.1.1 If automatic (D21), single-operator (D24) or semi-automatic (D35) procedures cannot be applied, the subscriber should make his booking at an international centre in the outgoing country.
D37
3.4.1.2 If conditions permit, an international position should select the foreign land station in question directly. Otherwise an international position in the land station country should be selected to give the necessary assistance to obtain contact with the land station in question. Alternatively, the international telephone position of the outgoing country or network should contact the international telephone position in the country of network in which the desired land station is located for the necessary assistance to obtain contact with the land station.
536
Maritime Manual
3.4.2
Setting-up
D38
3.4.2.1 The land station operator will establish a connection with the originating telephone subscriber either directly or with the assistance of his own international telephone position.
D39
3.4.2.2 After the termination of the call, the land station shall pass the following information to the international telephone position of the country of origin, where it is recorded for charging and accounting purposes:
D40
a)
the calling subscriber’s telephone number;
b)
the mobile station’s name and/or appropriate identification;
c)
the chargeable duration of the call;
d)
the land station charge to be collected.
3.4.2.3 Alternatively all information regarding collection of charges should be submitted to the caller’s ROA on a regular basis to be determined by the ROAs involved.
DIVISION E – RADIOTELEXOGRAM 1
General
1.1
Definition
E1
1.1.1 A radiotelexogram is a message sent by telex or telefax direct from an originator subscriber to a foreign land station for transmission to a mobile station or a message sent from a mobile station to a land station for transmission directly to a telefax or telex subscriber (see Note in E5).
1.2
Provision of service
E2
1.2.1 Operating, charging and accounting procedures should be subject to a bilateral agreement between the ROAs concerned. If such an agreement does not exist, the land station should refuse such radiotelexograms in the shore-to-ship direction.
E3
1.2.2 Alternatively, land stations may accept radiotelexograms from foreign originators provided that the calling subscriber supplies the name and address of a party in the land station country that will take responsibility for the payment of charges.
1.3
Validity of requests
E4
1.3.1 If it becomes obvious that the required mobile station is outside the coverage area of the land station, the originator shall be informed as soon as possible in order to have the radiotelexogram cancelled.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.110
537
2
Operational procedures
E5
2.1 The transmission of radiotelexograms should be in accordance with Divisions B and C or other ITU-T Recommendations as appropriate except as specified below or where varied through bilateral agreement. NOTE – A radiotelexogram is different from a radiotelex or telefax call. In particular, a radiotelexogram is normally transmitted between the mobile station and the land station as a radiotelegram by Morse telegraphy or by radiotelephony.
E6
2.2 Information to be supplied to the land station, as necessary, by the originator.
E7
2.2.1
E8
Radiotelexogram to a mobile station:
a)
international telex number and/or answer-back code or the telefax number of the calling subscriber;
b)
the date and time of origin;
c)
the word RADIOTELEXOGRAM;
d)
name or designation of the addressee with supplementary particulars if necessary;
e)
the name of the mobile station followed, when necessary, by its call sign/ship station identity or where this is not known, the particulars of the passage made by the mobile station;
f)
any specific delivery instructions.
2.2.2
Radiotelexogram from a mobile station:
a)
name and/or call sign/ship station identity of the mobile station;
b)
identification of the accounting authority;
c)
the date and time of origin;
d)
the word RADIOTELEXOGRAM;
e)
destination country and/or network;
f)
called subscriber’s telex number and answer-back code or telefax number.
Bibliography [1]
International Telecommunication Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1992.
[2]
International Telecommunication Constitutions, ITU, Geneva, 1992.
[3]
Radio Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1994.
[4]
List of Coast Stations, ITU, Geneva, 1993.
[5]
List of Ship Stations, ITU, Geneva, 1995.
[6]
Instructions for the International telephone service, ITU, Geneva, 1993.
538
Maritime Manual
ITU-T Recommendation F.120
SHIP STATION IDENTIFICATION FOR VHF/UHF AND MARITIME MOBILE-SATELLITE SERVICES
1
Introduction
1.1 The purpose of this Recommendation is to specify a method by which an internationally unique ship station identification may be assigned to all the ships participating in the Maritime Mobile Services. 1.2
Terminology The following terms are used in this Recommendation:
1.2.1
Maritime Mobile (Terrestrial) Service F: service mobile maritime (de Terre) S: servicio móvil marítimo (terrenal)
Conventional Maritime Mobile Services such as the HF Maritime Service, the MF Maritime Service and the VHF Maritime Service (as defined in the Radio Regulations [1]).
Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service F: service mobile maritime par satellite S: servicio móvil marítimo por satélite As defined in the Radio Regulations [1].
1.2.2
coast station F: station côtière S: estación costera A land station in the Maritime Mobile Service.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.120
539
coast earth station F: station terrienne côtière S: estación terrena costera An earth station in the Fixed-Satellite Service or, in some cases, in the Maritime MobileSatellite Service, located at a specified fixed point on land to provide a feeder link for the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service. Note – In this Recommendation the term coast station is also intended to include, for simplicity, coast earth station.
1.2.3
ship station identity F: identité de la station de navire S: identidad de estación de barco
The ship’s identification X1, X2 … Xk identifying the ship uniquely. The ship station identity may be transmitted on the radio path.
ship station number F: numéro de station de navire S: número de estación de barco The number that identifies a ship for access from a public network and forms part of the international number to be dialled or keyed by a public network subscriber. Note 1 – The formats of the ship station number are defined in other E and F Series Recommendations: Recommendation E.215 for telephone and ISDN numbering in the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service; Recommendation F.125 for telex numbering in the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service; numbering plans for maritime mobile (terrestrial) systems are for further study. Note 2 – In this Recommendation the term ship station is intended to also include, for simplicity, ship earth station.
540
1.2.4
Maritime Manual
coast station identity F: identité de la station côtière S: identidad de estación costera The coast station identification X1, X2 … Xk transmitted on the radio path.
Note – In this Recommendation the term coast station identity is intended to also include. for simplicity, coast earth station identity. 1.3
Basic considerations The considerations that form the basis of this ship station identification system are: a) that every ship shall have a unique ship station identity; b) that the same unique ship station identity should be used in both VHF/UHF and Maritime Mobile-Satellite Systems; c) that the same unique ship station identity should be used for all telecommunication services; d) that it is desirable that the ship station number and the ship station identity are related in a simple and unambiguous manner; e) that the capacity of the ship station identification system shall be sufficient to admit all ships wanting, or required, to participate in the various Maritime Mobile Services at present and in the foreseeable future; f) that the ship identity system shall be a numerical system, and should use the full range of decimal digits; g) that two or three of the digits, X1X2X3, of the ship station identity shall indicate the ship's nationality.
2
Ship station identification Ship station identity is established as nine digits. X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X8X9
The initial three digits define the nationality of the ship as indicated in the following sections. Since the whole or a part of the ship station identity is used in the ship station number, certain restrictions may be imposed on the allocation of ship station identities for the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service. Such restrictions are identified in Recommendations E.215 and F.125. The use of the ship station identity in maritime mobile (terrestrial) systems is for further study.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.120
541
3
Assignment of ship station identification
3.1
Assignment of blocks of numbers
Blocks of numbers should be assigned to countries so that individual Administrations may systematically assign ship station identities within those blocks. 3.2
Identification of ship’s geographical region
The first digit of each ship station identity is intended to identify the geographical region to which the nationality (registry) of the ship relates. Only the digits 2 through 7 are used for this purpose to identify easily the world's regions as follows: 2 – Europe 3 – North America 4 – Asia (except Southeast Asia) 5 – Oceania and Southeast Asia 6 – Africa 7 – South America. Arrangements may therefore be made to systematically assign a ship station identity to each ship as soon as national blocks are allocated. The digits zero (0), one (1), eight (8) and nine (9) are allocated for other purposes as indicated below. The digits eight (8) and nine (9) are not used for identification of geographical regions. However, for maritime VHF/UHF systems, the digits 8 and 9 may be used to expand network access as shown in § 8.2. The allocation of the first digit of the ship station identity is summarized in Table 1/F.120. TABLE 1/F.120 Allocations of first digit (X1) in the ship station identity First digit (X1) of ship station identity
Use
0
Group call/coast station identity
1
Reserved for future expansion
2
Europe
3
North America
4
Asia (except Southeast Asia)
5
Oceania and Southeast Asia
6
Africa
7
South America
8
See § 8.2
9
See § 8.2
542
3.3
Maritime Manual
Identification of ship’s nationality
Since blocks of the ship station identities would be systematically assigned by country, a ship’s nationality can be determined by analysing the first three digits of its ship station identity. The digits to be analysed are called Maritime Identification Digits (MID). Examples of the maritime identification digits for ships are given in Table 2/F.120.
TABLE 2/F.120
4
Country
Maritime identifications digits (MID)
Ship station identity
P
231
from 231 000 000 to 231 999 999
Q
233, 234
from 233 000 000 to 234 999 999
R
236, 237, 238
from 236 000 000 to 238 999 999
S
240 to 249
from 240 000 000 to 249 999 999
Assignment of maritime identification digits
Each MID represents a discrete capacity assigned according to a plan that relates assigned capacity to ship population. A plan has been developed by the World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services (MOB-83) [2] and is contained in Appendix 43 to the Radio Regulations [1]. The Radio Regulations make provision for the allocation of additional MIDs for a specific country when necessary.
5
Group calls
X1 = 0, X2 = 1 to 9 and X1 = 0, X2 = 0, X3 = 0, X4 = 0 to 9 are assigned to indicate a group call to a group of ships having a community of interest. Such calls may be barred in the public switched network and/or at the coast stations. Control of group calls may also be achieved by the use of special group service access to the coast stations. The group call numbering scheme used in the INMARSAT system is given in Annex B to Recommendation E.215 and in Annex B to Recommendation F.125.
Part E – ITU-T Rec. F.120
6
543
Coast station identity
X1 = 0, X2 = 0, X3 = 1 to 9 are assigned to indicate coast station identities in maritime mobile (terrestrial) systems.
7
Future expansion of the ship station identification system X1 = 1 as in the format 1 XXXXXXXX has been reserved for future expansion.
Note – X1 = 1 is used in the INMARSAT standard A system for identification of ship earth stations (see Recommendations F.125 and E.215).
8
Considerations related to ship station identity assignment
8.1 The ship station identity, or part of it, will be included in the INMARSAT mobile number. The way in which this is done for INMARSAT mobile numbers is described in Recommendations E.215 and F.125. The relationship between the nine-digit ship station identity and the part of it which is used in the ship station number is illustrated in Table 3/F.120. If the part of the identity used in the number is shorter than nine digits, then the corresponding identity is obtained by adding trailing zeros to form nine-digit ship station identities. This principle must be observed when allocating ship station identities for ships in the Maritime Mobile-Satellite Service (see Recommendations E.215 and F.125).
TABLE 3/F.120
Part of ship station identity used in ship station number
Digits on the automatic network
Ship stations identity
Digits in the ship station identity
MID X4X5X6
6
MID X4X5X6 000
9
MID X4X5X6X7
7
MID X4 X5X6X7 00
9
MID X4X5X6X7X8
8
MID X 4X5X6X7X8 0
9
MID X4X5X6X7X8X9
9
MID X4X5X6X7X8X9
9
8.2 Numbering plans for the maritime mobile (terrestrial) services are for further study. The principle of § 8.1 is likely to apply for these services also.
544
Maritime Manual
For maritime mobile (terrestrial) services, additional ship station numbering techniques may be used to expand network access to more ship stations on a regional and national basis as follows: Ship station number (or part thereof)
Ship station identity
8Y X4X5X6X7
MyIyDy X4X5X6X7 00
9
MnInDn X4X5X6X7X8 0
X4X5X6X7X8
In this arrangement, the digits 8Y may be 80 to 89 to define as many as ten foreign MIDs (shown as MyIyDy) to permit automatic calling of ships of particular nationalities. The coast station would be required to translate a given 8Y to a particular foreign MID. The digit 9 may be used to indicate the maritime identification digits for ships of the same nationality as the network and the coast station. The coast station would be required to translate 9 to one particular national MID (shown as MnInDn).
References [1]
Radio Regulations, ITU, Geneva, 1982, revised in 1985, 1986 and 1988.
[2]
Final Acts of the World Administrative Radio Conference for the Mobile Services (MOB-83), ITU, Geneva, 1983.
_______________
International Telecommunication Union Sales and Marketing Division Place des Nations CH-1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland
[email protected] www.itu.int/publications
Printed in Switzerland Geneva, 2011 ISBN 92-61-13701-6 Photo credits: Philip Plisson © ITU/K. Bogens
